GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Series 15 / 150 Model B for Machining Center

Operator's Manual (Operation)
GFZ-62564E-1/02 December 1996

GFL-001

Warnings, Cautions, and Notes as Used in this Publication

Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents, temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may be associated with its use. In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a Warning notice is used.

Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.

Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and operating the equipment.

This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made. GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply.

Copyright 1996 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units. It is essential that these precautions be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in this section assume this configuration). Note that some precautions are related only to specific functions, and thus may not be applicable to certain CNC units. Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine, as described in the relevant manual supplied by the machine tool builder. Before attempting to operate the machine or create a program to control the operation of the machine, the operator must become fully familiar with the contents of this manual and relevant manual supplied by the machine tool builder.

Contents

1. DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2. GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 4. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 5. WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

s1

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

B62564E1/02

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a damage of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not observed.

NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.

` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

s2

B62564E1/02

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

WARNING
1. Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the machine. Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating correctly by performing a trial run using, for example, the single block, feedrate override, or machine lock function or by operating the machine with neither a tool nor workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm the correct operation of the machine may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user. 2. Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data. Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user. 3. Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended operation. Generally, for each machine, there is a maximum allowable feedrate. The appropriate feedrate varies with the intended operation. Refer to the manual provided with the machine to determine the maximum allowable feedrate. If a machine is run at other than the correct speed, it may behave unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user. 4. When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the direction and amount of compensation. Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user. 5. The parameters for the CNC and PMC are factoryset. Usually, there is not need to change them. When, however, there is not alternative other than to change a parameter, ensure that you fully understand the function of the parameter before making any change. Failure to set a parameter correctly may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user. 6. Immediately after switching on the power, do not touch any of the keys on the MDI panel until the position display or alarm screen appears on the CNC unit. Some of the keys on the MDI panel are dedicated to maintenance or other special operations. Pressing any of these keys may place the CNC unit in other than its normal state. Starting the machine in this state may cause it to behave unexpectedly. 7. The operators manual and programming manual supplied with a CNC unit provide an overall description of the machines functions, including any optional functions. Note that the optional functions will vary from one machine model to another. Therefore, some functions described in the manuals may not actually be available for a particular model. Check the specification of the machine if in doubt.

s3

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

B62564E1/02

WARNING
8. Some functions may have been implemented at the request of the machinetool builder. When using such functions, refer to the manual supplied by the machinetool builder for details of their use and any related cautions.

NOTE
Programs, parameters, and macro variables are stored in nonvolatile memory in the CNC unit. Usually, they are retained even if the power is turned off. Such data may be deleted inadvertently, however, or it may prove necessary to delete all data from nonvolatile memory as part of error recovery. To guard against the occurrence of the above, and assure quick restoration of deleted data, backup all vital data, and keep the backup copy in a safe place.

s4

B62564E1/02

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING

This section covers the major safety precautions related to programming. Before attempting to perform programming, read the supplied operators manual and programming manual carefully such that you are fully familiar with their contents.

WARNING
1. Coordinate system setting
If a coordinate system is established incorrectly, the machine may behave unexpectedly as a result of the program issuing an otherwise valid move command. Such an unexpected operation may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.

2. Positioning by nonlinear interpolation

When performing positioning by nonlinear interpolation (positioning by nonlinear movement between the start and end points), the tool path must be carefully confirmed before performing programming. Positioning involves rapid traverse. If the tool collides with the workpiece, it may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.

3. Function involving a rotation axis

When programming polar coordinate interpolation or normaldirection (perpendicular) control, pay careful attention to the speed of the rotation axis. Incorrect programming may result in the rotation axis speed becoming excessively high, such that centrifugal force causes the chuck to lose its grip on the workpiece if the latter is not mounted securely. Such mishap is likely to damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.

4. Inch/metric conversion
Switching between inch and metric inputs does not convert the measurement units of data such as the workpiece origin offset, parameter, and current position. Before starting the machine, therefore, determine which measurement units are being used. Attempting to perform an operation with invalid data specified may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.

5. Constant surface speed control

When an axis subject to constant surface speed control approaches the origin of the workpiece coordinate system, the spindle speed may become excessively high. Therefore, it is necessary to specify a maximum allowable speed. Specifying the maximum allowable speed incorrectly may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.

s5

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

B62564E1/02

WARNING
6. Stroke check
After switching on the power, perform a manual reference position return as required. Stroke check is not possible before manual reference position return is performed. Note that when stroke check is disabled, an alarm is not issued even if a stroke limit is exceeded, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the user.

7. Tool post interference check

A tool post interference check is performed based on the tool data specified during automatic operation. If the tool specification does not match the tool actually being used, the interference check cannot be made correctly, possibly damaging the tool or the machine itself, or causing injury to the user. After switching on the power, or after selecting a tool post manually, always start automatic operation and specify the tool number of the tool to be used.

8. Absolute/incremental mode
If a program created with absolute values is run in incremental mode, or vice versa, the machine may behave unexpectedly.

9. Plane selection
If an incorrect plane is specified for circular interpolation, helical interpolation, or a canned cycle, the machine may behave unexpectedly. Refer to the descriptions of the respective functions for details.

10. Torque limit skip

Before attempting a torque limit skip, apply the torque limit. If a torque limit skip is specified without the torque limit actually being applied, a move command will be executed without performing a skip.

11. Programmable mirror image

Note that programmed operations vary considerably when a programmable mirror image is enabled.

12. Compensation function

If a command based on the machine coordinate system or a reference position return command is issued in compensation function mode, compensation is temporarily canceled, resulting in the unexpected behavior of the machine. Before issuing any of the above commands, therefore, always cancel compensation function mode.

s6

B62564E1/02

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING

This section presents safety precautions related to the handling of machine tools. Before attempting to operate your machine, read the supplied operators manual and programming manual carefully, such that you are fully familiar with their contents.

WARNING
1. Manual operation
When operating the machine manually, determine the current position of the tool and workpiece, and ensure that the movement axis, direction, and feedrate have been specified correctly. Incorrect operation of the machine may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the operator.

2. Manual reference position return

After switching on the power, perform manual reference position return as required. If the machine is operated without first performing manual reference position return, it may behave unexpectedly. Stroke check is not possible before manual reference position return is performed. An unexpected operation of the machine may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.

3. Manual numeric command

When issuing a manual numeric command, determine the current position of the tool and workpiece, and ensure that the movement axis, direction, and command have been specified correctly, and that the entered values are valid. Attempting to operate the machine with an invalid command specified may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the operator.

4. Manual handle feed

In manual handle feed, rotating the handle with a large scale factor, such as 100, applied causes the tool and table to move rapidly. Careless handling may damage the tool and/or machine, or cause injury to the user.

5. Disabled override
If override is disabled (according to the specification in a macro variable) during threading, rigid tapping, or other tapping, the speed cannot be predicted, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the operator.

6. Origin/preset operation
Basically, never attempt an origin/preset operation when the machine is operating under the control of a program. Otherwise, the machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the tool, or causing injury to the user.

s7

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

B62564E1/02

WARNING
7. Workpiece coordinate system shift
Manual intervention, machine lock, or mirror imaging may shift the workpiece coordinate system. Before attempting to operate the machine under the control of a program, confirm the coordinate system carefully. If the machine is operated under the control of a program without making allowances for any shift in the workpiece coordinate system, the machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the operator.

8. Software operators panel and menu switches

Using the software operators panel and menu switches, in combination with the MDI panel, it is possible to specify operations not supported by the machine operators panel, such as mode change, override value change, and jog feed commands. Note, however, that if the MDI panel keys are operated inadvertently, the machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the user.

9. Manual intervention
If manual intervention is performed during programmed operation of the machine, the tool path may vary when the machine is restarted. Before restarting the machine after manual intervention, therefore, confirm the settings of the manual absolute switches, parameters, and absolute/incremental command mode.

10. Feed hold, override, and single block

The feed hold, feedrate override, and single block functions can be disabled using custom macro system variable #3004. Be careful when operating the machine in this case.

11. Dry run

Usually, a dry run is used to confirm the operation of the machine. During a dry run, the machine operates at dry run speed, which differs from the corresponding programmed feedrate. Note that the dry run speed may sometimes be higher than the programmed feed rate.

12. Cutter and tool nose radius compensation in MDI mode

Pay careful attention to a tool path specified by a command in MDI mode, because cutter or tool nose radius compensation is not applied. When a command is entered from the MDI to interrupt in automatic operation in cutter or tool nose radius compensation mode, pay particular attention to the tool path when automatic operation is subsequently resumed. Refer to the descriptions of the corresponding functions for details.

13. Program editing

If the machine is stopped, after which the machining program is edited (modification, insertion, or deletion), the machine may behave unexpectedly if machining is resumed under the control of that program. Basically, do not modify, insert, or delete commands from a machining program while it is in use.

s8

B62564E1/02

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE

WARNING
1. Memory backup battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is performed with the power on and the cabinet open, only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this work. and When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the highvoltage circuits (marked fitted with an insulating cover). Touching the uncovered highvoltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric shock hazard.

NOTE
The CNC uses batteries to preserve the contents of its memory, because it must retain data such as programs, offsets, and parameters even while external power is not applied. If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the machine operators panel or CRT screen. When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a week. Otherwise, the contents of the CNCs memory will be lost. Refer to the maintenance section of the operators manual or programming manual for details of the battery replacement procedure.

s9

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

B62564E1/02

WARNING
2. Absolute pulse coder battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is performed with the power on and the cabinet open, only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this work. and When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the highvoltage circuits (marked fitted with an insulating cover). Touching the uncovered highvoltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric shock hazard.

NOTE
The absolute pulse coder uses batteries to preserve its absolute position. If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the machine operators panel or CRT screen. When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a week. Otherwise, the absolute position data held by the pulse coder will be lost. Refer to the maintenance section of the operators manual or programming manual for details of the battery replacement procedure.

s10

B62564E1/02

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNING
3. Fuse replacement
For some units, the chapter covering daily maintenance in the operators manual or programming manual describes the fuse replacement procedure. Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate and remove the cause of the blown fuse. For this reason, only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this work. When replacing a fuse with the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the highvoltage circuits and fitted with an insulating cover). (marked Touching an uncovered highvoltage circuit presents an extremely dangerous electric shock hazard.

s11

B62564E1/02

PREFACE

PREFACE
The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are : Product Name FANUC Series 15MB FANUC Series 15MFB FANUC Series 15MEKMODEL B4 FANUC Series 15MELMODEL B4 FANUC Series 150MB (*) (*) Abbreviations 15MB 15MFB S i 15 Series 1 15MEK 15MEL 150MB Series 150

(*) The FANUC Series 15MEK/MELMODEL B4 is a softwarefixed CNC capable of 4 contouring axes switchable out of 8 axes for milling machines and machining centers. Further the following functions can not be used in the 15MEK or 15MEL. D D D D D D D D D D D D D D Increment system D/E (Increment system C is an option function) Helical interpolation B Plane switching Designation direction tool length compensation 2 axes electric gear box Manual interruption of 3dimensional coordinate system conversion 3dimensional cutter compensation Trouble diagnosis guidance OSI/ETHERNET function Highprecision contour control using RISC Macro compiler (self compile function) MMCIII, MMCIV Smooth interpolation Connecting for personal computer by highspeed serialbus

p1

PREFACE
Manuals related to FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B are as follows. This manual is marked with an asterisk (*).

B62564E1/02

Table Related Manuals

Manual Name FANUC Series 15TB/TFBTTB/TTFB DESCRIPTIONS FANUC Series 15/150MB DESCRIPTIONS FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL FANUC Series 15MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (BMI Interface) FANUC Series 15MODEL B For Lathe OPERATORS MANUAL (Programming) FANUC Series 15MODEL B For Lathe OPERATORS MANUAL (Operation) FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B For Machining Center OPERATORS MANUAL (Programming) FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B For Machining Center OPERATORS MANUAL (Operation) FANUC Series 15MODEL B PARAMETER MANUAL FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL FANUC Series 15MODEL B DESCRIPTIONS (Suppelement for Remote Buffer) FANUC Series 15MODEL B PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Macro Compiler / Macro Executer) FANUC Series 15MB CONNECTION MANUAL (MultiTeaching Function) FANUC PMCMODEL N/NA PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Ladder Language) FANUC PMCMODEL NB/NB2 PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Ladder Language) FANUC PMCMODEL N/NA PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language) FANUC PMCMODEL NB PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language) FANUC PMCMODEL N/NA PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language Tool Management Library) CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR MACHINING CENTER (Series 15MFMFB) PROGRAMMING MANUAL CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR MACHINING CENTER (Series 15MF/MFB) OPERATORS MANUAL CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE (Series 15TF/TTF/TFB/TTFB) OPERATORS MANUAL CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION II FOR LATHE (Series 15TFB/TTFB) OPERATORS MANUAL Specification Number B62072E B62082E B62073E B62073E1 B62554E B62554E1 B62564E B62564E1 B62560E B62075E B62072E1 B62073E2 B62083E1 B61013E B61863E B61013E2 B61863E1 B61013E4 B61263E B61264E B61234E B61804E2 *

p2

CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
s1 p1

I. OPERATION
1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 Setting and Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.1.6 2.1.7 2.1.8 2.1.9 2.1.10 2.1.11 2.1.12 2.1.13 2.1.14 2.1.15 2.2 2.3 MDI keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents to be displayed and operations when the MMC is installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key input and input buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the contents of the key input buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soft key display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When the soft keys are insufficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing soft keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outline of operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function selection keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter selection keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation selection keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation guidance keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing language of the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arithmetic key (SHIFT and ALTER key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 19 19 25 29 29 29 30 30 30 31 33 33 34 36 37 38 39 42 44 44 46 55 57 58 59 60 60 62 64 65 67 68 70 74 75 75 79

Machine Operators Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tape Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 Tape reader without reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tape reader with reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Portable tape reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Note for handling tape reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4

FANUC PPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. POWER ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. MANUAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 Manual Reference Position Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Continuous Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Incremental Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Handle Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Feed in a Specified Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Numeric Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Absolute ON and OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effect of Manual Intervention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ThreeDimensional Handle Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9.1 4.9.2 Handle feed in the longitudinal direction of the tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

c1

4.9.3 4.9.4 4.9.5 4.9.6 4.9.7 4.9.8 4.10 4.10.1 4.10.2

Rotational handle feed around the center of the tool tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool . . . . . . . . Specifying a tool holder offset for tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes on threedimensional handle feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying the coordinates of the tool tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying the number of pulses for manual interrupt and the traveled distance . . . . Interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual interruption and the coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

83 86 86 87 88 89 91 91 92 93 93 93 93 94 95 95 96 97 98 98 99 99 99 99 99

Manual Interruption Function for ThreeDimensional Coordinate Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 Operation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.3 5.4 5.5 Operation in the tape mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation in the MEMORY mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDI operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Searching for a program number or sequence number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Searching for a program by name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rewinding a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selecting a Program to be Executed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Starting Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4 5.5.5 5.5.6 Program stop (M00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional stop (M01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program end (M02, M30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feed hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Singleblock stop according to the comparison between sequence numbers . . . . . . 100 Program restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Program restart function and output of M, S, T, and B, codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Block restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Tool retraction and recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Retrace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Manual handle interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Simultaneous automatic and manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

5.6

Restarting Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3 5.6.4 5.6.5

5.7

Manual Interrupt during Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 5.7.1 5.7.2

5.8

Override Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

6. TEST OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 All Axes Machine Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Machine Lock on Each Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Auxiliary Function Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Dry Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Single Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 RETRACE PROGRAM EDITING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 6.6.1 6.6.2 Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

c2

6.6.3 6.6.4

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

7. SAFETY FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Overtravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 PreTravel Stroke Limit Check Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Stored Stroke Limit Check in Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

8. ACTIONS REQUIRED FOR ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
9.1 9.2 Preparations for Storing and Editing Part Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Registering Part Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.3 9.4 Registering a part program from the tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Registering part programs from CRT/MDI panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Deleting Part Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Editing Part Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 9.4.1 9.4.2 9.4.3 Moving the cursor to the position to be edited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Repeat search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Editing part programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Operation and Display Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

9.5

MULTIEDIT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 9.5.1 9.5.2

9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9 9.10 9.11

Collating Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Part Program Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Background Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Number of Programs that can be Registered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Length of Part Program Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Extended Part Program Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 9.11.1 9.11.2 9.11.3 9.11.4 Copying and moving a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Merging programs (MERGE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Changing words and addresses (CHANGE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Automatically inserting sequence numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

9.12 9.13

Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Format Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 9.13.1 9.13.2 NC format guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Format guidance with figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

9.14 9.15 9.16

Program Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Time Stamp Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Simple Conversational Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

10.1 Offset Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 10.1.1 10.1.2 10.2 10.3 10.4 Display and setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Clearing all tool offset values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Offset from the Workpiece Reference Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Custom Macro Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

c3

10.5 10.6 10.7 10.8 10.9

Read/Punch Function for Custom Macro Common Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Pitch Error Compensation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Data Protection Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Measuring the Tool Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 10.10.1 10.10.2 Class B measurement of the tool length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Class B measurement of the workpiece reference position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

10.10 Class B Measurement of the Tool Length and Workpiece Reference Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

10.11 Menu Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 10.12 Tool Life Management Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 10.12.1 10.12.2 10.12.3 10.12.4 10.12.5 10.12.6 10.12.7 10.12.8 10.12.9 Displaying and modifying a tool group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Displaying tool life data while executing a machining program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Presetting a tool life counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Clearing execution data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Display format of tool life data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Tool change signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Resetting a tool change signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 New tool selection signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Tool skip signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

10.12.10 Expanded tool life management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 10.13 Software Operators Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 10.14 Tool Offset Using Tool Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 10.14.1 10.14.2 Selecting the tool data screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Setting tool data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

10.15 Setting the Floating Reference Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 10.16 Servo and Spindle Setting and Adjustment Screens and Spindle Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . 263 10.16.1 10.16.2 10.16.3 10.17.1 10.17.2 10.17.3 10.17.4 10.18.1 10.18.2 10.18.3 10.18.4 10.19.1 10.19.2 10.19.3 10.19.4 10.19.5 Servo screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Spindle screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Subscreen states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Subscreen operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Data displayed on the subscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Subscreen operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Selecting RS232C Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Details of Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Help Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Screen configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Tuning screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Example of the procedure for using the tuning screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Setting by specifying accelerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

10.17 Function for Displaying Multiple Subscreens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

10.18 RS232C Parameter Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

10.19 Screen for Specifying HighSpeed and HighPrecision Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

10.20 M Code Group Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

c4

10.20.1 10.20.2 10.20.3 10.20.4 10.21.1 10.21.2 10.21.3

Screen for Displaying M Codes Currently Being Executed or Which Have Already Been Executed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 M,S,T,B Codes Output for Program Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 M Code Group Check Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Details of Grouping M codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Screen Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Operation method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Workpiece zero point measurement B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

10.21 Workpiece Zero Point Manual Setting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

10.22 Transverse Inhibit Limit Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

11. DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

11.1 Program Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 11.1.1 11.1.2 11.1.3 11.2 11.3 Execution program and program directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Program check screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Groupbygroup program directory display and punchout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Current Position Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 11.3.1 11.3.2 11.3.3 Currentposition screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Presetting the current position display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Presetting the workpiece coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

11.4 11.5 11.6

Operator Message Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Alarm Message Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Graphic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 11.6.1 11.6.2 11.6.3 Selecting the graphic screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Setting the graphic parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Drawing a tool path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

11.7 11.8 11.9

Displaying the Actual Spindle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Directory of Floppy Disk Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Load Meter Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

11.10 Display of Run Times and Parts Counts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 11.11 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 11.12 Background Graphic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 11.12.1 11.12.2 11.12.3 11.12.4 11.12.5 11.12.6 11.12.7 11.12.8 11.12.9 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Setting of graphic parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Procedure for setting graphic parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Drawing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Figure to be drawn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Start coordinates and position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Drawing position after the start of drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Graphic shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Graphic enlargement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

11.12.10 Initial values at the start of drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 11.13 Waveform Diagnosis Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 11.13.1 11.13.2 11.13.3 11.13.4 Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Specifying the conditions for starting data sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Starting or terminating data sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Waveform display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

c5

11.13.5 11.13.6 11.13.7 11.14.1 11.14.2 11.15.1 11.15.2 11.15.3 11.15.4

Editing a displayed waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Erasing a displayed waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Waveform data input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Help window states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Operation history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Selecting signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Alarm history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

11.14 Help Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

11.15 Operation History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

11.16 Internal Position Compensation Data Display Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 11.17 Coordinate System Related Data Display Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

12. CRT SCREEN SAVING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

12.1 12.2 12.3 Small CRT/MDI Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Panels Other than the Small CRT/MDI Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Screen Saver Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

13. DATA OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 Tool Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Offset from the Workpiece Reference Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Output of Tool Offset Data Corresponding to Tool Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
14.1 14.2 14.3 What is a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 File SearchOut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Data Output Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 14.3.1 14.3.2 14.3.3 14.4 14.4.1 14.4.2 14.4.3 14.5 14.6 CNC program output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Offset data output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 CNC parameter output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 CNC program input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Offset data input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 CNC parameter input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Data Input Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

File Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 14.6.1 14.6.2 Request for cassette replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Adaptor lamp conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

14.7 14.8

File Name of Floppy Cassette or Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Expanded File Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 14.8.1 14.8.2 14.8.3 14.8.4 Searching for, inputting/outputting, and deleting a file by specifying its file name . . . 402 Twodrive floppy cassette control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Soft key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

15. ABSOLUTEPOSITION DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

15.1 Initial Setting at PowerOn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

c6

15.2 15.3 15.4

Manual Reference Position Return at Machine Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Setting the Zero Point for the Absolute Pulse Coder through MDI Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

16. AXIS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

16.1 16.2 Axis Control by the PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Mirror Image Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

II. MAINTENANCE
1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Cleaning the Tape Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Tape Reader Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Adjusting the PhotoAmplifier of the Tape Reader with Reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Cleaning the Air Filter (For the SelfStanding Cabinet Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

2. REPLACING A FUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

2.1 2.2 Fuse Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Fuse Mounting Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 2.2.1 2.2.2 Power unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Connection unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

3. REPLACING BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

3.1 3.2 Replacing the Battery for Backing Up the Memory in the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Replacing the Batteries of the Absolute Pulse Coder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

4. TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 Symptom and Investigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Checking the Input Voltage, Ambient Conditions, Handling, Programming, Operation, Machine, and Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Visually Checking the CNC System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 CNC Status Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 4.4.1 4.4.2 How to display the CNC internal status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Description of internal selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

5. FAILURE DIAGNOSIS GUIDANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

APPENDIX
APPENDIX A. APPENDIX B. STATUS WHEN TURNING THE POWER ON, WHEN RESET . . . RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
439 441

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 2. INTERFACE CONNECTOR POSITIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 3. RS232C INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 Names of RS232C Interface Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Signal Description of RS232C Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 RS232C Interface Transmission Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Connection between RS232C Interface and I/O Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

4. RS422 INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454

4.1 Names of RS422 Interface Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454

c7

4.2 4.3 4.4

Explanation of RS422 Interface Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 RS422 Interface Transmission Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Connection between RS422C Interface and Input/Output Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

APPENDIX C. APPENDIX D. APPENDIX E.

WARNING MESSAGE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIST OF OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN ENGLISH KEY AND SYMBOLIC KEY (Series 15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

458 460

462

c8

I. OPERATION

B62564E1/02

1. INTRODUCTION

1. INTRODUCTION
1) Manual operation a) Manual reference position return (See Section 4.1) The memory in the CNC machine tool holds the positional data for setting the machine. This position is called the reference position, where the tool is replaced or the coordinate are set. Ordinarily, after the power is turned on, the tool is moved to the reference position. Manual reference position return is to move the tool to the reference position using switches and pushbuttons located on the operators panel. Reference position

Operation panel

Tool

Fig. 1 (a)

Manual Reference Position Return

The tool can be moved to the reference position also with program commands. This operation is called automatic reference position return. (See Section 7.1) b) The tool movement by manual operation Using operators panel switches, pushbuttons, or the manual handle, the tool can be moved along each axis.

Operator's panel

Tool

Manual handle

Workpiece

Fig. 1 (b)

Tool Movement by Manual Operation

1. INTRODUCTION
The tool can be moved in the following ways: i) Manual continuous feed (See Section 4.2) The tool moves continuously while a pushbutton remains pressed. ii) Step feed (See Section 4.3)

B62564E1/02

The tool moves by the predetermined distance each time a pushbutton is pressed. iii) Manual handle feed (See Section 4.4) By rotating the manual handle,the tool moves by the distance corresponding to the degree of handle rotation. iv) Manual feed at any angle(See Section 4.5) The tool is moved in any direction on the plane. v) Manual numeric command(See Section 4.6) When numeric data is entered from the MDI keyboard, the tool is moved by the distance corresponding to the data. 2) Tool movement by programing Automatic operation (See Section 5)

Program 01000 ; M-S-T-; G92X-Y-Z-; G00 . . . ; G01 . . . . . . ; . . . . .

Tool

Fig. 1 (c)

Tool Movement by programing

Operating the machine according to a coded program is called automatic operation. Automatic operations are classified into operations according to tape, memory, and the MDI. (i) Operation according to tape

CNC

Machine

Tape reader

CNC tape

Operation according the tape The machine can be operated based on a program, while the program is being loaded from the tape reader. This is called the operation according to tape.

B62564E1/02
(ii) Memory operation

1. INTRODUCTION

After the program is once registered in memory of CNC, the machine can be run according to the program instructions. This operation is called memory operation.

CNC

Machine

Memory

Fig. 1 (d) (iii) MDI operation

Memory operation

After the program is entered, as an command group, from the MDI keyboard, the machine can be run according to the program. This operation is called MDI operation.

CNC MDI Keyboard

Machine

Manual program input

Fig. 1 (e)

MDI Operation

1. INTRODUCTION
3) Automatic operation (i) Program selection

B62564E1/02

Select the program used for the workpiece. Ordinarily, one program is prepared for one workpiece. If two or more programs are in memory, select the program to be used, by searching the program number (See 5.2.1).

O1001 G92 - - - - -

Program number

Work-1 program M30 O1002 G92 - - - - Program number Work-2 program M30 O1003 G92 - - - - Program number Work-3 program M30 Program number search Automatic operation

Fig. 1 (f)

Program Selection for Automatic Operation

(ii) Start and stop (See Section 5.3 to 5.5) Pressing the cycle start pushbutton causes automatic operation to start. By pressing the feed hold or reset pushbutton, automatic operation pauses or stops. By specifying the program stop or program termination command in the program, the running will stop during automatic operation. When one process machining is completed, automatic operation stops. Cycle start Feed hold reset Manual start Manual stop Automatic operation

Program stop Program end

Stop caused by program

Fig. 1 (g)

Start and Stop for Automatic Operation

B62564E1/02
(iii) Restarting machining

1. INTRODUCTION

Machining a workpiece can be stopped midway and restarted after several days holiday. Also, if the tool is broken during machining, machining can be restarted after the tool is replaced.

Tool

Machining after holidays

Tool Broken tool

Workpiece

Workpiece When the tool is broken

When machining is continued after a holiday (iv) Handle interruption (See Section 5.8)

While automatic operation is being executed, tool movement can overlap automatic operation by rotating the manual handle. Tool

Workpiece

Depth of cut specified by the program Depth of manual handle feed

Fig. 1 (h)

Handle Interruption for Automatic Operation

1. INTRODUCTION
4) Program test (See Chapter 6)

B62564E1/02

Before machining is started, the automatic running check can be executed. It checks whether the created program can operate the machine as desired. This check can be accomplished by running the machine actually or viewing the position display change (without running the machine). a) Check by running i) Dry run (See Section 6.4)

Tool

Remove the workpiece, check only movement of the tool. Select the tool movement rate using the dial on the operator's panel.

Table

Fig. 1 (i) ii) Feedrate override

Dry Run

Feed rate specified by program : 100 mm/min. Feed rate after feed rate override : 20 mm/min. Workpiece

Tool

Check the program by changing the rate specified in the program.

Fig. 1 (j)

Feedrate Override

B62564E1/02
iii) Single block (See Section 6.5)

1. INTRODUCTION

Cycle start

Cycle start

Cycle start Tool

Cycle start

Stop

Stop When the cycle start pushbutton is pressed, the tool executes on operation then stops. By pressing the cycle start again, the tool executes the next operation then stops. The program is checked in this manner.

Workpiece

Stop

Fig. 1 (k)

Single Block

b) How to view the position display change without running the machine i) Machine lock (See Sections 6.1 and 6.2)

Tool X Z

CRT/MDI

Workpiece

Change cause by machine movement The tool remains stopped, and only the positional displays of the axes change.

Fig. 1 (l)

Machine Lock

ii) Auxiliary function lock (See Section 6.3) When automatic running is placed into the auxiliary function lock mode during the machine lock mode, all auxiliary functions (spindle rotation, tool replacement, coolant on/off, etc.) are disabled.

1. INTRODUCTION
5) Part program editing (See Section 9)

B62564E1/02

After a created program is once registered in memory, it can be corrected or modified from the CRT/MDI panel. This operation can be executed using the part program storage/edit function.

Program registration

Program correction or modification CRT/MDI

CNC tape (program)

PPR

Fig. 1 (m)

Part Program Editing

6) Data display/setting (See Section 10.10 and 10.2) Data stored in NC memory can be displayed and corrected via the CRT/MDI screen.

Data setting Data display Screen Keys CRT/MDI Data CNC memory Fig. 1 (n) Data Display/Setting

10

B62564E1/02
i) Offset value (See Section 10.1)

1. INTRODUCTION

The tool has the tool dimension (length, diameter). When a workpiece is machined, the tool movement route depends on the tool dimensions. By setting tool dimension data in CNC memory beforehand, automatically generates tool routes that permit any tool to cut the workpiece specified by the program. Tool dimension data is called the offset value.

Setting Display Screen Keys CRT/MDI

Geometric compensation Tool Offset number 1 12.3 Tool Offset number 2 20.0 Tool Offset number 3

Wear compensation 25.0 40.0

CNC memory Fig. 1 (o) Offset Value Display/Setting

Machined shape

1st tool

2nd tool

Offset value of the 1st tool Offset value of the 2nd tool Fig. 1 (p) Offset Value

11

1. INTRODUCTION
ii) Displaying and setting parameters (10.6)

B62564E1/02

The CNC functions have versatility in order to take action in characteristics of various machines. For example, CNC can specify the following: a) Rapid traverse rate of each axis b) Whether the position is detected with digital or analog data Whether reference position return is based on the grid or analog system The data determining these items are called parameters (see Section 10.5). The parameters are specific to the machine.

Setting Display Screen Keys CRT/MDI

Parameter Rapid traverse rate Position control Backlash compensation data : : CNC memory Operational characteristics

Program

Automatic operation

Machine operation

Fig. 1 (q)

Parameter Display/Setting

iii) Displaying and specifying data (see Section 10.3).

Setting Display Screen Keys CRT/MDI

Parameters Rapid traverse feedrate Position control system Reference position return system Backlash compensation data Pitch error compensation data CNC memory Operation properties

Program

Automatic operation

Machine movement

In addition to the parameters, settings for changing the attributes of the machine are provided. The operator can set these items if necessary while the machine is operating. For example, the following settings are provided: (1) Settings for the area the tool must not approach (stroke check) (2) Settings for I/O devices (3) Amount of return and minimum depth of cut in the canned cycle

12

B62564E1/02
iv) Data protection key (See Section 10.8).

1. INTRODUCTION

Specifying data

Machine operator's panel fData protection key

Screen Keys CRT/MDI Inputting programs

Protection key

Signals

Inhibiting data from being registered and specified Programs Offsets Parameters Settings CNC memory Fig. 1 (r) Data Protection key

Tape reader

The protection key prevents the programs, offsets, parameters, and settings from being registered, changed, or deleted by mistake. (v) Menu switches and software operators panel (See Section 10.13).

MACHINE ON OFF LOCK SINGLE BLOCK ON OFF

MACHINE SINGLE LOCK BLOCK

CRT screen

Machine operator's panel

Turn on and off some of the switches provided for the machine operators panel such as <MACHINE LOCK>and <SINGLE BLOCK> switches on the CRT screen.

13

1. INTRODUCTION
7) Display

B62564E1/02

Tool

Screen Keys CRT/MDI Data Tool position Operating condition Machine operator's panel

Programs

Operator messages

The contents of memory are displayed on the CRT/MDI screen. The memory contains information on programs, tool position, and suchlike. (i) Program display (See Section 11.1) The contents of the currently active program are displayed. In addition, the programs scheduled next and the program list are displayed. Active program number O1234N10123 B92X300.0Y250.0 . . . . . . G00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N10123G33 . . . . . . . . . . . ............................ The cursor indicates the currently executed location. Currently executed program 01002 (WORK1.) 01046 01057 01245 01556 . . . . . . 02006 02567 03456 . . . . . . ................. ................. Active sequence number Program content

Programs

(ii) Displaying the state of the system (See Section 11.2).

14

B62564E1/02

1. INTRODUCTION

Displays the current state of the system according to the classification. CRT screen

Type of automatic operation Type of manual operation State of automatic operation

During operation using memory, MDI, or tape During jog feed, handle feed, or incremental feed When operation is reset, stopped, or suspended, or when searching for a sequence number

(iii) Current position display (See Section 11.3)

Y x X Y Z . . . Workpiece coordinate system X CRT screen

The current position of the tool is displayed with the coordinate values. The distance from the current position to the target position can also be displayed.

15

1. INTRODUCTION
(iv) Displaying operator messages (See Section 11.4).

B62564E1/02

SET WORKPIECE

Memory

Message 1 CRT screen Message 2 Message display signal

Message 3

When the system must notify the operator of necessary information during machining, the system displays the message preset in memory. (v) Displaying alarms (See Section 11.5).

PS133 MISSING =" PS805 ILLEGAL COMMAND P/S (program/setting) alarm Servo alarm Error codes Code PS000 PS133

CRT screen

Alarm No.

Meaning

Memory alarm

Operator's manual If a failure occurs while the machine is operating, the system displays the corresponding error code and alarm message on the CRT screen. For details of the error codes, see Appendix G in the Operators Manual (Programming).

16

B62564E1/02
(vi) Displaying the operating times The system displays the following three operating times on the CRT: Value obtained by adding the automatic operating time

1. INTRODUCTION

The system displays as follows the value obtained by adding the automatic operating time: Example 10 hours 43 minutes 8 seconds Value obtained by adding the cutting time The system displays the value obtained by adding the time required for the machine to move by cutting feed (linear or circular interpolation). Generalpurpose time display The system adds and displays the elapsed time while the operating time count signal (an input signal) is on. For the type of time displayed, refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder. These three types of operating times are displayed on the setting screen. For how to display data on the setting screen, see Section 10.3 in Part III. (vii) Graphic display (See Section 11.6) (2)

(3) Z

(4) Z

Data displayed on the Y-Z plane

Data displayed on the X-Z plane

Three-dimensional data displayed (isometric) Y (1)

Data displayed on the X-Y plane

The programmed movement of the tool is displayed using threedimensional data. Programmed tool movement can be displayed on the following planes: (1) XY plane (2) YZ plane (3) XZ plane (4) Three dimensional display

17

1. INTRODUCTION
8) Data output (See Section 13)

B62564E1/02

Programs, offset values, parameters, etc. input in CNC memory can be output to paper tape, cassette, or a floppy disk for saving. After once output to a medium, the data can be input into CNC memory.

FANUC PPR Memory Program Offset Parameters . . . Reader/puncher interface FANUC Floppy cassette adaptor

Portable tape reader FANUC PPR

Paper tape

FANUC cassette

Floppy disk Automatic programming system P-G

CNC

Fig. 1 (s)

Data Output

18

B62564E1/02

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
2.1 Setting and Display Unit
Setting and display units are classified into the following types.: Type 9 monochrome CRT/MDI (Small) 9 color or monochrome CRT/MDI (Standard) 10 PL/MDI or PCD/MDI (Vertical) 10 PL/MDI or PCD/MDI (Horizontal) 14 color CRT/MDI (Vertical) 14 color CRT/MDI (Horizontal) (a) 9 monochrome CRT/MDI (Small) Remarks Fig. 2.1 (a) Fig. 2.1 (b) Fig. 2.1 (c) Fig. 2.1 (d) Fig. 2.1 (e) Fig. 2.1 (f)

O X F

A U E

N Y

B V L J

G Z

7 4 1
SP

8 5 2 ? 0 # 6 3

H@ RK T(

.,

M[

S]

EOB )

=&
PMC CNC SHIFT

AUX
HELP

CAN

INPUT

Fig. 2.1 (a)

9 monochrome CRT/MDI (Small)

19

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
(b) 9 color or monochrome CRT/MDI (Standard)

B62564E1/02

A
POWER

C L

G P< Y
)

&

I R

J S

K: T

SP

O X

? (

Q> Z

U_ V [ W]

ON

7 4
OFF

8 5 2 0=

9 6 3

EOB HELP

SHIFT

POS

PROG

CAN PAGE PAGE AUX

1
+

Fig. 2.1 (b)

9 color or monochrome CRT/MDI (Standard)

20

B62564E1/02
(c) 10 PL/MDI or PCD/MDI (Vertical)

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES

POWER

ON

OFF

A F L R X
( % ;

C I

D J

7 4 1
+

8 5 2 0=

9 6 3

POS

PROG

G M S Y
SP

&

K:

N T Z
@

P < Q>

CAN PAGE PAGE

MMC

AUX

U_ V [ W]
EOB SHIFT HELP

Fig. 2.1 (c) 10 PL/MDI or PCD/MDI (Vertical)

21

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
(d) 10PL/MDI or PCD/MDI (Horizontal)

B62564E1/02

POS

PROG

POWER

A C
/

! #

$ &

7 4 1
+

8 5 2 0=

9 6 3

EOB HELP CAN

ON

F I L

G J

K: N

; ?

SP

OFF

O R

P < Q> S

MMC

AUX

SHIFT PAGE PAGE

U_ V [ W] X
(

Fig. 2.1(d) 10PL/MDI or PCD/MDI (Horizontal)

22

B62564E1/02
(e) 14color CRT/MDI (Vertical)

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES

POWER

A
ON

C I

D J

7 4 1
+

8 5 2 0=

9 6 3

POS

PROG

F L

% ;

G M S
SP

H N T Z

&

K:

P < Q>

CAN PAGE PAGE

MMC

AUX

R
OFF

U_ V [ W]
EOB SHIFT HELP

Fig. 2.1(e) 14color CRT/MDI (Vertical)

23

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
(f) 14color CRT/MDI (Horizontal)

B62564E1/02

A D
#

! $

E I

F J

G K: O S
?

H L

& ;

SP

P < Q> R T X
(

U_ V [ W] Y
)

SHIFT EOB HELP CAN

7 4 1
+

8 5 2 0=

9 6 3

MMC

AUX

POS

PROG

OFF

ON

PAGE PAGE

Fig. 2.1(f) 14color CRT/MDI (Horizontal)

24

B62564E1/02 2.1.1 MDI keyboard

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES

(23)OTHERSkey (2)RESETkey (6)Address key (19)P-CHECKkey

A
POWER

C L

G P< Y
)

&

I R

J S

K: T

SP

O X

? (

Q> Z

U_ V [ W]

ON

(21)SERVICE key (16)POS key

(17)PROG key (20)SETTING key EOB HELP CAN PAGE PAGE AUX SHIFT POS PROG

(22)MESSAGE key (18)OFFSETkey

7 4
OFF

8 5 2 0=

9 6 3

1
+

(12)Cursor move key

(26)AUX key

(4)Function menu key (1)POWER on/off buttons

(3)Soft keys

(5)Operation menu key (6)Numerical keys (9)Alter key (25)CALC key (10)Delete key (24)EOB/HELPkey

(8)INPUT/ INSERT key

(13)Page change keys (7)Shift key (11)CAN key (14)PMC/CNC key

25

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
Table 2.1.1 MDI Keyboard functions (1/3) No. (1) (2) (3) Name Functions

B62564E1/02

<Power> ON/OFF button Press this button to turn CNC power ON and OFF. <RESET> key Soft key Press this key to reset the CNC, to cancel an alarm, etc. The soft key has various functions, according to the Applications. The soft key functions are displayed at the bottom of the CRT screen. Pressing this key when the soft keys are not function selection keys (see Subsection 2.1.9) returns the soft keys to the states of the function selection keys. Pressing the key when the soft keys are function selection keys changes the soft keys to the function selection keys that do not fit on the screen. (The 9 CRT/MDI panel has five soft keys. The 14 CRT/MDI panel has ten soft keys. However, these soft keys are not sufficient for some applications. In this case, a plus sign (+) is displayed at the extreme right of the bottom line on the CRT. The plus sign indicates that some soft keys do not fit on the screen.) The functions of the soft keys vary according to the applications. Pressing this key when the soft keys are not operation selection keys changes the soft keys to the operation selection keys that are effective on the selected CRT screen (see Subsection 2.1.11). Pressing this key when the soft keys are operation selection keys changes the soft keys to the operation selection keys that do not fit on the screen. (The 9 CRT/MDI panel has five soft keys. The 14 CRT/MDI panel has ten soft keys. However, these soft keys are not sufficient for some applications. In this case, a plus sign (+) is displayed in the rightmost frame of the bottom line on the CRT. The plus sign indicates that some soft keys do not fit on the screen.) Press these keys to input alphabetic, numeric, and other characters. Some address keys are marked with two characters. To enter the lower right character, press the shift key first. When the shift key is pressed, ^ is displayed in the key input buffer. This indicates that pressing the address key enters the lower right character. !, , $, \, , <, >, :, ;, %, These characters can be used on the MMC screen. When an address or numeric key is pressed, the data is entered in the key input buffer, then displayed on the CRT. Press the input key to store the data entered in the key input buffer in the offset register. The input key is equivalent to an <INPUT> soft key. Either may be used. Pressing this key on the program editing screen inserts the contents of the key input buffer after the position where the cursor is located. The INSERT soft key has the equivalent function. Either key can be used. Pressing this key on the program editing screen replaces the word where the cursor is located with the contents of the key input buffer. The ALTER soft key has the equivalent function. Either key can be used.

(4)

Function menu key

(5)

Operation menu key

(6) (7)

Address/numerical key <SHIFT> key

(8)

<INPUT/INSERT> key

(9)

ALTER key

26

B62564E1/02
Table 2.1.1 MDI Keyboard functions (2/3) No. Name Functions

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES

(10) DELETE key

Pressing this key on the program editing screen deletes the word where the cursor is located. The DELETE WORD soft key has the equivalent function. Either key can be used. Pressing this key deletes a character or symbol input to the key input buffer. The contents of the buffer are displayed on the CRT. The position where a new entry is to be input is displayed with an underscore (_). Pressing the CAN (cancel) key deletes the character immediately before the underscore. Example) When the contents of the key input buffer are displayed as shown below, >N001X100Z_ pressing the CAN key deletes Z and the displayed contents change as follows: >N001Z100_ The following four cursor keys are provided: : This key moves the cursor forward in small increments. The cursor is moved in the direction of order. : This key moves the cursor backward in small increments. The cursor is moved to the opposite direction. : This key moves the cursor for the key input buffer forward when a character is entered in the key input buffer. The position of the cursor for the key input buffer is indicated by an underscore. Pressing an address or numeric key enters an address or number at the cursor position. Pressing the cancel <CAN> key deletes the character before the cursor position. This key moves the cursor on the CRT screen forward in large increments when no data is entered in the key input buffer. The cursor is moved in the direction of order. : This cursor key moves the cursor for the key input buffer backward. This key moves the cursor on the CRT screen backward in large increments when no data is entered in the key input buffer. The cursor is moved to the opposite direction. Two kinds of page change keys are described below. < >: This key is used to changeover the page on the CRT screen in the forward direction. < >: This key is used to changeover the page on the CRT screen in the reverse direction. The small 9 monochrome CRT/MDI panel is not provided with page keys. Pressing the and cursor keys simultaneously is equivalent to pressing the page key. Pressing the and cursor keys simultaneously is equivalent to pressing the page key. This key is used to determine whether the CRT/MDI panel is used for the CNC or PMC. Pressing this key enables the CRT/MDI to be used in the MMC. This key is valid only when a CNC having the MMC is used. Pressing this key selects the current position display screen. The POSITION soft key has the equivalent function. Either key can be used. Pressing this key selects the part program display screen. The PROGRAM soft key has the equivalent function. Either key can be used.

(11)

Cancel <CAN> key

(12) Cursor move keys

(13) Page change keys

(14) PMC/CNC switch key (15) MMC key

(16) POS key

(17) PROG key

27

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
Table 2.1.1 MDI Keyboard functions (3/3) No. Name Functions

B62564E1/02

(18) OFFSET key

Pressing this key selects the tool offset display screen or the screen displaying offset from the workpiece reference position. The OFFSET soft key has the equivalent function. Either key can be used. Pressing this key selects the program check screen. The P CHECK soft key has the equivalent function. Either key can be used. Pressing this key selects the setting screen. The SETTING soft key has the equivalent function. Either key can be used. Pressing this key selects the parameter and diagnosis screen. The MAINTENANCE soft key has the equivalent function. Either key can be used. Pressing this key selects the screen for alarm messages and operator messages. The MESSAGE soft key has the equivalent function. Either key can be used. Pressing this key selects and displays the screen specified with parameter No. 2215. Pressing this key displays the help window on a screen. Alarm help, soft key help, and G code guide can be displayed. For details, see Help Functions. Press this key to execute operation commands in the key input buffer. Example) When the data in the key input buffer is [10 + 20 x 30 + 400/8], the arithmetic key is pressed. Then, the data in the key input buffer is changed to 660. The arithmetic key is standard. Auxiliary key

(19) PCHECK key

(20) SETTING key

(21) SERVICE key

(22) MESSAGE key

(23) OTHERS key (24) HELP key (SHIFT/EOB) (25) Arithmetic <CALC> key <SHIFT>+<ATER>

(26) <AUX> key

28

B62564E1/02

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES

2.1.2 Contents to be displayed and operations when the MMC is installed

The data to be displayed and key input operations vary entirely according to whether the MMC screen or CNC/ PMC screen is displayed on the CRT/MDI panel. The MMC switch key and CNC/PMC switch key are used to determine whether the MMC screen or the CNC/ PMC screen is displayed. When the CNC/PMC screen is selected, the contents displayed on the CRT/MDI and the operations are identical to those for the Series 15MB. This manual describes the contents displayed and the operations when the CNC screen is selected. Refer to the machine tool builders manual for the contents displayed and the operations when the MMC screen is selected. (1) Selecting the MMC screen Press the MMC switch key to select the MMC screen. (2) Selecting the CNC/PMC screen Press the CNC/PMC key to display the CNC/PMC screen. Pressing the CNC/PMC key while the CNC screen is displayed displays the PMC screen. Pressing the CNC/PMC key while the PMC screen is displayed displays the CNC screen. Press the CNC/PMC key while the MMC screen is displayed to change the display mode (to display the CNC or PMC screen) before pressing the MMC switch key.

2.1.3 Key input and input buffer

When an address or a numerical key is pressed, the character corresponding to that key is input once into the key input buffer. The contents of the key input buffer is displayed at the bottom of the CRT screen. In order to indicate that it is key input data, a > symbol is displayed immediately in front of it. A _ is displayed at the end of the key input data indicating the input position of the next character. To input the lower character of the keys that have two characters inscribed on them, first press the <SHIFT> key and then the key in question. When the <SHIFT> key is pressed the _ that indicates the input position of the next character changes to ^ and indicates that the lower character can be input (shift status). When a character is input in shift status the shift status is canceled. To enter the lower characters on the address or numeric keys continuously, the shift key must be pressed first each time an address or numeric key is pressed. Pressing the shift key in the shift state releases the shift state. Up to 78 characters can be entered at a time in the key input buffer.

2.1.4 Changing the contents of the key input buffer

(1) Inserting characters The contents of the key input buffer are displayed on the CRT. When the next address or numeric key is pressed, the corresponding character is inserted at the cursor position indicated by an underscore. Press the or cursor key to move the cursor. Move the cursor to the desired position, then enter the desired characters. Example Contents of the key input buffer displayed: >N001X100.0Y200.0F100.0;_ To enter G90 after N001 in this case, perform the following: 1 Press the cursor key to move the cursor to the desired position: >N001_X100.0Y200.0F100.0; 2 Enter G90 by pressing the corresponding address and numeric keys. >N001G90_X100.0Y200.0F100.0; 3 Press the cursor key to move the cursor to the following position: >N001G90X100.0Y200.0F100.0;_ (2) Deleting characters Move the cursor to the position after the characters to be deleted, then press the <CAN> key. If the <CAN> key is pressed in the shift state, all data in the key input buffer is deleted. Example Contents of the key input buffer displayed: >N001X100.0Y200.0F100.0;_ To delete Y200.0, perform the following: 1 Press the cursor key to move the cursor to the desired position: >N001X100.0Y200.0_F100.0; 2 Press the <CAN> key five times. >N001X100.0_F100.0; 3 Press the cursor key to move the cursor to the following position: >N001X100.0F100.0;_

29

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES 2.1.5 Warning message

B62564E1/02

Data must be input in the specified format. If an attempt is made to input data that violates the specified format in the key input buffer in order to execute some operations, a warning message is displayed. The warning message is displayed in highlighted characters in the line above the key input buffer field. The characters are displayed at higher intensity on the 9 monochrome CRT or in purple on the 14 color CRT. When a warning message is displayed, the soft keys function as cancel keys. When the cancel key (soft key) is pressed, the warning message is canceled. Change the format of the data in the key input buffer to the specified format. Then, the operations specified by the data can be executed again.

2.1.6 Soft key display

The 9 CRT/MDI panel has five soft keys. The 14 CRT/MDI panel has ten soft keys. This manual describes the five soft keys on the 9 CRT/MDI panel. The soft keys are displayed as follows: POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET PRG-CHK CHAPTER +

The plus sign in the rightmost frame indicates that there are other soft keys that do not fit on the CRT. The same basic method for operating soft keys applies to both the 14 CRT/MDI panel with ten soft keys and the 9 CRT/MDI panel with five soft keys. Obviously, it is not necessary to scroll the soft keys on the 14 CRT/ MDI panel. When some soft keys for setting operations or operation guidance are pressed, processing is executed immediately. These keys are underlined on the screen. EXEC

Underlined soft keys are displayed at higher intensity on the 9 monochrome CRT. They are displayed in green on the 14 color CRT. Some soft keys are displayed in parentheses on the screen. When these soft keys are pressed, a message prompting the operator to enter the corresponding data is displayed. (PROG# )

2.1.7 When the soft keys are insufficient

As mentioned above, the 9 CRT/MDI panel is equipped with five soft keys and the 14 CRT/MDI panel is equipped with ten. These soft keys may be insufficient for some applications. When the soft keys are used as function selection keys, for example, up to seven functions can be selected. In this case, the plus sign (+) is displayed in the rightmost frame of the bottom line on the 9 CRT/MDI CRT. (1) When the soft keys are used as function selection keys When the function menu key (leftmost key) is pressed while the plus sign is displayed in the rightmost frame of the bottom line, the soft keys change to the function selection keys that do not fit on the screen. (2) When the soft keys are used as operation selection keys When the operation menu key (rightmost key) is pressed while the plus sign is displayed in the rightmost frame of the bottom line, the soft keys change to the operation selection keys that do not fit on the screen. (3) When the soft keys are used as chapter selection keys When the chapter selection menu key (soft key) is pressed while the plus sign is displayed in the rightmost frame of the bottom line, the soft keys change to the chapter selection keys that do not fit on the screen.

30

B62564E1/02 2.1.8 Changing soft keys

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES

The soft keys are used as either function selection keys, chapter selection keys, operation selection keys, or operation guidance keys. The procedure for changing the function of the soft keys is as follows: (1) Changing the soft keys to the function selection keys Pressing the leftmost function menu key changes the soft keys to the function selection keys. (2) Changing the soft keys to the chapter selection keys (a) Selecting chapters in the function selection key state The currently selected function key is displayed at higher intensity on the 9 CRT/MDI panel or in green on the 14 CRT/MDI panel. Whenever the function key is pressed, new chapters can be selected in sequence. (b) Changing the soft keys from the function selection keys to the chapter selection keys Pressing the <CHAPTER> soft key (rightmost soft key) changes the soft keys from the function selection keys to the chapter selection keys. Select the desired chapter by pressing the soft keys. To return the soft keys to the function selection keys, press the function menu key. To return the soft keys to the operation selection keys, press the operation menu key. (c) Selecting chapters in the operation selection key state To enable chapter selection when the soft keys are used as operation selection keys, use the soft keys as both the operation selection keys and the chapter selection keys. To switch between these modes, press the operation menu key. Pressing the chapter selection keys selects new chapters. To return the soft keys to the operation selection keys, press the operation menu key. (3) Changing the soft keys to the operation selection keys (a) Pressing the rightmost operation menu key changes the soft keys to the operation selection keys in whichever state the soft keys may be. (b) Entering data in the key input buffer when the soft keys are used as the function selection keys is assumed to be an attempt by the operator to execute an operation. The soft keys then automatically change to the operation selection keys. (4) Changing the soft keys to the operation guidance keys (a) Changing the soft keys from the operation selection keys to the operation guide keys Press the operation selection key. The following block diagram shows how to change the soft keys through their various modes.

31

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES

B62564E1/02

Changing chapters After chapters are changed Changing chapters Same Chapter selection key

Chapter selection (soft key) Chapter menu key

Changing functions After chapters are changed

Different

Function menu key

Function selection key

Function menu key Next function selection key Function selection (soft key)

Next operation selection key

Key input

Operation menu key

Operation menu key Operation selection (soft key)

Not empty

Operation key <Is the key input buffer empty?> Empty Operation guidance (soft key) Key input EXEC key (soft key)

Execution

After execution

32

B62564E1/02 2.1.9 Outline of operations

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES

1 Select the data to be displayed and the major item to be entered on the CRT/MDI panel with the function selection key (soft key). 2 Each major item is divided into minor items (called chapters). Select a chapter with the chapter selection soft key. 3 To perform a certain operation such as data input, select the operation with the operation selection soft key. 4 Pressing the operation selection key changes the soft key to the operation guide key. The executable operations can be checked with the operation guidance key. 5 Pressing some operation guidance keys immediately executes the corresponding operation. However, pressing other operation guidance keys displays a prompt for the operator to enter the data required for starting the corresponding operation. Operation guidance keys that immediately execute an operation are displayed in higher intensity on the 9 monochrome CRT or in green on the 14 color CRT. Operation guidance keys that display a prompt are displayed in bluegreen. 6 When operation guidance keys that displays a prompt for the operator to enter the required data is pressed, if the address that corresponds to the data has been determined, the system automatically enters the address into the keyinput buffer. Otherwise, the operator determines the address and inputs the data. 7 When the necessary data is entered in the key input buffer, the soft key changes to the EXEC key which starts execution. 8 Press the EXEC key after the necessary data is entered in the key input buffer. The corresponding operation is then performed. Set the functions to be displayed to parameter 2215.

2.1.10 Function selection keys

Function selection keys are classified into soft keys and the hard keys on the MDI panel. To select a function with the soft key, press the function selection menu key to change the soft keys to the function selection keys, then press the desired function selection key. To select a function with the hard key, press the desired function selection key. Functions can be selected in any mode. Detailed function selection is performed with the chapter selection keys. The following function selection keys are provided: (Soft keys) POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET PRG-CHK CHAPTER +

SETTING

SERVICE

MESSAGE

CHAPTER

(Hard keys) POS PROG OFFSET P-CHECK SETTING SERVICE MESSAGE OTHERS

(1) [POSITION] soft key or <POS> hard key Press this key to select the currentposition screen. (2) [PROGRAM] soft key or <PROG> hard key Press this key to select the partprogram screen.

33

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
(3) [OFFSET] soft key or <OFFSET> hard key

B62564E1/02

Press this key to select the tool offset screen or the screen for the offset from the workpiece reference point. (4) [PRGCHK] soft key or <PCHECK> hard key Press this key to select the program check screen. (5) [SETTING] soft key or <SETTING> hard key Press this key to select the setting screen. (6) [SERVICE] soft key or <SERVICE> hard key Press this key to select the parameter or diagnosis screen. (7) [MESSAGE] soft key or <MESSAGE> hard key Press this key to select the alarm or operator message screen. (8) [OTHERS] hard key Press this key to select the function screen other than the function screens described in items (1) to (7), such as a graphic screen.

2.1.11 Chapter selection keys

The function selection keys are used to select major items. Each major item is divided into minor items called chapters. The chapter selection keys are used to select the chapters. To select a chapter, change the soft keys to the chapter selection keys, then press the desired chapter selection key. Pressing the function selection hard key also enables chapter selection. (1) Chapter selection keys on the position screen (function keys to select position chapters) The chapter selection keys on the position screen are as follows:

OVERALL

RELATIV

ABSOLUT

MACHINE

(a) [OVERALL] key Press this key to select the overallposition screen on the position screen. (b) [RELATIV] key Press this key to select the relativeposition screen on the position screen. (c) [ABSOLUT] key Press this key to select the screen for the positions in the workpiece coordinate system on the position screen. (d) [MACHINE] key Press this key to select the screen for the positions in the machine coordinate system on the position screen. (2) Program chapter selection keys (function keys to select program chapters) The program chapter selection keys are as follows:

TEXT

DIR.MEM

(a) [TEXT] key Press this key to select the program text screen. (b) [DIR.MEM] key Press this key to select the screen for the programs stored in the program memory (directory). This screen displays the program numbers, program names, and other information.

34

B62564E1/02
(3) Offset chapter selection keys (function keys to select offset chapters) The offset chapter selection keys are as follows:

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES

WEAR

WRK.ZER

(a) [WEAR] key Press this key to select the tool offset screen. (b) [WRK.ZER] key Press this key to select the screen for the offset from the workpiece reference point. (4) Commandvalue chapter selection keys (function keys to select PRGCHK chapters) The commandvalue chapter selection keys are as follows:

CHECK

LAST

NEXT

(a) [CHECK] key Press this key to select the screen that simultaneously displays programs, relative or absolute positions, continuousstate information, and PMC data. (b) [LAST] key Press this key to select the screen for the command value of the block preceding the currently executed block and the continuousstate values of the issued G code, F code, and so on. (c) [NEXT] key Press this key to select the screen for the command value of the currently executed block and the continuousstate values of the issued G code, F code, and so on. (5) Setting chapter selection keys (function keys to select setting chapters) The setting chapter selection keys are as follows:

HANDY

GENERAL

OP .PANEL

MACRO

(a) [HANDY] key Press this key to select the inputoutput setting screen. (b) [GENERAL] key Press this key to select the screen for the parameters that can be set. (c) [OP.PANEL] key Press this key to select the menu switch or software operator panel screen. (d) [MACRO] key Press this key to select the custom macro variable screen.

35

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
(6) Service chapter selection keys (function keys to select service chapters)

B62564E1/02

PARAM

PITCH

DIAGNOS

DSP .MEM

(a) [PARAM] key Press this key to select the parameter screen. (b) [PITCH] key Press this key to select the pitch error compensation data screen. (c) [DIAGNOS] key Press this key to select the diagnosis screen. (d) [DSP.MEM] key Press this key to select the screen displaying the contents of the memory for CNC control software. (7) Message chapter selection keys (function keys to select message chapters) The message chapter selection keys are as follows:

ALARM

OPERATOR

(a) [ALARM] key Press this key to select the alarm message screen. (b) [OPERATOR] key Press this key to select the operator message screen.

2.1.12 Operation selection keys

The possible operations vary according to the screens selected with function selection keys or chapter selection keys. To improve operability, only the names of the operations enabled on the displayed screen are displayed in the field for the operation selection (soft) keys. To select an operation, change the soft keys to the operation selection keys, then press the desired operation selection key. For the operations of the operation selection keys, refer to the individual descriptions. NOTE When the operation selection key is pressed while no data is entered in the key input buffer, the soft keys change to the operation guidance keys. The operation guidance keys are used to display information about the current operation or the possible operations. Enter the necessary data in the key input buffer. When the desired operation selection key is pressed, the corresponding operation is performed. This procedure reduces the number of times keys are pressed when the operator understands the operation without using the operation guidance keys. Some operations cannot be performed unless the operation guidance keys are used. This section describes how to use the operation guidance keys.

Example

Setting offsets Operation selection keys:

INPUT

+INPUT

ORIGIN

COUNTER

INP .NO.

36

B62564E1/02
(1) When no data is entered in the key input buffer

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES

(a) Pressing the INPUT key changes the soft keys to the operation guidance keys.

(VALUE)

(b) Pressing the (VALUE) key displays the message prompting the operator to enter the offset data. (c) Entering the offset data changes the soft keys as follows:

EXEC

(d) Pressing the EXEC key stores the data of the key input buffer in the memory corresponding to the offset number at the cursor. (2) When the offset data is entered in the key input buffer (a) Pressing the INPUT key stores the data of the key input buffer in the memory corresponding to the offset number at the cursor.

2.1.13 Operation guidance keys

The possible operations vary according to the which operation selection keys are pressed. To improve operability, only the possible operations corresponding to the pressed operation selection key are displayed using the corresponding operation guidance keys (soft keys). Pressing some operation guidance keys immediately starts the corresponding operation while pressing others displays a prompt for the operator to enter the necessary data. Operation guidance keys that immediately execute an operation are displayed in higher intensity on the 9 monochrome CRT or in green on the 14 color CRT. In this manual, these soft keys are underlined. Entering data using the keys changes the soft keys as follows, irrespective of whether the operation guidance keys are pressed:

EXEC

Pressing the EXEC key executes the operation specified for the data in the key input buffer. For the use of the operation guidance keys, refer to the individual descriptions.

37

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES 2.1.14 Changing language of the display

B62564E1/02

The language of the CRT display is specified with a parameter. The following languages are available: Japanese, English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, and Swedish.

Japanese

English

German

French

Italian

Swedish

Spanish

38

B62564E1/02 2.1.15 Arithmetic key (SHIFT and ALTER key)

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES

The arithmetic key is a standard key and is used to evaluate the arithmetic expressions in the key input buffer whose data is entered from the MDI panel. (1) Operation 1 Enter data from the MDI panel. 2 Press the SHIFT and ALTER key. 3 The expression is evaluated, and the result is stored in the key input buffer. (2) Arithmetic expressions Enter the arithmetic expression in the same way as a general one. 1 An alphabetic or special character string other than a function name in the key input buffer is regarded as the end code of an arithmetic expression. The use of some end codes enables multiple expressions to be entered in the key input buffer. The CALC key evaluates of each expression. Example 1 100.0/2;200.0/2;300.0/2__ 50.0;100.0;150.0__ Example 2 X350.0*Y120.0/5;X20.0*3.5__ X1050.0Y24.0;X70.0__ (3) Types of numeric values This function uses integers and real numeric values. (a) Input format Integers : Strings of numbers from 0 to 9 Example 10735 Real values : Strings of numbers containing a decimal point Example 10.23 (b) Internal data format Integers : Onebit sign and 31bit binary data M : Onebit sign and 31bit binary data E : Onebit sign and sevenbit binary data (c) Types of values obtained by calculation i) A calculation involving integers and real values produces a real value. ii) The result of a calculation is converted into a character string in the following range, then stored in the key input buffer: Integer : 99999999 to 99999999 ,.0 ,.00000001 to 99999999.0 Real value : 99999999.0 to .0000001 Real values : M*2E 100.0 + 10.0__ [SHIFT] ; [ALTER CALC] 110.0__

39

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
(4) Functions The following functions are available: No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Function SIN COS TAN ATAN SQRT ABS ACOS ASIN LN EXP Type Integer 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Description Sine (degrees) Cosine (degrees) Tangent (degrees) Inverse tangent Square root Absolute value Inverse cosine Inverse sine Natural logarithm Exponent of e (= 2.718...)

B62564E1/02

NOTE

The arguments of the ATAN function are specified as follows: ATAN[<expression 1>][<expression 2>]

y 0 x

y=expression 1 x=expression 2

Example 1 ATAN[0] / [0] __ 0 Example 2 ATAN[1] / [0] __ 90.0 Example 3 ATAN[1] / [1] __ 45.0 Example 4 ATAN[-1]/ [-1] __ -135.0 (5) Priority of operations (a) Function > multiplication/division > addition/subtraction (b) The priority of operations can be changed with square brackets [ ]. Example SIN [ [ 10 + 15 ] * 0.1+0.5] * 10

Sequence of operations

The argument of SIN is obtained as the result of operation (4). (6) Operational accuracy The accuracy of real type data operation with this arithmetic function conforms to the operational accuracy for custom macro operation commands. (7) Syntax rules of the expressions <numeric character>: The following characters are used: 0 , 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , 5 , 6 , 7 , 8 , and 9 <sign> : The following signs are used to indicate whether numbers are positive or negative: + or <addition or subtraction operator> : <sign> is used to indicate addition and subtraction. <sign>

40

B62564E1/02
<multiplication or division operator>:

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
The following characters are used to indicate multiplication and division, respectively: * and (blank)

<unsigned integer>:

<numeric character> string <numeric character> ... Example) 4567

<fraction part>:

<numeric character> string <numeric character> ... Example) ...

<unsigned integer>:

A decimal point is inserted between <unsigned integer> and <fractional part>. {<unsigned integer>}.{<fractional part>} Example) 101.02

<function name 1>:

The following character strings are used to represent the functions of sine, cosine, tangent, square root, absolute value, inverse cosine, inverse sine, natural logarithm, and exponent of e: SIN, CON, TAN, SQRT, ABC, ACOS, ASIN, LN, and EXP The following character string is used to represent the inverse tangent function: ATAN <expression> enclosed in square brackets [ ] [<expression>]

<function name 2>:

<enclosed expression>: <simple factor>:

<unsigned number> and <enclosed expression> Example) <unsigned number>: 12.34 Example) <enclosed expression>: [10.1 + 3.3]

<function call>:

The following two types can be used: i) Calling <function name 1> The format is <function name 1> followed by <enclosed expression> to execute the function of <function name 1> for <enclosed expression>. ii) Calling <function name 2> The format is <function name 2> followed by two <enclosed expression> units to execute the function of <function name 2> for two divisional <enclosed expression> units. <function name 1><enclosed expression> and <function name 2><enclosed expression><enclosed expression> Example) SIN[30.0] Example) ATAN[2.5] [5.0]

<factor>:

<simple factor> and <function call> Example) <simple factor>: [1.0 + 2.5 * 3.333] Example) <function call>: SQRT[3.0 * 2.0]

<item>:

<factor> and multiplication or division between <item> and <factor> <factor> and <item><multiplication or division operator><factor> Example) <factor>: ATAN[2.5] [5.0] Example) <item><multiplication or division operator><factor>: 12.3 SIN[1.1 * 3.0]

<expression>:

<item> with <sign> and addition or subtraction between <expression> and <item> {<sign>}<item> and <expression><addition or subtraction operator><item> Example) {<sign><item>: 2.2 * 5.1 Example) <expression><addition or subtraction operator><item>: 1.2 3.0 + EXP[2.0]

41

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES

B62564E1/02

2.2 Machine Operators Panel

The operators panel varies in functioning and switch arrangement between the different tools. Operations of a typical operators panel are explained as shown Fig. 2.2. However, for details, refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder.

MDI TAPE MEMORY INC CYCLE START FEED HOLD JOG EDIT MODE SELECT X Y Z LOW OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON x10 RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE SINGLE OPTIONAL DRY RUN BLOCK BLOCK SKIP DISPLAY LOCK OFF REFERENCE RETURN 100 MACHINE LOCK OFF ON x1 x100 x1000 MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR INCREMENTAL Y X Z x10 x1 RAPID 25 50 100 -X -Y -Z HANDLE JOG & INCREMENTAL +X +Y +Z

EMERGENCY STOP

LOCK MODE

MANUAL/ABSOLUTE 0 200 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE

0 2000 JOG FEEDRATE

HANDLE AXIS

HANDLE MULTIPLIER

Fig. 2.2 An illustration for Operators panel

42

B62564E1/02
Table 2.2 Functions on the Operator Panel Function CYCLE START button Description

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES

To start automatic operation, select an executable program and press this button. The lamp indicating automatic operation is on during automatic operation. To decelerate and stop the tool, press this button during automatic operation. To select the mode according to the type of job, use this selector. To move the tool at the rapid traverse feedrate, press this button. To carry out continuous manual feed or incremental feed, press these buttons. To move the tool in the desired direction, rotate the handle. To perform automatic operation in units of blocks, turn this switch on. To skip optional blocks, turn this switch on. To perform a dry run, turn this switch on. To return the machine to the reference position, turn this switch on. To apply rapid traverse override to the machine, select the desired override. To select the distance to be traveled per step during incremental feed, use this selector. Press this button when the machine must be stopped immediately. To select the display lock or machine lock mode, use this selector. This switch specifies whether the distance to be traveled during manual operation is stored in the abusolute register when the operator manually intervenes in the automatic mode. This dial specifies the override when the feedrate is overridden during automatic or manual operation. This dial specifies the continuous manual feedrate. This selector is used to select the axis along which the machine is moved manually with the handle. This selector is used to select the multiplying factor of the distance traveled per graduation during manual handle feed.

FEED HOLD button Mode selector RAPID button JOG & INCREMENTAL buttons Handle SINGLE BLOCK switch OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP switch DRY RUN switch REFERENCE RETURN switch RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE selector INCREMENTAL selector EMERGENCY STOP button LOCK MODE selector MANUAL/ABSOLUTE switch

FEEDRATE OVERRIDE dial JOG FEEDRATE dial HANDLE AXIS selector HANDLE MULTIPLIER selector

43

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES

B62564E1/02

2.3 Tape Reader

The tape readers are classified into three types: (1) Tape reader without reels (2) Tape reader with reels (3) Portable tape reader

2.3.1 Tape reader without reels

1) Names and descriptions of each section 3. Capstan 1. Light source
AUTO RELEASE MANUAL 2. Optical reader

4. Control switch

CNC tape

The belt is pulled up to draw out the paper tape. Belt for drawing out the paper tape Tape compartment Fig. 2.3.1 (a) Names of Each Section Table 2.3.1 Descriptions for each part No. (1) Name Light Sources Functions An LED (Light emitting diode) is mounted for each channel and for the feed hole (9diodes in total). A builtin Stop Shoe functions to decelerate the tape. The light source is attracted to the optical reader by a magnet so that the tape will be held in the correct position. This unit can be opened upward, by turning the tape reader control switch to the RELEASE position (this turns off the magnet). Reads data punched on the tape, through a glass window. Dust or scratches on the glass window can result in reading errors. Keep this window clean. Controls the feeding of tape as specifyed by the control unit. A 3position switch used to control the Tape Reader. RELEASE The tape is allowed to be free, or used to open the light source. When loading or unloading the tape, this position is se lected. AUTO The tape is set to fixed posi tion by theStop Shoe. The feed and stop of the tape is controlled operation or data input from tape, the Light Source must be closed and this position must be selected. MANUAL The tape can be fed in the forward reading direction. if another position is selected, the tape feed is stopped. A Tape Box is located below the Tape Reader. A belt used to draw out a paper tape is located inside the box. The paper tape can easily be pulled out using this belt.

(2)

Optical Reader

(3) (4)

Capstan Roller Tape Reader Control Switch

(5)

Tape Box

44

B62564E1/02
2) Tape reader handling a) Tape loading 1 Open the front door of the tape reader. 2 Set the Tape Reader switch to the RELEASE position.

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES

3 Lift the Light Source Unit, and insert an NC tape between the gap. The tape must be positioned as shown in the figure, when viewed looking downward.

Feed hole

Direction of tape feeding

4 Pull the tape until the top of the tape goes past the Capstan roller. 5 Check that the NC tape is correctly positioned by the Tape Guide. 6 Lower the Light Source. 7 Turn the switch to the AUTO position. 8 Suspend the top and rearend of the tape in the Tape Box. b) Unloading the NC tape 1 Open the front door of the tape reader. 2 Turn the switch to the RELEASE position. 3 Lift the Light Source and remove the tape. 4 Lower the Light Source. 5 Close the front door of the tape reader.

45

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES 2.3.2 Tape reader with reels

(1) Names and description of each section

B62564E1/02

2. Optical reader 3. Capstan 1. Light source

6. Tension arm 4. Reel

4. Reel

5. Reel bose 5. Reel boss 8. AUTO lamp 12. REWIND button 9. ALARM lamp 11. STOP button 10. FORWARD button

7. Control switch

CNC tape

The belt is pulled up to draw out the CNC tape. Belt for drawing out the paper tape

Tape compartment

Fig. 2.3.2 (a) Names of Each Section

46

B62564E1/02
Table 2.3.2 (a) Descriptions of Each Section No. Section 1 Light source Description

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES

Nine LEDs for channels and feed holes are installed in this section. A builtin stop shoe stops the tape. The section is attached to the optical reader with a magnet so that it also serves as a tape retainer. The light source can be opened upward when the control switch is turned to the RELEASE position deactivate the magnet. This section reads the tape and has a glass window. If the window is dirty or is damaged, a reading error may occur. The window must always be kept clean and free from defects. This roller serves as a tape feeder and operates according to the command from the control unit. This reel is used for fastforwarding and rewinding the tape. A 150 m tape can be used. This boss is used to accept the reel. The boss rotates the reel and is driven by the reel motor according to the command from the control unit. This arm adjusts the tension of the tape fed from the reel. The arm absorbs the time delay in the tape transport when the reel motor starts and stops. This switch changes the operating modes of the tape reader. The switch can be turn to one of the following positions: RELEASE: Releases the tape so that it is free to move. The light source can be opened upward. Before loading or unloading the tape, turn the switch to this position. REEL ON: Secures the tape with the stop shoe and activates the reel motor. Before operating the tape reader with the tape on the reel, turn the switch to this position. REEL OFF: Secures the tape with the stop shoe, but does not activate the reel motor. Before operating the tape reader with the tape not on the reel, turn the switch to this position. However, the reels must be used to rewind the tape. When entering data from the tape by running it, be sure to close the light source and turn the switch to the REEL ON or OFF position.

Optical reader

3 4 5

Capstan Reel Reel boss

Tension arm

Control switch

AUTO lamp

This lamp comes on while the tape reader is automatically operated by the control unit. When the lamp is on, the manual operation buttons of the tape reader such as FORWARD (10), STOP (11), and REWIND (12) are ineffective.

47

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
Table 2.3.2 (a) Descriptions of Each Section (contitnued) No. Section 9 ALARM lamp Description

B62564E1/02

This lamp comes on when an alarm occurs in the tape reader. When the lamp lights, eliminate the cause of the alarm and turn the operation switch to the RELEASE position or press the RESET button on the CRT/MDI panel. The lamp then goes off. The following table lists the causes of alarms and the corresponding lamp states. No. Lights Flashes Cause Reel operation error 1. When the control switch is at the REEL ON position, the tape has reached the end or has become loose. 2. When the operation switch is at the REEL OFF position, the reels are being used. Tape reading error 1. The brightness ratio is not adjusted correctly. 2. Holes are punched incorrectly. Tape end The tape has reached the end. The tape does not stop at the EOR when it is rewound. 1. Defective stop magnet 2. Tape reading error

ALARM

ALARM FORWARD

STOP

REWIND

48

B62564E1/02

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
Table 2.3.2 (a) Descriptions of Each Section (Continued)

No. Section

Description No. Lights Flashes Cause Data is read in the reverse direction when the control switch is at the REEL OFF position. 1. During automatic operation The rewind command or the command for reading in the reverse direction is issued. 2. During manual operation The REWIND switch is pressed. Serial data error 1. The baud rate is not correct. 2. The stop bit is not correct. 3. The host does not stop transmitting data when CS is either off or in the DC3 reception state. (The PTR buffer is full.) 1. Watchdog 2. Abnormal power

ALARM REWIND

ALARM FORWARD STOP REWIND

AUTO ALARM FORWARD STOP REWIND

10

FORWARD button

This button is used to feed the tape in the tape reading direction, i.e., forward. To feed the tape forward, press the FORWARD button when the AUTO lamp is off and when the control switch is at the REEL ON or REEL OFF position. When the button is pressed, the tape continues to be fed until it stops under one of the following conditions: (i) When the STOP button is pressed (ii) When ER (EIA code) or % (ISO code) is read (iii) When the RESET button is pressed on the CRT/MDI panel

11

STOP button

This button stops the tape that is currently being fed with the FORWARD (10) or REWIND (12) button.

49

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
Table 2.3.2 (a) Descriptions of Each Section (Continued) No. Section 12 REWIND button Description

B62564E1/02

This button feeds the tape at high speed in the opposite direction to the reading direction. Press this button when the AUTO lamp is off and when the operation switch is at the REEL ON position. When the button is pressed, the tape continues to be fed until it stops under one of the following conditions: (i) When the STOP button (11) is pressed (ii) When an ER (EIA code) or % (ISO code) is read (iii) When the RESET button is pressed on the CRT/MDI panel If the REWIND button is pressed when the control switch is at the REEL ON position, an alarm occurs. This is because the tape cannot be rewound without reels.

13

Tape compartment

The tape compartment is installed at the bottom of the tape reader. The belt for drawing out the paper tape is installed in the tape compartment. Pulling up the belt enables the tape to be easily drawn out of the tape box.

50

B62564E1/02
(2) Operation (a) When no reels are used

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES

The procedure for operating a tape reader with the reels removed is the same as that for operating the tape reader with no reels. However, turn the control switch to the REEL OFF position in step (7). (b) When reels are used (i) Setting the tape 1 Set the tape in the reel. Operation (1)

(i) Twist the reel in the directions of the arrows. Then, the reel is separated.

(ii) Separated reel

paper tape

(iii) Set the tape in the reel.

Hub

(iv) Twist the reel in the directions of the arrows so that the reel and tape are fastened.

51

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
2 Open the front door of the tape reader 3 Turn the control switch to the RELEASE position.

B62564E1/02

4 Mount the reel containing the tape on the right reel boss and an empty reel on the left reel boss when facing the front of the tape reader. The right reel must be positioned so that the tape is fed in the counterclockwise direction as shown below: 5 Draw the tape out of the reel.

6 Feed the tape around tape guide A.

Tape guide A

7 Feed the tape over the tension arm.

52

B62564E1/02

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
8 Insert the tape under tape guides B. The tape is easy to insert if it is held taut. Tape guide B

9 Check that the tape passes under rear tape guide C as shown below: Tape guide C

Tape Tape guide C

10 Feed the tape at the left side in the same way as for the right side.

11 Wind the drawn tape leader onto the left reel and firmly roll the tape onto the reel several turns so that the tape is secured to the reel.

53

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES

B62564E1/02

12 Check that the tape is set as shown below when it is viewed from the top.

Feed holes

Direction in which the tape advances If the tape is not set as shown in the figure above, the orientation of the reel on the boss is reversed. 13 Make sure that the tape is correctly set along the tape guides. 14 Close the light source to hold the tape. 15 Turn the control switch to the REEL ON position. The reel then rotates a little, and the tension arm moves to tension the tape. If the reel continues to rotate, the tape is not secured to the reel. If the lefthand reel is loose, repeat the procedure from step 11. If the righthand reel is loose, repeat the procedure from step 5. If the reel boss continues to turn when the reel is stopped, the reel is not firmly secured to the reel boss. In this case, repeat the procedure from step 4. 16 Close the front door of the tape reader. (ii) Removing the tape 1 Open the front door of the tape reader. 2 Press the REWIND button to rewind the tape. If ER (EIA code) or % (ISO code) is encountered, the tape stops. In this case, press the REWIND button again to rewind the whole tape. When rewinding the tape is completed, press the STOP button to stop rewinding. 3 Turn the control switch to the RELEASE position. 4 Remove the reel from the boss. 5 Close the front door of the tape reader.

54

B62564E1/02 2.3.3 Portable tape reader

(1) Names and descriptions of each section
7. handle 3. capstan

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES

11. Cable storage

2. Optical reader

4. Control switch 1. Light source

6. Metal A 8. Winder 9. Cover lock 10. Lowering Lock lever 5. Tape box

13. Reader/punch interface adapter

12. Photoamplifier

Fig. 2.3.3 (a) Names of Each Section Table 2.3.3 (a) Description of Each Section No. 1 2 3 4 5 Section Light source Optical reader Capstan Control switch Tape compartment Can contain a 15 m tape. See the corresponding descriptions of the tape reader without reels. Description

Fastener (usually kept open) 6 Metal A

Push Paper tape

Insert Paper tape

When removing the rolled tape, reduce the internal diameter by pushing the fastener.

55

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
Table 2.3.3 (a) Description of Each Section (Continued) No. 7 8 9 Section Handle Winder Cover lock Used to carry the tape reader. Used to advance or rewind the tape. Description

B62564E1/02

Be sure to use the lock for fastening the cover before carrying the tape reader. When the tape reader is raised, the latch mechanism is activated to fix the tape reader. Thus, the tape reader is not lowered. The latch is locked with the lowering lock lever. The latch is therefore not unlocked even when the tape reader is raised with the handle.

10

Lowering lock lever When the latch is locked, the lever is horizontal. To store the tape reader in the box, push the lever to release the lock, then raise the tape reader with the handle to unlock the latch. When the latch is unlocked, the tape reader can be stored in the box. When storing the tape reader, secure it with the cover lock.

11 12 13

Cable storage Photoamplifier Reader/punch interface adapter

Used to store rolled power and signal cables. The cable length is 1.5 m. For the tape reader 200 VAC input and 5 VDC output power and reader/punch interface adapter PCB

(2) Operation The operating procedure is the same as that for the tape reader without reels. See Subsection 2.3.1. Preparations for using the tape reader and how to store the tape reader are described below. (a) Preparations 1 Unlock the cover locks (9). Raise the tape reader with the handle (6) until it clicks, then lower the tape reader. The tape reader then appears and is secured. Check that the lowering lock levers (10) are horizontal. 2 Take out the signal and power cables from the cable storage (11) and connect the signal cable with the CNC reader/punch interface port and the power cable with the CNC power supply. (b) Storage 1 Store the cables in the cable storage (11). 2 Push the lowering lock levers (10) at both sides down. 3 Raise the tape reader with the handle (6) to unlock the latch, then gently lower it. 4 Lock the cover locks (9) and carry the tape reader with the handle (6).

56

B62564E1/02 2.3.4 Note for handling tape reader

1) Precautions on tape loading

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES

When the NC tape is loaded, the Label Skip function should be activated to read but skip data until first End of Block code (CR in EIA code or LF in ISO code) is read. When loading an NC tape, the location within the tape, from which data reading should be started must properly be selected and the NC tape should be set as shown in the figure below. Actually, the end of block code(;) is CR in EIA code or is LF in ISO code.

; The program which should be read Actually, the end of block code (;) is CR in EIA code or is LF in ISO code.

Set the tape so that this section is under the glass window.

2) Disconnection and connection of tape reader connection cable Dont disconnect or connect CNC tape reader connection cable (signal cable) without turning off the CNC and tape reader power supply when using a separate tape reader, otherwise the PCB of the tape reader and master PCB of CNC controller may be broken. Turn off the CNC and tape reader power supply before disconnecting or connecting the connection cable, accordingly.

57

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES

B62564E1/02

2.4 FANUC PPR

FANUC PPR is an I/O device with paper tape reader, tape punch, and printer in one system. Interface is reader/ puncher interface.

Reel unit Printer

Paper tape punch

Paper tape reader

Switch unit

Paper tape reader read speed Printer characters per line Printing speed

: 150 ch/sec or more : 40 ch. (dot impact method) : 1.2 line/sec

Paper tape punch punching speed : 50 ch/sec

Fig. 2.4 FANUC PPR See the FANUC PPR Operators Manual (B54584E) for the FANUC PPR Operation.

58

B62564E1/02

3. POWER ON/OFF

3. POWER ON/OFF
1) Turning on the power 1 Check that the appearance of the CNC machine tool is normal. (For example, check that front door and rear door are closed.) 2 Turn on the power according to the manual issued by the machine tool builder. 3 Check that some data is being displayed on the CRT screen. 4 Check that the fan motor is rotating. CAUTION When pressing the <POWER ON> key, do not touch any other CRT/MDI panel keys.Until the positional or alarm screen is displayed, do not touch them. Some keys are used for the maintenance or special operation purpose. When they are pressed, unexpected operation may be caused.

2) Turning off the power 1 Check that the lamp indicating the cycle start is off on the operators panel. 2 Check that all movable blocks of the CNC machine tool is stopping. 3 Turn the tape reader operation switch to the RELEASE position. 4 If an I/O unit such as a tape punch unit is connected to the CNC unit , turn off the power to the I/O unit. 5 Continue to press the POWER OFF pushbutton for about 5 seconds. 6 Refer to the machine tool builders manual for turning off the power to the machine. CAUTION Before connecting or disconnecting the RS232C interface cable of the I/O unit, be sure to turn off the power to the I/O unit.

59

4. MANUAL OPERATION

B62564E1/02

4. MANUAL OPERATION
4.1 Manual Reference Position Return
1 Set the MODE SELECT switch to the JOG position. MDI HANDLE MEMORY INC EDIT JOG

MODE SELECT Switch 2 Turn on the REFERENCE POSITION RETURN switch. OFF ON

REFERENCE POSITION RETURN Switch 3 Jog Feed to reference position direction by each axis Keep this switch on until the reference position is reached. +X +Y +Z

Continue to press switch ON until arrive at reference position. The tool moves along the selected axis to the decelerated point at the rapid traverse rate, then moves to the reference position at the FL speed . A rapid traverse override is effective during rapid traverse motion.

60

B62564E1/02

4. MANUAL OPERATION

4 The machine stops at the reference position lighting the REFERENCE POSITION RETURN COMPLETION LED.

REFERENCE POSITION RETURN COMPLETION LED

CAUTION

For the distance (Not in the deceleration condition) to return the tool to reference position, refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder.

NOTE 1 Once the REFERENCE POSITION RETURN COMPLETION LED lights at the completion of reference position return, the tool does not move unless the REFERENCE POSITION RETURN switch is turned off. NOTE 2 The REFERENCE POSITION RETURN COMPLETION LED is extinguished by either of the following operations: (i) Moving from the reference position. (ii) Entering an emergency stop state.

61

4. MANUAL OPERATION

B62564E1/02

4.2 Manual Continuous Feed

The machine tool can be continuously moved manually as follows. 1 Set the MODE SELECT switch to the JOG position. MDI TAPE MEMORY EDIT HANDLE INC JOG

MODE SELECT Switch 2 Select an axis to be moved.

+X

+Y

+Z

The selected axis moves in its direction. NOTE 1 In manual operation, up to two axes can be simultaneously operated. If three axes are simultaneously selected by switches, only the first two of them are operated. NOTE 2 When the mode is switched to the JOG mode while power is on, axis will not move even if it has already been selected. Axis selection must be performed again.

3 Select JOG feedrate

0 2000 JOG FEEDRATE mm/min

62

B62564E1/02
4 Rapid traverse

4. MANUAL OPERATION

To execute the rapid traverse by manual mode, push RAPID TRAVERSE button, too.

RAPID TRAVERSE

It is possible to move the axis in the selected direction at rapid traverse while this button is pushed. NOTE 1 Feedrate, time constant and method of automatic acceleration/ deceleration for manual rapid traverse are the same as G00 in programmed command. NOTE 2 When the stored stroke limit function is provided, rapid traverse is not executed along the axis having the reference position return function if the [rapid] button is pressed under the following condition: When the power has already been turned on, but the reference position return function has not been executed. In this case, the tool is moved at the jog feedrate. This prevents the tool from reaching the stroke end while traveling at the rapid traverse feedrate and it necessary because the stored stroke limit function is validated only after the tool is manually returned to the reference position.

63

4. MANUAL OPERATION

B62564E1/02

4.3 Incremental Feed

1 Set MODE SELECT switch to INC position. MDI TAPE MEMORY EDIT HANDLE INC JOG

2 Select the desired amount of movement.

X100 X10 X1

X1000 X10000 X100000

Input system Metric input Inch input

X1 0.001mm 0.0001inch

X10 0.01mm 0.001inch

X100 0.1mm 0.01inch

X1000 1mm 0.1inch

X10000 10mm 1inch

X100000 100mm 10inch

3 Select an axis

+X

+Y

+Z

When the JOG switch is pressed once, the axis moves by the amount specified in its direction. Then when the switch is pressed after releasing it once, the axis moves by the specified amount. NOTE 1 The feedrate is the same as the jog feedrate. NOTE 2 The rapid traverse button is also effective. Rapid traverse override is effective during rapid traverse. NOTE 3 Multiplier X1 to X100000 depends on an individual machine tool.

64

B62564E1/02

4. MANUAL OPERATION

4.4 Manual Handle Feed

The feedrate can be adjusted precisely by using the manual pulse generator. 1 Set the MODE SELECT switch to the HANDLE position. MDI TAPE MEMORY EDIT HANDLE INC JOG

2 Select an axis. Y X Z

Axis select switch 3 Rotate the handle of the manual pulse generator.

Manual pulse generator

Clockwise rotation ............... + direction Counterclockwise rotation ... direction (The direction varies with the machine tool builder.)

65

4. MANUAL OPERATION
4 Select the movement amount

B62564E1/02

Some operators panels are provided with the following selector switch. X10 multiplies the movement amount by 10; X100 by 100. X10 X1 X100 (CAUTION 1)

Handle Multiplier

Input System Input system Metric input Inch input X1 0,001 m 0.0001 inch X10 0.01 mm 0.001 inch X100(Note) 0.1 mm 0.01 inch

CAUTION 1 If the handle is rotated in excess of 5 turns/sec, there is a difference between the handle rotation amount and the machine movement distance. CAUTION 2 Rotating the handle too fast when such as X100 is selected moves the tool or table at a rate as fast as the rapid traverse rate. A sudden stop gives the machine tool a shock. When provided, the automatic acceleration/deceleration function is executed also for movement when using manual handle feed so that the mechanical impact is reduced.

NOTE

Other amount may be used depending on machine tool.

66

B62564E1/02

4. MANUAL OPERATION

4.5 Manual Feed in a Specified Direction

The tool can be manually moved in a specified direction on a specified plane. The feedrate and the direction and plane of feed can be changed at any time. Simple cutting can be manually executed on a plane. (1) Selecting a plane Specify external signals that indicate the first and second axes of the plane on which the tool is manually moved in a specified direction. (2) Specifying the direction of feed Enter an external input signal that indicates the direction in which the tool is to be manually moved. The direction of feed can be specified in the range of 0 to 360 degrees in 1/16 degrees. The angle is specified as shown below. If an angle greater than 360 degrees is specified, the CNC unit repeatedly subtracts 360 from the angle until it falls within the range of 0 to 360 degrees. While the tool is being manually moved in the specified direction, the direction of feed can be changed as required. When the direction is changed, the position check is not executed, but the move command in the new direction is immediately executed.

(Positive direction of the second axis) 90

180

0 (Positive direction of the first axis)

270 (3) Specifying a feedrate Using the dial for specifying the jog feedrate, specify the feedrate (as a tangential velocity) at which the tool is manually moved in the specified direction. Parameter No. 1411 determines the feedrate when the dial is set to the 100% position. (4) Starting and stopping manual feed in the specified direction Manual feed in the specified direction is executed while the corresponding signals are on. The signal that moves the tool in the specified direction and the signal that moves it in the opposite direction are used in manual feed. NOTE 1 When the mode of manual feed in the specified direction is selected, the tool can be moved only on the selected plane determined by the selected axes. NOTE 2 Automatic or manual operation cannot be switched when manual feed in the specified direction is executed.

67

4. MANUAL OPERATION

B62564E1/02

4.6 Manual Numeric Command

The data entered by MDI devices in the program format can be executed in the jog mode. The manual numeric command can be executed whenever jog feed is allowed. The following commands can be specified: Positioning (G00) Linear interpolation (G01) Automatic reference position return (G28) Second, third, or fourth reference position return (G30) M, S, T, B (second miscellaneous functions) Execute the command as described below: (1) Select the mode of manual continuous feed (jog). The [reference return] switch must be set off. (2) Press the [function menu] key. (3) Press the [PROGRAM] key. The program screen is displayed. (4) When the displayed program screen is not a program text screen, do either of the following: (i) Press the [CHAPTER] key to switch the soft keys to [selection] keys, then press the [TEXT] key. (ii) Repeatedly press the [PROGRAM] key until the program text screen is displayed. (5) Press the [operation menu] key to switch the soft keys into [OPERATION SELECTION] keys. (6) Using the address keys and numeric keys, enter the command. The following commands can be entered: (i) G00 (Positioning) Specify the traveling distance with numeric values following addresses such as X, Y, and Z. Always specify the command with an incremental value, irrespective of whether G90 or G91 is selected. The rapid traverse selector (RT) determines whether the tool is moved at the rapid traverse feedrate or jog feedrate. (ii) G01 (Linear interpolation) Specify the traveling distance as described for G00 above. The tool is always moved at the dry run feedrate. The feedrate cannot be specified with F. This does not depend on whether the dry run switch is on or off. (iii) G28 (Reference position return) The G28 command automatically returns the tool to the reference position. Unlike automatic operation, the specified traveling distance does not affect the operation. The tool is directly returned to the reference position without passing through the intermediate point. The tool is returned to the reference position only along the axis for which the move command is specified. (iv) G30 (Second, third, or fourth reference position return) Like G28, the G30 command returns the tool to the second, third, or fourth reference position. Specify the number of the reference position with address P, as in automatic operation. (v) M, S, T, and B Enter as many addresses as required or as the system accepts. The addresses can be entered one after another. (7) Press the [input] key. (8) Repeat steps (6) and (7) until all necessary commands are entered. (9) After the all necessary commands are entered, the screen can be switched. Display the position screen or another screen as required. (10)Press the [cycle start] button once on the operators panel or the [start] key on the CRT/MDI panel. The program is executed and the status display indicates STRM. In some machines, the cycle start lamp goes on. (A parameter specifies whether the cycle start lamp goes on.)

68

B62564E1/02

4. MANUAL OPERATION

(11)When the program terminates, the status display indicates STOP or HOLD again. The cycle start lamp goes off. If one of the following occurs while the program is being executed, the program is stopped: (i) Feed hold (ii) Switching to a mode other than the manual continuous feed mode (iii) Alarm (iv) Reset or emergency stop The remaining distance is canceled. The M, S, T, and B codes are retained unless the program is stopped due to (iv). NOTE 1 A manual numeric command can be executed whenever manual continuous feed is allowed. It can be executed even if the feed hold function or another function stops the program (automatic operation stop state) in the middle of a block. In this case, however, the command is subjected to the following restrictions: (i) While the M, S, T, or B code is being processed, the manual numeric command including the M, S, T, or B code cannot be executed. (ii) While the M, S, T, or B code is being processed, no manual numeric commands can be specified in the following case: When the M, S, T, or B code was independently specified. Alternatively, another function (move command, dwell command, etc.) specified in the block containing the M, S, T, or B code has already been executed. NOTE 2 The M, S, T, or B code cannot be used to call a subprogram or custom macro. NOTE 3 The S code cannot be specified in the constant surface speed control mode.

69

4. MANUAL OPERATION

B62564E1/02

4.7 Manual Absolute ON and OFF

This switch specifies whether the amout of manual movement is to be added to the absolute value. 1) When the he switch is ON. Y axis

P2

Manual operation

P1

Z axis

The coordinate values change by the amount of manual operation. 2) When the he switch is OFF. Y1 Y2 P2

O2 O1

P1

X2 X1

The coordinate values do not change. Example 1 When the following tape commands are specified : G01G90X100.0Z100.0F010 ; X200.0Y150.0 ; X300.0Y200.0 ; (1) (2) (3)

a) When block (2) has been executed after manual operation (Xaxis +20.0, Zaxis +100.0) at the end of movement of block (1) Y (120.0 , 200.0) (220.0 , 250.0) When the absolute switch is off Manual operation 0 (100.0 , 100.0) (200.0 , 150.0) When the absolute switch is on X

70

B62564E1/02

4. MANUAL OPERATION
b) When the feed hold button is pressed while block (2) is being executed, manual operation (Yaxis + 75.0) is performed, and the cycle start button is pressed and released When the absolute switch is off (200.0 , 225.0) When the absolute switch is on Manual operation (200.0 , 150.0) (150.0 , 125.0) c) When the feed hold button is pressed while block (2) is being executed, manual operation (Xaxis +75.0) is performed, the control unit is reset with the RESET button, and block (2) is read again (300.0 , 275.0) (200.0 , 225.0) (150.0 , 200.0) When the absolute switch is off When the absolute switch is on Manual operation (200.0 , 150.0) (200.0 , 125.0) (100.0 , 100.0) d) When there is only one axis in the following command, only the commanded axis returns. N1G01G90X100.0Y100.0F500 ; N2X200.0 ; N3Y150.0 ; When the switch is on (300.0 , 200.0) (300.0 , 275.0)

(150.0 , 200.0)

(300.0 , 200.0)

Manual operation

N3

When the switch is off

N2 N1

71

4. MANUAL OPERATION

B62564E1/02

e) When the tape commands are followed by an incremental command, they are executed in the same manner as when the absolute switch is off. CAUTION When the operator manually intervenes during cutter compensation, the tool moves as described below:

1) Coordinates when the switch off and cutter compensation is being performed

Manual operation Cutter path

Program path

After manual operation is performed in the status of manual absolute switch is off, during cutter compensation, automatic operation is restarted then the tool moves parallel to the movement that would have been performed if manual movement had not been performed. The amount of separation equals to the amount that was performed manually. 2) When the switch is on during cutter compensation Operation of the machine upon return to automatic operation after manual intervention in the status of manual absolute switch is on, during execution with an absolute command program in the cutter compensation mode will be described. The center of the tool is directly moved to the top of the vector at the beginning of the next block. After that point, the distance of manual movement is taken into consideration when the vector is calculated. The same occurs when manual intervention is executed while turning a corner. If the INC bit in parameter No. 2402 is set to 1 when the program does not contain absolute commands but incremental commands, the tool is moved in the same manner as when the switch is off. If the INC bit is set to 0, even the incremental command is processed like the absolute command as described below. (a) When the operator manually intervenes while a block is being executed (Example 1) VB2 VB1 PB PC PD Path programmed by the absolute command VC1 VC2 After the operator has manually intervened, the tool moves along a path so that the center of the tool moves straight to the top of the next vector in the program.

PA

PH Path of tool center Path of tool center before manual intervention

Manual operation PH'

72

B62564E1/02
(Example 2) VB2 VB1 PB PC VC1 VC2

4. MANUAL OPERATION

PA

After the operator manually intervenes white turning a corner in cutter compensation, the tool moves along a path so that the center of the tool moves straight to the top of the next vector in the program, as described in Example 1 above. Path programmed by the absolute command

PH VA2 VA1

Manual operation

PH'VA1' (b) When the operator manually intervanes affer a block is terminated by the signal block function.

VB2 VB1 Manual operation PB PC

VC1 VC2

Path programmed by the PA absolute command Path of tool center PH

As described in (a) above, the tool moves along a path so that the center of the tool moves straight to the top of the next vector in the program. when the operation is stopped by the single block function, intervention from the MDI panel is enabled. In this case, the tool moves as when the operator manually intervenes.

73

4. MANUAL OPERATION

B62564E1/02

4.8 Effect of Manual Intervention

Section 4.7, Manual Absolute On and Off, describes the effect of manual intervention on the execution of the remaining part of the program. This section describes in detail the relationship between manual intervention and the INC bit (bit 1) in parameter No. 2402, the manual/absolute switch, and the G90 and G91 modes.

(1) (2)

Manual intervention

Program command

(1) When the manual/absolute switch is off: (1) (2) When the manual/absolute switch is on: (a) When the G90 mode is selected: (2) (b) When the G91 mode is selected: (i) When the INC bit in parameter No. 2402, is set to 1: (1) (ii) When the INC bit is set to 0: (2)

74

B62564E1/02

4. MANUAL OPERATION

4.9 ThreeDimensional Handle Feed

Threedimensional handle feed includes three special handle feed modes, a function for changing the tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool, and two screen display functions. The threedimensional handle feed function is used to execute special handle feed for a fiveaxis diesinking machine. These handle feed modes function even during manual handle interrupt. Special handle feed modes 1 Mode of handle feed in the longitudinal direction of the tool 2 Mode of handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool 3 Mode of rotational handle feed around the center of the tool tip *These three modes are called as special handle feed modes. Function for changing the tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool Function for specifying a tool holder offset for tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool Screen display functions 1 Function that displays the coordinate of the tool tip 2 Function that displays the number of pulses in a manual interrupt and the traveled distance The following variables are used in expressions described in the subsequent sections: Xp, Yp, Zp: Number of handle feed pulses for the axes (integrated value) Hp A, B, C L : Number of specified handle feed pulses (integrated value) : Machine coordinate of the A, B, and Caxes : Distance from the center of rotation of the tool to the tool tip

4.9.1 Handle feed in the longitudinal direction of the tool

Select the mode of handle feed in the longitudinal direction of the tool and rotate the handle of the manual pulse generator. The tool rotates about the rotation axis, causing the slanted tool to move in the longitudinal direction of the tool by the specified distance. If the mode is selected in the manual handle interrupt mode in automatic operation, the longitudinal movement by the manual pulse generator is superimposed on the movement by automatic operation.

A&C, B&C

When the handle interrupt is made in the longitudinal direction of the tool, the pulses are distributed to the axes as described below:

75

4. MANUAL OPERATION
(1) B and Caxes Z

B62564E1/02

B X

Zp Hp B

C Yp Xp Hpxy

Y Xp = Hp SIN( B ) COS( C ) Yp = Hp SIN( B ) SIN( C ) Zp = Hp COS( B )

If C is set to 0 (the CCLR bit in parameter No. 7550 is set to 1), the pulses are distributed as follows: Yp = Hp SIN( B ) Zp = Hp COS( B ) (2) A and Caxes Z

Zp Hp A

C Xp Y

X Hpxy Xp = Hp SIN( A ) SIN( C ) Yp = Hp SIN( A ) COS( C ) Zp = Hp COS( A )

Yp

If C is set to 0 (the CCLR bit in parameter No. 7550 is set to 1), the pulses are distributed as follows: Yp = Hp SIN( A ) Zp = Hp COS( A )

76

B62564E1/02
(3) A and Baxes

4. MANUAL OPERATION

A-axis master

A Zp B

Yp

X Xp Xp = Hp SIN( B ) Yp = Hp COS( B ) SIN( A ) Zp = Hp COS( B ) COS( A ) The pulses are distributed as described above. Z

B-axis master

B A Zp

X Xp = Hp COS( A ) SIN( B ) Yp = Hp SIN( A ) Zp = Hp COS( A ) COS( B ) The pulses are distributed as described above.

Xp

Yp

77

4. MANUAL OPERATION
(4) A and Baxes (when the longitudinal direction of the tool is in the X direction) X

B62564E1/02

Hp

Xp B Zp Z

Yp

Y Xp = Hp COS( B ) Yp = Hp SIN( B ) SIN( A ) Zp = Hp SIN( B ) COS( A ) The pulses are distributed as described above.

78

B62564E1/02 4.9.2 Handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool

4. MANUAL OPERATION

Select the mode of handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool and rotate the handle of the manual pulse generator. The tool rotates about the rotation axis, causing the slanted tool to move in the specified direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the tool by the specified distance. If the mode is selected in the manual handle interrupt mode in automatic operation, the transverse movement by the manual pulse generator is superimposed on the movement by automatic operation. A- and C- axes B- and C- axes Center of rotation Tool

Z A&C , B&C Transverse direction of the tool(X-axis) Longitudinal direction of the tool Transverse direction of the tool(Y-axis) X Workpiece A B Y C

When handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool is executed, the pulses are distributed as described below:

79

4. MANUAL OPERATION
(1) B and Caxes <X direction> Z

B62564E1/02

Xp X Hp (X direction)

0' Zp

B C X' Yp Hpxy Y C 0

Xp = Hp COS( B ) COS( C ) Yp = Hp COS( B ) SIN( C ) Zp = Hp SIN( B ) The pulses are distributed as described above. <Y direction> X 0 C Xp 0' Hp (Y direction) The XY plane is drawn because B- and C-axes are specified and because rotation about the B-axis, which is on the Y-axis, does not cause the tool to rotate about the Y-axis at the tool tip. Suppose that the Z-axis on this side of the XY plane is positive.

Yp

Y' Xp = Hp SIN( C ) Yp = Hp COS( C ) Zp = 0 The pulses are distributed as described above.

80

B62564E1/02
(2) A and Caxes <X direction> C 0 Y

4. MANUAL OPERATION

0'

Yp

Hp (X direction) Xp C

The XY plane is drawn because A- and C-axes are apecified and because rotation about the A-axis, which is on the X-axis, does not cause the tool to rotate about the X-axis at the tool tip. Suppose that the Z-axis on this side of the XY plane is positive.

X'

Xp = Hp COS( C ) Yp = Hp SIN( C ) Zp = 0 The pulses are distributed as described above. <Y direction> Hpxy Z Hp (Y direction)

Zp

Yp Xp 0 C Y

Xp = Hp COS( A ) SIN( C ) Yp = Hp COS( A ) COS( C ) Zp = Hp SIN( A ) The pulses are distributed as described above.

81

4. MANUAL OPERATION
(3) A and Baxes (when the longitudinal direction of the tool is in the X direction)

B62564E1/02

Z(+)

Feed in the Z direction

Z'(+)

Feed in the Z direction

Hp X'(+)

Zz

B Feed in the Y direction Hp Zy X(+) A Yy 0' Xz Yz

Y'(+)

Y(+)

When the tool is moved in the Y direction, the pulses are distributed as follows: Xy = 0 Yy = Hp COS( A ) Zy = Hp SIN( A ) When the tool is moved in the Z direction, the pulses are distributed as follows: Xz = Hp SIN( B ) Yz = Hp COS( B ) SIN( A ) Zz = Hp COS( B ) COS( A )

82

B62564E1/02 4.9.3 Rotational handle feed around the center of the tool tip

4. MANUAL OPERATION

Select the mode of rotational handle feed around the center of the tool tip and rotate the handle of the manual pulse generator. When the rotation axis (A, B, or Caxis) is moved, the X, Y, and Zaxes are adjusted so that the movement of the rotation axis does not shift the tool tip. If this mode is selected in the manual handle interrupt mode in automatic operation, rotation around the center of the tool tip by the manual pulse generator is superimposed on the movement by automatic operation. When the tool is rotated around the center of its tip, the traveled distance along linear axes (Xp, Yp, Zp) obtained by the following expressions are output at the time the movement about the rotation axes is output. The tool tip hardly moves. When rotational handle feed around the center of the tool tip is executed, the pulses are distributed to the axes as described below: CAUTION If the tool rotates about the rotation axes at high speed, the tool tip may move.

(1) B and Caxes Z

L B

Zt

C Yt

Xt Y Traveled distance along the linear axes Xp = L [ SIN(B+Bp) COS(C+Cp) SIN(B) COS(C) ] Yp = L [ SIN(B+Bp) SIN(C+Cp) SIN(B) SIN(C) ] Zp = L [ COS(B+Bp) COS(B) ] Angular displacement of the rotation axis Bp = Hp or Cp = Hp

83

4. MANUAL OPERATION
(2) A and Caxes Z

B62564E1/02

L A

Zt

C Xt

Yt X Traveled distance along the linear axes Xp = L [ SIN(A+Ap) SIN(C+Cp) SIN(A) SIN(C) ] Yp = L [ SIN(A+Ap) COS(C+Cp) SIN(A) COS(C) ] Zp = L [ COS(A+Ap) COS(A) ] Angular displacement of the rotation axis Ap = Hp or Cp = Hp

84

B62564E1/02

4. MANUAL OPERATION
(3) A and Baxes (when the longitudinal axis of the tool is in the X direction) Z(+) (A+Ap) , (B+Bp)

Rotation around the center of the tool tip, handle interrupt, or handle feed

Zp

Pe

Ps

A, B Yp Xp Ap, Bp Zs X(+) Ys Xs Ye

Ze Xe

L=Distance between tool tip position

Tool tip position Y(+) Traveled distance along the linear axes Xp = L [ COS(B+Bp) COS(B) ] Yp = L [ SIN(B+Bp) SIN(A+Ap) SIN(B) SIN(A) ] Zp = L [ SIN(B+Bp) COS(A+Ap) SIN(B) COS(A) ] Angular displacement of the rotation axis Ap = Hp or Bp = Hp

85

4. MANUAL OPERATION

B62564E1/02

4.9.4 Changing tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool
Select the mode of changing the tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of tool when both the following modes are selected: Mode of tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool (G43.1) and mode of manual handle interrupt (MOVL and H are on). Then rotate the handle of the manual pulse generator. The tool length compensation is changed in the longitudinal direction of the tool. The change is cleared to zero when a reset or the G49 command is executed or when the offset number is changed.

4.9.5 Specifying a tool holder offset for tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool
When this function is specified to perform tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool, a parameterset offset is added to the conventional tool compensation value and the sum is assumed as the tool length to be used for compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool. This function enables the user to separately specify the actual tool length and the machinespecific length between the center of rotation of the rotation axis and the position at which the tool is attached. The user need not add the two lengths to specify a compensation value. Do not change the value of the offset parameter (No. 7548) in the mode of tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool. To change the value, first cancel the mode of tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool. Setting parameters DTHO and ETHO (No. 7540) to 1 enables the following: 1 With the function for specifying a tool holder offset for tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool, the tool tip coordinates are displayed according to the machine specific length, set with parameter No. 7548. 2 The tool holder offset function can also be used for the tool length compensation function (G43), as well as for tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool.

86

B62564E1/02 4.9.6 Notes on threedimensional handle feed

4. MANUAL OPERATION

1) The threedimensional handle feed function is invalidated when the parallel axis control function is enabled. 2) A manual handle interrupt can be executed for threedimensional handle feed only when the manual handle interrupt function is enabled. 3) Handle interrupt cannot be executed when a command related to the rotation axis is specified. 4) The axes of the machine are configured as shown below: A- and C-axes B- and C-axes Center of rotation Tool

A&C , B&C Longitudinal direction of the tool

Z C

Workpiece

A- and B-axes (when the longitudinal direction of the tool is in the X direction) A B

Z Workpiece Center of rotation Tool Longitudinal direction of the tool 5) Manual handle interrupt in threedimensional handle feed When the handle of the manual pulse generator is rotated in the following state, handle interrupt is executed: a. Mode Automatic operation mode (tape, MDI, memory) b. Operation status Cutting feed mode (G01, G02, G03) c. Handle interrupt is invalidated: During an alarm or interlock state or when an operation for positioning is in progress. Y B X A

87

4. MANUAL OPERATION

B62564E1/02

6) If the HLB bit does not specify the A and C axes when the A and Caxes are selected, PLS alarm No. 011 occurs. The alarm occurs if the same applies to the B and Caxes or the A and Baxes. 7) The pulses of the first manual pulse generator are used. The mode of threedimensional handle feed is validated when the following two conditions are satisfied: The axis selected for the corresponding threedimensional handle feed mode is input in the manual handle feed axis selection signal of the first manual pulse generator. The corresponding handle mode signal (G156.0 to G156.3) is input. 8) The machine coordinates of rotation axes A, B, and C are read when the mode of handle feed in the longitudinal direction of the tool or the mode of handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool is selected. If the rotation axis is moved after either handle feed mode is selected, the new machine coordinates are ignored. 9) When the function for changing the tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool is executed, the new tool length compensation becomes valid for the blocks read into the buffer.

4.9.7 Displaying the coordinates of the tool tip

The absolute coordinates of the tool tip and the actual speed are displayed when handle feed in the longitudinal or transverse direction of the tool or rotational handle feed around the center of the tool tip is executed. Even in the manual handle interrupt mode, the coordinate and the speed are displayed in the same manner. When tool length L is specified, the absolute coordinates of the tool tip is calculated on the basis of the current position along the axes and the calculated coordinates are displayed. The screen displaying the tool tip coordinates can be selected in the following two ways: (a) Pressing the [FUNCTION SELECTION] key Press the [function menu] key to switch the soft keys to the [FUNCTION SELECTION] keys. Press the [POSITION] key in the [FUNCTION SELECTION] keys, then select the screen displaying the tool tip coordinates. (b) Pressing the [CHAPTER SELECTION] key Press the [function menu] key and select the position screen with the soft key. Press the [OPERATION SELECTION] key on the position screen to switch the soft keys to the [CHAPTER SELECTION] keys. Then select the tool tip position display. (1) Expressions for calculating the tool tip position When tool length L is specified, the tool tip position is calculated on the basis of the current position along the axes as describe below and the calculated position is displayed: (a) B and Caxes Xd = X L SIN( B ) COS( C ) Xd = Y L SIN( B ) SIN( C ) Zd = Z L COS( B ) When C is set to 0, (the CCLR bit in parameter No. 7550 is 1), the tool tip position is calculated as follows: Xd = X L SIN( B ) Xd = Y Zd = Z L COS( B ) (b) A and Caxes Xd = X L SIN( A ) SIN( C ) Xd = Y + L SIN( A ) COS( C ) Zd = Z L COS( A ) When C is set to 0, (the CCLR bit in parameter No. 7550 is 1), the tool tip position is calculated as follows: Xd = X Xd = Y + L SIN( A ) Zd = Z L COS( A ) (c) A and Baxes (Only for handle feed or handle interrupt in the longitudinal direction of the tool) Aaxis master Xd = X L SIN( B ) Xd = Y + L COS( B ) SIN( A ) Zd = Z L COS( B ) COS( A )

88

B62564E1/02
Baxis master Xd = X L COS( A ) SIN( B ) Xd = Y + L SIN( A ) Zd = Z L COS( A ) COS( B ) The tool tip position is calculated as shown above.

4. MANUAL OPERATION

A and Baxes (when the longitudinal direction of the tool is in the X direction) Xd = X L COS( B ) Xd = Y L SIN( B ) SIN( A ) Zd = Z + L SIN( B ) COS( A ) where Xd, Yd, Zd : Tool tip position X, Y, Z A, B, C L (2) Display formats (a) On the 9inch CRT (b) On the 14inch CRT
TOOL HEAD POSITION O0001 N00001

: Current position along the axes (workpiece coordinate) : Current position from the origin of the workpiece coordinate system of the A, B, and Caxes : Specified tool length

TOOL HEAD POSITION

O0001

N00001

X Y Z B C ACT, F : 15

(ABSOLUTE) 123.456 234.567 56.789 78.898 21.893

(MM) (MM) (MM) (DEG.) (DEG.)

X Y Z B C

(ABSOLUTE) 123.456 234.567 56.789 78.901 21.893 (ACTUAL SPEED)

(MM) (MM) (MM) (DEG.) (DEG.)

(MM/MIN) S: 0 (PRM) F

15 (MM/MIN) HANDLE PULSE

0 (PRM)

TL_HEAD

HDL_PLS

TOOL HEAD

4.9.8 Displaying the number of pulses for manual interrupt and the traveled distance
The total number of pulses in handle interrupt and the total traveled distances along individual axes can be displayed when the handle feed in the longitudinal or transverse direction of the tool, or the rotational handle feed around the center of the tool tip is executed. Even in the manual handle interrupt mode, the number of pulses and the distances are displayed in the same manner. When bit 0 of parameter No. 2214 is set to 1, the pulses generated by a threedimensional handle interrupt are not counted to update the displayed number of manual interrupt pulses. The number of manual interrupt pulses (No. 4101) displayed on the diagnosis screen (coordinate system shift) is, however, updated even if bit 0 of parameter No. 2214 is set to 1. The screen displaying the number of pulses in the handle interrupt and traveled distances along individual axes can be selected in the following two ways: (a) Pressing the [FUNCTION SELECTION] key Press the [function menu] key to switch the soft keys to the [FUNCTION SELECTION] keys. Press the [POSITION] key of the [FUNCTION SELECTION] keys, then select the screen displaying the number of pulses and the traveled distances along individual axes. (b) Pressing the [CHAPTER SELECTION] key Press the [function menu] key and select the position screen with the soft key. Press the [OPERATION SELECTION] key on the position screen to switch the soft keys to the [CHAPTER SELECTION] keys. Select the display of the number of pulses and traveled distances along individual axes.

89

4. MANUAL OPERATION
(1) Display formats (a) On the 9inch CRT
TOOL HEAD POSITION (PULSE) X 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 1.215 B 0.000 C 0.000 O0001 N00001 (DISTANCE) X 1.234 Y 2.098 Z 3.789 B 4.123 C 0.000

B62564E1/02

(b) On the 14inch CRT

TOOL HEAD POSITION (PULSE) X 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 1.215 B 0.000 C 0.000 (TOOL) 0.789 (ACTUAL SPEED) F 15 S (MM/MIN) TOOL HEAD HANDLE PULSE O0001 N00001 (DISTANCE) X 1.234 Y 2.098 Z 3.789 B 4.123 C 0.000

TOOL : ACT.F :

0.789 15 (MM/MIN)

L S 0 (PRM)

0 (PRM)

TL_HEAD

HDL_PLS

NOTE

In the column of the number of pulses, the value next to axis X, Y, Z, B (or A), or C (or B) does not indicate the number of pulses in the handle interrupt for each axis. The indicated value depends on the special handle function as described below. The axis in square brackets indicates the feed direction when the longitudinal direction of the tool is in the X direction and the rotation axes are the A and Baxes.

1 Handle feed in the X [Y] direction in the mode of handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool: The number of pulses in the handle interrupt is indicated next to the first axis. 2 Handle feed in the Y [Z] direction in the mode of handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool: The number of pulses in the handle interrupt is indicated next to the second axis. 3 Mode of handle feed in the longitudinal direction of the tool: The number of pulses in the handle interrupt is indicated next to the third axis. 4 Handle feed around the A and Baxes [Baxis] in the mode of rotational handle feed around the center of the tool tip: The number of pulses in the handle interrupt is indicated next to the fourth axis. 5 Handle feed around the Caxis [Aaxis] in the mode of rotational handle feed around the center of the tool tip: The number of pulses in the handle interrupt is indicated next to the fifth axis. 6 Changing the tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool: The number of pulses in the handle interrupt (tool length compensation) is indicated next to L or T00L. (This is indicated at the time the compensation is validated.)

90

B62564E1/02

4. MANUAL OPERATION

4.10 Manual Interruption Function for ThreeDimensional Coordinate Conversion

When the handle of the manual pulse generator is rotated in the threedimensional coordinate conversion mode, this function adds the travel distance specified by the manual pulse generator to the travel distance during automatic operation. This addition is performed for the new (converted) threedimensional coordinate component (programmed coordinate system) in the direction of the axis selected for manual feed using the manual pulse generator. Z Z Z'

X' X Coordinate system to be converted X Converted coordinate system

Y'

(When the Z-axis is selected, the travel distance is added to the Z'-axis as shown in the figure above.) Fig. 4.10 For the three basic axes

4.10.1 Interruption
This function performs interruption only when all the conditions in 1 to 8 are met. 1 During simultaneous manual and automatic operation mode (including manual interruption using the manual pulse generator) 2 During threedimensional coordinate conversion (i.e. while blocks G68 to G69 are being executed.) 3 During cutting mode (i.e. while blocks from a G code for cutting, such as G01, G02, or G03, to G00 are being executed.) 4 When parking along the feed axis is not enabled (i.e. when PKn for the feed axis is low.) 5 When the machine moves along the three axes selected for threedimensional coordinate conversion 6 When the axis for which the function performs interruption is a master axis under parallel axis control (in this case, no slave axes are converted). 7 When feed in the tool axis direction or the direction perpendicular to the tool axis or rotation around the tool tip center is not selected for the manual operation or the manual interruption using the manual pulse generator when the ALNGH, RGHTH, and RNDH input signals are all low. 8 While the playback function is not being executed The result of adding the feedrate in the threedimensional coordinate conversion mode is not permitted to exceed the maximum cutting speed for each axis.

91

4. MANUAL OPERATION 4.10.2 Manual interruption and the coordinate system

B62564E1/02

When this function is effective, the current position in the workpiece coordinate system does not depend on the travel distance specified during manual interruption using the manual pulse generator. The current position is therefore not updated even when the manual pulse generator is rotated. Each current position in the machine coordinate system and in the relative coordinate system depends on the travel distance specified during manual interruption. As shown in Fig. 1, the travel distance is added along the Zaxis. The travel distance is displayed using the X, Y, and Z coordinates of the coordinate system to be converted. The travel distance specified by this function can be monitored on the manual overlap screen. The DMK bit of parameter 2208 specifies whether the travel distance is displayed on the manual overlap screen using the coordinate system before or after threedimensional coordinate conversion.

92

B62564E1/02

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
5.1 Operation Mode
5.1.1 Operation in the tape mode
1 Load the program tape in the tape reader. 2 Set the mode selector to the TAPE position. MDI

TAPE MEMORY EDIT 3 Press the [CYCLE START] button.

HANDLE INC JOG

The cycle start lamp goes on.

CYCLE START When this button is pressed, automatic operation starts, and the cycle start lamp goes on.

5.1.2 Operation in the MEMORY mode

1 Preload programs in memory. See Chapter 9 in Part III. 2 Select the program to be executed. See Section 5.2 in Part III. 3 Set the mode selector to the MEMORY position. MDI

TAPE MEMORY EDIT 4 Press the [CYCLE START] button.

HANDLE INC JOG

The cycle start lamp goes on.

CYCLE START When this button is pressed, automatic operation starts, and the cycle start lamp goes on.

93

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 5.1.3 MDI operation

(1) Entering programs in the buffer memory for operation in the MDI mode

B62564E1/02

Multiple blocks of commands can be entered from the CRT/MDI panel to the buffer memory for operation in the MDI mode. The capacity of the buffer memory for operation in the MDI mode is 200 characters. 9 CRT unit 1 Set the mode selector to the MDI mode. 2 Press the function menu key to change the soft keys to the function selection keys. 3 Press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard key to display the program screen. 4 When the program screen is not a program text screen (i) Press the [CHAPTER] key to switch the soft keys to the chapter selection keys. Then, press the desired chapter selection key. or (ii) Press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard key repeatedly until the program text screen appears. 5 Press the operation menu key to switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys. 6 Enter the number of the desired program with the address keys and numeric keys. The program is temporarily stored in the key input buffer. Press the [INSERT] key to transmit the program in the key input buffer to the buffer memory for operation in the MDI mode. The contents of the buffer memory are then displayed on the CRT. 7 To enter more programs, repeat step 6.
POSITION

Function menu key

Soft keys

Operation menu key

9 CRT function selection keys

PROGRAM OFFSET PRG_CHK CHAPTER +

9 CRT operation selection keys

ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_WRD BG_EDIT +

14 CRT unit

Function menu key

Soft keys

Operation menu key

14" CRT function selection keys

POSITI ON PROGRA OFFSET PRGRAM SETTIN M CHECK G SERVIC E MESSAG E CHAPTE R

14" CRT operation selection keys

ALTER INSERT DELETE DELETE BACK WORD EDIT SEARCH BKWRD REWIND DRCTRY SEARCH MEMORY

(2) Editing the program in the buffer memory for operation in the MDI mode The program in the buffer memory for operation in the MDI mode can be edited in the same way as for the program stored in CNC memory. The following editing is possible: (a) Forward search (See Subsection 9.4.1.) (b) Backward search (See Subsection 9.4.1.) (c) Word change (See Subsection 9.4.2.) (d) Word insertion (See Subsection 9.4.2.) (e) Word deletion (See Subsection 9.4.2.) (f) Program rewinding (See Subsection 5.2.2.)

94

B62564E1/02

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5.2 Selecting a Program to be Executed

5.2.1 Searching for a program number or sequence number
1 To perform the operation in the MEMORY mode, set the mode selector to the MEMORY position. To perform the operation in the TAPE mode, set the mode selector to the TAPE position. Only searching for a sequence number is possible during the operation in the TAPE mode. Searching for a program number is impossible. 2 Press the function menu key. 3 Press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard key to display the program screen. 4 When the program screen is not a program text screen (i) Press the [CHAPTER] key to switch the soft keys to the chapter selection keys, then press the [TEXT] key. or (ii) Press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard key repeatedly until the program text is displayed. 5 Press the operation menu key to switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys. 6 Press the [FORE SEARCH] key. 7 (i) To search for a program number, press the [(PROG#)]key to enter 0 in the key inputbuffer. Then, the system prompts the operator to enter the number of the program to be searched for. To search for a sequence number, press the [(SEQ#)] key to enter N in the input buffer. Then, the system prompts the operator to enter the number of the sequence to be searched for. 9" CRT function selection keys
POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET PRG_CHK CHAPTER +

9" CRT operation selection keys

ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_WRD BG_EDIT +

(ii)

14" CRT function selection keys

POSITI ON PROGRA OFFSET PRGRAM SETTIN M CHECK G SERVIC E MESSAG E CHAPTE R

8 Enter the number of the program or sequence to be searched for. 9 Press the [EXEC] key to search for the program or sequence number.

14" CRT operation selection keys

ALTER INSERT DELETE DELETE BACK WORD EDIT SEARCH BKWRD REWIND DRCTRY SEARCH MEMORY

95

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 5.2.2 Searching for a program by name

This operation is possible in the EDIT or MEM mode.

B62564E1/02

The procedure is as follows. The following figures are examples of the soft keys on the 9 CRT. 1 Press the function menu key and [PROGRAM] key to display the program screen. 2 Press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard key a few times or press the [CHAPTER] key and the desired chapter selection key to display the text screen. 3 Press the operation menu key to switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys. * The above steps are the same as those in the procedure for searching for a program by number. 4 Press the [ID_SRCH] key. ID_SRCH

5 Press the [(NAME)] key. (NAME)

6 Enter the name of the program to be searched for. The first 48 characters of the program name are used in the search. There are two search methods: Entering the whole program name and entering part of the program name and specifying a special character to represent an arbitrary character string (generally called a wild card). The following characters can be used as wild cards: *: Represents any character string including a null character. ?: Represents any character. 7 Pressing the [EXEC] key selects the program whose name matches the entered program name. EXEC

The following example describes the use of a wild card. Assume that the following programs are already registered: O0001(GEAR1000.MAIN) O0002(SHAFT1000.MAIN) O1000(GEAR1000.SUS) Entering SHAFT* or SHAFT????.MAIN searches for program O0002. Either of the wild cards, asterisks or question marks may be entered anywhere. Be sure to enter the partial program name and wild cards that uniquely identify the desired program. If *1000* is entered, for example, all the programs are searched for, and the desired program is not selected. Remarks) To enter SP (null character) on the small CRT/MDI panel, press numeric key 1 while pressing the [SHIFT] key. To enter ? on the same panel, press numeric key 2 while pressing the [SHIFT] key. These marks are not indicated on either of the numeric keys.

96

B62564E1/02 5.2.3 Rewinding a program

This subsection describes the procedure for searching for the beginning of the program to be executed. 1 To perform the operation in the MEMORY mode, set the mode selector to the MEMORY position. To perform the operation in the TAPE mode, set the mode selector to the TAPE position. 2 Press the function menu key. 3 Press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard key to display the program screen. 4 When the displayed program screen is not a program text screen
ALTER INSERT POSITI ON M

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

9" CRT function selection keys

POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET PRG_CHK CHAPTER +

9" CRT operation selection keys

ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_WRD BG_EDIT +

14" CRT function selection keys

PROGRA OFFSET PRGRAM SETTIN CHECK G SERVIC E MESSAG E CHAPTE R

14" CRT operation selection keys

DELETE DELETE BACK SEARCH BKWRD REWIND DRCTRY

(i) Press the [CHAPTER] key to change WORD EDIT SEARCH MEMORY the soft keys to the chapter selection keys, then press the [TEXT] key. or (ii) Press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard key repeatedly until the program text is displayed. 5 Press the operation menu key to change the soft keys to the operation selection keys. 6 Press the [REWIND] key. The program is rewound, and the beginning of the program is searched for. The operation selection keys remain displayed in the soft key display field.

97

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

B62564E1/02

5.3 Starting Automatic Operation

(1) Operation in the MEMORY mode 1 Set the mode selector to the MEMORY position. 2 Select the program to be executed. See Section 5.2. 3 Press the [CYCLE START] button on the machine operators panel. (2) Operation in the TAPE mode 1 Load the tape and set the mode selector to the TAPE position. 2 Select the program to be executed. See Section 5.2. 3 Press the [CYCLE START] button on the machine operators panel.

5.4 Executing Automatic Operation

While executing a block, the CNC usually calculates the next block to convert it into data in the executable form. This is called buffering. The number of blocks to be buffered has been extended to 2, and the two blocks are preread so far as time permits. This prevents an interruption in the pulse distribution between two successive small blocks. The XBUF bit in parameter No. 7616 determines whether the number of blocks to be buffered is extended to 2. NOTE 1 To maintain the operational compatibility between Series 15B and conventional CNCs or suchlike if there is no need to execute small blocks at high speed, specify 1 as the number of blocks to be buffered by setting XBUF to 0. NOTE 2 After changing the setting of XBUF in parameter No. 7616, be sure to turn the power off, then on. NOTE 3 When the multibuffer option is provided, the multibuffer function overrides this buffering function, rendering this function ineffective. NOTE 4 The block of a canned cycle, cutter compensation C, or suchlike is also regarded as a single block.

After automatic operation is started, the following are executed: 1 A oneblock command is read from the specified program. 2 The block command is decoded. 3 The command execution is started. 4 The command in the next block is read. 5 Buffering is executed. That is, the command is decoded to allow immediate execution. 6 Immediately after the preceding block is executed, execution of the next block can be started. This is because buffering has been executed. 7 Hereafter, automatic operation can be executed by repeating the steps (4) to (6).

98

B62564E1/02

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5.5 Stopping Automatic Operation

There are two means to stop the automatic operation. One is to command a stop command in a program where the execution is to be stopped (See 5.5.1 5.5.3) and the other is to stop the operation at any time by pushing an appropriate button on the operators panel (See 5.5.4 and 5.5.5).

5.5.1 Program stop (M00)

Cycle operation is stopped after a block containing M00 is executed. When the program is stopped, all existing modal information remains unchanged as in single block operation. The cycle operation can be restarted by specifying an CNC start. (This differs with the machine tool builder.)

5.5.2 Optional stop (M01)

Similarly to M00, cycle operation is stopped after a block containing M01 is executed. This code is only effective when the Optional Stop switch on the machine operators panel is set to ON.

5.5.3 Program end (M02, M30)

1) This indicates the end of the main program and is necessary to store NC commands from tape to memory. 2) Cycle operation is stopped and the NC unit is reset. (This differs with the machine tool builder.) 3) Only M30 Rewinding is used in both the MEMORY and TAPE modes to search for the beginning of the program. The tape is not rewound in the reelless tape reader in the TAPE mode. When using the tape reader with reels in the TAPE mode and when many programs are recorded on the tape, the tape is always rewound to the beginning of the tape, indicated by the ER or % code. When the tape is rewound may vary according to the machine tool builder. Some machines instruct tape rewinding with M02.

5.5.4 Feed hold

When Feed Hold button on the operators panel is pressed during automatic operation, the tool decelerates to a stop at a time. 1 Press the feed hold button.

Feed hold lamp lights

Feed hold button

When pressed, the feed hold lamp lights and the cycle start lamp turns off. Turns off

Cycle start

At this time, i) Feeding stops if the tool is moving. ii) Dwell execution stops, if executing. iii) M, S, T or B operation continues up to the end of the block.

99

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 5.5.5 Reset

B62564E1/02

Automatic operation can be stopped and the system can be made to the reset state by using reset button on the CRT/MDI panel or external reset signal. When reset operation is applied to the system during a tool moving status, the motion is slowed down then stops.

5.5.6 Singleblock stop according to the comparison between sequence numbers

When the program contains a block having the same sequence number as the preset sequence number while the program is being executed, the block is executed, then the system enters the singleblock stop state. (1) Specifying the desired sequence number Set the mode selector to the MDI position and specify the sequence number for the singleblock stop. Setting: 1 to 9999 Initial setting: 0 (immediately after the power is turned on) When a sequence number agrees with the specified one or when the system is reset, the sequence number is changed to 0. (2) Conditions for singlelock stop 1 When the specified sequence number agrees with the sequence number assigned to the clock containing an instruction processed only in the CNC control unit, the system does not enter the single block stop state. Example N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 #1 = 1 ; IF[ #1 EQ 1 ] GOTO8 ; GOTO9 ; M98P1000L3 ; M99 ;

If the sequence numbers match in case of the block shown in the example above, the system does not enter the singleblock stop state. In addition, the preset sequence number is not changed. 2 When the program contains multiple blocks whose sequence numbers are the same, the block whose sequence number agrees with the specified one first in the execution order is executed, then the system enters the singleblock stop state. 3 Stopping at the block for which the number of times the block is executed is specified When the sequence number of this block agrees with the preset sequence number, the block is executed the specified number of times, then the system enters the singleblock stop state. Example N1 N2 N3 G91 ; G81X1000Y1000R5000Z2000F100 ; Z1000Y1000L3 ; G80 ;

In this example, the cycle of block N3 is executed three times, then the system enters the singleblock stop state.

100

B62564E1/02

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5.6 Restarting Automatic Operation

This function is used to restart machining at the specified block when the tool is damaged or after suspending machining over a holiday. A sequence number or block number is used to specify the block at which machining is to be restarted. (1) Specifying the sequence number to restart machining at the desired block Specify the sequence number of the block at which machining is to be restarted, the number of the program containing the sequence number, and the number of times the block with the sequence number is to be executed. The following data can be specified: (a) Sequence number only (b) Sequence number and the number of times the block is to be executed (c) Sequence number and program number (d) Sequence number, the number of times the block is to be executed, and the program number (2) Specifying the block number to restart machining at the desired block Machining can be restarted at a block that is not assigned a sequence number. When the CNC is stopped, the number of blocks that have been executed is displayed on the program screen or program restart screen. The operator references the block number displayed on the CRT to specify the number of the block at which machining is to be restarted. The displayed number indicates the number of the blocks that have been completed when the CNC is stopped. To restart machining at the block in which the CNC stopped, therefore, specify the displayed block number plus one. The block number is not lost when the power is turned off. The number of the blocks is counted from the block at which machining starts. One block refers to a cluster of commands at which a singleblock stop is allowed among blocks in executable form converted from the CNC program. Example 1 CNC program O0001; G90G92X0Y0Z0; G01X100.F100; G03X0I50.F50; M30; Example 2 CNC program O0002; G90G92X0Y0Z0; G90G00Z100.; G81X100.Y0.Z120.R80.F5 0; #1=#1+1; #2=#2+1; #3=#3+1; G00X0Z0; M30; Number of blocks 1 2 3 4, 5, 6 6 6 6 7 8 Number of blocks 1 2 3 4 5

The canned cycle is counted as three blocks. Macro statements are not counted as blocks.

101

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 5.6.1 Program restart

B62564E1/02

This function specifies Sequency No. of a block to be restarted when a tool is broken down or when it is desired to restart machining operation after a day off, and restarts the machining operation from that block. It can also be used as a highspeed tape check function. (1) Restarting machining when a tool is damaged (P type) Use the following procedure: (a) Press the Feed Hold button to escape the tool, and replace it with a new one. Modify the offset amount if it varies. (b) Turn on the program restart switch on the machine operators panel. (c) Searching for the beginning of the program (i) In the MEMORY mode 1 Set the mode selector to the MEMORY position. 2 Press the function menu key to switch the soft keys to the function selection keys. Then, press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard key to display the program screen. 3 Press the operation menu key to switch the soft keys to the function operation keys. Then, press the [REWIND] soft key. (ii) To perform the operation in the TAPE mode, position the tape in the tape reader at the beginning and set the mode selector to the TAPE position. (d) Switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys for the program screen. Then press the [RESTART P] operation selection key. (e) Specify the block at which machining is to be restarted. (i) Specifying the block by its sequence number 1 Press the [PSQ#] soft key and enter the sequence number of the block at which machining is to be restarted, the program number, and the number of times the block is to be executed with numeric keys. 2 Press the [EXEC] soft key to search for the block with the specified sequence number. When the same sequence number is used many times or when it is desired to search for the block with a specific sequence number in a program, specify the block with the sequence number in the following way. To search for a subprogram that is called several times for the block with the desired sequence number, specify the desired number of times the subprogram is called, enter a comma (,), specify the sequence number, enter another comma, then specify the desired program number beginning with O. To search for the block with sequence number 999 when the subprogram is called five times from program 1000, for example, enter P5,999,O1000, then press the [EXEC] soft key. P5,999,O1000[EXEC] The desired number of times the subprogram is called and/or program number can be omitted when the number is 1 and/or when it is not necessary to specify a program number. (i) Sequence number only P999[EXEC] (ii) Sequence number and the desired number of times the subprogram is called P5,999[EXEC] (iii) Sequence number and program number P999,O1000[EXEC] (iv) Sequence number, the number of times the subprogram is called, and program number P5,999,O1000[EXEC]

102

B62564E1/02
(ii) Specifying the block by the block number

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

1 Press the [PBK#] soft key and the number of the block at which machining is to be restarted with numeric keys. To specify the 100th block, for example, enter 100. PB100[EXEC] 2 Press the [EXEC] soft key. Then, the block with the specified block number is searched for. (f) When the desired block has been found, the CRT screen changes to the screen for restarting a program.

(START POSITION): Displays the position where machining is restarted. (REMAINING DISTANCE): Displays the distance from the current tool position to the position where machining is restarted. M : If the M codes consist of two digits, displays the last 35 M codes issued. If the M codes consist of more than two digits, displays the number of M codes that fit on the screen. No negative M codes are displayed. T S B : Displays the last two T codes issued. : Displays the last S code issued. : Displays the last B code issued.

BC : Displays the block number. (g) Turn off the program restart switch. (h) If the M, S, T, and/or B codes that are to be output are displayed on the screen, set the mode selector to the MDI position and output the codes from the MDI. In this case, the codes are not displayed on the program restart screen. (i) For operation in the MEMORY or TAPE mode, set the mode selector to the desired position. When the distance displayed in the REMAINING DISTANCE field is correct or when the tool is moved to the position where machining is restarted, check that there is no danger of the tool bumping into the workpiece or anything. If there is such a danger, manually move the tool to a safe position then press the [CYCLE START] button. The tool then moves to the machining restart position in the dry run mode along each axis in the order of axes specified in parameter No. 7110, then restarts machining. (2) When machining is restarted after the following events (applicable to programs of type Q) (i) The power is turned off then on. (ii) The automatic operation is suspended to change the coordinate systems. For example, (a) The G92 command is issued from the MDI panel. (b) The coordinate system is shifted. (c) The coordinate system is automatically determined by reference position return. (d) The [ORIGIN] key is pressed. (e) The coordinate systems are changed by resetting the system.

103

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

B62564E1/02

(a) When the power is turned on, all the necessary operations including reference position return are performed. (b) Manually move the tool to the program start point, that is, the machining start point. This operation sets the same continuousstate data and coordinate system as those when machining started. (c) Specify or change the offset if necessary. (d) Set the program restart switch on the machine operators panel to the on position. (e) Search for the beginning of the program. (i) In the MEMORY mode 1 Set the mode selector to the MEMORY position. 2 Press the function menu key to switch the soft keys to the function selection keys. Then, press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard key to display the program screen. 3 Press the operation menu key to switch the soft keys to the function operation keys. Then, press the [REWIND] soft key. (ii) To perform the operation in the TAPE mode, position the tape in the tape reader at the beginning and set the mode selector to the TAPE position. (f) Switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys for the program screen. Then, press the [RESTART P] operation selection key. (g) Specify the block at which machining is to be restarted. (i) Specifying the block by its sequence number 1 Press the [QSQ#] soft key and enter the sequence number of the block at which ma chining is to be restarted, the program number, and the number of times the block is to be executed with numeric keys. 2 Press the [EXEC] soft key to search for the block having the specified sequence number. When the same sequence number is used many times or when it is desired to search for the block with a specific sequence number in a program, specify the block with the sequence number in the following way. To search for a subprogram to be called several times for the block with the desired sequence number, specify the desired number of times the subprogram is called, enter a comma (,), specify the sequence number, enter another comma, then specify the desired program number beginning with O. To search for the block with sequence number 999 when the subprogram is called five times from program 1000, for example, enter Q5,999,O1000, then press the EXEC soft key. Q5,999,O1000[EXEC] The desired number of times the subprogram is called and/or program number can be omitted when the number is 1 and/or when it is not necessary to specify a program number. (i) Sequence number only Q999[EXEC] (ii) Sequence number and the desired number of times the subprogram is called Q5,999[EXEC] (iii) Sequence number and program number Q999,O1000[EXEC] (iv) Sequence number, the number of times the subprogram is called, and program number Q5,999,O1000[EXEC] (ii) Specifying the block by the block number 1 Press the [QBK#] soft key and the number of the block at which machining is to be restarted with numeric keys. To specify the 100th block, for example, enter 100. QB100[EXEC] 2 Press the [EXEC] soft key. Then, the block with the specified block number is searched for. (h) When the desired block has been found, the CRT screen changes to the screen for restarting a program. (i) Turn off the program restart switch. 104

B62564E1/02

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
(j) If the M, S, T, and/or B codes that are to be output are displayed on the screen, set the mode selector to the MDI position and output the codes from the MDI. In this case, the codes are not displayed on the program restart screen. (k) For operation in the MEMORY or TAPE mode, set the mode selector to the desired position. When the distance displayed in the REMAINING DISTANCE field is correct or when the tool is moved to the position where machining is restarted, check that there is no danger of the tool bumping into the workpiece or anything. If there is such a danger, manually move the tool to a safe position then press the [CYCLE START] button. The tool then moves to the machining restart position in the dry run mode along each axis in the order of axes specified in parameter No. 7110 then restarts machining.

CAUTION

In general, the tool cannot be returned to the correct position if one of the conditions occurs: (i) The tool is manually moved when the manual absolute mode is ineffective. (ii) The tool is moved in the machine lock state without considering the movement along the Zaxis. (iii) The mirror image function is used. (iv) No coordinate system is specified at the beginning of the program during incremental programming. (v) The tool is manually moved while it is being automatically returned along the axes. (vi) The machine lock state is released after the command for restarting the program is issued in that state. (vii) Restarting the program is specified in a block between the block for skip cutting and the subsequent absolute command block. (viii)The coordinate system is set, changed, or shifted after the block is searched for. In the case of (iii), the tool can be returned by a block in the program of type P if the block follows the last block for specifying whether the mirror image function is effective. In this case, the mirror image signal must be kept in the same state as when the interruption occurred. Care must be taken because no alarm occurs under any of the above conditions.

NOTE 1 A program of type P cannot be restarted under the following conditions: (i) When automatic operation is not performed after the power is turned on (ii) When automatic operation is not performed after the coordinate system is set, changed, or shifted (Shifting the coordinate system refers to changing the offset from the external workpiece reference point.) If there are blocks that follow the block in which the coordinate system is set or changed last while machining is suspended, the blocks can be restarted normally by restarting the program of type P. NOTE 2 Whenever the tool is moved along each axis to the machining restart position in both programs of types P and Q, a singleblock stop is valid after the tool has moved along one axis. In this case, however, manual intervention from the MDI panel is not possible. The tool can be manually moved. When the tool is already returned along an axis, however, it is not moved manually along the axis. NOTE 3 When searching for a block, unless the conditions such as the input signals and offsets are the same as those when machining was performed last, the tool does not return to the correct restart position. Searching for the block is not stopped even when the [SINGLE BLOCK] switch is turned on or when the mode selector is switched between the MEMORY and TAPE positions. NOTE 4 If one of the following conditions occurs, retry the operations for restarting the program from the beginning: The [FEED HOLD] switch is turned on while the block is searched for. The system is reset while or after the block is searched for. NOTE 5 If the [CYCLE START] button is pressed when the program restart switch is turned on, the operation is ignored, and a warning message is displayed. NOTE 6 Manual operation must be performed in the manual absolute mode irrespective of whether it is performed before or after machining. NOTE 7 After the block is searched for, the move command cannot be issued from the MDI to move the tool along the axes.

105

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

B62564E1/02

NOTE 8 After the command for restarting the program is issued, the character string PRSR is displayed at the bottom of the CRT screen while the tool is being returned along the last axis. NOTE 9 Notes on restarting the program for which macro variables are used: (i) Common variables The previously specified values are used as the common variables when restarting the program. The variables are not automatically preset. The necessary common variables are therefore initialized to the values used for the previous automatic operation immediately before the program is restarted. (ii) DI/DO While the program is restarted, DI data can be read from the corresponding system variables, but DO data cannot be output. (iii) Clock While the program is restarted, the clock time can be checked with the system variable, but the time cannot be preset. (iv) Tool offset and offset from the workpiece reference point While the program is being restarted, offsets can be read from the corresponding system variables, but offsets cannot be changed except for programs of type Q. NOTE 10 When the program specifies machining at high speed When a program contains a block for highspeed machining, the program cannot be restarted from the block. However, the program can be restarted from any block other than one for highspeed machining. NOTE 11 The number of blocks is not lost when the power is turned off. The recorded number of blocks is cleared when the [CYCLE START] button is pressed after the system is reset. The number of blocks is recorded every 60 seconds during automatic operation. NOTE 12 The number related to blocks displayed on the program screen indicates the number of block currently being executed. However, in the following cases, the number of blocks which have been executed is displayed: When all of the blocks have been executed When the system is reset When the singleblock stop button is pressed In other words, the number related to the blocks is displayed as follows when the CNC program is stopped or suspended under to the conditions below: When the [FEED HOLD] button is pressed, the number of block currently being executed is displayed. When the system is reset, the number of executed blocks is displayed. When the [SINGLE BLOCK] switch is turned on, the number of executed blocks is displayed. When the system is reset while block 10 is being executed, for example, the currently displayed number of blocks are changed from 10 to 9. NOTE 13 Suppose the operator manually intervenes in system operation from the MDI panel after turning on the [SINGLE BLOCK] switch during program execution. The number of issued CNC command blocks is added to the number of blocks.

5.6.2 Program restart function and output of M, S, T, and B, codes

The program restart function enables the following operations after searching for the block to be restarted: (1) Before moving the tool to the machining restart position 1 The program restart function automatically outputs the last M, S, T, and B codes to the PMC. If the last S code is the S code (maximum spindle speed) specified in the block containing G92, the program restart function outputs this S code as the maximum spindle speed signal (MR0 to MR15). If the S code is the other S code (specified spindle speed), it is output as the specified spindle speed signal (R0 to R15).

106

B62564E1/02

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Only the S code specified last is displayed on the program restart screen regardless of whether it is in the same block as a G92. 2 While searching for the block to be restarted, the program restart function automatically outputs all the sampled M codes and the last S, T, and B codes to the PMC. The function can sample up to 35 M codes. When the number of M codes sampled exceeds 35, the function outputs the latest 35 M codes to the PMC. Specify whether the function performs operation 1 or 2 with the MOAL bit (bit 6 of parameter 7620).

(2) Before the machining restart position is reached. On the program restart screen, M, S, and B codes can be specified from the MDI for output to the PMC while the system is still in the MEM or TAPE mode.

Outputting the last M, S, T, and B codes

When the MOPR bit (bit 3 of parameter 7620) = 1, press the cycle start button after searching for the block to be restarted with the program restart function. The program restart function then automatically outputs the last M, S, T, and B codes to the PMC before moving the tool to the machining restart position. In the single block stop state, press the cycle start button again after the program restart function outputs the last M, S, T, and B codes. The tool then starts moving to the machining restart position.

Outputting all the M codes and the last S, T, and B codes

When the MOAL bit (bit 6 of parameter 7620) = 1, press the cycle start button after searching for the block to be restarted with the program restart function. The program restart function then automatically outputs all the M codes and the last S, T, and B codes to the PMC before moving the tool to the machining restart position. Example When M10, M11, M12, M13, M14, T0101, S1000, and B10 are already sampled: The program restart function outputs these codes in the following program format before moving the tool to the machining restart position: M10 T0101 S1000 B10 ; M11 ; M12 ; M13 ; M14 ;

Outputting the M, S, B codes on the program restart screen

When the MOPR bit (bit 3 of parameter 7620) = 1, enter M, S, and B codes from the MDI in the MEM or TAPE mode until the tool completes moving to the machining restart position after searching for the block to be restarted with the program restart function. The program restart function then outputs these codes to the PMC. [Operation] 1 Search for the block to be restarted with the program restart function. The program restart screen is displayed. On this screen, the operation soft keys OVRSTR and CLEAR are displayed for the 9inch CRT, and OVERSTORE and CLEAR are displayed for the 14inch CRT. PROGRAM RESET O0030 N00020

(DESTINATION)BC: 00123456 X 60. 114 M 03 10 20 25 40 Z 60. 113 51 55 41 63 26 ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** (DIST TO GO) ** ** ** ** ** X 30. 000 ** ** ** ** ** Z 30. 000 T 0101 0202 S 2000 B 13 ACT. F: 0(MM/MIN) S: 100 (RPM) MEN *** PRSR **** *** *** *** *** *** INPUR CLEAR OVRSTR CHAPTER

Displays for the 9inch CRT 2 The program restart function enters the overstore mode to display the overstore field on the screen when the OVRSTR soft key is pressed before the machining restart position is reached.

107

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

B62564E1/02

To set the overstore mode while the tool is moving to the machining restart position, temporarily stop the restart operation with the feed hold function, then press the OVRSTR soft key. Enter the M, S, and B codes to be output in the overstore field from the MDI. On this screen, plus (+) and minus () signs are not displayed if they are entered. Example To enter M10, S1000, and B20 in the overstore field Enter M10 from the MDI. Press the INPUT key. Enter S1000 from the MDI. Press the INPUT key. Enter B20 from the MDI. Press the INPUT key. PROGRAM RESET O0030 N00020

(DESTINATION)BC: 00123456 X 60. 114 M 03 10 20 25 40 Z 60. 113 51 55 41 63 26 ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** (DIST TO GO) ** ** ** ** ** X 30. 000 ** ** ** ** ** Z 30. 000 (OVER STORE) M 10 S 1000 B 20 ACT. F: 0(MM/MIN) S: 100 (RPM) MEM *** PRSR **** *** *** *** *** *** INPUT CLEAR OVRSTR CHAPTER

Displays for the 9inch CRT 3 After the codes have been entered in the overstore field, press the cycle start button. The codes in the overstore field are output to the PMC, then they are cleared from the field. 4 To clear the M, S, B codes entered in the overstore field, press the CLEAR soft key. All the entered codes are cleared. 5 To cancel the overstore mode, press the OVRSTR soft key or reset key in the overstore mode. After the OVRSTR soft key or reset key is pressed, the program restart screen is restored to the initial state shown in item (1). 6 To continue the restart operation, cancel the overstore mode and press the cycle start button. NOTE 1 When M, S, B codes are entered and output to the PMC in the overstore mode, these codes are not displayed on the program restart screen. NOTE 2 When the operation mode is changed to a mode other than the MEM or TAPE mode in the overstore mode, the overstore mode is not canceled, but no code can be entered in the overstore field.

5.6.3 Block restart

The block restart function is used to restart an automatic operation that was interrupted because of a damaged tool or some other problem. Automatic operation can be resumed at the start point of the interrupted block or at an intermediate point in it. (1) Block restart operation sequence The block restart operations must always be performed in the sequence shown below. The block return switch is provided on the machine operators panel for use with this function.

108

B62564E1/02

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

(1)

An abnormality occurred.

(2)

Stop automatic operation by pushing the feed hold button or switching the mode.

The block restart function cannot be used if the reset or emergency button has been pressed and the system has entered the reset state.

(3)

Retract the tool menually and take the necessary actions.

(4)

Set the offset value again if necessary.

(5)

Turn on the block return switch in the continuous manual mode.

The message RSTR blinks at the bottom of the screen.

(6)-1 Move the tool menually as close to the point where the automatic operation was interrupted as possible while observing the tool movement carefully.

(6)-2 Move the tool toward the starting point manually. The tool automatically stops when it reaches the start point.

In the cutter compensation mode, a vector is formed perpendicular to the programmed path in the interrupted block at the start point, and the tool is returned to the tip of the vector.

(7)

Return to the mode selected prior to the interruption of the automatic operation, and turn on the block return switch if it is off.

The message RSTR may be displayed constantly or start blinking at the bottom of the screen depending on the condition set up.

(8)

Push the cycle start button while the block return switch is on.

(9)

When the cycle start lamp lights the automatic operation is restarted, turn off the block return switch.

Of the above operations, the following operations apply only to the restart function:

(6)2 Manual operation with the block return switch turned on (8) Restart of automatic operation with the block return switch turned on

109

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
(a) Manual operation with the block return switch turned on

B62564E1/02

Move the tool in the continuous manual feed mode toward the start point of the interrupted block while the block return switch is on. The tool automatically stops at the start point. When the start point is reached for all axes, the message RSTR disappears from the bottom of the screen. If the block return switch is turned on in the continuous manual feed (JOG) mode, the distance between the current position of the tool and the start point of the interrupted block is calculated. The start point of the interrupted block refers to the point calculated as follows: Absolute coordinate of the programmed start point + Previously compensated tool value + Newly calculated tool length compensation value = Newly calculated cutter compensation value perpendicular to the interrupted block at the start point If the tool offset value is changed, the new compensation value (vector) is calculated based on the new offset value for the tool length compensation (G43 and G44) of the fixed compensation axis (parameter 6000L x Y = 0) and the cutter diameter compensation (G41 and G42). However, the compensation value for the tool length compensation of an arbitrary compensation axis (parameter 6000L x Y = 1) and the tool offset (G45 to G48) remain unchanged. The calculated distance to the start point is displayed on the CRT screen using the [POSITION] function selection key and the [RESTART (B)] chapter selection key. In general, when the block return switch is turned on in the continuous manual feed mode, the screen for restarting operation (referred to as the restart screen) appears automatically. The restart screen contains the following displays:
BLOCK RESTART (DESTINATION) X 100.000 Y 200.000 Z 100.000 A 200.000 B 0.000 (MACHINE) X 0.000 Y 100.000 Z 200.000 A 100.000 B 200.000
****

O1234 N5678 (ABSOLUTE) X 0.000 Y 100.000 Z 200.000 A 100.000 B 200.000 (DISTANCE TO GO) X 100.000 Y 100.000 Z 300.000 A 100.000 B 200.000

JOG RSTR **** *** *** *** *** ***

(i) (DESTINATION): Absolute coordinates of the tool center at the start point of the interrupted block (ii) (DISTANCE TO GO): Distance from the current position (ABSOLUTE) of the tool to the start point (DESTINATION) of the interrupted block

110

B62564E1/02
(iii) Status of RSTR display Various conditions (mode, cutter compensation, etc.) Continuous manual feed (JOG) mode Automatic operation ( , TAPE, , or MDI) ) (MEMORY, When the outer corner is being compensated in the cutter compensation mode. Other than the above Reset state

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

RSTR is displayed continuously. RSTR blinks. RSTR blinks. RSTR is displayed continuously. RSTR does not appear regardless of what the current mode is.

CAUTION

When returning the tool to the start point of the block by a manual operation using the block restart function, the tool is returned to the tip of the vector vertical to the block at its start point. Therefore, if the start point of the interrupted block is inside the corner, the workpiece may be cut when the tool returns to the start point.

Manual operation

When the tool moves to the start point, it may cut the workpiece.

Automatic operation is stopped at this point.

Programmed path The tool should be returned manually to an arbitrary point in the block.

In this case, return the the tool to an appropriate position while watching it, rather than to the start point.

111

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

B62564E1/02

NOTE

If the tool movement is interrupted during a canned drilling cycle and is restarted, the tool always returns to the positioning point, regardless of whether the current mode is the initial level return (G98) mode or pointR level return (G99) mode. The point to which the tool is returned by the block restart function, regardless of whether the current mode is the initial level return (G98) mode or point-R level return (G99) mode

Initial point

Point R

Point of interruption Point Z On the second or subsequent drilling cycle, the tool returns to either of the following two positions according to the G98 or G99 mode.

Point returned to by the block restart function Initial point Point returned to by the block restart function Point R Point R

Point of interruption Point Z For initial level return (G98 mode) Point Z

Point of interruption For Point-R level return (G99 mode)

112

B62564E1/02

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
(b) Restart of automatic operation with the block return switch turned on If the cycle start button is pressed while the block return switch is on, the tool length compensation value and the cutter compensation value are recalculated, and automatic operation is restarted toward the compensated end point from the current position.

The tool is retracted to this position so the tool can be replaced.

Path after automatic operation is restarted Newly calculated end point Target end point prior to interruption

Path prior to interruption

The tool moves toward the recalculated end point from its current position regardless of whether it has been returned to the start point of or an arbitrary point in the interrupted block prior to pushing the cycle start button. CAUTION The tool may cut the workpiece when it is being moved toward the end point of the interrupted block. In this case, an alarm is displayed and the the tool is inhibited from moving to the end point. This function is referred to as the block restart interference check.

Manual operation Point at which automatic operation is restarted Point at which automatic operation is interrupted Correct path End point of interrupted block

Tool center path

The workpiece will be cut when automatic operation is restarted

Programmed path

If the tool will cut the workpiece when automatic operation is restarted, press the cancel key to reset the alarm. Then move the tool to a proper position manually while watching it, and perform the restart operation again. The block restart interference check is performed based on the value that is set in parameter No. 7651 (d: error limit at the start of block restart). If the distance between the normal path and the point where the block is restarted is d or longer, an interference check alarm is issued.

113

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

B62564E1/02

Manual operation Point at which automatic operation is interrupted Point at which automatic operation is to be re started. Normal path End point of interrupted block

The workpiece may be cut when automatic operation is restarted.

Tool center path Programmed path The block restart interference check function can be enabled and disabled using bit 7 of parameter No. 7605. However, the interference check is not performed in the following cases even if it has been enabled: When the tool is moved manually to the start point of the interrupted block while the block return switch is on. When the interrupted automatic operation is restarted with the cutter compensation mode canceled. When no vector is available for cutter compensation at the start point of the block in which the tool movement was interrupted. (Start up of cutter compensation) (2) Notes on the block restart function (a) The command for automatic reference point return (G28 and G30) in the cutter compensation mode does not return the tool to the correct position even when the restart operation is performed within the block. (b) The restart operation cannot be performed in the block for which a dwell (G04) has been specified. (c) The compensation value must be set prior to turning on the block return switch. (d) In the threedimensional cutter compensation mode with zero value, suppose the tool movement is interrupted, the compensation value is changed, and the operation is restarted. In this case, the vector for the cutter compensation is not recalculated. Note that if the compensation values are changed excessively, the accuracy for vector calculation may deteriorate. (e) When the block return switch is on, if the message RSTR does not appear on the CRT screen, the cycle start command is ignored. (f) Operating the block return switch during continuous manual feed stops the tool. (g) Operation must not be restarted in a block without a move command. (h) After a singleblock is stopped, operation is restarted at the block after the block that has already been executed by the singleblock function.

114

B62564E1/02 5.6.4 Tool retraction and recovery

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

The tool retraction and recovery function retracts a broken tool from a workpiece so that the tool can be replaced or the machining checked. The function also returns the replaced tool efficiently to the correct location to restart machining. The tool retraction and recovery function is divided into the following four basic operations: (1) Retraction When the TOOL RETRACT switch on the machine operators panel is pressed while automatic operation is started, stopped, or held, the tool is retracted by the distance specified in the program. The position to which the tool retracts is called the retraction position. When retraction is completed, the RETRACT POSITION lamp on the machine operators panel comes on. When the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on while automatic operation is started, if a block is being executed, the tool is retracted after the block is suspended. When retraction ends, the machine enters the automatic operation hold state. The clearance and direction can be specified by the program. If these values are not specified by the program, the tool is not retracted. When the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on while automatic operation is stopped or held the tool is retracted, and the machine is placed again in the automatic operation stop or hold state. When the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on, the machine enters the tool retraction mode, and the TOOL RETRACTING lamp on the machine operators panel comes on. (2) Manual retraction In the manual mode, when it is necessary to replace the tool or measure workpieces, the tool can be moved manually, such as by continuous manual feed, manual incremental feed, or manual handle feed. This operation is called manual retraction. The path along which the tool retracts is automatically stored in the control unit. (3) Recovery After the control unit has reentered the automatic mode, when the TOOL RECOVER switch on the machine operators panel is turned on, the control unit returns the tool automatically to the retraction position along the same path that the tool was moved by manual operation. This operation is called recovery. When the tool has been returned to the retraction position, the RETRACT POSITION lamp comes on. (4) Repositioning When the cycle is started at the retraction position, the tool is first returned to the position where the TOOL RETRACT switch was turned on. This operation is called repositioning. When repositioning is complete, the TOOL RETRACTING lamp comes on to indicate the end of the tool retraction mode. The operations performed differs according to the status of automatic operation when the machine entered the tool retraction mode. (i) When the machine enters the tool retraction mode while automatic operation is started, the automatic operation that has been held is resumed after the tool is repositioned. (ii) When the machine enters the tool retraction mode while automatic operation is stopped or held, the machine returns to the same mode after the tool is repositioned. If the cycle is restarted, automatic operation is resumed.

115

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

B62564E1/02

:Position where the tool retraction switch is turned on :Programmed retraction position :Position to which the tool is retracted by menual operation :Path along which the tool is retracted :Manual operation :Return path :Repositioning

(path along which the tool is retracted manually) Z

X Y

(a) General operating procedure 1 Specify the axis along which the tool is to be retracted and distance beforehand using command G10.6 IP__. 489The following sample program specifies that in block N20, the retraction axis is the Xaxis and the distance is 50 mm.

N10 N30

(Sample program) N10 G91 Z-50. ; N20 G10.6 Z-50. ; N30 G01 X150. F500. ;

116

B62564E1/02

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
2 When block N30 is being executed, turn on the TOOL RETRACT switch on the machine operations panel at point A, for example.

Machine operator's panel

TOOL RETRACTING

RETRACT POSITION

A N30

TOOL RETRACT

TOOL RECOVER

3 When the machine enters the tool retraction mode, the TOOL RETRACTING lamp on the machine operators panel comes on. At the same time, automatic operation is held and the tool is retracted by the distance specified by program. If point A is the end of the block, the tool is retracted after automatic operation is stopped. The retraction operation is interpolated linearly and executed at the dry run speed. When the tool has been retracted, the RETRACT POSITION lamp on the machine operators panel comes.

Machine operator's panel

Point E

TOOL RETRACTING

RETRACT POSITION TOOL RECOVER

A N30

TOOL RETRACT

117

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
During retraction, the following displays appear: ACTUAL POSITION (RELATIVE COORDINATES) X Y Z 207.438MM 402.083MM 133.561MM (i) (ii) (iii) PTRR* * *STRT

B62564E1/02

(i) PTRR blinks at the location where otherwise the automatic mode is indicated. (ii)
*** is displayed at the location where otherwise the

manual mode is indicated. (iii) STRT is displayed at the location where otherwise the automatic operation state is indicated.

If retraction is not specified by G10.6, the tool is not retracted, execution of the block in the automatic mode is suspended, and automatic operation is held or stopped.

N30

If the single block switch is turned on during the start of automatic operation or if the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on after a feed hold to hold or stop automatic operation, the tool is retracted and the machine returns to the automatic operation hold or stop state after the completion of retraction. During retraction, feed hold is disabled. The RESET switch is effective, and retraction is stopped immediately when the RESET switch is pressed. If an alarm occurs during the retraction, retraction is stopped immediately. It is possible to shift from the retract end state to step 6 (repositioning) without retracting or recovering the tool. 4 Enter the manual mode. Either jog feed, incremental feed, handle feed, and manual numeric value command is possible in this mode. (Manual arbitraryangle feed is impossible.) 5 Manually move the tool along an axis. This operation is called manual retraction. Be sure to select only one axis for this operation. Do not issue a signal for two or more axes at one time. NOTE Simultaneous automatic/manual operations are impossible in the tool retraction mode. If they are selected, manual operation such as jog feed, incremental feed, or handle feed is not performed in the tool retraction mode. In the tool retraction mode, if an attempt is made to move the tool along two or more axes at one time using a manual numeric value command, P/S alarm No. 183 is issued.

118

B62564E1/02

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
6 If each axis is specified by manual operation, the control unit stores up to ten positions on the traced route. When another axis is specified after one axis is specified, the position where the axes are switched is stored. Up to ten such positions are stored. Subsequent positions are discarded. Resetting the machine deletes the stored position data and cancels the retraction mode.

12 10 8

11

3 2 5 Point E 1

7 6 Z

X Point A Y

7 When the retraction ends and the tool is replaced, it is necessary to return the tool to the original retracted position. First return to the automatic mode. Then, turn on the TOOL RECOVER switch on the machine operators panel, and turn it off again. The tool then returns to the original retracted position at the dry run speed, irrespective of whether the dry run switch is on or off. During recovery, the following displays appear: ACTUAL POSITION (RELATIVE COORDINATES) X Y Z 207.438MM 402.083MM 133.561MM (i) (ii) (iii) PTRR* * *MSTR (i) PTRR blinks at the location where otherwise the automatic mode is indicated. (ii)
***is

displayed at the location where otherwise the manual mode is indicated.

(iii) MSTR is displayed at the location where otherwise the automatic operation state is indicated.

If the path along which the tool is retracted exceeds 10 positions, the tool first moves to the 10th position, then sequentially to the 9th and 8th and so on, and finally returns to the original position.

119

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

B62564E1/02

12 10 4 8

11

3 2

7 5 6 Z

Point E

1 X Point A Y

During recovery, the single block switch is effective. Keeping the switch in the off position enables the recovery operation to continue. Keeping it in the on position causes the tool to stop at each stored position. To resume recovery, turn on the TOOL RECOVER switch, then turn it off. If an alarm condition occurs during recovery, the tool stops. During recovery, feed hold is ineffective. When the tool has returned to the original retracted position, the RETRACT LAMP is lit. 8 When cycle is started while the tool remains in the retracted position (point E in the following figure), that is while the RETRACT POSITION lamp is on, the tool returns to the position from which it was retracted, that is, the position where the TOOL RETRACT switch was turned on. This operation is called repositioning. During repositioning, feed hold is effective.

N30

120

B62564E1/02

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
The operation to be performed after repositioning depends on the automatic operation state when the TOOL RETRACT switch was turned on. (i) During the start of automatic operation After repositioning, execution of the interrupted block is resumed. Namely, the remaining part of block N30 is executed.

NOTE

Bit 1 (TRS) of parameter No. 7614 can be set so that if the single block switch is on, the tool stops immediately when repositioning is completed and the remaining part of block N30 is executed when the cycle is started once again.

(ii) When automatic operation is held or stopped When repositioning is completed, the tool stops, and the machine returns to the automatic operation hold or stop state. Then, restarting the cycle resumes the automatic operation. When repositioning is completed, the tool retraction mode is canceled, and the TOOL RETRACTING lamp is turned off. This is the end of the general procedure of tool retraction and recovery. (b) Procedure for retraction and recovery in thread cutting 1 The tool retraction and recovery function is also effective for thread cutting. The following is a sample program for thread cutting. 01234 N0 G10.6 X40. ; N1 G91 G00 X-50. ; N2 G33 Z-100. ; N3 G00 X50.; N4 Z100. ; M02 ;

D N3

N4

A N1

N2

2 Let us assume that while thread cutting programmed in block N2 is being executed, the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on.

A N1

Machine operator's panel

TOOL RETRACTING

RETRACT POSITION

N2

B
TOOL RETRACT TOOL RECOVER

121

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
3 The tool is retracted at 45 to the thread cutting block.

B62564E1/02

In this example, the thread is cut along the 2axis, and the tool is retracted 40 mm each along the X axis and Zaxis. The Xaxis is called the retraction axis. However, if the tool is retracted 40 mm along the Zaxis, the tool may overrun thread cutting end point depending on when the TOOL RETRACT switch was turned on. After the thread cutting end point on the Zaxis is reached, the tool will be moved only along the retraction axis (the Xaxis) to the specified position. If the tool does not reach the end point on the Zaxis when it has reached the retraction position on the retraction axis, the tool is moved to the thread cutting end point.

45 C F

If the program specifies the axis along which the thread is cut as the retraction axis, the tool is not retracted irrespective of whether the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on. In addition, P/S alarm No. 215, ESCAPE ERROR (PTRR), is issued after the tool stops at the position where a block other than the thread cutting block terminates. 4 After retraction is completed, the tool stops after the next block, not the thread cutting block, is executed.

122

B62564E1/02

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
5 The tool is repositioned so that it comes back to the thread cutting end position (point D in the following figure) specified by the program.

N4 D

(c) Procedure for retraction and recovery in a canned drilling cycle 1 When the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on in a canned drilling cycle, how the tool is retracted depends on the operation being performed at that time. Motion 1 Positioning along the X- and Y-axes Motion 2 Rapid traverse to point R Motion 3 Actual drilling Motion 4 Operation at the bottom of a hole Motion 5 Retraction to point R Motion 6 Rapid traverse to initial point Motion 1 Initial point Motion 2 Point R Motion 6

Motion 3

Motion 5

Motion 4 (i) If the switch is turned on during motion 1, the tool is moved retracted by the distance specified by G10.6, as in ordinary retraction. (ii) If the switch is turned on during motion 2, the motion is suspended and the tool moves to the initial point and stops there. (iii) If the switch is turned on during motion 3, the motion is suspended, cycle motions 4, 5, and 6 are executed from that position. After motion 6, the tool stops at the initial point.

123

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

B62564E1/02

(iv) If the switch is turned on during motion 4, 5, or 6, the motion is continued until the tool reaches the initial point. During motions 2 to 6, turning on the TOOL RETRACT switch does not retract the tool as specified by G10.6. However, when the switch is turned on and the tool reaches the initial point, the machine enters the tool retraction mode. When the canned cycle is in its second or subsequent operation, if the switch is turned on during motions 2 to 6, the retraction position differs according to G98 or G99. G98 (initial level return): The tool moves to the initial level. G99 (pointR level return): The tool moves to point R. 2 A canned repositioning cycle is performed by starting the cycle at the retraction position. (i) Repositioning when the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on during motion 1 As in ordinary repositioning, automatic operation is resumed after completion of repositioning. (ii) Repositioning when the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on during motion 2 Operation is resumed from canned cycle motion 2. (iii) Repositioning when the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on during motion 3 Operation is resumed from canned cycle motion 2. (iv) Repositioning when the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on during motion 4, 5, or 6 Operation is resumed from canned cycle motion 2 with the same hole position.

124

B62564E1/02

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

(d) Combining the block restart function and the retraction and recovery function The procedure for combining the tool retraction and recovery and block restart functions is shown following. See Item 5.6.2 for the block restart function. If the tool breaks, for example, after automatic operation is suspended, the tool is replaced, and the offset value is changed, the operation is resumed from the start point of or an intermediate point in the interrupted block.

(1)

Start of automatic operation

(2)

When a problem occurs and the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on, the tool is retracted and the automatic operation is held. The mechine enters the tool retraction mode.

(3)

Move the tool manually and replace the tool or take an appropri ate action.

(4)

Change the tool offset value if necessary.

(5)

Return to the automatic mode, and return the tool to the retraction position by turning on the TOOL RETURN switch then turning it off again.

Turn on block return switch and move the tool to the start point by continuous manual feed. The tool automatically stops at the start point.

(6)

Return to the automatic mode and turn on the block return switch. When the block return switch is on, executing the block can be resumed by restarting it at an arbitrary position. The position may not always be the retraction position.

(7)

Start the cycle with the block return switch turned on.

(8)

When automatic operation is resumed, the tool retraction mode is canceled. Turn off the block return restart switch.

125

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cautions and Note on use of the tool retraction and recovery function

B62564E1/02

CAUTION 1 The retraction axis specified by G10.6 and the distance the tool is retracted need to be changed in the necessary block according to the figure to be machined. If correct retraction is not specified, the tool or the workpiece may be damaged. CAUTION 2 If the origin, preset, and work offset are changed after the retraction position is specified by an absolute G10.6 command, the retraction position does not change. After the operation or the work offset is changed, specify the retraction position again using G10.6. CAUTION 3 When retracting the tool by manual operation in the tool retraction mode, do not use the machine lock or mirror image function.

NOTE

The manual numeric value command option is necessary for tool retraction.

5.6.5 Retrace
The retrace function enables the tool to retrace the path of movement so far. It also returns the tool along the same path once again. When the tool returns to the point where it started retracing its path, it continues machining as directed by program. The retrace function can be triggered by the trace switch on the machine operators panel. It can also be automatically triggered (without the operators intervention) when a damaged tool is detected. Refer to the appropriate manual issued by the machine builder to check what conditions cause the tool to retrace its path and to return to the machining position. The control switch directs the tool to retrace or trace its path according to a retrace on/off signal received from the machine.

Ends retrace and starts returning to the machining position. Retrace signal off

Retrace signal on

Starts retraction

When the trace signal is turned on, the tool retraces the path covered so far. When the trace signal is subsequently turned off, the tool returns along the retraced path to the machining position. RVRS blinks on the CRT screen during retracing, and RTRY blinks when returning along the retraced path. RTRY continues blinking until normal operation is resumed after the tool returns to the block where retracing was started. When there are no more blocks to retrace, message RVED blinks to indicate the end of the current retrace. The maximum number of blocks that can be retraced is between 40 and 80 blocks executed in an automatic mode such as memory, tape, or MDI operation. The retraction speed is set by a parameter (No.1494).

126

B62564E1/02

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

NOTE 1 Starting retracing or returning at the end of a block Retracing or returning can be started at a block such as rapid traverse (G00) in the automatic mode (memory, tape, or MDI operation), linear interpolation (G01), circular interpolation (G02 or G03), dwell (G04), skip cutting (G31), or an auxiliary function block. However, it does not begin as soon as the retrace signal changes, but only after the completion of the movement, dwell, or auxiliary function block. NOTE 2 Starting retracting and returning after feed hold stop During rapid traverse (G00), linear interpolation (G01), circular interpolation (G02 or G03), or skip cutting (G31), if the retrace signal is switched for restart after a feed hold stop, the tool starts retracing or returning immediately from that position. However, this does not apply during dwell (G04) or when executing an auxiliary function. If retracing starts after a feed hold stop in a certain block, the space between the beginning of that block and the point where the hold stop has been specified is considered as one block. Therefore, if returning starts with the single block switch on, it will be canceled as soon as the program has returned to the point where the current retrace was initiated.

Feed hold stop - Retrace signal on - Cycle start Feed hold stop - Retrace signal off - Cycle start Starts retrace.

Ends retrace and starts returning. NOTE 3 Starting retracing and returning after a single block stop At the end of a single block, switching the trace signal for restart immediately triggers retracing or returning. NOTE 4 o activate retracing after a feed hold stop or single block stop, if a manual intervention has been made after the stop, it is necessary to first return to the original position and then turn on the retrace signal. NOTE 5 Tool path for retracing or returning in rapid traverse (G00) The path the tool retraces depends on the rapid traverse path selected by the LRP bit of parameter No. 1400. The retrace and return paths are the same in linear interpolation repositioning. However, they are different in nonlinear interpolation repositioning. NOTE 6 During retrace and return, a dwell command is executed just as in ordinary operation. NOTE 7 Tool path for retracing and returning in skip cutting (G31) The distance the tool retraces and returns is not the programmed one but the distance actually traveled during the first execution of the block before the skip signal is turned on. The skip signal is ignored in skip cutting during retrace and return.

Starts retracing. Retrace signal on

Ends retracing and starts returning.

Retrace signal off

(Skip cutting)

127

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

B62564E1/02

NOTE 8 Refer to the appropriate manual issued by the machine tool builder for the operations of the M, S, T, and second auxiliary function (B function) performed during retrace. NOTE 9 The blocks created internally in the control unit are included in the retrace path. In the following figure, four blocks of move commands are created instead of the two programmed blocks. In this case, the singleblock stop positions may differ between retrace and return. 3 2 Path after compensation Programmed path 1 1 2

Path in cutter diameter compensation C NOTE 10 The blocks executed are stored as long as memory is available. Eighty or more blocks can be retraced in some cases. NOTE 11 A programmed entry (G10) of a tool compensation value is ignored during retrace and return. NOTE 12 If a coordinate system setting command (G92) appears during retrace, the display of the current position during return may differ from the actual position. However, the machine position is not changed. NOTE 13 The tool retraces its path through blocks in the programmable mirror image mode (G50.1 or G51.1) in mirror image. Blocks that have been mirrorimaged by a data setting command or a machine signal are memorized without mirror image. The mirror image set by the data setting command or machining signal is valid in both retrace and return. NOTE 14 If the cutter compensation or tool length offset data is changed during retrace or return, the original data stays valid until ordinary operation is resumed after the machine has returned to the machining position. NOTE 15 Retracing in a block containing any of the following commands is invalid. If any of them appear during retrace, the retrace is immediately terminated, and the message RVED appears on the CRT screen. Inch/millimeter conversion (G20, G21) Reference point return function (G28, G29, G30) Thread cutting (G33) Remote buffer (G05) NOTE 16 When any of the following functions is being executed, retrace is invalid. If any of them appear during retrace, the message RVED appears on the CRT screen. Circular threading B (G02.1, G03.1) Polar coordinate interpolation (G12.1, G13.1) Cylindrical interpolation (G7.1) Highspeed machining (G10.3, G11.3) Exponential function interpolation (G02.3, G03.3) NOTE 17 The following function disables this function. Multibuffer NOTE 18 Use of the twoblock readahead function (set when bit 1 (XBUF) of parameter No. 7616 is 1) disables the this function.

128

B62564E1/02

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5.7 Manual Interrupt during Automatic Operation

For details of this operation, refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder.

5.7.1 Manual handle interrupt

In automatic operation, this function allows a move command generated by the manual pulse generator to be superimposed on a programmed move command. As a result, the actual tool path deviates from the programmed path by the amount by which the operator turns the manual pulse generator. Therefore, this function can give the operator an additional margin in machining. [Interrupt operation] (1) A manual handle interrupt can be accepted in modes other than the rapid traverse mode (such as G00). Even in a block that does not move the tool or when automatic operation is in the stopped state, a manual handle interrupt can be accepted unless the rapid traverse mode is effective. NOTE Even if the feedrate override signal is set to 0%, a manual handle interrupt is accepted.

(2) The axis subject to a manual handle interrupt is determined by the manual handle selection signal. Only one axis is selected for each manual pulse generator. (3) The feedrate for manual handle interrupt must be determined so that when it is added algebraically to the feedrate observed on the axis in the uninterrupted state, the result of addition must not exceed the upper limit of the cutting feedrate for that axis. Example Suppose that the upper limit of the cutting feedrate on a given axis is 5 m/min. If the tool is moving along that axis in the positive direction at 2 m/min, the manual pulse generator can be turned to set up to 3 m/min. When the same movement is interrupted by turning the generator in the negative direction, up to 7 m/min is possible. If the manual pulse generator is turned in beyond the limit, the excess pulses generated from the generator are discarded. Consequently, the reading of the pulse generator disagrees with the actual traveled distance made by the interrupt.

(4) The magnification used in the manual handle interrupt depends on the states of signals MP1, MP2, and MP4. (5) If the direction of movement is reversed as a result of a manual handle interrupt, backlash compensation is applied. In this case, pitch error compensation is applied to the position set after the interrupt. For a manual handle interrupt, the application of acceleration/deceleration is based both on the time constant for cutting feed acceleration/deceleration (parameter No. 1622) and that for jog feed acceleration/deceleration (parameter No. 1624). When bit 0 of parameter No. 1604 is set to 1, however, the time constant for jog feed acceleration/deceleration is disabled, so that the application of acceleration/deceleration for a manual handle interrupt is based only on the time constant for cutting feed acceleration/deceleration.

129

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
[Manual handle interrupt and coordinate systems]

B62564E1/02

(1) The workpiece and local coordinate systems are shifted by the magnitude of a manual handle interrupt. Therefore, when an absolute command is specified in a workpiece or local coordinate system, the end point is shifted by the magnitude of the interrupt. All workpiece and local coordinate systems are shifted by the same amount at the same time regardless of which coordinate system has been selected when the interrupt is performed. (2) A manual handle interrupt does not change the basic machine coordinate system. Therefore, the end points of an absolute command (G53) and automatic reference position return (G28) issued in the machine coordinate system are not affected by the manual handle interrupt.

(G90G54)

Programmed path

Manual handle interrupt Shift by manual handle interrupt

Path after interrupt

(Workpiece and local coordinate systems before interrupt) (G90G53) (Workpiece and local coordinate systems after interrupt)

(Basic machine coordinate system)

(3) Current position display in a workpiece coordinate system The displayed position does not include the movement caused by a manual handle interrupt. Current position display in the machine coordinate system and relative coordinate system The displayed position includes the movement caused by a manual handle interrupt. (4) It is possible to display only the amount of movement caused by a manual handle interrupt on the manual interrupt screen indicating the current position.

130

B62564E1/02 5.7.2 Simultaneous automatic and manual operation

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

When the simultaneous automatic and manual selection signal is set to on and an automatic mode (tape operation, MDI operation, or memory operation or part program editing) and a manual mode (manual continuous feed or incremental feed) are selected, automatic operation and manual operation can be performed simultaneously. In the simultaneous automatic and manual mode, for example, cutting along an axis can be interrupted to change the depth of cut on that axis, or the next workpiece can be set up during automatic operation. (1) Operation (a) Selecting a mode The following table shows how to select a simultaneous automatic and manual operation mode: Mode selection input signal T Simultaneous automatic and manual operation D MEM EDT MOVL 1 H S J AJG 0 One of these signals is set to 1, J and H are set to 1, or S and H are set to 1.

One of these signals set to 1

(0: Signal low, 1: Signal high) (b) Manual operation during simultaneous automatic and manual operation There are two types of simultaneous automatic and manual operation. (i) Interrupt type An interrupt can be made for an axis whose park signal is low. A move command for manual continuous feed or incremental feed can be superimposed on a move command being executed in automatic operation. Thus, this function becomes equivalent to the manual handle interrupt. The interrupt type is enabled or disabled by the setting of the EMI bit (bit 6) of parameter No. 1000. (ii) Setup type For an axis whose park signal is high, movement by manual continuous feed or incremental feed can be performed during automatic operation. In this way it is possible to set up the next workpiece or perform a similar operation during automatic operation. For an axis whose park signal is high, automatic operation cannot be performed. If automatic operation is attempted for such an axis, an alarm occurs. 1 When the simultaneous automatic and manual mode is selected (strictly speaking, when the manual mode of the simultaneous automatic and manual mode is selected) Simultaneous automatic and manual operation is enabled immediately the manual mode is selected. 2 When the park signal is changed Even in automatic operation, the time when the interrupt type is switched differs slightly between singleblock operation and continuous operation. [For singleblock operation] Simultaneous automatic and manual operation is enabled from the block following the current block. [For continuous operation] Simultaneous automatic and manual operation is enabled from the block two blocks ahead of the current block. [When the system is reset] Simultaneous automatic and manual operation is enabled immediately after the system is reset.

131

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
(2) Performance

B62564E1/02

Automatic operation in the simultaneous automatic and manual mode is the same as normal automatic operation. Therefore, the following explains manual operation only. (a) Simultaneous automatic and manual operation (in relation to automatic operation) Interrupt type In the positioning mode (*1) In the cutting mode (G01, G02, G03, etc.) In the threading mode Not possible Possible Possible Setup type Possible Possible Possible

As indicated in the above table, the setup type is not affected by automatic operation. For the interrupt type, interrupts are possible in modes other than the positioning mode. NOTE In the positioning mode, the tool is moved at the rapid traverse feedrate. Therefore, blocks containing G28 and G29 are also included.

(b) Feedrate and acceleration/deceleration time constant The following lists the traveled distance, feedrate, and acceleration/deceleration time constant: Interrupt type Traveled distance Feedrate Time constant Same as normal manual operation (*1) (*2) Setup typ Same as normal manual operation Same as normal manual operation Same as normal manual operation

NOTE 1 (*1) The feedrate along the axis subject to an interrupt is the result of superimposition of the feedrate by the manual interrupt on the feedrate in automatic operation. If the resultant feedrate exceeds the maximum cutting feedrate for that axis, it is clamped at the maximum cutting feedrate. NOTE 2 (*2) For interrupt type, the application of acceleration/deceleration is based both on the time constant for cutting feed acceleration/deceleration (parameter No. 1622) and that for jog feed acceleration/deceleration (parameter No. 1624). When bit 0 of parameter No. 1604 is set to 1, however, the time constant for jog feed acceleration/deceleration is disabled, so that the application of acceleration/deceleration is based only on the time constant for cutting feed acceleration/deceleration. (c) Relationship with signals The operation is related to signals as listed below: Interrupt type Absolute on/off Interlock Machine lock Mirror image (d) Indication The indication is as follows: Interrupt type Absolute coordinates Relative coordinates Machine coordinates Not updated Updated Updated Updated Updated Updated Setup typ Not affected (always off) Setup typ Affected

Affected. If the signal is on, operation is not carried out. Affected. If the signal is on, operation is not carried out. Not affected. Even if the signal is on, a positive command moves the machine in the positive direction.

132

B62564E1/02

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

5.8 Override Playback

It is possible to store the cutting feedrate override and spindle speed override set at program execution. When that program is executed again, the stored override values can be used. Storing overrides is called override teaching. Using the taught overrides is called override playback. Teaching is possible only when the memory is operating. When override teaching is performed during memory operation, an override value having the following format is inserted immediately after the current block in memory. The override value is then stored. (Current block) ,L1F R S ; ,L1: Indicates that the following F, R, and S are commands of override values. F : Cutting feedrate override (0 to 254, unit: 1%) R : For linear machining, the distance along the axis to the end point. (Unit: Least input increment of the basic axis. For circular machining, the center angle up to the end point. If the basic axis is ISA, the unit is 0.01 degree. If it is ISB, the unit is 0.001 degrees.) In playback, if the remaining distance of the axis has reached the value specified by R or a smaller value, or if the remaining center angle of an arc has reached the value specified by R or a smaller value, the specified feedrate override value becomes valid. S : Spindle speed override (15 to 120, unit: 1%) In playback, the specified spindle speed override value becomes valid from the start of the target block. In general override playback, set the feedrate and spindle override switches on the operators panel of the machine to 100%. If an override switch on the operators panel of the machine is set to other than 100%, the programmed override value is multiplied by the override value set by that switch. (1) Teaching procedure Teaching can be performed by using the MDI keys or by using the switches and buttons on the operators panel of the machine. (a) Using the MDI keys 1 Press the function menu key to switch the soft keys to the function selection keys. 2 Press the <SETTING> key. 3 Press the <SETTING> key several times or press the <TEACH> key to select the override playback screen. 4 The override playback screen has five function selection keys, <TCHON>, <TCHOFF>, <FEDMEM>, <SPNMEM>, and <F/SMEM>. To enable teaching, press the <TCHON> key. When teaching is enabled, TEACHING MODE = ON is displayed. To disable teaching, press the <TCHOFF> key. When teaching is disabled, TEACHING MODE = OFF is displayed. 5 Select the memory operation mode to activate the memory.

133

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
6 (i)

B62564E1/02

To store a feedrate override value, press <FEDMEM> with a desired override position set.

(ii) To store a spindle speed override, press <SPNMEM> with a desired override position set. (iii) To store both a feedrate override and spindle speed override, press <F/SMEM>.

(b) Using the switches on the operators panel of the machine 1 Turn on the override teaching mode switch. 2 Select the memory operation mode to activate the memory. 3 Press the feedrate override teaching switch with the desired feedrate override position set. Alternatively, press the spindle override teaching switch with the desired spindle speed override position set. When only a feedrate override is taught, L1F R is inserted at the end of the block being executed. When only a spindle override is taught, L1S is inserted to the end of the block. When both feedrate and spindle speed overrides are stored, ,L1F R S is inserted. If override teaching is performed more than once while a block is being executed, the last override value is inserted in the command program. Teaching is enabled in memory operation but not in part program or MDI operation. (2) Playback procedure When a program is executed after override teaching has been performed, the taught feedrate override and spindle speed override can be used for operation (playback). 1 Set the feedrate override switch and spindle speed override switch on the operators panel of the machine to 100%. 2 To cancel the override teaching mode, press the <TCHOFF> key if the MDI keys are used, or turn off the override teaching mode switch if the switches on the operators panel of the machine are used. 3 Select the memory operation mode to activate the memory. 4 If .L1F R ; is specified in the command program, the following takes place: For linear machining, when the distance along the axis to the end point of the block has reached the value specified by R, the override value specified by F becomes valid. For circular machining, when the center angle to the end point has reached the value specified by R, the override value specified by F becomes valid. If ,L1S ; is specified in the program, the spindle speed override specified by S becomes valid from the start point of the block. The specified override value remains valid until a new override value is specified. 5 If M02 or M30 is specified, the override values effective at that time are canceled and assumed to be 100%.

134

B62564E1/02

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

NOTE 1 An override value added to the end of a block can be edited together with the other commands in the part program storage and edit mode. This means that override values can be inserted, changed, and deleted. NOTE 2 In override playback, the override switches on the operators panel can also be used. If the override switch on the operators panel is set to 70% when a feedrate override of 80% is specified by ,L1F80R ;, for example, an override of 56% is applied to the specified feedrate. NOTE 3 Override playback is enabled in every automatic operation (memory operation, part program operation, and MDI operation). NOTE 4 If M02 or M30 is specified during override playback, the override values effective at that time are canceled and assumed to be 100%. If a program number is searched for, the effective override values are also canceled and assumed to be 100%. If a reset operation is performed, whether to cancel the override values to 100% can be selected by the NCM bit of parameter No. 2401. NOTE 5 If the override value specified by F exceeds 254%, 254% is assumed. If the override value specified by S is less than 50%, 50% is assumed, and if it is more than 120%, 120% is assumed. NOTE 6 If teaching is performed when the cutting feedrate override cancel switch is set on, 100% is stored as the feedrate override value. NOTE 7 If teaching is performed twice for the same program, an override value is stored as follows: When teaching is specified again, the override value currently played back is multiplied by the override value set by the override switch, and the result is inserted in the program. In addition, the override value set by the override switch at that time is recorded by the control unit. When an override is specified later in the program, it is multiplied by the recorded override value, and the result is inserted as a new override value. NOTE 8 Whether teaching is enabled for programs O8000 to O9999 is determined depending on by the NE8 and ND8 bits of parameter No. 0011 and the NE9 and ND9 bits of parameter No. 2201. If teaching is attempted during execution of these programs when these parameters indicate NO EDITING (NE8 = 1 or NE9 = 1) or NO DISPLAY (ND8 = 1 or ND9 = 1), a warning is issued. (WRITE PROTECT in the former case and INVISIBLE PROGRAM in the latter.) Teaching is not performed for the block, and operation continues. NOTE 9 When one of the following functions is being executed, override teaching is disabled regardless of the parameter settings. If teaching is attempted, it is performed at the first block immediately after the function terminates. In blocks in which teaching is disabled, never insert override values in the part program storage and edit mode. Only teaching of a feedrate override is disabled. Blocks other than cutting feed blocks Dry run operation Teaching of both feedrate and spindle speed overrides is disabled. Canned cycle Multiple repetitive canned cycle Highspeed machining Blocks internally generated for corners in cutter compensation C NOTE 10 When one of the following functions is being executed, override playback R is invalid regardless of the parameter settings. In this case, the specified feedrate override becomes valid when the block starts to be executed: Drilling canned cycle Skip function Chamfering/corner rounding Direct drawing dimension programming NOTE 11 If feed hold or reset is specified for the same block after teaching, the taught values are canceled. NOTE 12 Teaching is not valid unless movement along the target axis is in progress. NOTE 13 For a block executed repeatedly, do not specify override values through teaching or in the part program storage and edit mode. The following blocks may be executed repeatedly: (1) Blocks in a subprogram called repeatedly by M98 or G65. (2) Blocks in a main program executed repeatedly by M99. (3) Blocks repeated in a WHILE statement and GOTO statement

135

6. TEST OPERATION

B62564E1/02

6. TEST OPERATION
6.1 All Axes Machine Lock
This function is used to check a program. Although the tool does not move, it is displayed as if it were actually operating.

OFF DISPLAY LOCK MACHINE LOCK

Display lock/machine lock switch

NOTE 1 When a G27, G28 or G30 command is specified, the tool does not go to the reference position and the reference position return completion led does not go on. NOTE 2 The M, S, T, and second miscellaneous functions (B) are executed.

6.2 Machine Lock on Each Axis

When this machine lock switch is set to an axis in advance, movement along the axis is suppressed during manual or automatic operation. The position display is updated as if the tool were actually moving along the axis.

OFF X

OFF Z

NOTE

During manual/automatic simultaneous operation, manual operation is executed without the tool being locked.

6.3 Auxiliary Function Lock

When the Auxiliary function lock switch is turned on, on the machine operators panel, M, S, T, and B function operations are locked. This switch is used to check a program together with a machine lock switch. NOTE M00, M01, M02, M30, M98 and M99 are executed as usual.

136

B62564E1/02

6. TEST OPERATION

6.4 Dry Run

If this switch is set to ON in the Cycle Operation, the feedrate specified by the program is ignored and becomes as follows: OFF ON

Dry run Rapid p traverse button Positioning g type yp (RT signal) i l) (#LRP of parameter No.1400) Programmed command For rapid traverse Rapid traverse rate (parameter No. 1420) For cutting feed(*2)
The dry run feedrate (parameter No. 1410) is overridden by the maximum manual feedrate override value (parameter No. 2016).

RT=ON

LRP=0/1

LRP=0 RT=OFF LRP=1

Jog feedrate (parameter The dry run feedrate (parameter No. 1410) is overridden by the No. 1423)(*1)
manual feedrate override value

Same as for cutting feed (*1) (*JV0 to *JV15 signals).

NOTE 1 For rapid traverse, the indicated feedrates are valid only when RDR of parameter No.1400 is 1. If RDR is 0, the rapid traverse rate is used in the same way as when the rapid traverse button is set to ON. NOTE 2 The dry run feedrate does not exceed the maximum cutting feedrate (parameter No.1422). (The feedrate is clamped at the maximum cutting feedrate.)

6.5 Single Block

The single block function stops the tool after one block of a program has been executed. (1) Turn on the single block switch. OFF ON

Single block One block of the program is executed, and then the execution is stopped. If the cycle start button is pressed, the next block is executed and then the execution is stopped again. NOTE 1 If G28 to G30 are issued, the single block function is effective at an intermediate point. NOTE 2 In a canned cycle, the single block stop points are the end of (1) , (2) , and (6) shown below. When the single block function is effective at points (1) or (2) , the feed hold lamp lights.

137

6. TEST OPERATION

B62564E1/02

(1)

(2) (6) Rapid traverse Feed (3) (5)

(4)

NOTE 3 Single block stop is not performed in blocks containing M98P_;. M99;and G65, G66, G67. However, single block stop is even performed in a block with M98P_ or M99 command, if the block contains an address other than O, N or P.

138

B62564E1/02

6. TEST OPERATION

6.6 RETRACE PROGRAM EDITING FUNCTION

This function checks a machining program while executing it in the test mode. If it finds an error in the program, the error can be corrected the error at that time and the corrected program can be executed immediately. It can be used to check and correct a machining program without stopping operation. To make this function effective, set parameter (REV, 2005) to 1 and turn on power again. 1 While the tool was moving according to the N03 block, an error was found in the tool path. Y PROGRAM(MEMORY) N01 N02 N03 N04 G90 G01 G02 G01 G00 X20. Y20. ; X0. Y20. F500 ; X20. Y0. R20. ; X20. Y10. ; Forward operation N03 -20 N04 N02 20 0 X

2 The tool is stopped and reverse operation is started immediately. Y PROGRAM(MEMORY) N01 N02 N03 N04 G90 G01 G02 G01 G00 X20. Y20. ; X0. Y20. F500 ; X20. Y0. R20. ; X20. Y10. ; Reverse operation N03 -20 N04 N02 20 0 X

3 After the N03 block to be corrected is executed in reverse, the tool is stopped and the program is edited. Y PROGRAM(MEMORY) N01 N02 N03 N04 G90 G01 G03 G01 G00 X20. Y20. ; X0. Y20. F500 ; X20. Y0. R20. ; X20. Y10. ; N03 -20 N04 N02 20 0 X

4 When operation is restarted, the corrected program is executed. Y PROGRAM(MEMORY) N01 N02 N03 N04 G90 G01 G02 G01 G00 X20. Y20. ; X0. Y20. F500 ; X20. Y0. R20. ; X20. Y10. ; Second forward operation -20 N04 N03 N02 20 0 X

139

6. TEST OPERATION 6.6.1 Modes

This function can be executed only in the test mode.

B62564E1/02

The test mode is enabled when both the memory mode signal and test mode signal (G02.2) are high. When the TSKY bit (bit 2 of parameter 2004) is set to 1, the test mode can be selected by pressing the [TEST ON] soft key. This is an operation selection key for the program text screen and program check screen in memory mode. After the test mode is selected, the mode status indication changes to TEST.

6.6.2 Operation
(1) Basic Procedure for Retrace Editing 1 Select the test mode.

or MEMORY+TEST MEMORY then

TEST ON

Mode selection

Mode selection

Soft key

2 Start the operation.

Cycle start

3 Perform a singleblock stop or feedhold stop in the block in which a program error is detected.

OFF or Feed hold

ON

Single block

4 Set the reverse signal high. REVERS ON or Reverse

OFF

ON

Soft key

140

B62564E1/02
5 Start reverse operation.

6. TEST OPERATION

Cycle start

6 After required blocks are executed in reverse, perform a singleblock stop or feedhold stop and terminate reverse operation.

OFF or Feed hold

ON

Single block

7 After reverse operation is terminated, correct subsequent parts of the program.

G01X0. Y20. ; G02 X10. Y0. : : >G03

NOTE

The program cannot be edited when the STL signal is high.

8 Set the reverse signal low. REVERS OFF or Reverse

OFF

ON

Soft key

141

6. TEST OPERATION

B62564E1/02

9 Restart forward operation. Operation is started from the last block executed in reverse operation.

Cycle start

Corrected block 20

N02 Reverse operation is terminated, the tool is stopped, the program is edited, and forward operation is restarted.

N03 Reverse operation is started. 0

-20 N04

Number of blocks that can be executed in reverse operation This function can execute up to 15 blocks in reverse. In reverse operation, one block is counted as one movement. If a canned cycle or other single command specifying two or more movements is included, the number of blocks that can be executed in reverse will not agree with the number of programmed blocks. Status indication during reverse operation During reverse operation, the REVS indication blinks on the CRT screen. When no more blocks can be executed in reverse, the RVED indication blinks to indicate that reverse operation is terminated. Blocks that can be edited When operation is stopped or halted (STL signal is low) in the test mode, the system can edit blocks which have not yet been executed and blocks which have been executed during reverse operation. Block from which forward operation is restarted and the position of the cursor Only after the program is edited (modification, insertion, deletion) after reverse operation, forward operation is restarted from the block in which reverse operation is terminated. The block from which operation is restarted does not depend on the position of the cursor in the program. If the program is not edited after reverse operation, or if the cursor is moved during forward operation, operation is restarted from the block where the cursor is located.

142

B62564E1/02

6. TEST OPERATION

(2) Starting Reverse Operation and Subsequent Forward Operation after the Reverse Signal is Switched During Execution Reverse operation and subsequent forward operation can be started in rapid traverse (G00), linear interpolation (G01), circular interpolation (G02, G03), dwell (G04), skip cutting (G31) or in a miscellaneous function in test mode. However, reverse operation and subsequent forward operation are not started immediately after the reverse signal is switched. They are started after the block is completed, that is, after the move, dwell, or miscellaneous function is completed. (3) Starting Reverse Operation and Subsequent Forward Operation after a FeedHold Stop If the reverse signal is switched after a feedhold stop is made in rapid traverse (G00), linear interpolation (G01), circular interpolation (G02, G03) or skip cutting (G31), the reverse operation or subsequent forward operation can be started at that point. This operation cannot be executed when a dwell (G04) or miscellaneous function is executed. When reverse operation is started after a feedhold stop, the movement from the start point of the block to the position at which the feedhold stop is made is stored as a block. Feed-hold stop Reverse signal, high Cycle start

Feed-hold stop Reverse signal, low Cycle start

Point at which the feed-hold stop is made Breakpoint between blocks

Reverse operation is terminated and subsequent forward operation is started.

(4) Starting Reverse Operation and Normal Operation after a SingleBlock Stop If the reverse signal is switched after a singleblock stop, reverse operation or forward operation can be started at that point. Single-block stop Reverse signal, high Cycle start

Single-block stop Reverse signal, low Cycle start

Reverse operation is terminated and subsequent forward operation is started.

143

6. TEST OPERATION 6.6.3 Display

B62564E1/02

(1) The program screen in the test mode is different than in other modes with regard to the following points: 1 During operation in the test mode, the cursor is moved over text to indicate the current block. (See Fig. 6.6.3(a)) <Current block> 14inch CRT: Lightblue cursor 9inch CRT: Dim cursor <Block in the preread state> Same as the conventional system 14inch CRT: Yellow cursor 9inch CRT: Highlighted cursor 2 Executed and preread blocks can be discriminated from blocks to be executed. <Executed or preread blocks> 14inch CRT: Green characters 9inch CRT: Highlighted characters <Blocks to be executed> 14inch CRT: White characters 9inch CRT: Normal characters 3 When a program that contains blocks that do not fit on one page is executed, the screen can be scrolled. A new page contains the last three lines on the previous page. (On a 9inch CRT screen, a new page contains the last two lines on the previous page.) (See Fig. 6.6.3(b)) 4 When the screen is scrolled by pressing the , , , or key, a new page contains the last three lines on the previous page. (On a 9inch CRT screen, a new page contains the last two lines on the previous page.) (2) During reverse operation, the REVS indication blinks on the CRT screen. When no more blocks can be executed in reverse, the RVED indication blinks. <Reverse operation in progress>
TEST***REVS****MTN*** ALTER INSERT DELETE DELETE BACK WORD EDIT 09:28:06 LSK

FRWRD BKWRD REVERS TEST SEARCH SEARCH OFF OFF

REWIND +

<No more blocks can be executed in reverse operation>

TEST***RVED**** *** *** ALTER INSERT DELETE DELETE BACK WORD EDIT 09:28:06 LSK

FRWRD BKWRD REVERS TEST SEARCH SEARCH OFF OFF

REWIND +

144

B62564E1/02

6. TEST OPERATION

(3) When a figure is drawn on graphic display A during machining, a parameter can be used to specify the color in which reverse movement is indicated.
O0001 N00015
N19 N20 N21 N22 N23 N24 N25 N26 N27 N28 N29 N30 N31 N32 N33 N34 N35 N36 X0.676 Y0.009 ; X0.697 Y0.003 ; X3.789 Y0.123 X5.787 Y0.312 ; X8.892 Y0.434 ; X9.787 Y0.232 ; X10.934 Y0.145 ; X7.898 Y20.901 ; X6.768 Y22.234 ; X3.789 Y17.890 ; X2.894 Y13.645 ; X1.896 Y7.768 ; X0.899 Y5.656 ; X0.076 Y0.878 ; X0.892 Y3.376 ; X2.983 Y14.092 ; X3.443 Y23.898 ; X5.892 Y32.937 ;

PROGRAM(MEMORY) O0001 N01 G91 G28 X0. Y0. ; N02 G90 G00 X100. Y50. ; N03 T0101 ; N04 G42 G01 X50. F2000 D17 ; N05 G91 X10. ; N06 X2. Y3.5 ; N07 X1.343 Y2.45 ; N08 X2.34 Y1.898 ; N09 X0.786 Y0.432 ; N10 X0.214 YO.339 ; N11 X0.123 Y0.278 ; N12 X0.356 Y0.232 ; N13 X2.384 Y7.623 ; N14 X3.545 Y9.903 ; N15 X4.544 Y5.984 ; N16 X3.789 Y3.567 ; N17 X2.567 Y2.789 ; N18 X1.89 Y0.899 ;

TEST***STAT****MTN*** 09:28:06 LSK

ALTER INSERT DELETE DELETE BACK WORD EDIT FRWRD BKWRD REVERS TEST SEARCH SEARCH ON OFF REWIND +

Fig. 6.6.3(a) Program Screen Display During Operation in Test Mode

N19 N20 N21 N22 N23 N24 N25 N26 N27 N28 N29 N30 N31 N32 N33 N34 N35 N36

X0.676 Y0.009 ; X0.697 Y0.003 ; X3.789 Y0.123 ; X5.787 Y0.312 ; X8.892 Y0.434 ; X9.787 Y0.232 ; X10.934 Y0.145 ; X7.898 Y20.901 ; X6.768 Y22.324 ; X3.789 Y17.890 ; X2.894 Y13.645 ; X1.896 Y7.768 ; X0.899 Y5.656 ; X0.076 Y0.878 ; X0.892 Y3.376 ; X2.983 Y14.092 ; X3.443 Y23.898 ; X5.829 Y32.937 ;

N31 N32 N33 N34 N35 N36 N37 N38 N39 N40 N41 N42 N43 N44 N45 N46 N47 N48

X0.899 Y5.656 ; X0.076 Y0.878 ; X0.892 Y3.376 ; X2.983 Y14.092 ; X3.443 Y23.898 ; X5.829 Y32.937 ; X6.343 Y17.653 ; X5.892 Y13.788 ; X3.732 Y8.783 ; X2.902 Y3.892 ; X0.334 Y1.434 ; X0.233 Y0.876 ; X0.097 Y0.074 ; X0.345 Y0.782 ; X0.123 Y0.234 ; X0.344 Y0.782 ; X0.399 Y0.789 ; X0.213 Y0.349 ;

TEST***STAT****MTN*** 09:34:45
FRWRD SEARCH BKWRD SEARCH REVERS ON TEST OFF REWIND ALTER INSERT DELETE DELETE WORD

(Right half of the screen before a new page is displayed)

(Left half of the screen showing a new page)

Fig. 6.6.3(b) Scrolling the Screen

6.6.4 Note
1) Manual intervention When manual intervention is made after a feedhold stop or singleblock stop, cancel the manual intervention before starting reverse operation. Then set the reverse signal to high. 2) Tool paths when the rapid traverse command (G00) is executed in reverse operation and subsequent forward operation The tool path in reverse operation depends on the path of rapid traverse selected by the LRP bit (parameter 1400). When the tool is positioned using linear interpolation, the path in reverse operation is the same as in subsequent forward operation. When the tool is positioned using nonlinear type positioning, the tool paths do not agree with each other. 3) Dwell command The dwell command is executed in reverse operation and subsequent forward operation, just as in the normal operation. 4) Tool paths when the skip cutting (G31) command is executed in reverse operation and subsequent forward operation The distance traveled in reverse operation or subsequent forward operation does not agree with the pro-

145

6. TEST OPERATION

B62564E1/02

grammed distance. It is equal to the distance by which the tool actually travels until the skip signal goes high when the block is first executed. When the skip cutting command is executed in reverse operation or subsequent forward operation, the skip signal is ignored. 5) Operation using miscellaneous functions Miscellaneous functions specified by the M and S codes may cause different movements during reverse and forward operation. To prevent this, these miscellaneous functions must be nested or machine operation must be reversed when the reverse signal is high. O1 2 3 4 N1 N2 S 1 N1 0 S 1 N1 1 S 2 N2 0 S 2 ; ; 0 0 0 ; Machining program 0 0 0 ; 0 0 0 ; Machining program 0 0 0 ;

6) The block created by the control unit is treated as a reverseoperation block. 3 2 5 1 (2) (1) Tool path after cutter compensation C Although two blocks are programmed for the example shown above, four movecommand blocks are created for actual machining. 7) Tool compensation entered by the program is ignored during reverse operation. 8) Command for specifying the coordinate system (G92) during reverse operation If the command for specifying a coordinate system (G92) is executed during reverse operation, the current position displayed may be different from the corresponding position displayed during forward operation. However, the actual tool positions are the same. 9) Mirror image When a block created using mirrorimage programming (G50.1, G51.1) is executed in reverse operation, the tool follows the actual mirrored path. A block created for mirror images using settings or machine signals is stored in its original state (not mirrored). The mirror image created using settings or machine signals is valid during both reverse and subsequent forward operation. 10)Changing an offset value If the cutter compensation or tool length offset is changed during reverse operation or subsequent forward operation, the tool is moved according to the original offset value specified when the block was first executed. The new offset value becomes valid when normal operation is started after subsequent forward operation is completed. 11) Commands that cannot be executed during reverse operation. Blocks containing the following commands cannot be executed during reverse operation. When the system encounters one of these commands during reverse operation, the system stops reverse operation at that point and indicates RVED. 146

Tool path after compensation Programmed tool path

B62564E1/02
Inch/metric conversion command Reference position return command Threading command Binary command (G20, G21) (G28, G29, G30) (G33) (G05)

6. TEST OPERATION

12)Optional functions that cannot be executed during reverse operation When any of the following optional functions are executed, reverse operation cannot be started. When the system encounters a block containing one of these functions, the system stops reverse operation at that point and indicates RVED. Circular threading B Polar coordinate interpolation Cylindrical interpolation Highspeed machining Exponential interpolation Figure copy Spline interpolation Involute interpolation Multibuffer Macro compiler Fiveblock preread function 14)Switching modes If the mode is switched to the test mode before all preread blocks in the former mode are processed, a startreject warning is made when operation is started. Perform a reset before starting operation in the test mode. Otherwise, execute all preread blocks in singleblock mode before switching to test mode. Do the same when switching from the test mode to another mode. 15)Subprogram Subprogram calls (M98, including subprogram calls with M, S, T, or B codes) and returns to the main program (M99) can be executed during reverse operation. During reverse operation, subprogram calls and returns the subprograms can be executed up to four times. 16)Custom macros Macro calls (G65, G66, G66.1, G67, including macro calls with G or M codes) and returns to the main program (M99) can be executed during reverse operation. During reverse operation, macro calls and returns from macros can be executed up to four times, including subprogram calls and returns from subprograms. Operation commands executed during reverse operation are not subjected to inverse operation. Suppose the initial value of local variable #1 in the following block is 1.0 and the value is changed to 3.0 after forward operation. After the block is executed in reverse operation, the value of variable #1 remains 3.0. After the block is executed in subsequent forward operation, the value is changed to 5.0. #1 = #1 + 2.0; If a program including a macro operation command is executed in subsequent forward operation after reverse operation, the initial forward operation may not be reproduced. This may occur with the following blocks: Block of control command (IF, WHILE, etc.) Block of move command including a macro variable (Y [#1 #5], X [#1 + #2], etc.) If local variables are used only as arguments to macro calls in a program, subsequent forward operation after reverse operation of the program including macro calling and return from the macro reproduces the initial forward operation. An example is shown below: Main program Macro G66 P9082 R70.Z30.X2. ; 09082 ; X100. ; G00 Z#18 ; M06 ; G01 Z#26 ; Y50. ; G04 X#24 ; G00 Z [ROUND [#18] +ROUND [#26] ] M99 ; (G02.1, G03.1) (G12.1, G13.1) (G07.1) (G10.3, G11.3) (G02.3, G03.3) (G72.1, G72.2) (G06.1) (G02.2, G03.2)

13)The following functions are invalid in test mode:

147

7. SAFETY FUNCTIONS

B62564E1/02

7. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
7.1 Emergency Stop
If you press Emergency Stop button on the machine operators panel, the machine movement stops in a moment.

Red

EMERGENCY STOP

This button is locked when it is pressed. Although it varies with the machine tool builder, the button can usually be unlocked by twisting it. CAUTION Causes of trouble must be removed before the button is released.

NOTE 1 EMERGENCY STOP interrupts the current to the motor. NOTE 2 The CNC enters the reset or alarm status. (Whether the CNC enters the reset or alarm status is specified by the ENR bit in parameter No. 2001.)

7.2 Overtravel
When the tool moves beyond the stroke end set by the machine tool limit switch, an error code (0T001 to 0T008) is displayed and the tool slows down and stops. This also happens when the tool enters the prohibited area defined by the stored stroke limit specified by the program or setting data. If the tool stops (Refer to II19), press the reset button to release the alarm and manually move the tool in the opposite direction. For the exact operation of overtravel, refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder.

148

B62564E1/02

7. SAFETY FUNCTIONS

7.3 PreTravel Stroke Limit Check Function

When a block which moves the tool starts to be executed, the pretravel stroke limit check function checks the endpoint coordinate according to the current position of the tool and the traveled distance. This function also checks whether the tool enters the prohibited area defined by stored stroke limit 1 or 2. If the block causes the tool to enter the prohibited area, the function stops the tool immediately after the tool has started moving and displays the alarm. CAUTION Manual numeric commands are checked.

NOTE 1 This function checks whether the endpoint coordinate of the move command in each block is in the prohibited area but does not check the halfway path of the command. In addition, an alarm occurs when the tool passes the prohibited area defined by stored stroke limit 1 or 2.

Prohibited area of stored stroke limit 2 a Start point Stored limit 2 stops the tool at point a.

End point

Prohibited area of stored stroke limit 2 Start point Pre-travel stroke limit check stops the tool immediately after the tool starts moving started.

End point

149

7. SAFETY FUNCTIONS

B62564E1/02

Prohibited area of stored stroke limit 1 or 2 End point Start point Stored stroke limit 1 or 2 stops the tool at point a.

Prohibited area of stored stroke limit 1 or 2 End point Start point

Pre-travelstrokelimitcheckstopsthetool immediately after the tool starts to move.

NOTE 2 If the machine lock switch is on when movement in the block starts, the pretravel stroke limit check function is not executed. NOTE 3 If stored stroke limit 2 is invalid (in the G23 mode), the prohibited area defined by stored stroke limit 2 is not checked.

150

B62564E1/02

7. SAFETY FUNCTIONS

7.4 Stored Stroke Limit Check in Manual Operation

When an attempt is made to move the tool such that stored stroke limit 1 is exceeded during manual operation (manual rapid traverse, manual jog feed, manual handle feed, or manual incremental feed), a warning message is displayed instead of an alarm. Also, the tool does not move such that stored stroke limit 1 will be exceeded. A warning message is displayed if the tool attempts to enter an area set as inhibited by stored stroke limit 1. The warning message is automatically cleared when the tool is backed out in the reverse direction. This function can be enabled or disabled according to the setting of parameter No. 5201 (SSLWRN). When this function is disabled, the specifications of stored stroke limit 1 are the same as those set conventionally. CAUTION This function is disabled when the tool attempts to enter an area set as inhibited by stored stroke limit 1 as a result of a manual interrupt operation such as an interrupttype manualautomatic simultaneous operation or manual handle interrupt. In such a case, an alarm is output. This function is enabled for setuptype manualautomatic simultaneous operation.

NOTE 1 This function is enabled from the point when reference position return is completed, in the same way as for the conventional specifications. NOTE 2 If another warning message is already being displayed when the tool attempts to enter an inhibited area, the original message remains as is and the warning message for this function is not displayed. NOTE 3 Warning messages for this function can be cleared by changing the screen, resetting, or pressing the CANCEL soft key, in exactly the same way as for all other warning messages.

WARNING The warning messages as following is displayed, and machine is stopped. Messages +OVERTRAVEL(SOFT1) Explanation The tool has attempted to enter an area set as inhibited by stored stroke limit 1 during manual movement in the positive direction. Backing out the tool in the negative direction automatically clears this warning message. The tool has attempted to enter an area set as inhibited by stored stroke limit 1 during manual movement in the negative direction. Backing out the tool in the positive direction automatically clears this warning message.

OVERTRAVEL(SOFT1)

151

8. ACTIONS REQUIRED FOR ALARMS

B62564E1/02

8. ACTIONS REQUIRED FOR ALARMS

Check the following items when operation is not normal: (1) When an error code is displayed on the CRT If an error code is displayed, check the cause of the error according to Appendix 11 List of Error Codes. In particular, PSfffindicates a program or data setting error. Correct the program or setting. (2) When no error code is displayed on the CRT The tool appears to stop when the system is operating. Refer to Section 4.4 CNC Status Display in the Maintenance Manual. (3) Refer to Chapter 4 Troubleshotting in the Maintenance Manual.

152

B62564E1/02

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

9.1 Preparations for Storing and Editing Part Programs
To store or edit part programs as described below, it is necessary to establish the status in which a part program can be edited according to the following preparations. (1) Set the I/O devices. (2) Set data on the I/O devices. (See Section 10.3.) (3) Turn on the data protection key (KEY3). Some systems may not have this key. (4) Set the operation mode to the EDIT mode. (5) Press the function menu key to switch the soft keys to operation selection keys. (6) Press the PROGRAM soft or hard key to display the program screen. If the text of programs is not displayed on the screen, perform one of the following: (i) Press the CHAPTER key to switch the soft keys to chapter selection keys and press the desired chapter selection key. (ii) Press the PROGRAM soft or hard key repeatedly until the program text is displayed.
ON

9" CRTunit

Function Softkeys menukey 9" CRTfunctionselectionkeys

POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET

Operation selectionkey

PRG-CHK

CHAPTER

14" CRTunit

Function menukey

Softkeys

Operation selectionkey

14" CRTfunctionselectionkeys
POSITI PROGRA OFFSET PRGRAM SETTIN M CHECK G SERVIC E MESSAG E CHAPTE R

153

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

B62564E1/02

9.2 Registering Part Programs

9.2.1 Registering a part program from the tape
This section explains the following operations: 1 Registering all part programs 2 Registering one part program 3 Registering a part program when the current program number is changed or a new program number is assigned (1) Establish the status in which part programs can be edited. (See Section 9.1.) (2) To add a new part program to the programs that are already registered, search for the last program number. (See Section 5.2.1.) 9" CRToperationselectionkeys Ojjj O
CONDENS DELETE FILE READ PUNCH VERIFY +

SearchthisAddanew program program number. tothis position.

9" CRToperationguidancekeys
A L L 1-PROGRAM (PROG#) (FILE#)

14" CRToperationselectionkeys
CONDEN DELETE READ SE FILE PUNCH VERIFY COPY MOVE MERGE INS_TIM CHANGE +

14" CRToperationguidancekeys
A L L PROG (PROG (FILE RAM #) #)

(3) Press the operation menu key to switch the soft keys to the operation guidance keys. (4) When the READ key is pressed, the soft keys function as operation guidance keys. (5) When one part program is registered when the current program number is changed or a new program number is assigned.) (5)1 Press the (PROG#) key. (5)2 Enter a program number from the CRT/MDI panel and press the EXEC key.

When all part programs are registered (5)1 Press the ALL key.

When one part program is registered (5)1 Press the 1PROG key. (5)2 (i) For new registration, press NEW. (ii) For addition, press ADD.

(6) To stop part program registration, press the STOP key. When this key is pressed, however, registration of the remaining part programs cannot be restarted. (7) When part program registration terminates, the soft keys return to operating as the operation selection keys.

154

B62564E1/02

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

9.2.2 Registering part programs from CRT/MDI panel

(1) Establish the status in which part programs can be edited. (See Section 9.1.) (2) Press the operation menu key. (3) Use address and numeric keys to enter the program to be registered. The enter program is temporarily stored in the key input buffer. When the INSERT key or INPUT/INSERT hard key is pressed, the program is loaded into memory. (4) To enter additional programs, repeat step (3). 14" CRToperationselectiomkeys
ALTER INSERT DELETE DELETE BACK WORD EDIT SEARCH BKWRD REWIND DRCTRY SEARCH MEMORY

9" CRToperationselectionkeys
ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT-WRD BG-EDT +

155

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

B62564E1/02

9.3 Deleting Part Programs

Part programs that are protected from being edited are not deleted. When the NE8 bit in parameter No. 0011 is 1, part programs O8000 to O8999 are not deleted. When the NE9 bit in parameter No. 2201 is 1, part programs O9000 to O9999 are not deleted. (1) Establish the status in which part programs can be edited. (See Section 9.1.) (2) Press the operation menu key to switch the soft keys to operation selection keys. (3) Press the DELETE key. (4) Press the PROGRAM key. (5) When deleting all part programs (5)1 Press the ALL key. All the registered part programs are deleted except those protected from being edited. The soft keys are switched to the operation selection keys. (5)2 Press the EXEC soft key. All part programs are deleted. When the CANCEL soft key is pressed, deletion of all the part programs is cancelled and the system is restored to the status in 1 in which part programs can be edited. When deleting the currently selected program (5)1 Press the THIS key. The currently selected program is deleted and the soft keys return to operating as the operation selection keys. When deleting the specified part program (5)1 Press the (PROG#) key. (5)2 Enter the program number and press the EXEC key. (5)2 To delete multiple programs at a time, delimit the upper and lower program numbers with commas (, ). Example When 0100,0200 is entered and the EXEC key is pressed, programs 0100 to 0200 are deleted. 9" CRT soft keys displayed when ALL is pressed
CANCEL EXEC

9" CRT operation selection keys

ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT-WRD GB-EDT +

9 CRT soft keys displayed when DELETE is pressed

WORD ~EOB ~(WORD) PROGRAM

9" CRT soft keys displayed when PROGRAM is pressed

A L L THIS (PROG#)

14" CRT soft keys displayed when ALL is pressed

CAN CEL EXEC

14" CRT operation selection keys

ALTER INSERT DELETE DELETE BACK WORD EDIT BKWRD REWIND DRCTRY SEARCH MEMORY CHAPTE R

14" CRT soft keys displayed when DELETE is pressed

WORD ~EOB ~(W ORD) PROG RAM

14" CRT soft keys displayed when PROGRAM is pressed

A L L THIS (PROG #)

156

B62564E1/02

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

9.4 Editing Part Programs

Editing part programs means inserting or deleting data in part programs or otherwise altering them. Part programs in memory can be edited as follows: (1) Establish the status in which part programs can be stored and edited. (See Section 9.1.) (2) Search for the part program to be edited. (See Section 5.3.) This step is not necessary if the part program to be edited has already been selected. (3) Move the cursor to the position to be edited. (4) Edit the part program. Steps (3) and (4) are described in detail below.

9.4.1 Moving the cursor to the position to be edited

(1) Press the operation menu key. (2) When the position to be edited is after the cursor (2)1 Press SEARCH. When the position to be edited is before the cursor (2)1 Press BW_SRCH. Backward search does not apply to words in the same block. When returning the cursor to the beginning of the part program (3) (2)1 Press REWIND. When searching for a word or address
TOP

9" CRToperationselectionkeys
FW_SRCH BW_SRCH REWIND DIR.MEM

9" CRToperationguidancekeys displayed

REPEART BOTTOM (WORD) (PROG#) NXT_PRG

TOP

REPEAT

(WORD)

(PROG#)

PRV_PRG

14" CRToperationselectionkeys
ALTER INSERT DELETE DELETE BACK WORD EDIT FRWRD BKWRD REWIND DRCTRY MULTI MEMORY EDIT SEARCH SEARCH

14" CRToperationguidancekeys displayed

REPEAT BOTTOM (WORD) (PROG#) NEXT PRGRAM

REPEAT (WORD) (PROG#) PRVIOS PRGRAM

(3)1 Press (WORD). (3)2 Enter the address (such as N) or word (such as N100) to be searched for and press the EXEC key. The address or word is searched for in the specified direction, starting at the current cursor position. When the search is completed, the cursor moves to the located address or word.

When moving the cursor to the end in forward search or beginning of the part program in backward search (3)1 To move the cursor to the end of the part program in forward search, press the BOTTOM soft key. (3)1 To move the cursor to the beginning of the part program in backward search, press the TOP soft key.

157

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) 9.4.2 Repeat search

B62564E1/02

Once a search function is used, the repeat search function enables the search function to be triggered simply by pressing the REPEAT key. (1) EXAMPLE OF USE O1000 ;
*1

1 This example searches for G01 several times when the program at the left is being edited, assuming that the cursor is initially set at position *1. 2 At the first search, press: F_SRCH G01 EXEC The cursor will move to position *2. 3 At the second and subsequent searches, press: F_SRCH and REPEAT. The cursor will move to position *3, then to position *4. The search condition is displayed during the search. 4 To change the search condition, use the same operation as with the previous version: F_SRCH (condition) EXEC To repeat the search with the new condition, press: F_SRCH and REPEAT.

N01 G00 G90 Z100. C0 ; N02 G04 G91 G18 Z0 C0 ; N03 G07. 1 C57299 ;
*2

N04 G90 G01 G42 Z120. D01 F250 ; N05 C30. ; N06 G02 Z90. C60. R30. ;
*3

N07 G01 Z70. ; N08 G03 Z60. C70. R10.

*4

N09 G01 C150. ; (2) Search conditions and CNC states for which the repeat search function can be used (a) The repeat search function can be used with the forward and backward search functions for the CNC states (modes and screens) listed below. Mode Edit Memory Tape MDI Test BACK GROUND Program Program Program Program Program, Directory FS15- B only Screen Program, Directory Remarks

(b) Once a forward or backward search is performed under a certain condition with a certain mode and screen, the search can be repeated under the same search condition even with other modes and screens provided that the new modes and screens are those to which the repeat function is applicable (Example 1). If the search condition is one not displayed with the operation guide key, however, the warning message FORMAT ERROR or CAN NOT REPEAT (FUNCTION IS DIFFERENT) will be issued (Examples 2 and 3) . (c) For words, sequence numbers, and program numbers, the forward and backward search functions are not distinguished from each other (Example 4) . Example 1 After a word is searched for on the edit mode program screen, the same word can be searched for on the MDI mode program screen. Example 2 A word search is not available on the tape mode program screen. If the repeat search function is used on the tape mode program screen even for the same word that was searched for on the edit mode program screen, the warning message FORMAT ERROR will be issued. Example 3 After executing _SRCH BOTTOM, if you try to execute B_SRCH REPEAT, the warning message CAN NOT REPEAT (FUNCTION IS DIFFERENT) will be issued. Example 4 After making a forward search using F_SRCH G01 EXEC, you can perform a backward search by pressing B_SRCH REPEAT. (3) Caution If you try to use the repeat search function before using the forward and backward search functions, the warning message CAN NOT REPEAT (BUFFER IS EMPTY) will be issued. 158

B62564E1/02 9.4.3 Editing part programs

Part programs can be edited as follows: (i) Alteration Changing one word to another word Changing one word to two or more words hanging one word to two or more blocks (ii) Insertion Inserting one word Inserting two or more words Inserting two or more blocks (iii) Deletion Deleting one word

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

Deleting the words from the cursor position to the end of block (EOB) Deleting the words from the cursor position to the specified word (entered from the keyboard) (1) Establish the status in which part programs can be edited. (See Section 9.1.) (2) Move the cursor to the position to be edited. (3) Press the operation menu key. (4) To change data (4)1 Press the ALTER soft or hard key. (4)2 Press the (WORD) key. (4)3 i) To change one word to another, enter the new word. ii) To change one word to two or more words, enter the new words. iii) To change one word to two or more blocks, enter the blocks. (4)4 Press the EXEC key. The word indicated by the cursor is replaced with the new data, and the cursor moves to the last word entered. The soft keys return to operating as the operation selection keys. 14" CRToperationselectionkeys
ALTER INSERT DELETE DELETE BACK WORD EDIT SEARCH BKWRD REWIND DRCTRY SEARCH MEMORY

9" CRT operation selection keys

ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT-WRD BG-EDIT +

9" CRT operation guidance keys displayed when the ALTER/INSERT key is pressed
(WORD) (PROG #)

9" CRT soft keys displayed when the DELETE key is pressed
WORD ~EOB ~(WORD) PROGRAM

14" CRT operation guidance keys displayed when the ALTER/INSERT key is pressed
(WOR (PROG D) #)

14" CRT soft keys displayed when the DELETE key is pressed
WOR ~EOB D ~(WO RD) PROG RAM

159

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

To insert data (4)1 Press the INSERT soft key or the INPUT/INSERT hard key. (4)2 Press the (WORD) key. (4)3 i) To insert one word, enter the new word. ii) To insert two or more words, enter the new words. iii) To insert two or more blocks, enter the blocks. (4)4 Press EXEC key.

B62564E1/02

The entered word(s) are inserted immediately after the word containing the cursor. The cursor is moved to the last inserted word. Each soft key returns to an operation selection key. To delete data (4)1 i) To delete only one word, press the DLTWRD soft key or the DELETE hard key. ii) To delete two or more words, press the DELETE soft key and perform the following: (4)2 i) When the (WORD) key is pressed, the word indicated by the cursor is deleted. The soft keys return to operating as operation selection keys. ii) When the ~EOB key is pressed, the words from the cursor position to the end of block (EOB) are deleted. The soft keys return to operating as the operation selection keys. iii) To delete the words from the cursor position to the specified word, 1) press the (WORD) key, 2) enter the word, and 3) press the EXEC key. The words from the cursor position to the specified word are deleted. The soft keys return to the operating as the operation selection keys.

160

B62564E1/02

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

9.5 MULTIEDIT FUNCTION

The multiedit function allows two programs to be edited at the same time by displaying them in the left and right halves of the program text screen.

9.5.1 Operation and Display Transition

PROGRAM
01234 ; .................... ; ........... ; ................ ; ........ ;

01234 N12345
................ ; ........... ; .................... ; ........ ; ............... ;

The screen can be divided into left and right areas for multiediting only when the program text screen is displayed. The screen can be divided into left and right areas regardless of whether it is also divided into upper and lower areas. The screen can be divided into left and right and upper and lower areas at the same time.

POSITI ON

PROGRA OFFSET PRGRAM SETTIN M CHECK G

SERVIC E

MESSAG E

CHAPTE R

<Function menu key>

ALTER INSERT

<Operation menu key>

SEARCH BKWRD REWIND DRCTRY MULTI SEARCH MEMORY EDIT WORD EDIT

DELETE DELETE BACK

<MULTI END>
PROGRAM
01234 ; .................... ; ........... ; ................ ; ........ ;

<MULTI EDIT>
01234 N12345
05678 ; ........... ; .................... ; ........ ; ............... ;

MULTI RIGHT END /LEFT

<Operation menu key>

Press the MULTI EDIT key. Enter Oxxxx from the MDI panel, then press the EXEC key. (This is the same operation as for starting background editing.) In this example, O5678 is entered. When the multiedit mode starts, the screen is divided into left and right areas for displaying two programs at the same time. The program to be edited is displayed in green. (Initially, the program on the right is indicated as the target program). A rogram on the left can be made the target program by pressing the RIGHT/LEFT key. Each program can be edited as usually, except that it is displayed on only half the screen.

161

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

<Operation menu key>
COPY MOVE MERGE CHANG E

B62564E1/02

<COPY> <MOVE> <Operation menu key>

TO KEY BUFFER TO PRO GRAM

(Not displayed when MOVE is pressed)

<TO PROGRAM> (Not displayed when MOVE is pressed)

~BOT TOM ALL RIGHT /LEFT

Press the operation menu key a few times. Until the soft keys for extended part program editing appear. Copy and move operations can now be performed between both the left and right programs. Merge and replacement operations conform to the standard extended part program editing specifications. When the COPY or MOVE key is pressed, the soft key indications change (same as standard indications). When the <TO PROGRAM> key is pressed, the soft key indications change (same as standard indications). Copying into the keyin buffer (TO KEY BUFFER) conform to standard extended part program editing specifications.

CUR SOR~

~CUR SOR

<RIGHT/LEFT>
PROGRAM
01234 ; .................... ; ........... ; ................ ; ........ ;

<RIGHT/LEFT>
01234 N12345
05678 ; ........... ; .................... ; ........ ; ............... ;

Pressing the RIGHT/LEFT key switches the program to be edited (the source of copy and move operation). The program to be edited is displayed in green and the other program is displayed in white.

CUR~ SOR

~CUR SOR

~BOT TOM

ALL

RIGHT /LEFT

<CURSOR ~>

Move the cursor to the start point, then press the CURSOR ~ key. The soft key indications change.

162

B62564E1/02
CUR~ SOR ~CUR SOR ~BOT TOM ALL RIGHT /LEFT

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

PROGRAM
01234 ; .................... ; ........... ;

<A CURSOR>, <A BOTTOM>, or <ALL> Move the cursor to the end point, then press the ~ CURSOR key. To specify the end point as the end of the program, press the ~ BOTTOM key. To copy the entire program, do not specify the start point. Simply press the ALL key. As shown in this example, when the target program to be edited is changed to the other program after the COPY or MOVE key was pressed, the other program automatically becomes the target program (the destination program for copy or move operation). To change the destination program for copy and move operations to the other program, press the RIGHT/LEFT key. Each time the CONFIRM key is pressed, the cursor moves alternately to the start point and end point of the copy or movement source range. This is done so that the user can check the range before starting a copy or move operation. Move the cursor to the target destination position, then press the EXEC key. To create a separate program from the specified copy or movement source range and register it, press the PROG# key, enter a program number, then press the EXEC key. The screen to the left shows that area A of program 01234 has been copied or moved to program 05678.

01234 N12345
05678 ; ........... ; .................... ; ........ ; ............... ;

EXEC

(PROG #)

RIGHT /LEFT

<EXEC>
PROGRAM
01234 ; .................... ; ........... ;

01234 N12345
05678 ; ........... ; .................... ; ........ ; ............... ;

COPY

MOVE

MERGE

CHANG E

9.5.2 Remarks
(1) The <RIGHT/LEFT> key enables the user to select the target program from the two programs displayed during multiediting. When the target program is switched after the <COPY> or <MOVE> key is pressed, the target program is switched automatically after the range is specified i.e., the target program is switched to the program selected as the target program when a copy or move was specified. (2) When multiediting is terminated, and the normal screen mode is restored, the program on the left is displayed regardless of which program was been selected as the target program. To execute a program created and selected in the right area in the memory mode, it must be selected and displayed in the left area of the screen. (3) The program directory screen is automatically switched to the program text screen after a program search terminates on the program directory screen.

163

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

B62564E1/02

9.6 Collating Programs

(1) Establish the status in which part programs can be edited. (See Section 9.1.) (2) Press the operation menu key to switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys. (3) Press the VERIFY key. (4) i) To collate all the part programs on the tape with the programs in memory, press the ALL key. ii) To collate one part program on the tape with the programs in memory, press the 1PRGRM key. iii) To start collation from the character indicated by the cursor in the currently selected memory program, press the CURSOR~ key. The CURSOR~ key, however, can only be used when collating programs a second time because the previous collation failed. (5) To cancel program collation, press the STOP key. When this key is pressed, collating the remaining part programs with the programs in memory cannot be restarted. (6) When program collation terminates, the soft keys return to operating as the operation selection keys. (7) If program collation is unsuccessful, the message and the CANCEL soft key are displayed. Pressing the CANCEL key releases the alarm. (8) To restart program collation using the CURSOR~ key, perform the following: i) Select the program screen without cancelling the alarm. The contents of the tape buffer are displayed. The block where a collation mismatch occurred is displayed on the first line. ii) Cancel the alarm and reselect the program screen. The memory contents are displayed, starting at the block where the collation mismatch occurred. iii) The cursor is positioned at the word where the collation mismatch occurred. iv) Move the cursor to the beginning of the next block. (If a collation mismatch occurs in the word immediately before EOB, move the cursor to the next block but one.) v) Press the CURSOR~ key. vi) For the data buffer, program collation is automatically restarted at the beginning of the next block. 9" CRT operation selection keys
CONDENS DELFILE READ PUNCH VERIFY +

9" CRT operation guidance keys displayed when the VERIFY key is pressed
A L L 1-PRGRM CURSOR~ (FILE#)

14" CRT operation selection keys

CONDENDELETE READ SE FILE PUNCH VERIFY COPY MOVE MERGE INS_TIM CHANGE +

14" CRT operation guidance keys displayed when the VERIFY key is pressed
ALL I_PROG CURSOR HERE RAM (FILE #)

164

B62564E1/02

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

9.7 Part Program Output

This section explains the following operations: 1 Outputting all the part programs 2 Outputting the currently selected part program 3 Outputting the specified part program (1) Establish the status in which part programs can be edited. (See Section 9.1.) (2) Set whether to use the EIA or ISO code as the punch code. (See Section 10.3.) (3) Press the operation menu key to switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys. (4) Press the PUNCH key. (5) i) When outputting all the part programs Press the ALL key. Outputting all the part programs is started. ii) When outputting the currently selected part program Press the THIS key. Outputting the currently selected part program is started. iii) When outputting the specified part program Press the (PROG#) key, enter the program number, then press the EXEC key. Outputting the specified part program is started. iv) Press the CURSOR ~ key to output the specified part program from the position where the cursor is located. (6) To cancel part program output, press the STOP key. When this key is pressed, outputting the remaining part programs cannot be restarted. When the PAUSE key is pressed, the end of block (EOB) code is output, part program output temporarily stops, and the following soft keys are displayed: EXEC EX-SNGL %-FEED 9" CRT operation selection keys
CONDENS DELFILE READ PUNCH VERIFY +

9" CRT soft keys displayed when the PUNCH key is pressed
A L L THIS (PROG#) (FILE#)

14" CRT operation selection keys

CONDEN DELETE READ SE FILE PUNCH VERIF COPY MOVE MERGE INS_TIM CHANGE +

14" CRT soft keys displayed when the PUNCH key is pressed
ALL THIS (PROG #) CUSSOR (FILE ~ #)

When the %FEED key is pressed, the end of record (EOR) code and feed codes are output and part program output is terminated. When the EXSNGL key is pressed, part program output is continued until the EOB code is encountered. When the EXEC key is pressed, part program output is restarted. Feed code output can be terminated by pressing the NOFEED key when an unpunched feed code is being output to the beginning or end of the tape. When part program output terminates, the soft keys return to the operating as operation selection keys.

165

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

B62564E1/02

9.8 Background Editing

If the operation mode is other than the EDIT mode, part programs can be stored and edited in the background at any time. Alarms or warnings that occur when part programs are being stored or edited in the background do not affect the foreground operations at all. Conversely, alarms that occur in the foreground do not affect part program storage and editing in the background. 1 Starting background editing (1) Establish the status in which part programs can be stored and edited. (See Section 9.1.) An operating mode other than the EDIT mode, however, must be selected. Also set the I/O interface for background. (See Section 10.3.) (2) Press the operation menu key to switch the soft keys to operation selection keys. (3) Press the BGEDIT key or BACK EDIT soft key to switch the soft keys to the operation guidance keys. (4) To select the part program previously edited in the background, press the PRVPRG key. The program previously edited in the background is displayed and the soft keys return to operating as the operation selection keys. Step (5) is not necessary. (5) To select a part program, press the (PROG#) key, enter its program number, then press the EXEC key. The selected program is displayed and the soft keys return to operating as the operation selection keys. PROGRAM (BGEDIT), indicating that part programs can be stored and edited in background, is displayed at the top right corner of the CRT. (6) For the exact operations of part program storage and editing, see each item. 2 Terminating background editing (1) Press the operation menu key to switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys. (2) Press the BGEND key to terminate background editing. 9" CRT operation selection keys
ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT-WRD BG-EDIT +

9" CRT operation guidance keys (operation selection keys)

(PROG #) PRV-PRG

14" CRT operation selection keys

ALTER INSERT DELETE DELETE BACK WORD EDIT SEARCH BKWRD REWIND DRCTRY SEARCH MEMORY

14" CRT operation guide keys

(PROG #) PRVIOS PRGRAM

166

B62564E1/02

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

9.9 Number of Programs that can be Registered

The maximum number of programs that can be registered is either 100, 400, or 1000, depending on the length of part program storage.

9.10 Length of Part Program Storage

Any of the following part program storage lengths can be selected: 80 m, 160 m, 320 m, 640 m, 1280 m, 2560 m, and 5120 m NOTE Depending on what option is specified, the part program storage length may decrease.

(1) Custom macro common variables Table 9.10 (a) Custom Macro Common Variables and Part Program Storage Length that Decrease Part program storage length that decreases 0m 0m 2.2m 7.4m

Common variable Common variable A Common variable B Common variable C Common variable D (2) Number of offset pairs

Remarks #100 to #149, #500 to #540 #100 to #199, #500 to #599 #100 to #199, #500 to #699 #100 to #199, #500 to #999

Table 9.10 (b) Offset Pairs and Part Program Storage Length that Decreases Part program storage length that decreases 0m 0m 1.5m 4.4m 10.3m 0m 1.5m 3.7m 10.3m 22.0m 0m 3.7m 8.1m 22.0m 44.7m Geometry and G d wear are distinguished distinguished. Cutter diameter and tool length are distinguished. G Geometry and d wear are distinguished. G Geometry and d wear are not distinguished.

Offset memory Number of offset pairs 32 99 A 200 499 999 32 99 B 200 499 999 32 99 C 200 499 999 (3) Tool life management

Remarks

The part program storage length is reduced by 5.9 m. When the number of tool life management pairs is 512, the part program storage length is reduced by 45 m. (4) Tool offsets using tool numbers The part program storage length is reduced by 14 m. (5) Addition of the number of work coordinate system pairs The part program storage length is reduced by 4.4 m.

167

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

B62564E1/02

9.11 Extended Part Program Editing

The extended part program editing function performs the following operations on the programs in memory through the MDI panel: (1) Copying or moving all or part of a program into the program buffer or keyin buffer (2) Merging two programs into one (3) Changing the word or address specified in the program The extended part program editing function simplifies creation of a new identical program with the original program being left as is, and hence is useful when creating a program containing similar parts. This function can also be used to change the program command sequence, command values, addresses, and other items. Extended part programs can be edited only on the program screen or program list display screen in the EDIT, MDI, or background editing mode. Note, however, that the program list display screen cannot be used in the MDI mode. COPY MOVE MERGE CHANGE

TO-BUFF

TO-PROG

WORD

~EOB

CURSOR~

~CURSOR

BOTTOM

ALL

(PROG#)

EXEC

STOP
* *

In the MDI mode, a program can be copied only into the keyin buffer. When the program list screen is displayed, a program can be copied only into another program.

168

B62564E1/02 9.11.1 Copying and moving a program

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

(1) Changing the 9 CRT soft keys during operation The 9 CRT soft keys change as shown in the figure below. The arrow () indicates the sequence in which the soft keys change. (The arrows in the figures on the next and subsequent pages have the same meaning.) 1 Coping a program (COPY) COPY MOVE MERGE CHANGE

TO-BUFF

TO-PROG

WORD

~EOB

CURSOR~

~CURSOR

BOTTOM

ALL

(PROG#)

EXEC

STOP * In the MDI mode, a program can be copied only into the keyin buffer. * When the program list screen is displayed, a program can be copied only into another program.

169

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

2 Moving a program COPY MOVE MERGE

B62564E1/02

CHANGE

TO-BUFF

TO-PROG

WORD

~EOB

CURSOR~

~CURSOR

BOTTOM

ALL

(PROG#)

EXEC

STOP * In the MDI mode, a program can be copied only into the keyin buffer. * When the program list screen is displayed, a program can be copied only into another program.

170

B62564E1/02
(2) Copying or moving one program into another 1 Copying the whole program

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

Press the soft keys [COPY], [TOPROG], [ALL], and [(PROG#)] in that order, then enter the program number and press the soft key [EXEC]. OXXXX O****

A Copy

Program XXXX is copied into new program ****. The copied program is the same as the original program but with a different program number. 2 Copying or moving part of a program Press the soft keys [COPY] or [MOVE], [TOPROG], [CURSOR~], [~CURSOR] or [~BOTTOM], and [(PROG#)] in that order, then enter the program number and press the soft key EXEC. OXXXX A Start point OXXXX A B O****

B Copy End point C

Program part B of program XXXX is copied into new program ****. That is, the portion from the start point to the end point of program XXXX is copied into O****. The program in which an editing range is specified does not change before or after it is copied. OXXXX A Start point C B Move End point C OXXXX A B O****

Program part B of program XXXX is deleted and moved to new program ****. That is, the portion from the start point to the end point in program OXXXX is moved to O****. The moved portion of the program in which an editing range is specified disappear after movement.

171

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

B62564E1/02

Press the soft key (PROG#) or numeric key 0, then enter the number of the new program to be created using copying and movement. When numeric key 0 is pressed or when program number 0 already exists, however, a warning is issued. When the soft key [CURSOR~] is pressed, the cursor position is set as the start point of the editing range. When [~CURSOR] is pressed, the cursor position is set as the end point of the editing range. When [~BOTTOM] is pressed, the end of the program is set as the end point of the editing range. NOTE 1 [CURSOR~] can be used to set the start point of the editing range any number of times before the end point of the editing range is set by [~CURSOR] or [~BOTTOM]. NOTE 2 If the end point of the editing range is set without the start point being set, a warning is issued. NOTE 3 If the program number position is specified although the start point of the editing range is after the end point, a warning issued during execution. NOTE 4 The set start and end points of the editing range are effective until they are cancelled. The start and end points are cancelled in the following cases: When editing (except for word search, rewind and search bottom) is performed during insertion, deletion, or alteration after the start or end point has been set. Or when a program merge position is specified after the start or end point has been set When the soft keys return to operating as the operation selection keys after the start and end points have been set. However, if the soft keys return to operating as the operation selection keys after only the start point has been set, the start point is not cancelled. NOTE 5 If the area becomes insufficient when a program is being copied, a warning occurs, and copying is suspended. NOTE 6 In background editing, it is only possible to copy a whole program provided the program is selected in foreground editing and it is not in the reset or rewind status. Otherwise, a warning is issued. NOTE 7 In the MDI mode, a program can be copied and moved into the keyin buffer only. NOTE 8 Copying or moving part of a program is possible only when there are three or more remaining registered programs. NOTE 9 If the power is turned off while copying or moving part of a program, the source program may be divided into two and the program number of the latter half may become 0. In this case, change the number 0 to another number and merge the programs.

(3) Copying or moving a program into the keyin buffer 1 Copying or moving the word indicated by the cursor Press the soft keys [COPY] or [MOVE], [TOBUFF], and [WORD] in that order. 2 Copying or moving the words from the cursor position to the end of block (EOB) Press the soft keys [COPY] or [MOVE], [TOBUFF], and [EOB] in that order. NOTE 1 The program is always copied or moved into the keyin buffer in units of words. Words longer than the keyin buffer length cannot be copied and moved. NOTE 2 The program is always copied or moved into the keyin buffer in the addition format. If words are already set in the keyin buffer, the program must be copied or moved one word at a time. NOTE 3 The program list screen cannot be used to copy or move a program into the keyin buffer.

172

B62564E1/02 9.11.2 Merging programs (MERGE)

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

(1) Changing the 9 CRT soft keys during operation COPY MOVE MERGE CHANGE

(PROG#)

CURSOR>

BOTTOM

DLT-ORG

CPY-ORG

STOP (2) Merging programs by copying the source program Press the soft keys [CHANGE] and [(PROG#)] and enter the program number. Then press the soft keys [CURSOR~], [BOTTOM], and [CPYORG] in that order. OXXXX A Merge position C B Move O**** OXXXX A B O****

Program XXXX and program **** are merged. O**** does not change before or after the programs are merged.

173

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

(3) Merging programs by deleting the source program

B62564E1/02

Press the soft keys [MERGE], [(PROG#)], [CURSOR>] or [BOTTOM], and [DLTORG] in that order. OXXXX A Merge position C B Move B O**** OXXXX A

Program XXXX and program **** are merged. O**** disappears after the programs have been merged. When [CURSOR>] is pressed in (2) or (3) above, the position immediately after the cursor is set as the merge position. When [BOTTOM] is pressed, the end of the program is set as the merge position. NOTE 1 If the soft key [MERGE] is pressed after the source program number has been set in the keyin buffer, programs must always be merged according to (2) Merging programs by copying the source program. NOTE 2 If program number 0 already exists, a warning is issued. NOTE 3 If the area becomes insufficient when programs are being merged, a warning is issued, and merging the programs is suspended. NOTE 4 For merging programs by copying the merge source program, at least four remaining registered programs are needed. For merging programs by deleting the source program, at least three remaining registered programs are needed. NOTE 5 If the power is turned off when programs are being merged, the source program may be divided into two and the program number of the latter half may become 0. In this case, change the number 0 to another number and merge programs. NOTE 6 Programs cannot be merged in the MDI mode.

174

B62564E1/02 9.11.3 Changing words and addresses (CHANGE)

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

(1) Changing the 9 CRT soft keys during operation COPY MOVE MERGE CHANGE

(WORD)

(ADRES)

(WORD)

(ADRES)

EXEC

EX-SNGL

STOP

* When the soft key [EX-SNGL] is pressed, the soft keys automatically change after the search.

EXEC

EX-SNGL

SKIP

STOP

(2) Changing words 1 Changing one word to either another word or multiple continuous words 2 Changing multiple continuous words to either one word or multiple continuous words Press the soft keys [CHANGE], [(WORD)], [(WORD)], and [EXEC] or [EXSNGL] in that order. Enter the word or words to be changed at the first (WORD) and enter the new word or words at the second (WORD).

175

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

(3) Changing addresses

B62564E1/02

Press the soft keys [CHANGE], [(ADRES)], [(ADRES)], and [EXEC] or [EXSNGL] in that order. Enter the address or addresses to be changed at the first (ADRES) and enter the new address or addresses at the second (ADRES). In (2) and (3), the first comma encountered after the first character is regarded as the delimiter between the word or address to be changed and the new word or address. Examples are given below. X100, Y100 : X100 is changed to Y100. X1Y0, C10 : X1Y0 is changed to ,C10. , C10,Y100 : ,C10 is changed to Y100. ,,, C10 : , is changed to ,C10. When [EXEC] is pressed, all the specified words or addresses after the cursor are replaced. When [EX SNGL] (single block change) is pressed, the first specified word or address after the cursor is searched for and the tool stops. After the tool has stopped, change or no change can be selected. NOTE 1 If two or more words to be changed include the end of block (EOB) and are followed by other words, they cannot be changed. (E.g.: X100;N10,X200;N20 caused a warning to be issued.) NOTE 2 If [CHANGE] is pressed after the word or words to be changed have been set in the keyin buffer, singleblock change is applied. NOTE 3 When changing words or addresses terminates normally, the total number of changed words or addresses is displayed at the beginning of the keyin buffer display line. NOTE 4 The program list display screen cannot be used to change words or addresses.

176

B62564E1/02

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

9.11.4 Automatically inserting sequence numbers

In the part program storage and edit mode (including the background edit mode), a sequence number can be automatically inserted in each block in a fixed increment when a program is created using the MDI panel. When the INSERT key is pressed after the end of block (EOB) has been entered, the sequence number obtained by adding a fixed increment to the current sequence number is automatically inserted into memory with address N. The sequence number, however, is automatically inserted following EOB only when EOB is inserted at the end of the program (i.e., when the cursor is positioned before %). If EOB is inserted at the middle of the program, a sequence number is not automatically inserted. 1 To automatically insert a sequence number when a program is created using the MDI panel, first set the SEQ bit (bit 1) of parameter No. 0010 to 1. Next set the initial value of the sequence number in parameter No. 0031 and then the increment in parameter No. 0032. 2 Select the part program storage and edit (EDIT) mode or set the status in which a part program can be edited in the background. 3 Enter the program number and press the INSERT soft key or the INPUT/INSERT hard key. 4 Enter EOB and press the INSERT soft key or the INPUT/INSERT hard key. EOB is loaded into memory. If 10 is set as the initial value, N10 is simultaneously inserted into the next line and displayed.

5 Insert data of either one block or two or more blocks in the format in which the data is delimited by EOB. 6 Enter EOB and press the INSERT soft key or the INPUT/INSERT hard key. EOB is loaded into memory. If 2 is set as the increment, N12 is simultaneously inserted into the next line and displayed.

7 To not insert N12 into the next block in step 6, press the DELETE key to delete N12.

177

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

B62564E1/02

NOTE 1 When data of two or more blocks is inserted, the sequence number is inserted only next to the EOB code of the last block.

NOTE 2 If the sequence number to be automatically inserted exceeds 99999, it returns to the initial value. NOTE 3 Even if an EOB code (M30, etc.) is inserted at the end of the program, a sequence number is automatically inserted. Use the DELETE key to delete the sequence number. NOTE 4 To change a sequence number, move the cursor to the last sequence number of the program (immediately before %), enter the sequence number to be changed, and press the ALTER key. Subsequently, this sequence number plus an increment is automatically inserted. When N120 is entered and the ALTER key is pressed, for example, the sequence number is changed to N120 and subsequently updated, such as 122, 124, 126, ...

178

B62564E1/02

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

The values in the following examples are valid for part program editing but cannot be used as the first digits of the subsequent sequence numbers to be automatically inserted: Example 1 N123456 ALTER: Digit overflow (more than five digits) Example 2 N1234X100 ALTER: There is data other than the N command. Example 3 N100 N1234 ALTER: There is data other than the N command. Example 4 N100 ALTER: There is data other than numeric characters after the N command. NOTE 5 As shown in the figure below, the first digit of the sequence number to be automatically inserted can also be changed by deleting the last sequence number and inserting a new sequence number.

NOTE 6 Leave an allowance of at least six characters at the end of the keyin buffer.

179

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

B62564E1/02

9.12 Playback
When the playback option is selected, teaching in the job mode and teaching in the handle mode become available. In these modes, the tool position obtained through manual operation can be loaded into memory as the program position and a program can be created. To load words (O, N, G, R, F, M, S, T, P, Q, and EOB, etc.) other than axis names into memory, execute the same load operations as in the EDIT mode. The tool position can be loaded into memory as follows: 1 Select teaching in the jog mode or teaching in the handle mode. 2 Move the tool to the desired position. 3 Press a soft key to select the program. 4 Enter address X. 5 Press the soft key INSERT to load the tool position of the Xaxis into memory. Example X10.521 (when the absolute position is entered in mm) X10.521 (contents loaded into memory)

6 Likewise, enter Z and press INSERT. The tool position of the Zaxis is loaded into memory. NOTE 1 When a value is entered and INSERT is pressed after an axis address (X, Y, or Z, etc.) has been entered, the tool position plus the entered value is loaded into memory. This operation is used to compensate the tool position using keys. If the entered value exceeds the maximum value, the tool position cannot be loaded into memory. If the entered value includes a decimal point and is less than the least input increment, it is rounded to the least input increment. Example The tool position is assumed to be 0. (Least input increment: 1/1000) Entered value Z123456.78 Z1.2345678 Value loaded Cannot be loaded Z1.235

NOTE 2 All the coordinates loaded into memory in this operation are treated as absolute coordinates. A value with a decimal point is loaded as a coordinate. If the coordinate to be loaded is 0, however, no decimal point is assigned to it. Example Coordinate X000.000 X000.987 X12345678 Value loaded X0 X0.987 X12345.678

NOTE 3 To load the commands inserted before and after the tool position into memory, execute the same load operations as in the EDIT mode. NOTE 4 Numeric keys cannot be used to load values consisting of more than eight digits into memory. NOTE 5 On the 9 CRT, up to 79 characters can be edited at a time. On the 14 CRT, up to 74 characters can be edited at a time. If the number of characters exceeds these limits, clear all the keyed in data once. NOTE 6 Do not edit macro statements in the playback mode. For example, in the macro statement #1=#1XOR #2, the exclusiveOR (XOR) instruction is processed as address X. NOTE 7 Playback cannot be applied to the pararell axes.

180

B62564E1/02
Example of Operation (Example) 01234 Z___ ; P0 Z___ ;P1 N3 G01Z___F30 0; N4 M02 ; X N1 G92X___ N2 G00G90X___

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

P0

P2 P2 Z

The program in the above example can be loaded into memory as follows: 1 Select teaching in the handle mode. 2 Use the manual pulse generator to position the tool at P0. 3 Select the program to be loaded. 4 Load the program number into memory. 5 Enter address N and the value 1, then press INSERT. 6 Enter address G and the value 29, then press INSERT. G92 is loaded into memory. 7 Enter in address X and press INSERT. Likewise, enter address Z and press INSERT. Then press EOB. The P0 tool position is loaded into memory. 8 Use the manual pulse generator to position the tool at P1. 9 Enter address G and the value 00, the press INSERT. Then enter address G90, press INSERT, enter address X, press INSERT, and enter address Z and EOB in that order. The P1 tool position is loaded into memory. 10 Position the tool at P2. 11 Enter address G and the value 01, then press INSERT. Then enter address Z, press INSERT, and enter address F, the value 300, and EOB in that order. Block 3 is loaded into memory. 12 Load N4 into memory. Enter address M, the value 02 and EOB to load the last block of N4M02; into memory. This completes loading the entire program into memory. The program in memory can be checked in the TEACH IN mode in the same way as in the EDIT mode. Also as in the EDIT mode, pressing INSERT for each word is not always needed. For example, the keystrokes N, 1, G, 9, 2, X, Z, EOB, INSERT can be substituted for steps 5 to 7.

181

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

B62564E1/02

9.13 Format Guidance

9.13.1 NC format guidance
As a part programming guide using the NC format, the following two types of guidance are available: 1) Guidance to list of G codes 2) Standard format guidance to one block for G code 1) Guidance to list of G codes To use the programming guide by displaying the guidance to the list of G codes on the CRT, the operation is as follows. 1 Select the program display screen. 2 Enable the part program storage and edit operation by either selecting the program edit (EDIT) mode or assuming the background edit state. 3 Keyinput G, and then depress the <HELP> key. In the program display screen, the <HELP> key has a role to display the guidance too.
PROGRAM(MEMORY) O1234 N00000

O1234 N10 ; N20 G00 G97 T0808 S360 M42 ; N30 X150. Z182. ;

>G EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** *** ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +

4 The guidance to the list of G codes is displayed in the lower half of the program display pattern. Five G codes and the meaning of each of them are displayed at once.

PROGRAM(MEMORY)

O1234 N00000

O1234 N10 ; N20 G00 G97 T0808 S360 M42 ; N30 X150. Z182. ; % (G CODE G00 : G01 : G02 : G03 : G04 : GUIDANCE) POSITIONING LINEAR IPL. CIRCULAR/HERICAL IPL. CW CIRCULAR/HERICAL IPL. CCW DWELL

>G EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** *** ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +

5 It is a possible to turn the page of the guidance to the list of G codes by depressing the <> key or the <> key. The screen shown at the right is displayed when the <> key is depressed once from the state 4.

PROGRAM(MEMORY)

O1234 N00000

O1234 N10 ; N20 G00 G97 T0808 S360 M42 ; N30 X150. Z182. ; % (G CODE G09 : G10 : G10.1: G17 : G18 : GUIDANCE) EXACT STOP DATA SETTING DATA SETTING(PC) XY PLANE ZX PLANE

>G EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** *** ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +

182

B62564E1/02

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

2) Standard format guidance to one block for G code To use the programming guide by displaying on the CRT the standard format guidance to one block for a certain G code, the operation is as follows. 1 Select the program display screen. 2 Enable the part program storage and edit operation by either selecting the program edit (EDIT) mode or assuming the background edit state. 3 Keyinput the G code, and then depress the <HELP> key. To display the standard format guidance to one block for G02, for example, key input <G>, <0>, <2>, and then depress the <HELP> key.
PROGRAM(MEMORY) O1234 N00000

O1234 N10 ; N20 G00 G97 T0808 S360 M42 ; N30 X150. Z182. ;

>G02_ EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** *** ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +

4 The standard format guidance to one block for the input G code is displayed in the lower half of the program display screen. Shown at the right is the standard format guidance to one block for G02 being displayed.

PROGRAM(MEMORY)

O1234 N00000

O1234 N10 ; N20 G00 G97 T0808 S360 M42 ; N30 X150. Z182. ; % (G02 : CIRCULAR/HERICAL IPL. CW) G02 X Y I J F ; (XY PLANE) G02 X Z I K F ; (ZX PLANE) G02 Y Z J K F ; (YZ PLANE) IF HERICAL IPL.,SPECIFY ONE MORE AXIS RADIUS CAN BE SPECIFIED BY R >G02_ EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** *** ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +

183

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

3) Example of NC format guidance operation

B62564E1/02

Described below is an example of part programming using the NC format guidance function. 1 Suppose that you have inserted up to G40 by the part program edit operation (see the illustration at the right), and that you became aware at the very moment to program the drilling cycle that you have forget the G code. In such a case, keyinput <G>, and depress the <HELP> key.
PROGRAM(MEMORY) O1234 N10 ; N20 G90 G00 X100. Y200. ; N30 S3000 M03 ; % O1234 N00000

>G_ EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** *** ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +

2 The guidance to the list of G codes is displayed in the lower half of the program display screen.

PROGRAM(MEMORY) O1234 N10 ; N20 G90 G00 X100. Y200. ; N30 S3000 M03 ; N40 % (G CODE G09 : G10 : G10.1: G17 : G18 : GUIDANCE) EXACT STOP DATA SETTING DATA SETTING(PC) XY PLANE ZX PLANE

O1234 N00000

>G_ EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** *** ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +

3 Search for the G code of the drilling cycle by depressing the <> key or the <> key a number of times. It is known from the guidance to the list of G codes shown at the right that the G code of the drilling cycle is G81.

PROGRAM(MEMORY) O1234 N10 ; N20 G90 G00 X100. Y200. ; N30 S3000 M03 ; N40 % (G CODE G73 : G74 : G76 : G80 : G81 : GUIDANCE) DRILLING(DEEP HOLE) TAPPING(COUNTER) BORING(FINE) CANNED CYCLE CANCEL DRILLING

O1234 N00000

>G_ EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** *** ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +

4 Keyinput <8>,<1>. Depress the <HELP> key to display the standard format guidance to the G81 block. If you know that the G code of the drilling cycle is G81 and have forgot the G81 format, omit steps (1)(3), and just depress the <HELP> key after inputting <G>, <8>,<1>.

PROGRAM(MEMORY) O1234 N10 ; N20 G90 G00 X100. Y200. ; N30 S3000 M03 ; N40 % (G CODE G73 : G74 : G76 : G80 : G81 : GUIDANCE) DRILLING(DEEP HOLE) TAPPING(COUNTER) BORING(FINE) CANNED CYCLE CANCEL DRILLING

O1234 N00000

>G81_ EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** *** ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +

184

B62564E1/02
5 The standard format guidance to the G81 block is displayed in the lower half of the screen.

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

PROGRAM(MEMORY) O1234 N10 ; N20 G90 G00 X100. Y200. ; N30 S3000 M03 ; N40 %

O1234 N00000

(G81 : DRILLING) G81 X Y Z R F L ; Z:Z POINT R:R POINT L:REPETITION TIMES (L0:DATA SET ONLY) >G81_ EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** *** ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +

6 Keyinput while referring to the guidance.

PROGRAM(MEMORY) O1234 N10 ; N20 G90 G00 X100. Y200. ; N30 S3000 M03 ; N40 %

O1234 N00000

(G81 : DRILLING) G81 X Y Z R F L ; Z:Z POINT R:R POINT L:REPETITION TIMES (L0:DATA SET ONLY) >G99G81X150.Y250.Z173.R100.F100;_ EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** *** ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +

7 Keyinput the data of one block, and then depress the soft key <INSERT>, and it will be inserted into the program. At the same time the guidance display will disappear.

PROGRAM(MEMORY)

O1234 N00000

O1234 N10 ; N20 G90 G00 X100. Y200. ; N30 S3000 M03 ; N40 G99 G81 X150. Y250. Z173. R100. F100 %

EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** *** ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +

NOTE 1 The guidance to the list of G codes does not include some G codes which are generally less frequently used, for example G31.2 (multistep skip). NOTE 2 In the standard format guidance to one block for each G code, an absolutely standard format is displayed. In some cases, therefore, it may not be necessary to program according to the guidance. NOTE 3 In the standard format guidance to one block for each G code, some word addresses have comments to explain the meaning. However, those the function of each of which is clear, such as the dimension word addresses X, Y, Z, etc., the feed rate F, the auxiliary function M, the spindle function S or the tool function T, etc., do not have comment.

185

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) 9.13.2 Format guidance with figure

B62564E1/02

The guidance to the standard format of each G code can be displayed with a figure on the CRT screen and used as a guide to the preparation of part program. The operation procedure is the same as that for the NC format guidance. Proceed in the sequence below. 1 Set the mode selector switch on the operators panel to the tape memory/edit (EDIT) mode or the background edit mode.(Refer to III, 9.8) 2 Select the program display screen. i) Press the function menu key to change the soft key to the function selection key. ii) Press the PROGRAM key to display the program. If the screen is not the one for displaying the program text, press the CHAPTER key to change the soft key to the chapter selection key, and press the TEXT key. Otherwise, press the PROGRAM key repeatedly until the text is displayed. 3 Press the operation menu key to change the soft key to operation selection key. 4 To use the format guidance with a figure for G87, for example, press the HELP key after input the G87. The description for the input G code is displayed in the upper right half of the program display screen, and the standard format guidance is displayed in the lower right half of the screen. The following drawing shows the state with the description for G87 displayed.
PROGRAM(MEMORY) O1111 ; N001 G92 N002 G90 N003 G43 N004 S30 N005 X0 Y0 Z0 ; G00 Z250.0 T11 M6 ; Z0 H11 ; M3 ; %

O1111 N00000
G87(G98) R Z (I, J) I G87(G99) R Z I I

Z R

(G87 : BORING(MANUAL)) G87 X Y Z R Q F L ; Z:Z POINT Q:SHIFT(TIPE 2) R:R POINT L:REPETITION TIMES(L0:DATA SET ONRY) >G87_ EDIT***STOP**** *** 03:16:16 LSK
ALTER INSERT DELETE DELETE BACK WORD EDIT BKWRD BKWRD REWIND DRCTRY SEARCH SEARCH MEMORY

(5) While observing the format guidance, key in the data in one block and then, press the INSERT key. The data is inserted into the program, and the guidance display disappears. When the CAN key is pressed, the formyat guidance display disappears and the display is returned to the tape memory/edit or the background edit program screen. NOTE 1 The function of format guidance with figure can be added when a 14 CRT is used. NOTE 2 Nothing is drawn for some G codes. When nothing is drawn for the G code, the message THIS G CODE HAS NO PICTURE is displayed.

186

B62564E1/02

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

9.14 Program Encryption

The types of program protection described below are enabled by setting a code specific to each machine tool builder in the system parameters. (1) Encryption After the parameters for encryption are set, the operations listed below cannot be performed for the programs in the specified protection range. (1) Program input (read) (2) Program output (punchout) (3) Program display (4) Program editing Encryption enables a custom macro program developed by a machine tool builder to be protected against inadvertent editing or alteration by end users. In addition, complete security is provided because the contents of such a program are never displayed. (2) I/O of encrypted programs A program stored in memory can be encrypted before it is punched out. A program encrypted and punched out can also be loaded into memory. An encrypted program is indecipherable when it is punched out. Therefore, the programs that require security, such as custom macro programs of a machine tool builder, can be encrypted and punched out, and the punched out data can be shipped with the machine to the end user as maintenance data. Such a punched out custom macro program enables FANUC service staff or end users rather than the service staff of the machine tool builder to restore the contents of the Bubble Memory if destroyed for some reason. (a) Parameters Data No. 2210 Data Code(PSW) Set a code. When a value other than 0 is set here, the programs are locked and the display goes blank. Setting: 0 to 99999999 Data No. 2211 Data Key(KEY) When the same value as the code is set here, the programs are unlocked. The data set here is not displayed. Setting: 0 to 99999999 Data No. 2212 Data Lower value of the program protection range (PMIN)

2213

Upper value of the program protection range (PMAX) Programs whose numbers lie within the range of values set here are locked. Set a desired upper and lower program numbers. Setting: 0 to 9999 [Example] When parameter No. 2212=7000 and parameter No. 2213=8499, programs whose numbers are from O7000 to O8499 are locked.

187

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

(i) Code (PSW) setting This parameter can be set when PSW = 0 or PSW = (KEY).

B62564E1/02

For security, no code set is displayed. To unlock the programs, set KEY to the same value as the set code. Be careful not to forget the value set as a code, otherwise the programs cannot be unlocked. If you forget the set code, it becomes necessary to clear all the programs whose numbers lie within the protection range, as described later. This operation sets PSW to 0 to release the locked state. In this case, all programs in the protection range are cleared, thus providing security. (ii) Key (KEY) setting This parameter can be set at any time. The value set is not displayed. This parameter is internally set to 0 when the power is turned on. (iii) Setting the lower value (PMIN) and upper value (PMAX) of the program protection range These parameters can be set when PSW = 0 or PSW = (KEY). When PMIN = 0 is specified, PMIN = 9000 is assumed. When PMAX = 0 is specified, PMAX = 9999 is assumed. Set values so that PMAX > PMIN. NOTE 1 Punching out and reading parameters The four parameters described above cannot be punched out or read. NOTE 2 Clearing parameters The four parameters described above are not cleared even when the parameter file is cleared during IPL state. NOTE 3 Display The contents of PSW and KEY are not displayed. However, note that when PSW = 0, the value 0 is displayed to indicate that the programs are unlocked state. NOTE 4 Setting PSW and KEY When setting PSW or KEY, pressing <+INPUT> does not add the value to the previous value, but overwrites the previous value. Example When KEY = 99, pressing 1 together with <+INPUT> sets KEY to 1, not 100 (= 99 + 1).

(b) The locked and unlocked states (i) The unlocked state Setting PSW to 0 or KEY releases the programs from the locked state. (ii) The locked state Setting PSW to other than 0 or KEY sets the program in the locked state.

188

B62564E1/02

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

(c) Relationships between program I/O and parameters (i) Punching out programs Type of operation Parameter state PSW 0 KEY PSW 0 0 P Punchout h (all) ( ll) PSW = 0 PSW = KEY Results All programs outside the specified protection range are punched out in the normal way. All programs in the specified protection range are encrypted and punched out. All programs are punched out in the normal way. All programs outside the specified protection range are punched out in the normal way. For the programs in the specified protection range, only percent signs (%) are punched out, and a warning message is output. All programs outside the specified protection range are punched out in the normal way. The programs in the specified protection range are encrypted and punched out. The specified programs are punched out in the normal way.

PSW 0 KEY Punch out Punchout (by program number) PSW 0 0

PSW = KEY

PSW = 0

(ii) Reading from tape containing encrypted programs Operation Parameter state PSW 0 0 N l operation i Normal PSW = 0 Password on tape PSW = password on tape Results The tape is read normally.

PSW 0 password on tape P/S alarm No. 580 occurs. The p password on tape p is set in d th d PSW and the t tape i is read. When the tape has been read or reading g the tape p is canceled, , the h programs are locked. l k d

NOTE 1 Password on punchedout tape Encrypted programs punched out onto tape include the encrypted code set for PSW. This encrypted code is called the password. NOTE 2 When punching out the programs on tape after encryption, set the EIA bit in parameter No. 0 to 0 to specify ISO for the punching code. If the programs are punched out with the EIA bit set to 1, P/S alarm No. 581 occurs. NOTE 3 Tape containing encrypted programs cannot be read by specifying 1 PROGRAM ADD for registering additional programs. NOTE 4 Programs outside the protection range cannot be read. NOTE 5 Tape containing encrypted programs can be read normally even in the locked state. At this time, the REP bit in parameter No. 2200 is referenced. If an attempt is made to register a program that has a program number already registered, the REP bit specifies the following operations: REP = 0: An alarm occurs. REP = 1: The existing program is deleted and the new program with the same number is registered.

(d) Verification of tape containing encrypted programs In normal tape verification, the programs in memory are checked against the encrypted programs on tape. However, note that the contents of the tape being verified are not displayed when PSW 0 KEY.

189

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

(e) Program display Locked programs are not displayed. Only unlocked programs are displayed. NOTE

B62564E1/02

Locking and unlocking programs do not change the display immediately. The display conforms to the program protection only after another operation, such as program search, is performed.

(f) Program editing and deletion Locked programs cannot be edited or deleted, except according to the following special procedure for deleting locked programs. [Deleting locked programs] 1 Turn on power while holding down both the <0> and <CAN> keys. 2 The message ALL LOCKED PROGRAMS DELETE OK? appears. Enter Y. All locked programs are deleted and PSW is set to 0, producing the unlocked state. When N is entered, the locked programs are not deleted.

190

B62564E1/02

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

9.15 Time Stamp Function

When a program is executed, the time the machining specified by the main program is executed is displayed on the program time display screen. The machining times of up to 10 main programs are displayed in hours, minutes, and seconds. When more than 10 programs are executed, the machining times are discarded in the order of execution. The time from the initial start after a reset in the memory operation mode until another reset is monitored. If no reset occurs during operation, the time from the start until M02 or M30 is monitored. The time does not include the time during which operation is suspended, but does include the time spent waiting for the M/S/T/B function to complete. The displayed machining time data can be stamped, i.e. inserted, as a comment in a program stored in memory after the program number. Instead of the program tape length data (amount of memory used), it is possible to display the machining time inserted after a program number on the program directory screen. Whether to display the machining time or tape length is specified by a parameter. The machining time of each program can therefore be used as reference information when planning processes in the factory. Machining time calculation and display 1 Select the memory operation mode, and press the <reset> key. 2 Select the program screen, and select the program for which machining time is to be calculated. 3 Execute the program and perform the actual machining. 4 If the graphic drawing screen is available, select it. The machining time is then displayed, continually being updated, together with a machining path. 5 When the <reset> key is pressed or M02 or M30 is executed, monitoring the machining time terminates. When the machining time display screen is selected, the elapsed machining time is displayed together with the number of the main program executed. The machining time displayed on the graphic drawing screen is reset to 0 when the operation is terminated.

191

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

B62564E1/02

6 If the machining time needs to be calculated for additional programs, repeat steps (1) to (5). Then the machining time display screen sequentially displays the program numbers and machining times of the main programs executed. Note, however, that the machining time cannot be displayed for more than 10 main programs. If this number is exceeded, the machining times of earlier programs are discarded. The screens below show the change in the display of the machining time. The lefthand screen displays the machining times for 10 main programs (O0020, O0040, ..., 00200). When the machining time is calculated for an additional program (O0220), the display changes to the righthand screen.

Stamping the machining time (inserting the machining time in a program as a comment) 1 Before the elapsed machining time can be inserted as a comment in the program, the machining time of the program must be displayed on the machining time display screen. The machining time display screen must first be checked to see if the program number for which the machining time is to be stamped is displayed. 2 After setting the part program storage and edit mode or the background editing mode, select the program screen, then select the program in which machining time is to be inserted. Suppose that the machining time of program number O0100 is displayed on the machining time display screen. 3 Press the <operation menu> key, and switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys. Then, press the <INSTIM> key. The program is rewound, and the machining time of the program is inserted after the program number.

192

B62564E1/02

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

4 The machining time is inserted into a program after an existing comment, if any, in the block containing the program number.

5 When bit TIM of parameter 0011 is set to 1, the machining time inserted as a comment in a program can be displayed instead of the amount of memory used. The data is displayed on the program directory screen listing the program numbers and program names.

NOTE 1 When a program is stopped due to an alarm, the machining time continues to be monitored until the alarm is reset. NOTE 2 If the bit for M30 in parameter No. 2400 is set to 1, the FIN completion signal is returned without resetting the control unit with M30. This enables a program to be executed repeatedly from the beginning. In this case, the machining time stops to be monitored when the FIN signal is returned. NOTE 3 The machining time of a program cannot be inserted in a program with the <INSTIM> key unless the machining time is displayed on the machining time display screen. NOTE 4 When the machining time inserted in a program is displayed on the program directory screen, if the comment after the program number consists only of the machining time, the machining time is displayed in the program name field as well as the machining time display field. NOTE 5 If machining times are inserted in programs as shown in the examples below, the program directory screen does not display the machining times.

193

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

Example 1 When the program name exceeds 16 characters

B62564E1/02

Example 2 When more than one machining time is inserted

(The first machining time item is inserted.)

194

B62564E1/02

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

Example 3 When the format of the inserted machining time is changed from the valid format hhhHmmMssS (a threedigit number followed by H, a twodigit number followed by M, and a twodigit number followed by S)

NOTE 6 If the machining time is calculated erroneously, for example, by pressing the <reset> key during program execution, calculate the correct machining time by reexecuting the program. When two or more machining times are displayed for a program on the machining time display screen, the latest machining time is inserted in the program.

195

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

B62564E1/02

9.16 Simple Conversational Programming

This function helps the user to develop an NC machining program by selecting menu items displayed on the CRT screen and entering data according to menu screens, instead of by programming in the NC format. For example, the screen displays menu items such as the position and depth of drilling. The user can create a program simply by entering desired values in response to the menu items. For detailed information about this function, refer to the relevant manual of the machine tool builder. NOTE This function can only be used with the 9 CRT/MDI, not with the 14 CRT/MDI.

This section first explains the procedure by which users create a program using this function. This section then explains the procedure for machine tool builders to create a machining menu incorporating their proprietary machining expertise by using tools such as custom macros, and thus to implement their own conversational functions. (1) Outline of simple conversational programming 1 Select the part program storage and edit mode (EDIT). Select the simple conversational schedule screen.

Schedule machining by selecting machining menu items in the order of machining.

Select the simple conversational data input screen.

Enter data for each machining menu item.

Select the memory command mode. Execute the machining program.

196

B62564E1/02

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

(2) Configuration of simple conversational programming Programs that can be developed by simple conversational programming, (hereafter referred to as simple conversational programs,) are configured as follows. (a) Number of programs Up to four simple conversational programs can be held in memory. (b) Number of blocks Each simple conversational program can contain 16 blocks. Each machining menu item prepared by a machine tool builder constitutes one block. This block can be considered as being equivalent to an NCformat program block starting and ending with EOB codes. (c) Number of words Each block can contain up to 16 words. Each machining menu item requires several data input items for machining. Suppose that data items such as hole depth and spindle speed are provided for the menu item, tapping. In this case, each data item constitutes one word. This word can be considered as being equivalent to an NCformat program word such as X or Y.

04 03 02 01 MENU PROGRAM

N01 N02 N03 N04 .. ..

INITIAL SET DRILLING BOLT HOLE CIRCLE TAPPING ........ ........

1 block 1 block

N04 TAPPING

N015 END PROGRAM N016

01 DEPTH 02 SPINDLE RPM .. ..

= =

1 word 1 word

15 16

= =

197

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

(3) Simple conversational schedule screen

B62564E1/02

Select the part program storage and edit mode (EDIT) and press the soft key <MNU_PRG>. Then, the simple conversational schedule screen shown below appears. The righthand side of the screen displays a menu listing drilling, tapping, and so forth. To schedule the machining, select from the menu those items that are required for machining in the order of machining. Simple conversational program number

Block numbers

Machining menu

(a) Program selection Enter a number from 1 to 4 to select the desired simple conversational program, then press the soft key <SRC_PRG>. Example When the simple conversational program having number 01 is currently selected, and the program having number 02 is to be selected (Operation 1) 1 Enter 2, then press the soft key <SRC_PRG>. INSERT DELETE SRC-PRG BLK-DAT

(Operation 2) 1 Press the soft key SRC_PRG. 2 The soft key display changes as shown below. Press <NXT_PRG>. (PROG#) NXT-PRG

(Operation 3) 1 Press the soft key <SRC_PRG>. 2 Enter 2. 3 The soft key display changes as shown below. Press <EXEC>. EXEC

198

B62564E1/02
(b) Block selection

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

Each simple conversational program can contain up to 16 blocks. The blocks are numbered N01, N02, ..., N16 in the order of machining. A block is currently selected when the cursor is placed over the block. The desired block is selected by pressing the cursor keys <> or <>. One screen displays the first eight blocks (block numbers N01 to N08) and the other screen displays the last eight blocks (block numbers N09 to N16). To change screens, position the cursor at the last block on the screen (N08 or N16) and press the cursor key <>. The other screen appears with the cursor positioned at the first block (N09 or N01). Alternatively, position the cursor at the first block on the screen (N01 or N09) and press the cursor key <>. The other screen appears with the cursor positioned at the last block (N08 or N16). The screen can also be switched using the page keys <> or <>. (On the compact 9 CRT/MDI, press the cursor keys <> and <> at the same time, or press <> and <> at the same time.) (c) Positioning the cursor at the first block When the <reset> key is pressed, the cursor moves to the first block (N01) regardless of on which block number the cursor is positioned. (d) Machining menu display Up to 16 machining menu items can be set. The number of prepared menu items depends on the machine tool builder. Each menu item is numbered. Menu item numbers 01 to 08 are displayed on one screen and menu item numbers 09 to 16 are displayed on another screen. The screens are switched using the <> and <> keys. (e) Block editing (i) Deletion of all blocks 1 Press the soft key <DELETE>. INSERT DELETE SRC-PRG BLK-DAT

2 The soft key display changes as shown below. Press <ALL>. ALL THIS

3 The contents of all blocks from numbers 01 to 16 are deleted, and the blocks become empty. (ii) Deletion of one block 1 Move the cursor to the block to be deleted. 2 Press the soft key <DELETE>. INSERT DELETE SRC-PRG BLK-DAT

3 The soft key display changes as shown below. Press <THIS>. ALL THIS

4 The contents of the block where the cursor is positioned are deleted. Subsequent blocks are shifted upward by one block.

199

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

(iii) Insertion of one block 1 Move the cursor to a block where the new block is to be inserted.

B62564E1/02

2 Enter the machining menu item number to be inserted using the numeric keys. 3 Press the soft key <INSERT>. INSERT DELETE SRC-PRG BLK-DAT

4 When the block where the cursor is positioned contains no data, the machining menu item entered in step (2) is set in the block.

When the block where the cursor is placed already has a machining menu item set, that block and subsequent blocks are shifted backward by one block. The machining menu item entered in step (2) is then set in the block.

When a machining menu item number is entered in step (2), the cursor position remains unchanged if the machining menu item is not followed by an EOB code. If an EOB code is entered after the machining menu item number, the cursor moves to the next block after block insertion.

200

B62564E1/02
(iv) Insertion of two or more blocks

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

1 Move the cursor to the block where new blocks are to be inserted. 2 Enter the machining menu item numbers to be inserted in the desired order. Separate each machining menu item number with an EOB code. To insert machining menu item numbers 01, 03, and 07 successively in that order, for example, enter 01 EOB 03 EOB 07. When the last number is not followed by an EOB code, the cursor is positioned over the last block inserted. When the last number is followed by an EOB code, the cursor is positioned over the block immediately after the last block inserted. 3 Press the soft key <INSERT>. INSERT DELETE SRC-PRG BLK-DAT

4 If no machining menu item is set in the block at which the cursor is positioned or in any subsequent blocks, the machining menu items entered in step (2) are set successively starting at the first empty block.

When a machining menu item is already set in the block where the cursor is positioned or in any subsequent blocks, that block and the subsequent blocks are shifted backward by the number of inserted blocks. Then, the machining menu items entered in step (2) are set successively starting at the block where the cursor is positioned.

201

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

(v) Block replacement

B62564E1/02

When a block already containing a machining menu item is to be replaced with another machining menu item, use the procedure below. 1 Move the cursor to the block that is to be replaced. 2 First, delete the block according to the procedure in item (ii) above. 3 Then, enter a new machining menu item number, and insert the menu item at the block according to the procedure in item (iii) above. Change the machining menu item in block number N03 from 06:BOLT HOLE CIRCLE to 07:LINE AT ANGLE. (1) Position the cursor over block number N03. Press the soft key <DELETE>, then press the soft key <THIS>. Example

(2) Enter 07, then press the soft key <INSERT>.

(3) The machining menu item of block number N03 has been changed.

202

B62564E1/02
(4) Simple conversational data input screen

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

The simple conversational data input screen is used to enter data for each machining menu item set on the simple conversational schedule screen. (a) Switch to the simple conversational data input screen One of two methods can be used. One method sets all required machining menu items at a time in the order of machining on the simple conversational schedule screen, then enters data for the machining menu items. The other method sets one machining menu item at a time on the simple conversational schedule screen, then enters data for that machining menu item. This step is repeated for all machining menu items. In both methods, the procedure below is used to switch from the simple conversational schedule screen to the simple conversational data input screen. 1 On the simple conversational schedule screen, place the cursor over the block containing the machining menu item for which data is to be entered. Then, press the soft key <BLKDAT>.

2 The simple conversational data input screen for the machining menu item of the block appears.

Simple Conversational Data Input Screen (b) Data menu item selection Each machining menu item allows up to 16 data menu items to be set. The number of data menu items depends on the machining menu item and the specifications laid down by each machine tool builder. The cursor is positioned over the data field of the currently selected data menu item, indicating that data can be entered in that field. The desired data menu item can then be selected using the cursor keys <> or <>. One screen can display eight data menu items, numbered from 01 to 08. Data menu items numbered from 09 to 16 are displayed on another screen. When a data menu item on the next screen is selected with the cursor keys, the screen display is automatically changed. The screen display can also be switched using the page keys.

203

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

(c) Data input 1 Move the cursor to the data menu item for which data is to be entered. Enter a numeric value, then press the soft key <INPUT>.

B62564E1/02

2 Data is entered. If the entered numeric value is not followed by an EOB code, the cursor position is not changed. If the entered numeric value is followed by an EOB code, the cursor moves to the next data menu item.

Multiple data items can be entered at a time. In this case, separate the data items with EOB codes. When the soft key <EMPTY> is pressed for a data menu item for which data has been entered, the data input field is cleared.

(d) Return to the simple conversational schedule screen After entering all data required for a machining menu item, press the soft key <END> to return to the simple conversational schedule screen.

Simple Conversational Data Input Screen

Simple Conversational Schedule Screen

204

B62564E1/02
(5) Simple conversational program execution

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

1 Select the simple conversational program to be executed according to the procedure in item (3)(a) in this section. 2 Select the memory command mode. 3 Turn on the switch for menu program operation on the machine operators panel. 4 Turn on the <start> button on the machine operators panel to start operation. NOTE Steps 3 and 4 may vary according to the machine. Refer to the relevant manual of each machine tool builder.

(6) Menu registration The function of simple conversational programming is basically implemented with custom macros and so forth prepared by the machine tool builder. The machine tool builder determines required machining menu items and the required data menu items. The procedure for the machine tool builder to perform simple conversational programming is described below. First, the procedure of registering machining menu items and data menu items is explained. The G10 function (programmable data input function) is used to register machining menu items and data menu items. A program for registering menu item names must be created as indicated below. By executing this program, the menu item names are stored in the memory of the control unit. In subsequent operation, the machining menu items and data menu items are displayed according to this program. O9859 ; G10L60P01 ( INITIAL SET ) ; Registration of the machining menu item INITIAL SET, and its data menu items G10L61P01Q01 ( Z SAFETY LIMIT ) ; G10L61P01Q02 ( X START POINT ) ; G10L61P01Q03 ( Y START POINT ) ; G10L61P01Q04 ( Z START POINT ) ; G10L60P02 ( DRILLING ) ; Registration of the machining menu item DRILLING, and its data menu items G10L61P02Q01 ( WORK SURFACE ) ; G10L61P02Q02 ( DRILL DEPTH ) ; G10L61P02Q ( ) ; G10L60P03 ( TAPPING ) ; Registration of the machining menu item TAPPING, and its data menu items G10L61P03Q01 ( WORK SURFACE ) ; G10L61P03Q02 ( DRILL DEPTH ) ; G10L61P03Q ( ) ; M30 ;

205

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

(a) Machining menu item registration A machining menu item is registered using the following command: G10L60P02 (DRILLING)

B62564E1/02

Machining menu item name (not exceeding 16 characters) Machining menu item number (01 to 16)

(b) Data menu item registration A data menu item is registered using the following command: G10L61P02 Q01 (WORK SURFACE)

Data menu item name (not exceeding 16 characters) Data menu item number (01 to 16) Machining menu item number (01 to 16) (c) Specification of menu item names There are several ways to specify the character strings defining machining menu item names and data menu item names. (i) Alphanumeric characters, hyphens (), periods (.), and spaces Uppercase letters (A to Z), numeric characters (0 to 9), hyphens, periods, and spaces can be directly entered. Example G10L60P (FANUC) (ii) Katakana and special symbols Katakana characters and the special symbols that cannot be directly entered can be specified using internal codes. The characters included in the internal code list below can be specified. Specify a string of internal codes, each code consisting of two hexadecimal characters, between two at marks (@). Example G10L60P (@ CC A7 C5 AF B8 @); is displayed. (iii) Kanji and hiragana Kanji and hiragana characters that cannot be directly entered can be specified using internal codes. The characters included in the internal code list for kanji and hiragana characters in Appendix 8 can be specified. Specify a string of internal codes, each code consisting of four hexadecimal characters, between two at marks (@). Example G10L60P (@8177 646A 822E 8559@);

is displayed. An internal code starting with a character from 6 to 8 is assumed to be an internal code for a hiragana character. When counting the number of kanji or hiragana characters, treat one character as two alphanumeric characters.

206

B62564E1/02

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

Internal code list

0 0 0 0 7 6 5 4 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0

0 0 0 1 1

0 0 1 0 2

0 0 1 1 3

0 1 0 0 4

0 1 0 1 5

0 1 1 0 6

0 1 1 1 7

1 0 0 0 8

1 0 0 1 9

1 0 1 0 A

1 0 1 1 B

1 1 0 0

1 1 0 1

1 1 1 0 E

1 1 1 1 F

C D

0 @ P ! # $ 1 2 3 4 A Q B C D E F R S T U V

% 5 & ( )
*

6 7 8 9 : ; <

G W H I J K L X Y Z [ ] ^ _

+ , . /

= M > ? N O

207

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

(7) Procedure for executing simple conversational programs

B62564E1/02

To develop programs for machining workpieces, the programmer selects the required items from a prepared machining menu in the order of machining. The programmer then enters data for each item, and starts operation. The workpiece needs to be machined in the programmed sequence and according to the entered data. For this purpose, a program such as that indicated below is developed and stored in memory. This program serves as a main program for simple conversational program execution. O9240 ; N1 #6091 = 01 ; N2 1F[#6000 EQ 0] GOTO 7 ; N3 M98 P[#6000 +9500] ; N4 #6091 = #6091 +1 ; N5 1F[#6091 GT 16] GOTO 7 ; N6 GOTO 2 ; N7 M30 ; The main program above includes two new custom macro system variables. These system variables are explained below together with the specification of each block. (a) Block N1 System variable #6091 is used to specify the block number of a simple conversational program. Block N1 specifies 01 as the current block number of the simple conversational program. In addition, when a numeric value is assigned to #6091 by specifying #6091 = n, the number of the machining menu item set with the specified block number of the menu program is substituted into system variable #6000. Furthermore, the 16 data menu items entered for the machining menu item of that block number are substituted into system variables #6001 to #6016. In other words, system variable #6000 identifies the machining menu item of the block number specified by #6091, and #6001 to #6016 identify the contents of the data menu items. If a block number specified by #6091 has no machining menu item set, 0 is set in #6000 and null characters are set in #6001 to #6016 for the data menu items that have no values set. (b) Block N2 If the specified block number has no machining menu item set, this block branches control to block N7 to terminate execution. (c) Block N3 This block calls a subprogram with the M98 command. The called program equals 9500 plus the machining menu item number. Suppose that the following machining menu has been created. 01: INITIAL SET 02: DRILLING 03: TAPPING 04: BORING Machining menu item name Machining menu item number

208

B62564E1/02

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)

If the specified block number has the machining menu item (tapping) set, the value of #6000 is 03. Therefore, program number O9503 is called. This means that a program for the machining menu item (tapping) must already have been created having program number O9503. In other words, when the example of the machining menu above is used, the machine tool builder needs to create programs having the following program numbers for the machining menu items in advance: O9501 : Program for INITIAL SETTING O9502 : Program for DRILLING O9503 : Program for TAPPING O9504 : Program for BORING When a program for a machining menu item is called, the contents of the data menu items are assigned to system variables #9001 to #9016. Therefore, the created program needs to be able to perform the desired machining by referencing #6001 to #6016. A program for a machining menu item can include conventional custom macro common variables. In general, a program for a machining menu item ends with M99 to return to the main program. (d) Block N4 When the machining menu item of the specified block number has been executed, operation needs to proceed to the machining menu item of the next block number. For this purpose, block N4 increments system variable #6001 by 1 to proceed to the next block number. (e) Block N5 If the specified block number exceeds 16, this block branches control to block N7 to terminate execution. (f) Block N6 This block returns control to block N2 to repeat execution for the next block number. (g) Block N7 This block marks the end of the program. When the operator executes a simple conversational program, the main program (09420 in the example above) for executing the simple conversational program is first executed, then the programs developed by the machine tool builder for machining menu items are called for machining. To execute a simple conversational program, the program for executing it must be selected as the main program in memory operation. If another program is selected as the main program in memory operation, only the selected program is executed. The simple conversational program is not executed. For this reason, it is necessary to provide a switch on the machine operators panel for simple conversational program operation. When the switch is turned on, the system starts memory operation after searching for the program number of the main program for executing a desired simple conversational program by using the function of workpiece number search or external data input.

(8) Additional custom macro system variables As mentioned in Item (7) above, some custom macro system variables have been added for simple conversational programs. The table below summarizes the system variables. System variable #6000 Function Holds the number of the machining menu item set with the block number held in #6091. Hold values set for the 16 data menu items for the machining menu item of the block number held in #6091. (The data menu item number matches the lower two digits of the corresponding system variable.) Specifies a block number.

#6001A#6016 #6091

209

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

B62564E1/02

10.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

10.1 Offset Values
10.1.1 Display and setting
Turn on the data protection key (KEY1) when setting the offset values. 1 Press the <function menu> key. 2 Press the <OFFSET> key or <OFFSET> soft key. Either of the following screens is displayed:

OFFSET

OFFSET

210

B62564E1/02
Press the <OFFSET> key or <OFFSET> soft key to switch between the screens. Switching between the screens can also be performed in the following way: Press the <CHAPTER> key to change the soft keys to the chapter selection keys. Pressing the <TOOL> key displays the tool offset screen. 3 Position the cursor on the desired offset number in either of the following ways: (1) Move the cursor to the desired offset number using the page keys ( [] [] ) or cursor keys ( [] [] [] [] ). (2) 1. Press the <operation menu> key to change the soft keys to the operation selection keys. 2. Press <INPNO.>, type the offset number to be displayed or set, and press the <EXEC> key. 4 Press the <operation menu> key to change the soft keys to the operation selection keys. 5 To set the entered value as the offset value (absolute input) Press <INPUT>. To add the entered value to the offset value already set (incremental input) Press <+INPUT>. 6 Type the offset value. To enter offset values for several consecutive items at once, delimit the values with the <EOB> key. EOB (end of block) is represented by ; on the CRT. Example: 100.0 ;200.0 ;300.0 ;400.0 The cursor automatically proceeds to the next item when ; is found. (Same as when the cursor key [] is pressed) 7 Pressing the <EXEC> key sets the entered offset value in the offset memory location pointed to by the cursor. The soft keys are changed to the operation selection keys.

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

9" CRT unit

<Function menu> key <Operation menu> key <Soft> keys

14" CRT unit

<Function menu> key

<Operation menu> key <Soft> keys

9" CRT function selection keys

POSITIONPROGRAM OFFSET PRG-CHK CHAPTER +

9" CRT OFFSET chapter selection keys

WEAR WRK.ZER

9" CRT operation selection keys

INPUT +INPUT ORIGIN COUNTER INP-NO +

14" CRT function selection keys

POSI TION PROG RAM OFF SET CHAPTE SETT R ING ID SERRCH CHAP TER

14" CRT OFFSET chapter selection keys

TOOL WORK ZERO

14" CRT operation selection keys

INPUT +IN PUT
MEASURE

PUNCH INOUT
NUMBER

ALL CLEAR

211

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 10.1.2 Clearing all tool offset values
1 Press the <function menu> key to change the soft keys to the function selection keys. 2 Press the <OFFSET> key or <OFFSET> soft key. 3 Press the <operation menu> key to change the soft keys to the operation selection keys. 4 Press the <ALLCLR> key to change the soft keys to the operation guidance keys. 5 To clear all tool offset values to 0, press the <ALL> key. To clear all geometry offset values to 0, press the <GEOM> key. To clear all tool wear offset values to 0, press the <WEAR> key. 6 Pressing the <ALL>, <GEOM>, or <WEAR> key clears the corresponding tool offset values to 0. The soft keys are changed to the operation selection keys. 9" CRT function selection keys
POSITIONPROGRAM OFFSET +

B62564E1/02

PRG-CHK CHAPTER

9" CRT operation selection keys

ALL-CLR PUNCH MEASURE

9" CRT operation guide keys

ALL GEOMTRY WEAR

14" CRT function selection keys

POSI TION PROG RAM OFF SET
PROGRAM CHECK

SETT ING

SERV ICE

MESSAG E

CHAP TER

14" CRT operation selection keys

INPUT +IN PUT
MEASURE

PUNCH INPUT
NUMBER

ALL CLEAR

CHAP TER

14" CRT operation guide keys

ALL GEOMET WEAR RY

212

B62564E1/02

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

10.2 Offset from the Workpiece Reference Point

Turn on the data protection key (KEY1) when setting the offset values. 1 Press the <function menu> key. 2 Press the <OFFSET> key or <OFFSET> soft key. One of the following screens is displayed: (Tooloffset) (Standardworkpiece coordinatesystem) Pagekeys
OFFSET

(Additionalworkpiece coordinatesystem)

OFFSET

213

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

Press the <OFFSET> key or <OFFSET> soft key to switch between the screens. Switching between the screens can also be performed in the following way: Press the <CHAPTER> key to change the soft keys to the chapter selection keys. Pressing the <WRK.ZER> key displays the screen for the offset from the workpiece reference point. 3 Position the cursor on the desired offset number in either of the following ways: (1) Move the cursor to the desired offset number using the page keys ( [] [] ) or cursor keys ( [] [] [] [] ). (2) 1. Press the <operation menu> key to change the soft keys to the operation selection keys. 2. Press <INPNO.>, type the number of the workpiece coordinate system to be displayed or set (0: Workpiece coordinate system to be specified externally, 1 to 6: Workpiece coordinate systems corresponding to G54 to G59), and press the <EXEC> key. 9" CRT function selection keys
POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET PRG-CHK

B62564E1/02

CHAPTER

9" CRT OFFSET chapter selection keys

WEAR WRK.ZER

9" CRT operation selection keys

INPUT +INPUT ORIGIN COUNTER INP-NO. +

14" CRT function selection keys

POSITI ON PROGRA OFFSET M
PROGRAM CHECK

SETTIN G

SERVIC E

MESSAG E

CHAPTE R

14" CRT OFFSET chapter selection keys

TOOL WORK ZERO

14" CRT operation selection keys

INPUT +INPUT
MEASURE

TL_INP

INPUT NUMBER

PUNCH

CHAPTE R

4 Press the <operation menu> key to change the soft keys to the operation selection keys. 5 To set the entered value as the offset value (absolute input) Press <INPUT>. 6 Type the offset value. To enter offset values for several consecutive items at once, delimit the values with the <EOB> key. The EOB (end of block) is represented by ; on the CRT. Example: 100.0 ;200.0 ;300.0 ;400.0 The cursor automatically proceeds to the next item when ; is found. (Same as when the cursor key [] is pressed) 7 Pressing the <EXEC> key sets the entered offset value in the offset memory location pointed to by the cursor. The soft keys are changed to the operation selection keys. (1) Select the displayed axis in workpiece zero point offset setting menu screen On the workpiece zero point offset setting menu, axes can be specified separately for a display of the offset to be specified, using a parameter. The offset can be specified only for these axes on the workpiece coordinate setting menu. The same parameter is also used to select axes for a display on the workpiece zero point offset setting menu of the multi-submenus. To add the entered value to the offset value already set (incremental input) Press <+INPUT>.

214

B62564E1/02
Example

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

In a configuration with the X-, Y-, A-, and B-axes, to omit the A-and B-axis displays, specify with bit 4 of parameter No. 1009 as follows: X=0, Y=0, A=1, B=1, Z=0 With this setting, the A-and B-axes will not be displayed on the workpiece offset setting menu. (Shown below is an example of displays on the 9-inch CRT.)
WORK ZERO OFFSET NO. X Y Z NO. X Y Z 00 (COMMOM) 0.000 0.000 0.000 (G54) 0.000 0.000 0.000 O1234 N00000 NO. X Y Z NO. X Y Z 02 (G55) 0.000 0.000 0.000 (G56) 0.000 0.000 0.000

01

03

(MM) MDI *** STOP **** *** *** 12:40:15 LSK POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET PRG_CHK CHAPTER +

Example of displays on the 9-inch CRT

215

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

B62564E1/02

10.3 Settings
There are two types of data to be set here. Turn on the data protection key (KEY2) when setting data. (1) Data related to input/output (2) Parameters set by the user 1 Enter the MDI mode. 2 Press the <function menu> key to change the soft keys to the function selection keys. 3 Press the <SETTING> key or <SETTING> soft key several times. 9" CRT function selection keys
SETTING SERVICE MESSAGE CHAPTER +

SETTING

9" CRT SETTING chapter selectionkeys

HANDY GENERAL OP .PANEL MACRO

14" CRT function selection keys

SETTING SETTING
POSITI ON PROGRA OFFSET M
PROGRAM CHECK

SETTIN G

SERVIC E

MESSAG E

CHAPTE R

14" CRT SETTING chapter selection keys

HANDY GENE REL OPERAT MACRO TOOL PANEL VAR. LIFE CHAPTE R

SETTING

There are two ways to display the setting screen. (i) Press the <SETTING> key or <SETTING> soft key several times until the setting screen is displayed. (ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key to change the soft keys to the chapter selection keys. a) To display data related to input/output Press the <HANDY> key. b) To display the parameters that can be set by the user Press the <GENERAL> key.

216

B62564E1/02
For data related to input/output 4 Move the cursor to the item to be set using the cursor keys ( [] [] ).

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

For parameters that can be set by the user Position the cursor on the parameter number to be set in either of the following ways: a) Move the cursor to the desired parameter number using the page keys ( [] [] ) or cursor keys ( [] [] [] [] ). b) i) Press the <operation menu> key to change the soft keys to the operation selection keys. ii) Press <INPNO.>, type the parameter number to be displayed or set, and press the <EXEC> key.

5 Press the <operation menu> key. 6 Set data in either of the following ways: a) To set 1, press the <ON: 1> key. To set 0, press the <OFF: 0> key. b) To set data other than 1 or 0: i) Press the <INPUT> key. ii) Type the data to be set. To enter values for several consecutive parameters at once, delimit the values with the <EOB> key. Example 100 ;200 ;300 The cursor automatically proceeds to the next parameter when ; is found. iii) Press the <EXEC> key.

9" CRT operation selection keys (when the <GENERAL>key is pressed)

INPUT +INPUT ON:1 OFF:0 INP-NO. +

9" CRT operation selection keys (when the <HANDY> key is pressed)
INPUT +INPUT ON:1 OFF:0 INP_NO. +

14" CRT operation selection keys (when the <GENERAL> key is pressed)
INPUT +IN PUT ON:1 OFF:0 INPUT NUMBER CHAPTE R

14" CRT operation selection keys (when the <HANDY> key is pressed)
INPUT +IN PUT ON:1 OFF:0 INPUT NUMBER CHAPTE R

217

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

B62564E1/02

10.4 Custom Macro Variables

Local variables, group 1 common variables, and group 2 common variables can be displayed. Group 1 common variables and group 2 common variables can be set. #1 to #33: Local variables #100 to #199: Group 1 common variables (Common variables whose values are not retained when the power is turned off) #500 to #699: Group 2 common variables (Common variables whose values are retained when the power is turned off) 1 Enter the MDI mode. 2 Press the <function menu> key to change the soft keys to the function selection keys. 3 Press the <SETTING> key or <SETTING> soft key several times. 9" CRT function selection keys
SETTING SETTING SERVICE MESSAGE CHAPTER

9" CRT SETTING chapter selection keys

HANDY GENERAL OP .PANEL MACRO

14" CRT function selection keys

POSITI ON PROGRA OFFSET M
PROGRAM CHECK

SETTIN SERVIC MESSAG G E E

CHAPTE R

SETTING

SETTING

14" CRT SETTING chapter selection keys

HANDY GENERA OPERAT MACRO TOO L PANEL VAR. LIFE CHAPTE R

SETTING

There are two ways to display the macro variables screen. (i) Press the <SETTING> key or <SETTING> soft key several times until the macro variables screen is displayed. (ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key to change the soft keys to the chapter selection keys and press the MACRO key. 4 Position the cursor on the macro variable number to be set in either of the following ways: a) Move the cursor to the desired macro variable number using the page keys ( [] [] ) or cursor keys ( [] [] ). b) i) Press the <operation menu> key to change the soft keys to the operation selection keys. ii) Press <INPNO.>, type the macro variable number to be displayed or set, and press the <EXEC> key. 5 Press the <operation menu> key to change the soft keys to the operation selection keys. 9" CRT operation selection keys INPUT +INPUT ALL-CLR EMPTY INP-NO. +

14" CRT operation selection keys IN PUT +IN PUT ALL INPUT INPUT PUNCH CLEAR EMPTY NUMBER
CHAPTE R

218

B62564E1/02
6 To set the entered value as the variable value (absolute input) (6) 1 Press <INPUT> and type the variable value.(To enter values for several consecutive variables at once, delimit the values with the <EOB> key Example 100.0 ;200.0 ;300.0;400.0 The cursor automatically proceeds to the next variable when ; is found.) (6) 2 Press the <EXEC> key. To add the entered value to the variable value already set (incremental input) (6) 1 Press <+INPUT>. (6) 2 Type the increment and press the <EXEC> key.

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

To set a null value in the variable Press the <EMPTY> key. To clear the variable values

Press the <ALLCLR> key to change the soft keys to the operation guidance keys. To clear all group 1 and group 2 common variables to 0, press the <ALL> key. To clear only the group 1 common variables, press the <COMMON 1> key. To clear only the group 2 common variables, press the <COMMON 2> key. The soft keys are changed to the operation selection keys.

9" CRT operation guide keys ALL COMMON 1 COMMON 2

14" CRT operation guide keys ALL

COMMON COMMON NONVOL VOL

NOTE

UNDER FLOW is displayed when the value of a custom macro is in either of the following ranges:

0 < Macro variable value < +0.0000001: +UNDER FLOW 0 > Macro variable value > 0.0000001: UNDER FLOW

219

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

B62564E1/02

10.5 Read/Punch Function for Custom Macro Common Variables

The values and names of the common variables (#200 to #999) retained after the power is disconnected can be output to an output device in custom macro statement form. As shown in the following example, output is in program format. Variable data can be set by executing this program. Example % ; #500=25600*65536/16777216; . . . . . . #501=#0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . #502=0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . #503= .....................; .............................; SETVN500[ABC,DEF,,,...] ; . . . . . . . . . M2; %

For a normal value When the value is empty When the value is 0

For variable names

When this custom macro statement program is executed, values and names are set for the common variables. As shown in #500 in the above example, the values of variables are generally expressed as mathematical expressions. Since macro variables are handled in floatingpoint form in the control unit, such mathematical expressions are used to accurately express the values stored internally. The user need not by concerned with this format. (1) Outputting the values and names of common variables 1 Press the function menu key to display the function selection keys as soft keys. 2 Press the <SETTING> key several times until the screen for outputting the values of custom macro variables appears. An alternate method is to press the <CHAPTER> key to display chapter selection soft keys, then press the <MACRO> key. 3 Press the operation menu key several times until the <PUNCH> soft key appears. 4 Press the <PUNCH> key to display operation guidance soft keys. 5 Press the <COMMON NONVOL> key. (For 9inch CRT display, press the <COMMON2> key.) 6 The values and names of common variables are output to the output unit selected in the foreground, and the <STOP> soft key is displayed. 7 To stop outputting common variable values and their names, press the <STOP. key. Once the <STOP> key is pressed, output of the remaining common variable values and names cannot be resumed. To perform output again, return to step 3. 8 When all the values and names of common variables have been output, the operation selection soft keys are displayed again. Function selection keys on a 9-inch CRT display 1, 2 SETTING SERVICE MESSAGE CHAPTER

Chapter selection keys displayed by pressing SETTING on a 9-inch CRT display 2 HANDY GENERAL MACRO

Operation selection keys displayed by pressing MACRO on a 9-inch CRT display 3, 4 PANCH

220

B62564E1/02

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

Operation guidance keys (PUNCH) on a 9-inch CRT display

COMMON2

(FILE#)

6, 7

STOP

NOFEED

Function selection keys on the 14-inch CRT display 1, 2

POSI PRO TION GRAM OFF SET
PRO GRAM CHECK

SET TING

SER VICE

MES SAGE

CHAP TER

Chapter selection keys displayed by pressing SETTING on the 14-inch CRT display 2
HAN DY GEN ERAL
MACRO VAR.

TIME

CHAP TER

Operation selection keys displayed by pressing MACRO on the 14-inch CRT display 3, 4
IN PUT IN ALL INPUT NUM PUT+ CLEAR EMPTY
BER INPUT

PUN CH

CHAP TER

Operation guidance keys (PUNCH) on the 14-inch CRT display 5

COM MON NONVOL

(FILE #)

6, 7

STOP

NO FEED

The values and names of the common variables can be output in any mode as long as automatic operation is in the stopped state. When the values and names of the common variables are output to a FANUC floppy disk, the file name in the file list is COMMON.NONVOL. (2) Inputting the values and names of common variables Input the values and names of the common variables using one of the following methods: (i) The output of the values and names of common variables is read as a program in the edit mode, then the program is executed in the memory mode. 1 Before registering the program in memory, perform steps (1) to (6). (1) Select the EDIT mode. (2) Display the program screen using the soft keys. (3) Press the operation menu key to display the READ soft key. (4) Press the READ soft key. (5) Press (FILE#), and enter the file number. (Search for the file storing the program was output to the FANUC disk.) (6) Press (PROG#), enter a program number, then press EXEC. The program number can be any number that is not currently being used.

221

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

B62564E1/02

2 After the above input operation is completed, the program created by outputting the values and names of the common variables is displayed on the screen. 3 Change the mode to memory mode. Press the cycle start button to execute the program. The values and names of the common variables are then input to the custom macro memory area in the CNC. 4 Select the screen for displaying custom macro variable data. Check the display to ensure that the values and names of the common variables are set properly. (ii) The program created by outputting the values and names of the common variables is executed in tape mode to directly input the values and names. 1 Set the program tape in the tape reader. 2 Select the TAPE mode. 3 Press the cycle start button. The common variables and names are input to the custom macro memory area in the CNC. 4 Select the screen for displaying custom macro variable data. Check the display to ensure that the values and names of the common variables are set properly. NOTE 1 If the write protect function (parameters 7031 and 7032) is enabled for common variables, release the protection before inputting the values and names of the common variables. NOTE 2 Variable names are output in the following format:

SETVN

500 [ Variable name for #500

, Variable name for #501

, Variable name for #502

, ... , Variable name for #519

For macro variables which have no names, nothing is output. Example Variable No. #500 #501 #502 #503 #504 #505 #506 #507 #508 #509 Variable name ABC COUNTER (Not assigned) POINTER (Not assigned) (Not assigned) (Not assigned) (Not assigned) START (Not assigned) Variable No. #510 #511 #512 #513 #514 #515 #516 #517 #518 #519 Variable name TOOLPT (Not assigned) (Not assigned) (Not assigned) (Not assigned) (Not assigned) (Not assigned) (Not assigned) (Not assigned) (Not assigned)

When variables are named as shown above, these names are output in the following program form: SETVN 500 [ABC,COUNTER,,POINTER,,,,,START,,TOOLPT,,,,,,,,,, ] ;

222

B62564E1/02

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

10.6 Parameters
Parameters are used for adjusting the CNC according to the characteristics and functions of motors or machines connected to the CNC. The settings of the parameters depend on the machine. Setting parameters incorrectly may cause the machine to malfunction. Generally, the user must not change the parameters. 1 Press the <function menu> key to change the soft keys to the function selection keys. 2 Press the <SERVICE> key or <SERVICE> soft key. 9" CRT function selection keys
SETTING SERVICE MESSAGE CHAPTER

9" CRT SERVICE chapter selection keys

PARAM PITCH DIAGNOS DSP .MEM CHAPTER

14" CRT function selection keys

POSITI ON PROGRA OFFSET M
PROGRAM CHECK

SETTIN SERVIC MESSAG G E E

CHAPTE R

14" CRT SERVICE chapter selection keys

PARA PITCH DIAG DISPLAY MEMORY CHAPTE R MATER ERROR NOSIS

When the parameter screen is not displayed, there are two ways to display the parameter screen. (i) Press the <SERVICE> key or <SERVICE> soft key several times until the parameter screen is displayed. (ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key to change the soft keys to the chapter selection keys and press <PARAM>. 3 Position the cursor on the parameter number to be set in either of the following ways: a) Move the cursor to the desired parameter number using the page keys ( [] [] ) or cursor keys ( [] [] ). b) i) Press the <operation menu> key to change the soft keys to the operation selection keys. ii) Press <INPNO.>, type the parameter number to be displayed or set, and press the <EXEC> key. This completes the operation for displaying a parameter. To set a parameter, follow the steps below. 4 Enter the MDI mode. Alternatively, press the emergency stop button to enter the emergency stop state. 5 Set 1 in bit PWE of parameter No. 8000 to enable the setting of parameters. See section 10.3 for how to set the parameters. 6 Set data in either of the following ways: a) To set 1, press the <ON: 1> key. To set 0, press the <OFF: 0> key. b) To set data other than 1 and 0, press the <operation menu> key to change the soft keys to the operation selection keys.
INPUT

9" CRT operation selection keys

INPUT + INPUT ON:1 OFF:0 INP-NO.

14" CRT operation selection keys

+IN PUT ON:1 OFF:0 INPUT NUMBER READ PUNCH CHAPTE R

223

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

To set the entered value as the parameter value (absolute input) 6 1 Press <INPUT> and type the parameter value. (To enter values for several consecutive parameters at once, delimit the values with the <EOB> key. Example 100.0 ;200.0 ;300.0 ;400.0 The cursor automatically proceeds to the next parameter when ; is found.)

B62564E1/02
To add the entered value to the parameter value already set (incremental input) 6 1 Press <+INPUT>. 6 2 Type the increment and press the <EXEC> key.

6 2 Press the <EXEC> key. 7 When the setting of parameters is completed, set 0 in bit PWE of parameter No. 8000, to disable setting of parameters.

224

B62564E1/02

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

10.7 Pitch Error Compensation Data

Pitch error compensation data is set according to the characteristics of the machines connected to the CNC. The compensation data settings depend on the machine. Changing the settings reduces the precision of the machine. Generally, the user must not change pitch error compensation data. 1 Press the <function menu> key to change the soft keys to the function selection keys. 2 Press the <SERVICE> key or <SERVICE> soft key. 9" CRT function selection keys
SETTING SERVICE MESSAGE CHAPTER

9" CRT SERVICE chapter selection keys

PARAM PITCH DIAGNOS DSP .MEM

14" CRT function selection keys

POSITI ON PROGRA OFFSET M
PROGRAM CHECK

SETTIN SERVIC MESSAG G E E

CHAPTE R

14" CRT SERVICE chapter selection keys

PARA PITCH DIAG NOSIS DISPLAY MEMORY MATER ERROR

When the screen for the pitch error compensation data is not displayed, there are two ways to display the screen. (i) Press the <SERVICE> key or <SERVICE> soft key several times until the screen for the pitch error compensation data is displayed. (ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key to change the soft keys to the chapter selection keys and press <PITCH>. 3 Position the cursor on the number of the pitch error compensation data to be set in either of the following ways: a) Move the cursor to the number of the desired pitch error compensation data using the page keys ( [] [] ) or cursor keys ( [] [] ). b) i) Press the <operation menu> key to change the soft keys to the operation selection keys. ii) Press <INPNO.>, type the number of the pitch error compensation data to be displayed or set, and press the <EXEC> key. This completes the operation for displaying pitch error compensation data. To set pitch error compensation data, follow the steps below. 4 Enter the MDI mode. Alternatively, press the emergency stop button to enter the emergency stop state. 5 Set 1 in bit PWE of parameter No. 8000 to enable the setting of parameters. See section 10.3 for how to set the parameters. 6 Press the <operation menu> key to change the soft keys to the operation selection keys. 7 Press the <INPUT> key and type the compensation data. (To enter values for several consecutive compensation data items at once, delimit the values with the <EOB> key. 9" CRT operation selection keys Example 1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4 The cursor automatically proceeds INPUT + INPUT ON:1 OFF:0 INP-NO to the next compensation data item when ; is found.) 8 Press the EXEC key. 9 When the setting of pitch error compensation data is completed, set 0 in bit PWE of parameter No. 8000 to enable the setting of parameters. 14" CRT operation selection keys
INPUT +IN PUT ON:1 OFF:0 INPUT NUMBER READ PUNCH

225

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

B62564E1/02

For bidirectional pitch error compensation, another 1280 points (10000 to 11279) can be used for pitch error compensation data, in addition to the conventional 1280 points. The data for the additional points can be exchanged with an external device, modified using G10, and input/output using the PMC window, in the same way as conventional data.

226

B62564E1/02

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

10.8 Data Protection Key

Data protection keys can be installed on the machine to protect data in the CNC. The following three keys are available according to the type of the data to be protected: (1) KEY1 Enables and disables entering tool offset values and offset values from the workpiece reference point. (2) KEY2 Enables and disables entering data on the setting screen and presetting the absolute coordinates. (3) KEY3 Enables and disables entering and editing part programs. See the manual issued by the machine tool builder for the installed keys and their locations on the machine.

227

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

B62564E1/02

10.9 Measuring the Tool Length

(1) When the tool offset function using tool numbers is not provided 1 Press the <function menu> key to change the soft keys to the function selection keys. 2 Press the <OFFSET> key or <OFFSET> soft key. Either of the following screens is displayed: 9" CRT function selection keys
PRG-CHK CHAPTER +

POSITIONPROGRAM OFFSET OFFSET

14" CRT function selection keys

POSITI ON PROGRA OFFSET M
PROGRAM CHECK

SETTIN SERVIC MESSAG G E E

CHAPTE R

OFFSET

Press the <OFFSET> key or <OFFSET> soft key to switch between the screens. Switching between the screens can also be performed in the following way: Press the <CHAPTER> key to change the soft keys to the chapter selection keys. Pressing the <TOOL> key displays the tool offset screen. 3 Position the cursor on the desired offset number in either of the following two ways: (a) Move the cursor to the desired offset number using the page keys ( [] [] ) or cursor keys ([] [] [] [] ). (b) (i) Press the <operation menu> key to change the soft keys to the operation selection keys. (ii) Press <INPNO.>, type the offset number to be displayed or set, and press the <EXEC> key. 4 Press the <MEASURE> key and type the name of the axis along which the tool length is to be measured. 5 Press the <SELECT> key. The axis specified in 4 is effective until a new axis is specified. 9" CRT OFFSET chapter selection keys
WEAR WRK.ZER

9" CRT operation selection keys

INPUT +INPUT ORIGIN COUNTER INP-NO. +

9" CRT operation guide keys

ALL-AXS (AXIS)

14" CRT OFFSET chapter selection keys

TOOL WORK ZERO

14" CRT operation selection keys

INPU T +IN PUT
MEASURE

PUNCH INPUT

ALL

CHAPTE R

NUMBER CLEAR

14" CRT operation guide keys

ALL- (AXIS) AXS

6 Select the reference tool and manually move the tool until it stops at the reference point for measuring the tool length. 7 Press the <MEASURE> key. 8 Press the <ORIGIN> key to clear the counter to 0. The soft keys are changed to the operation guidance keys. 9 Select the tool to be measured and manually move the tool until it stops at the reference point for measuring the tool length. The offset (difference between the traveled distance of the reference tool and that of the tool to be measured) is displayed as the relative position. 10 Pressing the <MEASURE> key changes the soft keys to the operation guidance keys. 228

B62564E1/02

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

11 Pressing the <INPUT> key sets the offset displayed as the relative position in the memory location pointed to by the cursor. 12 Repeat steps 9 to 11 for each tool to be measured.

CAUTION

Bit LXY in parameter No. 6000, specifies that tool length compensation is always performed along the Z axis. If this bit is set to 0, the Z axis is set as the axis along which the tool length is measured when the power is turned on.

(2) When the tool offset function using tool numbers is provided 1 Press the <function menu> key to change the soft keys to the function selection keys. 2 Press the <OFFSET> key or <OFFSET> soft key. Either of the following screens is displayed:

OFFSET

OFFSET

OFFSET 9" CRT function selection keys POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET PRG-CHK CHAPTER +

14" CRT function selection keys

POSI TION PRO GRAM OFF SET
PRGRAM SET CHECK TING

SER VICE

MES SAGE

CHAP TER

Press the <OFFSET> key or <OFFSET> soft key to switch between screens. Switching between screens can also be performed in the following way: Press the <CHAPTER> key to change the soft keys to the chapter selection keys. Pressing the <TL.DATA> key displays the screen for the tool offset function using tool numbers.

229

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

B62564E1/02

3 Move the cursor to the desired offset number using the page keys ( [] [] ) or cursor keys ( [] [] [] [] ). 4 Press the <MEASURE> key and type the name of the axis along which the tool length is to be measured. 5 Press the <SELECT> key. The axis specified in 4 is effective until a new axis is specified. 9" CRT OFFSET chapter selection keys WEAR WRK.ZER TL.DATA

9" CRT operation selection keys PUNCH MEASURE

9" CRT operation guide keys INPUT ORIGIN (AXIS)

14" CRT OFFSET chapter selection keys

TOOL WORK ZERO MEAS_ TL TOOL DATA

14" CRT operation selection keys INPUT INSERT DE LETE SEAR MEA PUNCH CH SURE CHAP TER

14" CRT operation guide keys INPUT ORIGIN (AXIS) 6 Select the reference tool and manually move the tool until it stops at the reference point for measuring the tool length. 7 Press the <MEASURE> key. 8 Press the <ORIGIN> key to clear the counter to 0. The soft keys are changed to the operation guide keys. 9 Select the tool to be measured and manually move the tool until it stops at the reference point for measuring the tool length. The offset (difference between the traveled distance of the reference tool and that of the tool to be measured) is displayed as the relative position. 10 Pressing the <MEASURE> key changes the soft keys to the operation guidance keys. 11 Pressing the <INPUT> key sets the offset displayed as the relative position in the memory location pointed to by the cursor. 12 Repeat steps 9 to 11 for each tool to be measured.

230

B62564E1/02

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

10.10 Class B Measurement of the Tool Length and Workpiece Reference Position
10.10.1 Class B measurement of the tool length
The procedures for class B measurement of the tool length are simplified, enabling the tool length to be measured easier and in a shorter time than using the general measurement procedure. The tool length compensation value is generally defined using the two methods described below. The basic idea, however, is the same: The difference between the coordinate at the tip of a tool and that at the tip of the reference tool is defined as the tool length compensation value. (1) Method 1 Method 1 uses the actual tool length as the tool length compensation value. The reference tool in this method is a virtual tool whose tip has the same Z coordinate as the machine zero point when the machine is at the machine zero point. The tool length compensation value is the difference between the Z coordinate of the tip of each tool and that of the tip of the reference tool, that is, the distance measured along the Z axis from the machine zero point to the tip of each tool when the machine is at the machine zero point. Reference tool Machine zero point (Z coordinate of the tip of the reference tool) OFSL01 OFSL02 Tool T01 Tool T02 OFSL03 Tool T03

OFSL01 : Tool length compensation value for tool T01 OFSL02 : Tool length compensation value for tool T02 OFSL03 : Tool length compensation value for tool T03

231

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

B62564E1/02

In class B measurement of the tool length, a tool is moved by manual feed until the tip of the tool touches the top of the workpiece or reference block. This surface is called the measurement surface. The top of the table on the machine cannot be actually used as the measurement surface because the table will be damaged. Assume, however, that the top of the table is used. Distance L from the machine zero point to the top of the table is a value specific to the machine. Set L in a parameter. If the Z coordinate of the tool tip when it touches the top of the table (Zt) is known, the tool length compensation value OFSL can be easily calculated from L and Zt. However, because the top of the table cannot be used as the measurement surface, tool length compensation value OFSL is actually obtained in the following way: Define the top of the table as the reference measurement surface and set the distance from the reference measurement surface to the actual measurement surface, that is, the height of the workpiece or reference block (Hm). OFSL is calculated using the formula shown below. Machine zero point (Z coordinate of the tip of the reference tool)

OFSL

Tool OFSL 01

Tool T01

Zm L Zt Zm Measurement surface

Measurement surface

Workpiece

Hm

Reference measurement surface

Reference Hm block Table on the machine Table on the machine

L Hm Zm (Zt

: Distance from the initial position of the tip of the reference tool to the reference measurement surface (Z coordinate of the reference measurement surface in the machine coordinate system) : Distance from the reference measurement surface to the actual measurement surface : Distance from the initial position of the tip of the tool to be measured to the measurement surface : Distance from the initial position of the tip of the tool to be measured to the reference measurement surface)

OFSL : Tool length compensation value (OFSL = Zm - Hm - L) This method of setting the actual tool length as the tool length compensation value has the advantage that subsequent remeasurement is not necessary when the workpiece is changed, provided there is no wear. Another advantage is as follows. When machining several workpieces at once, it is only necessary to assign workpiece coordinate systems G54 to G59 to the workpieces and set the offset from each workpiece reference position. Resetting the tool length compensation value is not necessary.

232

B62564E1/02
(2) Method 2

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

Method 2 uses the distance from the position of the tool tip when the machine is at the machine zero point to the workpiece reference position as the tool length compensation value. The basic idea is the same as in method 1: The difference between the length of a tool and that of the reference tool is defined as the tool length compensation value. The reference tool in method 2, however, is a virtual tool whose tip has the same Z coordinate as the workpiece reference position when the machine is at the machine zero point. Machine zero point

Tool T01 Tool T02

Tool T03

Reference tool

OFSL01 Workpiece reference position OFSL02

OFSL03

Workpiece

OFSL01 : Tool length compensation value for tool T01 OFSL02 : Tool length compensation value for tool T02 OFSL03 : Tool length compensation value for tool T03 In this method, the reference measurement surface is a surface containing the workpiece reference position. Because the tip of the reference tool is on the same surface, distance L from the tip of the reference tool to the reference measurement surface is 0. Set 0 in the parameter for L. Generally, the actual measurement surface is the same as the reference measurement surface containing the workpiece reference position. When the top of the reference block is used as the measurement surface or the workpiece reference position is not on the top of the workpiece (for example, shifted from the top by the cutting allowance), set the distance from the reference measurement surface to the actual measurement surface in Hm. Tool length compensation value OFSL is calculated using the same formula as in method 1.

233

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

B62564E1/02

Machine zero point

Tool T01

Tool T01

OFSL

Zm

OFSL Measurement surface

Zm

Workpiece reference position ( reference measuremnt surface)

Hm Hm Reference block Workpiece

Table on the machine L : Hm : Zm : OFSL :

Table on the machine

Distance from the initial position of the tip of the reference tool to the reference measurement surface (= 0) Distance from the reference measurement surface to the actual measurement surface Distance from the initial position of the tip of the reference tool to the tool to be measured tothe measurement surface Tool length compensation value(OFSL = Zm - Hm - L)

In method 2, the reference tool is a virtual tool whose tip has the same Z coordinate as the workpiece reference position when the machine is at the machine zero point. Therefore, it is generally necessary to measure the tool length compensation value again when the workpiece is changed. The same compensation value, however, can be used by setting one of G54 to G59 to the distance along the Z axis between the reference position for the new workpiece and that for the workpiece used when the compensation value was measured as an offset value. Thought of in another way, this method sets the offset from the workpiece reference position as the tool length compensation value of each tool.

234

B62564E1/02
Procedures for measuring the tool length compensation value

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

1 Move the machine to the tool change position by manually returning to the reference position. 2 Select the manual handle feed or continuous manual feed mode. 3 Turn on the TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT switch on the operators panel on the machine. The control unit then automatically changes the CRT screen to that for measuring the tool length compensation value, shown on the next page. The OFST status display blinks at the bottom of the screen to indicate that the preparation for measuring the tool length compensation is completed. The screen for measuring the tool length compensation value differs depending on the type of the tool compensation memory. The screen for tool compensation memory A is shown on the next page. See Note 1 for tool compensation memory B and tool compensation memory C. In memory B, geometry compensation values and wear compensation values are stored separately. In memory C, geometry compensation values and wear compensation values are stored separately, as are cutter compensation values and tool length compensation values.

4 Set the distance between the reference measurement surface and actual measurement surface by entering the value with numeric keys and pressing the <HM_INP> soft key. 5 Select the tool whose length compensation value to be measured. When the screen for measuring the tool length compensation value is selected and the OFST status display is blinking at the bottom of the screen, T commands or M commands can be specified on this screen even in the manual handle feed or continuous manual mode. Entering Ttttt and pressing the cycle start button on the machine operators panel or CRT MDI panel executes the Ttttt program command and selects the tool to be measured. Generally, enter M06 to move the tool to the position of the spindle. The tool whose length compensation value to be measured is set at the position of the spindle. Position the cursor at the tool length compensation number assigned to the compensation value for the tool. 6 Move the tool by manual handle feed or continuous manual feed until it touches the measurement surface of the workpiece or reference block. 7 Press the <MEASURE> soft key. The tool length compensation value is set in tool compensation memory according to the abovementioned formula. For tool compensation memory B or C, the tool length compensation value is set as the tool geometry compensation value and 0 is set in the tool wear compensation value. The cursor remains on the same tool compensation number. Pressing the <MEASUR+> soft key automatically moves the cursor to the next number after setting is completed. When the tool length compensation value is set, the tool automatically moves to the tool change position. 8 The procedure for measuring the tool length compensation value for a tool is now completed. Repeat the operations from step 5 for each subsequent tool. When the tool length compensation values for all the tools are measured, turn off the TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION switch on the operators panel on the machine. When the switch is turned off, the OFST status display at the bottom of the screen goes off.

235

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

B62564E1/02

NOTE 1 i. Screen for measuring the tool length compensation value for tool compensation memory B

ii. Screen for measuring the tool length compensation value for tool compensation memory C

NOTE 2 Generally, a tool is moved along the Z axis because a tool is mounted in parallel with the Z axis. Some machines, however, has the W axis which is parallel with the Z axis. It may be convenient for such machines to move a tool along the W axis for measuring the tool length compensation value. There are also machines which have an attachment for mounting a tool in parallel with an axis other than the Z axis. On such machines, the tool length compensation value can be measured along an arbitrary axis. When the tool length compensation value can be measured along an axis other than the Z axis, note the following: Set the distance from the initial position of the tip of the reference tool to the reference measurement surface (L) in a parameter for each axis along which it is possible to measure the tool length compensation value, not only for the Z axis. The distance from the reference measurement surface to the actual measurement surface (Hm) must be measured along each axis. After moving the tool along an axis until it touches the workpiece or reference block, enter the name of the axis before pressing the <MEASURE> or <MEASUR+> soft key. When measuring along the W axis, for example, enter W before pressing the <MEASURE> or <MEASUR+> soft key. NOTE 3 The operator selects the tool length compensation number assigned to the compensation value for the tool to be measured by positioning the cursor on the number. Some machines, however, automatically position the cursor when the tool is selected. Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for details.

236

B62564E1/02

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

10.10.2 Class B measurement of the workpiece reference position

The offset from the workpiece reference position can be easily measured using the methods described in this section. The offset from the workpiece reference position along the longitudinal tool axis (the Z axis) can also be easily measured. The offset from the workpiece reference position along the X axis or Y axis can also be easily measured whether the workpiece reference position is on a surface of the workpiece or at the center of a machined hole. (1) Offset from the workpiece reference position measured along the Z axis (a) Method 1 In method 1, the offset from the workpiece reference position measured along the Z axis is the distance from the machine zero point to the workpiece reference position measured along the Z axis. Machine zero point

OFSL

Tool

OFSWG54 ZmG54 OFSWG55 ZmG55

Workpiece reference position (G54) OFSL

Workpiece reference position

(G55)

Workpiece(G54)

Workpiece(G55)

: Tool length compensation value when the offset from the workpiece reference position is measured ZmG54 : Distance traveled from the machine zero point to the workpiece reference position of G54 when measured with a tool whose length is OFSL ZmG55 : Distance traveled from the machine zero point to the workpiece reference position of G55 when measured with a tool whose length is OFSL OFSWG54 : Offset from the workpiece reference position of G54 OFSWG55 : Offset from the workpiece reference position of G55 The above figure shows that the offset from the workpiece reference position measured along the Z axis is calculated using the following formula: OFSW = Zm OFSL where OFSW: Offset from the workpiece reference position OFSL: Tool length compensation value when the offset from the workpiece reference position is measured Zm: Distance traveled from the machine zero point to the workpiece reference position when measured with a tool whose length is OFSL

237

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

(b) Method 2

B62564E1/02

As mentioned previously, the tool length compensation value measured in method 2 equals the offset from the workpiece reference position measured along the Z axis. The setting of the offset from the workpiece reference position is therefore not necessary. The setting of the offset from the workpiece reference position, however, can substitute for subsequently measuring the tool length compensation value in the following case: When the workpiece is changed after the tool length compensation value is measured for a workpiece or when workpiece coordinate systems G54 to G59 are assigned for machining several workpieces at once. Machine zero point

Tool

OFSL

ZmG55 Workpiece reference position (G55) OFSWG55

Workpiece(G55)

Workpiece reference position (G54)

Workpiece(G54)

OFSL ZmG55

: Tool length compensation value measured with workpiece G54 : Distance traveled from the machine zero point to the workpiece reference position of G55 when measured with a tool whose length is OFSL OFSWG55 : Offset from the workpiece reference position of G55 (The offset from the workpiece reference position of G54 is 0.) In method 2, the offset from the workpiece reference position measured along the Z axis is calculated using the same formula as in method 1. OFSW = Zm OFSL where OFSW : Offset from the workpiece reference position OFSL Zm : : Tool length compensation value when the offset from the workpiece reference position is measured Distance traveled from the machine zero point to the workpiece reference position when measured with a tool whose length is OFSL

238

B62564E1/02

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

(2) Offset from the workpiece reference position measured along the X or Y axis The offset from the workpiece reference position along the X or Y axis can be easily measured whether the workpiece reference position is on a surface of the workpiece or at the center of a machined hole. (a) When the workpiece reference position is on a surface +Y Workpiece +X Workpiece reference position

Offset from the workpiece reference position measured along the Y axis

Machine zero point

Offset from the workpiece reference position measured along the X axis

The above figure shows the case when the workpiece reference position is on a side of the workpiece. The basic idea for measuring the offset along the X or Y axis with the workpiece reference position on a surface of the workpiece is the same as for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position along the Z axis described in item (1). What is different is that the offset from the workpiece reference position along the X or Y axis is measured considering the cutter diameter, whereas the offset along the Z axis is measured considering the tool length. +Z +X Tool Workpiece

OFSR Xm OFSW Machine zero point Workpiece reference position

OFSR :Cutter compensation value when the offset from the workpiece reference position is measured Xm :Traveled distance from the machine zero point to the workpiece reference position when measured with a tool whose length is OFSR OFSW:Offset from the workpiece reference position The above figure shows that the offset from the workpiece reference position measured is calculated with the following formula: OFSW = Xm OFSR Be careful of the sign of cutter compensation value OFSR. The sign of OFSR is negative when the measurement surface is located in the positive direction from the center of the tool.

239

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

(b) When the workpiece reference position is at the center of a machined hole +Y +X Workpiece

B62564E1/02

Offset from the workpiece reference position measured along the Y axis

Workpiece reference position

Machine zero point

Offset from the workpiece reference position measured along the X axis

The above figure shows the case when the workpiece reference position is at the center of a machined hole in the workpiece. In this case, measure the positions of three points on the inside wall of the hole using a measuring probe with a sensor on the tip. The three points uniquely define the circle on which they lie, enabling the workpiece reference position for the X and Y axes to be determined as the center of the circle. +Z Measuring probe with a sensor +X

+Y +X

240

B62564E1/02

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

(3) Procedures for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position (a) Procedures for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position along the Z axis 1 Set a tool at the position of the spindle. Select the tool with an MDI instruction. The tool length compensation value of the selected tool must be already measured. 2 Select the manual handle feed or continuous manual feed mode. 3 Turn on the switch for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position on the operators panel on the machine. The control unit then automatically changes the CRT screen to that for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position. The WOFS status display blinks at the bottom of the screen to indicate that the preparation for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position is completed. 4 Enter the tool length compensation value of the selected tool with the numeric keys and press the TL_INP soft key. (The following is the screen when the parameter is set so that the measurement is not made according to the reference hole.)

5 Position the cursor on an offset value from G54 to G59 for the workpiece to be measured. The cursor can be on an offset value other than one along the Z axis. 6 Move the tool by manual handle feed or continuous manual feed until it touches the top of the workpiece. 7 Enter the axis (Z), press the <MEASURE> soft key, and press the <INPUT> soft key. The offset from the workpiece reference position measured along the Z axis is set according to the abovementioned formula. The cursor is located on the set offset value. When a parameter is set so that the offset from the workpiece reference position is measured only along the Z axis, the axis (Z) need not be entered. When the workpiece reference position is not on the top of the workpiece (for example, shifted from the top by the cutting allowance), enter the shift amount (S in the following figure) with the numeric keys and press the <MEASURE> soft key.

Workpiece reference position

S Workpiece

8 To measure the offset for the next workpiece, move the tool away from the current workpiece and repeat the operations from step 5.

241

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

B62564E1/02

(b) Procedures for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position along the X or Y axis using a reference surface Procedures when the workpiece reference position for the X or Y axis is on a surface of the workpiece is basically the same as for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position along the Z axis, excluding step 4. In step 4, enter the cutter compensation value of the selected tool on the screen for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position. Enter the value with the numeric keys and press the <TL_INP> soft key. When entering the cutter compensation value, be careful of the sign of the value. Prefix the value with when the measurement surface is located in the positive direction from the tool. Prefix the value with + when the measurement surface is located in the negative direction from the tool. (c) Procedures for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position along the X or Y axis using a reference hole 1 Attach the measuring probe with a sensor to the spindle. 2 Select the manual handle feed or continuous manual feed mode. 3 Turn on the switch for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position on the operators panel on the machine. The control unit then automatically changes the CRT screen to that for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position. The WOFS status display blinks at the bottom of the screen to indicate that the preparation for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position is completed. 4 Position the cursor on an offset value from G54 to G59 for the workpiece to be measured. The cursor can be on an offset value other than one along the X or Y axis. 5 Move the measuring probe by manual handle feed or continuous manual feed until it touches the inside wall of the hole. The probe can be moved only along one axis at a time. 6 When the sensor detects that the probe has touched the wall, the probe stops moving. The position where the probe stops is stored as the first measurement point. The machine coordinates of the stored measurement point are displayed at the bottom right of the CRT screen as shown in the figure below. 7 Move the probe to the second measurement point. At this time, the control unit inhibits the probe from moving in the direction it was moved immediately before. For example, when moving the probe after moving it in the +X direction until it touches the current measurement point, movements in the X, +Y, and Y directions are allowed but movement in the +X direction is inhibited until the probe moves away from the inside wall of the hole. This also applies after the probe touches the second measurement point. 8 After making the probe touch the third measurement point, press the MEASURE soft key then the <CENTER> soft key. The coordinates of the center are calculated from the coordinates of the three measured points, and the offset from the workpiece reference position along the X axis or Y axis is set. To stop the measurement midway and restart the operation, reset the control unit. Resetting the control unit clears all stored coordinates of the measurement points.

242

B62564E1/02

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

10.11 Menu Switch

1 Press the [function menu] key to switch the soft keys to the function selection keys. 2 Press the <SETTING> hard or soft key. One of the following screens is displayed.

SETTING

SETTING

SETTING

SETTING

(Menu switch screen) There are two ways to display the menu switch screen. 1) Press the <SETTING> hard or soft key several times. 2) Press the <CHAPTER> key and then the <OP.PANEL> key. 3 Move the cursor to the item to be set using the cursor keys ( < > <> ). 4 Press the [operation menu] key to switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys. 5 To set 1, press the <ON: 1> key. To set 0, press the <OFF: 0> key. The soft keys remain as the operation selection keys. 9" CRT function selection keys SETTING SERVICE MESSAGE CHAPTER

9" CRT SETTING chapter selection keys HANDY GENERAL OP .PANEL MACRO

9" CRT operation selection keys INPUT ON:1 OFF:0

243

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

14" CRT function selection keys
POSI TION PRO GRAM OFF SET
PRGRAM SET CHECK TING

B62564E1/02

SER VICE

MES SAGE

CHAP TER

14" CRT SETTING chapter selection keys HANDY GEN OPERAT MACRO TOOL ERAL PANLE LIFE VAR

14" CRT operation selection keys INPUT ON:1 OFF:0

NOTE

Ignoring the Zaxis means that the third axis is in the machine lock state even if the third axis is not the Zaxis.

244

B62564E1/02

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

10.12 Tool Life Management Data

10.12.1 Displaying and modifying a tool group
Tool group data registered in the area for storing and editing a part program can be displayed and modified in the same way as ordinary part program editing. The modified program, however, must be executed as described in item 11.2.(1) in Programming. Otherwise, the program will not be stored in the tool life data area.

10.12.2 Displaying tool life data while executing a machining program

Tool life management data is displayed on the CRT as follows: Press the <SETTING> key until tool life data is displayed in any mode. Alternatively, press the <CHAPTER> key and then the <TOOL LIFE> key on the setting screen. The previously displayed page is displayed. (However, the first group is displayed immediately after the power is turned on.) The number of groups that can be displayed on a page depends on the parameter settings and the CRT type as shown in the following table (see Figure 10.12.5 for the display format): Table 10.12.2 Number of groups that can be displayed on a page Maximum number of tools 2 2 6 256 4 8 16 4 12 512 8 16 32 Maximum number of groups 128 64 32 16 512 256 128 64 5 5 3 2 5 3 2 1 Size of grouop 9inch groups/page groups/page groups/page groups/page groups/page groups/page groups/page group/page 14inch 14 groups/page 14 groups/page 10 groups/page 6 groups/page 14 groups/page 10 groups/page 6 groups/page 2 groups/page

Number of tool l groups

On the 9 screen, up to 7 numbers of the groups for which tool change signals are issued are displayed at the bottom of the screen. On the 14 screen, up to 15 numbers are displayed. If there are more than 7 groups on the 9 screen or 15 groups on the 14 screen, an arrow appears. If the option for 1024 tool life management groups is used, up to 6 numbers of the groups for which tool change signals are issued are displayed along the bottom of the tool life screen (13 numbers when the 14 screen is being used). For information on a specified group, enter the group number and press <INPNO.>. The page on which the group starts is displayed. (When the specified group is already displayed, the cursor moves to the life counter for the group.) Press <> or <> for information on the previous or next group. Pressing <> or < >moves the cursor to the life counter for the previous or next group. When the cursor is on the first or last group on the screen, the page changes.

10.12.3 Presetting a tool life counter

To change the value of a life counter, enter the MDI mode, set the value, and press <PRESET>. The life counter for the group at cursor position is preset. Other data on the group does not change.

10.12.4 Clearing execution data

Specify the number of a group generating a tool change signal and press <CANCEL>. All execution data for the group up to the point is cleared. This is equivalent to tool reset for a group(Note 1). (See 10.12.7.) NOTE <CANCEL> is accepted only in the RESET status. (It is not, however, accepted during the RESET process.)

245

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 10.12.5 Display format of tool life data
The following figure shows the display format on a 9 CRT.
TOOL LIFE DATA 01234 N01234 SELECTED GROUP GROUP 001 : LIFE 4300 COUNT 0240 *0100 *0110 *0120 *0130 *0150 @0160 0170 #0140 GROUP 002 : LIFE 4300 COUNT 4300 *0200 *0210 #0220 *0230 *0240 #0250 *0260 0270 GROUP 003 : LIFE 3800 COUNT 1350 *0300 *0310 0320 0330 0340 0350 0360 0370 GROUP TO BE CHANGE 002 005 013 027 055 060 062

B62564E1/02

Fig. 10.12.5 Display format (1) The first line is the title line. (2) The second line displays the number of the group for which commands are currently executed. If there is no such group, *** is displayed instead. (3) The third to fifth lines display the tool life data for the group. (The number of displayed lines varies depending on the maximum number of tools. In this example, the maximum number of tools is 8.) The third line displays the group number, the set tool life, and the current tool use count. A parameter specifies whether the tool life is counted as duration of use or number of times used. (See II11.2.) The fourth and fifth lines display the tool numbers. In this example, the tools are selected in the order of 0100, 0110, 0120, 0130, 0140, 0150, 0160, and 0170. The special characters have the following meanings:
*

: Indicates that the life of the tool has expired. : Indicates that a skip command is specified.

@ : Indicates that the tool is currently being used. The value of the tool life counter corresponds to that for the tool marked @. * is displayed the next time commands are executed for the group the tool belongs to. (4) The sixth to eleventh lines display the life data for group 2 and group 3. (5) The thirteenth line displays the numbers of the groups for which tool changes signals are issued. The group numbers are displayed in ascending order. If all group numbers cannot be displayed on a screen, an arrow is displayed at the end. Otherwise, *** is displayed at the end.

246

B62564E1/02 10.12.6 Tool change signal

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

Each time the life of a tool expires, the next tool in the group is selected. When the life of the last tool in a group expires, a tool change signal is output. When the tool life is in terms of the duration of use, the signal is output when the time elapses even during machining. The machining, however, continues. When the tool life is in terms of the number of times used, this signal is output when the CNC is reset by M02/M30 after the set value has been reached. When all tools in a group have expired, the group is displayed on the CRT and a tool change signal is output. If the group is specified again without resetting the signal (see 10.12.7), the last tool is used.

10.12.7 Resetting a tool change signal

A tool change signal can be reset and hence automatically terminated in either of the following ways: (1) With a tool change reset signal Replace the tools in the group and input a tool change reset signal by externally specifying the group. Then, the tool life counter, the * and @ marks, and other related data are cleared. Perform this operation for all groups whose life expires. A tool change signal continues to be output while there is at least one group whose life has expired. Parameter No. 7400 (RAG) allows all groups to be cleared without externally specifying a group. When the allclean signal is issued, the data for either all groups or only groups whose life has expired is cleared, depends on a parameter setting. (2) From the MDI panel The MDI panel can be used to reset the data for all groups whose life has expired (see III10.12.4). NOTE The reset operation is valid only when the CNC is in the reset status (excluding during the reset process). When the group which has been reset is specified again, the first tool is selected.

10.12.8 New tool selection signal

When a new tool in a group is selected, a new tool selection signal is output together with the T code of the tool. This signal can be used to automatically measure the compensation value for the new tool.

10.12.9 Tool skip signal

Tools whose life has not expired can be forcibly replaced in either of the following ways. Set the SNG bit of parameter No. 7400 to specify whether the signal is valid only when tools subject to tool life management are used or also when tools not subject to tool life management are used. (1) Externally specify the group to which the tool belongs and input a tool skip signal. The next T code selects the next tool in the specified group. (2) Input a tool skip signal without specifying a group number. When tools subject to tool life management are used, it is assumed that the current group is specified. When tools not subject to tool life management are used but a parameter specifies that the signal is valid also for that case, it is assumed that the group last used is specified. The next T code selects the next tool in the specified group. When a tool skip signal is input for the last tool, a tool change signal is output irrespective of whether the tool life is in terms of duration of use or number of times used. A tool skip signal is not accepted during the reset process.

247

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 10.12.10 Expanded tool life management

B62564E1/02

It is possible to display details of tool management data, edit the data via the MDI, and override the tool life in terms of the duration of use. (1) Displaying the details of tool life management data The details of tool life management data can be displayed by positioning the cursor on the group whose data is to be displayed and pressing the <EDIT> soft key on the ordinary tool life management screen. (Expanded tool life management screen)
EDIT LIFE DATA GROUP: 005 TYPE : LIFE : COUNT: NO. 01 02 03 04 1(1:C 2:M) 4300 2000 STATE TCODE * 10001 * 10002 # 10003 @ 10004 01234 N01234 NEXT GRP:006 USE GRP :008 SLCT GRP:008 DCODE 2 12 13 25

HCODE 1 10 11 20

NEXT GRP: USE GRP: SLCT GRP: TYPE: LIFE: COUNT: STATE:

Number of the group whose tool life starts to be monitored when the next M06 command is executed Number of the group whose tool life is currently being monitored Number of the group whose tool life is currently being monitored or was monitored last 1 (when the tool life is in terms of the number of times the tool is used) 2 (when the tool life is in terms of the duration of use) The life of the tool The elapsed life of the tool The state of the tool Used @ # @ / * (Note) Not used Blank # * The underscore indicates that the special character is displayed in reverse.

Tool state Usable Skipped The tool life has expired

NOTE

The EMD bit of parameter No. 7401 determines whether the asterisks is displayed when the next tool is used or when the tool life has expired.

TCODE: HCODE: DCODE:

Tool number H code D code

The following information is added also to the ordinary tool life management screen: 1 Displaying NEXT GRP and USE GRP 2 Displaying the type of tool life data (M: Duration of use, C: No. of times) for each tool group 3 Displaying the state of a tool as on the expanded tool life management screen (2) Editing tool life management data Tool life management data can be edited when the CNC is stopped, paused, or reset (excluding while the resetting signal is on) in the MDI mode. Data cannot be edited while the program is setting data. The following alterations can be made when editing data:

248

B62564E1/02
1 Setting a tool life 2 Setting an elapsed tool life 3 Adding, changing, or deleting a tool number (T code) 4 Setting an H code or D code 5 Setting the type of life data 6 Setting the state of a tool

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

NOTE 1 Do not edit a group whose tool life starts to be monitored when the next M06 command is executed or a group whose tool life is currently being monitored. An attempt to edit such a group forcibly terminates the tool management for the group. NOTE 2 Editing tool life data may turn on or off a tool change signal.

1 A tool change signal is turned on in the following cases: i) When the tool state is skipped for the last tool ii) When deleting a tool number leaves only tools whose life has expired (including skipped tools) in the tool group 2 A tool change signal is turned off in the following cases: i) When a tool whose life has not expired is added to the tool group ii) When a tool state is cleared A tool change signal is not turned off if there is another group whose tool life has expired. (3) Editing tool life data (a) Selecting the editing screen for expanded tool life management Position the cursor on the group to be edited and press the <EDIT> soft key on the ordinary tool life management screen to select the expanded tool life management screen. (b) Selecting the ordinary tool life management screen Press the <END> soft key to return to the ordinary tool life management screen. (c) Setting the tool life, the elapsed tool life, the type of tool life data, the tool number, and the H and D codes INPUT INSERT DELETE STATE

(VALUE)

EXEC 1 Position the cursor on the item to be changed, press the <INPUT> soft key, enter the value, and press the <EXEC> soft key. 2 Position the cursor on the item to be changed, enter the value, and press the <INPUT> soft key. NOTE 1 Changing the tool life or the elapsed tool life does not affect the state of the tool or tool change signal. NOTE 2 When the type of tool life data is changed, reset the tool life value and the elapsed tool life.

249

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

(d) Adding a tool group or tool number INPUT INSERT DELETE STATE

B62564E1/02

(VALUE)

EXEC 1 Adding a tool group To add data to a group where no data has been set yet: Press the <INSERT> soft key, enter the tool number, and press the <EXEC> soft key. The type of tool life data is set according to the current parameter (the LTM bit of parameter No. 7400) and the tool life and elapsed tool life are set to 0. NOTE The cursor does not move until the tool number is set.

2 Adding a tool number A tool number can be added in either of the following ways: i. Position the cursor on the tool data (tool number or H or D code) before the position where a tool number is to be added, press the <INSERT> soft key, enter the tool number, and press the <EXEC> soft key. ii. Position the cursor on the tool data (tool number or H or D code) before the position where a tool number is to be added, enter the tool number, and press the <INSERT> soft key. Example Adding tool number 1500 between No. 01 and 02 Position the cursor on 20 in the DCODE column, press the <INSERT> soft key, enter 1500, and press the <EXEC> soft key. TCODE 1320 1400 TCODE 1320 1500 1400 HCODE DCODE 10 20 30 40 HCODE DCODE 10 20 0 0 30 40

NO. CONDITION 01 * 02 # NO. CONDITION * 01 02 03 @ NOTE

The H and D codes are set to 0.

(e) Deleting a tool group or tool number INPUT INSERT DELETE STATE

<CRSR>

GRP

EXEC

250

B62564E1/02
1 Deleting a tool group

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

Press the <DELETE> soft key, the <GRP> soft key, then the <EXEC> soft key. 2 Deleting a tool number Position the cursor on the tool data (tool number or H or D code) to be deleted, press the <DELETE> soft key, and press the <CRSR> soft key. NOTE 1 Deleting all tools in a tool group is equivalent to deleting a group. NOTE 2 When a tool being used (prefixed by @) is deleted, the previous tool whose life has expired or which is skipped is indicated by @.

(f) Setting the state of a tool INPUT INSERT DELETE STATE

SKIP

CLEAR

1 Skipping a tool Position the cursor on the tool data (tool number or H or D code) to be skipped, press the <STATE> soft key, then press the <SKIP> soft key. 2 Clearing tool life data (resetting the life) Position the cursor on the tool data (tool number or H or D code) to be cleared, press the <STATE> soft key, then press the <CLEAR> soft key. (4) Overriding the elapsed tool life When the life of the tools in a group is in terms of duration of use, the elapsed tool life can be overridden. The override factor is specified by a switch on the machine operators panel. The override factor ranges from 0 to 99.9. When 0 is specified, the tool life is not monitored. Set the LFV bit of parameter No. 7401 to enable the override switch. Example When the override factor is 0.1 and it takes ten minutes to cut the workpiece, one minute is added to the elapsed tool life.

NOTE

The elapsed tool life is not updated when the actual cutting time is less than four seconds. However, when the TRV bit of parameter No.7401 is set to 1, outting time loss than four seconds is counted as four seconds (two or three seconds are counted as four seconds).

251

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

B62564E1/02

10.13 Software Operators Panel

Many operations performed on the machine operators panel can also be performed on the software operators panel (the CRT/MDI panel). The following operations are possible on the CRT/MDI panel: (a) Group 1: Mode selection (b) Group 2: Selection of the jog feed axis and jog rapid traverse (c) Group 3: Selection of the feed axis for the manual pulse generator and selection of the manual pulse factor from X1, X10, and Xn (where n is set by a parameter) (d) Group 4: Selection of the jog feedrate, feedrate override, and rapid traverse override (e) Group 5: Optional block skip (block deletion), single block operation, machine lock, and dry run (f) Group 6: Memory protection (g) Group 7: Feed hold (h) Group 8: Generalpurpose switches (Eight generalpurpose switches are provided. A name consisting of up to eight characters can be assigned to each switch.) Whether to use the CRT or machine operators panel is determined by parameter No. 7603 for each group. (1) Settings such as mode selection 1 Press the [function menu] key to switch the soft keys to the function selection keys. 2 Press the <SETTING> soft or hard key several times to select the menu switch screen. 3 Press one of the page keys several times to display the software operators panel screen.

The screen for generalpurpose switches is shown above. The user can allocate eight signals on this screen. A name consisting of up to eight characters can be assigned to each signal by a parameter.

252

B62564E1/02

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

4 Position the cursor (represented by a solid box) on the desired switch using the cursor keys (<> <>). 5 Position the cursor on the desired status using the cursor keys (<> <>). (The selected statuses are displayed in reverse.) (2) Jog feed (available only for the small 9 CRT/MDI unit)

7 4 1
SP

8 5 2
?

9 6 3 t

1 Display the software operators panel screen using the soft keys. 2 Select the JOG mode. 3 Perform jog feed by pressing one of the arrow keys. 5 key together with an arrow key jogs the machine at Pressing the the rapid traverse feedrate. , *

+ EOB )

0 = &

CAUTION

When the CRT displays a screen other than the software operators panel screen, jog feed is disabled.

NOTE

The axis and direction corresponding to each arrow key are set by parameters No. 2020 and 2021.

(2) Generalpurpose switches As an extension of the software operators panel, an additional eight switches can be arbitrarily specified. The eight switches are assigned a name consisting of up to eight characters by a parameter. Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for the function of each switch. (3) Displaying software operators panel by function The unused switches can be deleted from the software operator panel by setting parameter OPND (bit 6 of parameter No.7601). NOTE 1 The unused switches refer to those which specified as unused by bits 0, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 of parameter No.7603. NOTE 2 General-purpose switches 1 to 8 are assumed to be unused when all corresponding bits of parameter Nos. 2311 to 2318, 2321 to 2328, . . . , and 2381 to 2388 (parameters to name switches) are 0.

Example

The screens when the parameters shown in Table 1 are set are shown on the following pages:

253

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

B62564E1/02

Table 1 Example of Setting of Parameters for Software Operators Panel Parameter no. 7601#6 7603#0 7603#2 7603#3 7603#4 7603#5 7603#6 2311 2312 2313 2314 2315 2316 2317 2318 2321 to 2328 2331 to 2338 2341 to 2348 2351 to 2358 2361 to 2368 2371 to 2378 2381 to 2388 Value 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 83 73 71 78 65 76 32 49 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Mode selection is done. Axis and multiplier selection of manual pulse generator is done. Jog feed, override and rapid traverse override are not executed. Optional block skip, Single block and Machine lockand Dry run are not executed. Memory protect is done. Feed hold is done. Name of G.P.switch 1, Name of G.P.switch 1, Name of G.P.switch 1, Name of G.P.switch 1, Name of G.P.switch 1, Name of G.P.switch 1, Name of G.P.switch 1, Name of G.P.switch 1, Name of G.P.switch 2 Name of G.P.switch 3 Name of G.P.switch 4 Name of G.P.switch 5 Name of G.P.switch 6 Name of G.P.switch 7 Name of G.P.switch 8 1st character 2nd character 3rd character 4th character 5th character 6th character 7th character 8th character (S) (I) (G) (N) (A) (L) ( ) (1) Meaning Unused switches are not displayed.

G. P. switch=General Purpose switch

By the above setting, the following switches are not displayed: Rapid traverse override switch Jog feedrate switch Feedrate override switch Optional block skip switch Single block switch Machine lock switch Dry run switch General purpose switches 2 to 8

OPERATORS PANEL

O1234

N00000

MODE : EDT MEM TAP MDI JOG REF HND INC HANDLE AXIS : X Y Z HANDLE MULTI : *1 *10 *100

ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE) X 10.000 Y Z 12.100

123.400

ACT F : 0 (MM/MIN) S: 0 (RPM) EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** 00:46:32 LSK SETTING SERVICE MESSAGE CHAPTER +

Fig. 1 Software Operators Panel Display Example 1st page (9 CRT)

254

B62564E1/02

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

OPERATORS PANEL MEMORY PROTECT FEED HOLD

O1234 N00000 : PROTECT RELEASE : OFF ON

ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE) X 10.000 Y Z 12.100

123.400

ACT F : 0 (MM/MIN) S: 0 (RPM) EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** 00:46:32 LSK SETTING SERVICE MESSAGE CHAPTER +

Fig. 2 Software Operators Panel Display Example 2nd page (9 CRT)

OPERATORS PANEL SIGNAL 1 : OFF 0N

O1234 N00000

ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE) X 10.000 Y Z 12.100

123.400

ACT F : 0 (MM/MIN) S: 0 (RPM) EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** 00:46:32 LSK SETTING SERVICE MESSAGE CHAPTER +

Fig. 3 Software Operators Panel Display Example 3rd page (9 CRT)

255

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

B62564E1/02

10.14 Tool Offset Using Tool Numbers

10.14.1 Selecting the tool data screen
1 Press the [function menu] key. 2 Press the <OFFSET> soft or hard key several times to display the following screen.

After pressing the <OFFSET> key, press the <CHAPTER> key to switch the soft keys to the chapter selection keys. Pressing the <TOOL> key displays the tool data screen. 9" CRT function selection keys POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET 9" CRT OFFSET chapter selection keys WEAR WRK.ZER TL.DATA PRG-CHK CHAPTER +

14" CRT function selection keys

POSI TION PRO GRAM OFF SET
PRGRAM SET CHECK TING

SER VICE

MES SAGE

CHAP TER

14" CRT OFFSET chapter selection keys TOOL WORK ZERO TOOL DATA

256

B62564E1/02

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

(a) The numbers displayed in the NO. column are called display numbers. The display numbers are used for editing or searching for tool data. The display numbers, however, may change when tool data is deleted or inserted. (b) The 3digit number preceded by E: on the second line of the above example indicates the display number of the tool data for which compensation is currently enabled (after an M06 command). The 3digit number preceded by S: indicates the display number of the selected tool data (before an M06 command). When machining is executed or there is no selected tool, *** is displayed. (c) * is displayed before a pot number when the same pot number is set. (d) Data positions which are not set become blanks. (e) When there is no registered data or before about 15 seconds elapse after the power is turned on, display number 001 is *** and other data positions are blanks. (f) On a 14 CRT, the above example is displayed on the left, the items related to (b) are in the center, and the current position (relative coordinates) is on the right.

10.14.2 Setting tool data

(1) Entering and changing data 1 Position the cursor at the data to be entered or changed using the page keys (<> <>) or cursor keys ( <> <> <> <> ). 2 Press the [operation menu] key to switch the soft keys to the following: 9" CRT operation selection keys INPUT INSERT DELETE SEARCH

14" CRT operation selection keys IN PUT IN SERT DE LETE SEAR MEA PUNCH CH SURE CHAP TER

3 Enter or change data as follows: i) Press the [operation menu] key. ii) Press the <INPUT> key. iii) Enter the data to be set. iv) Press the <EXEC> key. NOTE Step i) can be omitted.

9" CRT operation selection keys INPUT (VALUE) EXEC INSERT DELETE SEARCH

257

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

14" CRT operation selection keys IN PUT (VAL UE) EXEC (2) T codes 1 Press the [operation menu] key. IN SERT DE LETE SEAR MEA PUNCH CH SURE

B62564E1/02

CHAP TER

2 A new T code can be inserted under the current cursor position using the insert command. Press the soft keys <INSERT>, <(T#)>, then <EXEC>.

VINSERTWT1030VEXECW

3 After pressing <(T#)> (or entering T), enter the T code to be inserted. A warning is issued when 300 data sets are already registered or the same T code exists.

258

B62564E1/02

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

4 When <EXEC> is pressed without entering a T code number (only T is entered), a T code is not set but only the area is allocated.

Example

T1234, <EXEC>: 1234 is inserted in the T_CODE column. T, <EXEC>: Only the area is inserted leaving the T_CODE column blank.

9" CRT operation selectionkeys INPUT INSERT (T#) EXEC 14" CRT operation selection keys IN PUT IN SERT DE LETE SEAR MEA PUNCH CH SURE DELETE SEARCH

(T#) EXEC

259

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

(3) Deleting registered data (a) Method 1 for deleting a line i) Press the [operation menu] key. ii) Press the <DELETE> key. iii) Enter the display number of the line to be deleted. iv) Press the <EXEC> key. (b) Method 2 for deleting a line i) Press the [operation menu] key. ii) Move the cursor to the line to be deleted. iii) Press the <DELETE> key. iv) Press the <CRSR> key. (c) Deleting consecutive lines i) Press the [operation menu] key. ii) Press the <DELETE> key. iii) Enter the starting display number (M) and end display number (N). iv) Press the <EXEC> key. The lines from display number M to N are deleted. 9" CRT operation selection keys INPUT INSERT DELETE (No.) EXEC , (No.) EXEC 14" CRT operation selection keys IN PUT IN SERT DE LETE SEAR MEA PUNCH CH SURE <CRSR> SEARCH

B62564E1/02

(No.) EXEC

<CRS R>

,(No.)

EXEC

260

B62564E1/02
(4) Searching for data (a) Searching for a display number i) Press the [operation menu] key. ii) Press the <SEARCH> key. iii) Enter the display number to be searched for. iv) Press the <EXEC> key. (b) Searching for a T code i) Press the [operation menu] key. ii) Press the <SEARCH> key.

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

iii) Enter T and the T code number to be searched for. iv) Press the <EXEC> key. (c) Searching for a POT number i) Press the [operation menu] key. ii) Press the <SEARCH> key. iii) Enter P and the POT number to be searched for. iv) Press the <EXEC> key. To search for the same POT number which appears next: v) Press the <SEARCH> key. vi) Enter P. vii) Press the <EXEC> key. (d) Searching for the last registered data i) Press the [operation menu] key. ii) Press the <SEARCH> key. iii) Press the <BOTTOM> key. 9" CRT operation selection keys INPUT INSERT DELETE SEARCH (NO.) EXEC 14" CRT operation selection keys IN PUT IN SERT DE LETE BOT TOM SEAR MEA PUNCH CH SURE (T#) (P#) BOTTOM

(NO.) EXEC

(T#)

(P#)

261

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

B62564E1/02

10.15 Setting the Floating Reference Position

The floating reference position is set as follows: 1 Select the currentposition screen. The currentposition screen may be the overall position display, relative position display, or current position display in a work coordinate system. 2 Move the machine to the floating reference position by manual jog feed or a similar operation. 3 Press the [operation menu] key to switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys. 4 Press the [MEMFRP] key. The soft keys are switched to the operation guide keys. 5 51 To store the coordinates on all axes as a floating reference position, press the [ALLAXS] key. 52 To store the coordinate along a specified axis as a floating reference position, enter the name of the axis (X, Y, etc.) and press the <EXEC> key. Multiple axis names can be specified at a time. Example Enter XYZ and press the <EXEC> key. 6 Setting the FPC bit of parameter No. 1200 presets the relative position display to 0 and stores the floating reference position. 9" CRT POSITOIN operation selection keys ORIGIN PRESET MEM-FRP

9" CRT MEM-FRP operation guide keys ALL-AXE (AXIS)

14" CRT POSITION operation selection keys ORI GIN PRE SET MEM -FEP

14" CRT MEM-FRP operation guidance keys ALL AXE AXIS

NOTE 1 The floating reference position is stored when the power is turned off. NOTE 2 The stored floating reference position (machine coordinates) can be checked on the parameter screen. (The data is stored in parameter No. 1244.)

262

B62564E1/02

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

10.16 Servo and Spindle Setting and Adjustment Screens and Spindle Monitor Screen
The servo setting screen, servo adjustment screen, spindle setting screen, spindle adjustment screen, and spindle monitor screen have been added to the screens which can be displayed by pressing the <SERVICE> hard key or the <SERVICE> function selection soft key. The servo motor and spindle motor can thereby be easily set or adjusted.

10.16.1 Servo screens

(1) Servo setting screen This screen displays the parameters necessary for the initial standard setting of the servo motor. This setting screen is valid only for servo axes. It cannot be used for spindle positioning axes or Cs contour control axes.
SERVO SETTING O1000 N0000

X AXIS INITIAL SET BITS 00000011 MOTOR ID NO. 12 AMR 00011111 CMR 2 FEEDGEAR N 2 (N/M) M 3 DIRECTION SET 111 VELOCITY PULSE NO. 8000 POSITION PULSE NO. 8000 REF. COUNTER 8000

Z AXIS 00000011 12 00011111 2 2 3 111 8000 8000 8000

MDI *** STOP **** *** 14:48:20 LSK SERVO SPINDLE CHAPTER+

The correspondence between the items on the screen and the parameters are as follows: INITIAL SET BITS MOTOR ID NO. AMR CMR FEEDGEAR N (N/M) M DIRECTION SET : Parameter No. 1804 : Parameter No. 1874 : Parameter No. 1806 : Parameter No. 1820 : Parameter No. 1977 : Parameter No. 1978 : Parameter No. 1879

VELOCITY PULSE NO. : Parameter No. 1876 POSITION PULSE NO. : Parameter No. 1891 REF. COUNTER NOTE : Parameter No. 1896

The servo setting screen is available only to the servo axes. It is not available to the spindle positioning axis and Cs contouring control axis.

263

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

(2) Servo adjustment screen

B62564E1/02

This screen displays the parameters and status monitors necessary for basic adjustment of the servo motor.
SERVO MOTOR TUNING X AXIS (PARAMETER) FUNC. BIT 00110100 LOOP GAIN 3000 TUNING ST. 1 SET PERIOD 50 INT. GAIN 251 PROP. GAIN 2460 FILTER 2450 VELOC. GAIN % 150 O1000 N0000

(MONITOR) ALARM 1 00110100 ALARM 2 00110100 ALARM 3 00000000 ALARM 4 00000000 LOOP GAIN 3000 POS ERROR 100 CURRENT % 5 SPEED(RPM) 50

MDI *** STOP **** *** 14:48:20 LSK SERVO SPINDLE CHAPTER+

The correspondence between the items on the screen and parameters are as follows: FUNC. BIT LOOP GAIN INT. GAIN FILTER : Parameter No. 1808 : Parameter No. 1825 : Parameter No. 1855 : Parameter No. 1895

SET PERIOD : Parameter No. 1972 PROP. GAIN : Parameter No. 1856 VELOC.GAIN % : (LDINT ) 1) 100 256 (NOTE LDINT : Parameter No. 1875) TUNING ST. ALARM 1 ALARM 2 ALARM 3 ALARM 4 LOOP GAIN : When 1 is set, the digital servo is automatically adjusted. : Data for diagnosis of a servo alarm : Data for diagnosis of a servo alarm : Data for diagnosis of a servo alarm : Data for diagnosis of a servo alarm : Displays the loop gain obtained from the output pulse and position deviation. The following monitors are provided:

POS ERROR : Displays the magnitude of the error for each axis. CURRENT % : Displays Actual current 100 Parameter No.1979 SPEED (RPM): Displays the actual speed for each axis.

264

B62564E1/02 10.16.2 Spindle screens

(1) Spindle setting screen

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

This screen displays the parameters necessary for the initial standard setting of the spindles.
SPINDLE SETTING GEAR SELECT SPINDLE :1 :S11 O1000 N0000

(PARAMETER) GEAR RATIO MAX MOTOR SPEED MAX CS AXIS SPEED MAX SPINDLE SPEED

50 6000 100 3000

MDI *** STOP **** *** 14:48:20 LSK SERVO SPINDLE CHAPTER+

GEAR SELECT : Displays one of the following modes depending on the states of control input signals CTH1 and CTH2. CTH1 0 0 1 1 SPINDLE S11 S12 S21 S22 PARAMETER CTH2 0 1 0 1 Mode HIGH GEAR MIDIUM HIGH GEAR MEDIUM LOW GEAR LOW GEAR Display 4 3 2 1

: Displays which spindle is being adjusted. : Main spindle of the first spindle amplifier : Subspindle of the first spindle amplifier : Main spindle of the second spindle amplifier : Subspindle of the second spindle amplifier : Displays one of the following parameter numbers according to the gear selection. HIGH M.H 3057 3020 3021 M.L 3058 3020 3021 LOW 3059 3020 3021

Gear ratio Maximum rotation speed of the motor Maximum rotation speed of C axis

3056 3020 3021

MAX SPINDLE SPEED : Displays the value obtained from the gear ratio and maximum rotation speed of the motor. The cursor does not move to this item.

265

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

(2) Spindle adjustment screen

B62564E1/02

This screen displays the parameters and status monitors necessary for basic adjustment of the spindles.
SPINDLE TUNING O1000 N0000

OPERATION :SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL GEAR SELECT :1 SPINDLE :S11 (PARAMETER) PROP. GAIN 2460 MOTOR 100 INT. GAIN 251 SPINDLE 150 LOOP GAIN 3000 POS ERR S1 100 MOTOR VOLT 30 POS ERR S2 50 ZRN GAIN % 300 SYN.ERROR 128 REF. SHIFT 300

MDI *** STOP **** *** 14:48:20 LSK SERVO SPINDLE CHAPTER+

OPERATION : Displays one of the following according to on the spindle setting. 1 Normal operation 2 CS control 3 Synchronous control 4 Rigid tapping 5 Orientation 6 (Blank)

PARAMETER : Displays one of the following parameter numbers according to the gear selection and operating mode. <During normal operation> HIGH Proportional gain Integrated gain Motor voltage Generative power 3040 3048 3083 3080 M.H 3040 3048 3083 3080 M.L 3041 3049 3083 3080 LOW 3041 3049 3083 3080

<During CS control> HIGH Proportional gain Integrated gain Loop gain Motor voltage ZRN gain (%) Reference position shift 3046 3054 3069 3086 3092 3135 M.H 3046 3054 3070 3086 3092 3135 M.L 3047 3055 3071 3086 3092 3135 LOW 3047 3055 3072 3086 3092 3135

266

B62564E1/02
<During synchronous control> HIGH Proportional gain Integrated gain Loop gain Motor voltage Acceleration/ deceleration constant Reference position shift 3044 3052 3065 3085 3032 3034 M.H 3044 3052 3066 3085 3032 3034 M.L 3045 3053 3067 3085 3032 3034 LOW 3045 3053 3068 3085 3032 3034

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

<During rigid tapping> HIGH Proportional gain Integrated gain Loop gain Motor voltage ZRN gain (%) Reference position shift 3044 3052 3065 3085 3091 3073 M.H 3044 3052 3066 3085 3091 3073 M.L 3045 3053 3067 3085 3091 3073 LOW 3045 3053 3068 3085 3091 3073

<During orientation> HIGH Proportional gain Integrated gain Loop gain Motor voltage ORAR gain (%) Stop position shift Reference position shift 3042 3050 3060 3084 3064 3077 3031 M.H 3042 3050 3061 3084 3064 3077 3031 M.L 3043 3051 3062 3084 3064 3077 3031 LOW 3043 3051 3063 3084 3064 3077 3031

MONITOR: Displays one of the following according to the operating mode: Normal operation Motor speedSpindle speed CS control Motor speedFeedratePosition deviation S1 Synchronous control Motor speedSpindle speedPosition deviation S1 Position deviation S2 Synchronous error Rigid tapping Motor speedSpindle speedPosition deviation S1 Position deviation Z Synchronous error Orientation Motor speedSpindle speedPosition deviation S1

Motor speed Spindle speed Feedrate

: Displays the speed of the spindle motor. (Unit: RPM) : Displays the speed of the spindle. (Unit: RPM) : Displays the feedrate of the spindle. (Unit: DEG/MIN)

Position deviation S1 : Displays the spindle position deviation for the first unit. Position deviation S2 : Displays the spindle position deviation for the second unit. Synchronous error : Displays the instantaneous value of the synchronous position deviation between the spindle and Z axis during rigid tapping. Displays the instantaneous value of the synchronous position deviation between the main spindle and subspindle during synchronous control. Peak hold values can be displayed by setting the PKHD bit of parameter No. 5820. NOTE When the second spindle is displayed during orientation or CS control, position deviation S2 is displayed.

267

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

(3) Spindle monitor screen This screen displays various information on the spindles.
SPINDLE MONITOR ALARM OPERATION FEED.SPEED MOTOR SPEED LOAD METER =========== CONTROL INPUT :MRDY *ESP ORCM CONTROL OUTPUT:ORAR SST O1000 N0000

B62564E1/02

:AL27(PC DISCON. ) :SP.CONTOURING CONTROL : 100 DEG/MIN : 150 RPM 0 50 100 150 200(%)

MDI *** STOP **** *** 14:48:20 LSK SERVO SPINDLE CHAPTER+

ALARM : Displays one of the following according to the spindle alarm number: No. 01 02 07 09 10 11 12 13 18 19 20 24 Display MOTOR OVERHEAT SPEED ER.EXCESS OVER SPEED HEATSINK OVERHEAT LOW VOLTAGE DC LINK OVER VOLT DC LINK OVER CUR. MEMORY ABNOR. SUM CHECK ER. U PHASE OFFSET V PHASE OFFSET SERI.DATA ABNOR. LOAD METER : No. 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Display SERI.TRANS.STOP CVEL.DISCON. PC DISCON. CPOS.DISCON. OVERLOAD INPUT OVER CUR. PG DISCON SERI.RAM ABNOR. DC LINK LOW VOLT PARA. SET ABNOR. GEAR RATIO SET ER ER.COUNT.OVERFLOW

Displays the load (%) of the spindle motor.

268

B62564E1/02

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

CONTROL INPUT: Displays up to ten of the following signals when they are on.

Symbol TLML TLMH CTH1 CTH2 SRV SFR ORCM MRDY ARST

Name Torque restrict command LOW Torque restrict command HIGH Clutch/gear ratio Clutch/gear ratio Reverse rotate command Forward rotate command Orientation command Machine tool ready Alarm reset signal

Symbol
*

Name External stop instruction Spindle select command Power line switching complete signal Soft start/stop cancel Output switching request signal Power line status check signal Orientation stop position change Orientation stop rotation direction Orientation shortpa

ESP

SPSL MCFN SOCN RSL RCH INDX ROTA NRRO

CONTROL OUTPUT: Displays up to ten of the following signals when they are on. Symbol ALM SST SDT SAR LDT1 LDT2 Alarm signal Speed zero signal Speed detected signal Speed reached signal Load detected signal 1 Load detected signal 2 Name Symbol TLM5 ORAR CHP CFIN RCHP RCFN Name Torque restricting signal Orientation completion signal Power line switching signal Spindle switching complete signal Output switching signal Output switching complete signal

269

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 10.16.3 Operations

B62564E1/02

The servo setting screen, servo adjustment screen, spindle setting screen, spindle adjustment screen, and spindle monitor screen have been added to the screens which can be displayed by pressing the <SERVICE> hard key or the <SERVICE> function selection soft key. 1 Press the [function menu] key. 2 Press the <SERVICE> soft or hard key. 9" CRT function selection keys POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET PRG-CHK CHAPTER +

SETTING

SERVICE

MESSAGE

CHAPTER +

3 Pressing the <SERVO> key displays the servo setting screen or servo adjustment screen. Pressing the <SPINDLE> key displays the spindle setting screen, spindle adjustment screen, or spindle monitor screen. 9" CRT SERVICE selection keys PARAM PITCH DIAGNOS DSP .MEM CHAPTER +

MAP-SRV

SYSTEM

CHAPTER +

SERVO

SPINDLE

CHAPTER +

Select screens in either of the following ways: a) Servo setting screen and servo adjustment screen i) Press the <SERVICE> key until the servo setting screen or servo adjustment screen is displayed. ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key then the <SERVO> key. After the servo setting screen or servo adjustment screen is displayed, the servo setting screen or servo adjustment screen for each axis can be displayed using the page keys. b) Spindle setting screen, spindle adjustment screen, and spindle monitor screen i) Press the <SERVICE> key until the spindle setting screen, spindle adjustment screen, or spindle monitor screen is displayed. ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key then the <SPINDLE> key. After the spindle setting screen, spindle adjustment screen, or spindle monitor screen is displayed, pressing a page key changes the screen to either the spindle setting screen, spindle adjustment screen, or spindle monitor screen. 4 Pressing the [operation menu] key or entering data changes the soft keys to the following keys: Press the <CHAPTER> key to return to step 3.

270

B62564E1/02
a) Servo setting screen and servo adjustment screen 9" CRT SERVO operation selection keys INPUT +INPUT ON:1 OFF:0

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

CHAPTER +

SV-SET

SV-TUN

CHAPTER +

Press the <SV_SET> key to select the servo setting screen. Press the <SV_TUN> key to select the servo adjustment screen. b) Spindle setting screen, spindle adjustment screen, and spindle monitor screen 9" CRT SPINDLE operation selection keys INPUT +INPUT CHAPTER +

SR-SET

SP-TUN

SP-MON

CHAPTER +

Press the <SP_SET> key to select the spindle setting screen. Press the <SP_TUN> key to select the spindle adjustment screen. Press the <SP_MON> key to select the spindle monitor screen.

271

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

B62564E1/02

10.17 Function for Displaying Multiple Subscreens

At times, the operator may want to see the data of two or more CNC screens at a time. For example: When the operator wants to check the current position simultaneously on both the screen for cutter com pensation and the screen for the offset from the workpiece reference point When the operator wants to check the current program on the graphic screen This function displays subscreens on the current screen (main screen). The current position, current program, cutter compensation value, alarm, and other data can be displayed on a subscreen. (For details, see Subsecs 10.17.2 10.17.4) There are very few restrictions on the data items that can be displayed on a subscreen and on the position and size of the subscreen. Simple input and editing are permitted for data on a subscreen. (On the position subscreen, for example, the origin/preset operation is permitted. On the cutter compensation subscreen, a compensation value can be input. Program editing and other complicated operations are not allowed.) Multiple subscreens are displayed as shown below:
O0010 N00005
NO. 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 0 4 :MODL 0 G90 0 G00 0 G17 0 G40 0 D 5 0 F 0 S DATA 1.500 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 G54
3 ;WORK OFFSET NO.02 (G55) NO.03 (G56) 2 : PROGRAM 1 : POSITION (ABSOLUTE)

TOOL OFFSET NO. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 >
POSITION

DATA 1.500 0.000 0.000 0.000 2.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

O0010 ; G90 G55 ; G00 X0 Y0 ; Z50. ; G43 H1 ; G42 X50. Y10. D5 ; Z20. ; G01 Y20. D1 F100 ; X10. ;

X Y Z

0.000 0.000 50.000

(MACHINE)

X Y Z

10.000 20.000 50.000

H 1 100 200

X Y Z

10.000 X 20.000 Y 0.000 Z

0.000 0.000 0.000

MEM***STRT**** *** *** 08:40:00 LSK

PROGRA OFFSET PRGRAM SETTIN SERVIC MESSAG GRAPHI M CHECK G E E C

Fig. 10.17 Multiple subscreens On a single main screen, up to five subscreens can be displayed. Information describing a displayed subscreen (data items, displayed position, and size) is stored. These items need not be specified each time the power is turned on. (Information on subscreens for up to all 30 main screens can be stored.)

10.17.1 Subscreen states

There are three subscreen states: 1 Nosubscreen state No subscreens are displayed. Data can be edited (page keys, cursor keys, and soft keys can be used) only on the main screen. 2 Subscreen/display state Subscreens are displayed, but only data on the main screen can be edited. 3 Subscreen/edit state Subscreens are displayed and data on subscreens can be edited. The page keys, cursor keys, and soft keys can be used on subscreens.

272

B62564E1/02
(1) No-subscreen state
PROGRAM(MEMORY)

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

(2) Subscreen display state
PROGRAM(MEMORY)

O0100 N00002

O100 ; N1 G90 G00 X0 Y0 Z100. ; N2 G42 G01 X10. F1000 D1 ; N3 Y10. ; N4

S9

O100 ; N1 G90 G00 X0 Y0 Z100. ; N2 G42 G01 X10. F1000 D1 N3 Y10. ; N4

O0100 N00002 3 :WORK OFFSET NO. 02 (G55) X 10.000 ; Y 20.000 Z 30.000

The frame is displayed in white. S8

> EDIT > EDIT

Soft keys for the main screen

Soft keys for the main screen

Sn Sn

RETURN MAIN

DELETE SCREEN

(3) Subscreen edit state

PROGRAM(MEMORY)

O0100 N00002

3 :WORK OFFO100 ; NO. 02 (G55) N1 G90 G00 X0 Y0 Z100. ; SET N2 G42 G01 X10. F1000 D1 X; 10.000 Y 20.000 N3 Y10. ; N4 Z 30.000

By pressing the following keys, the subscreen state can be changed. For details, see the next section. Sn S8 S9 Subscreen operation keys
> EDIT

The frame is displayed in green.

Soft keys for the subscreen

DELETE SCREEN

RETURN MAIN

Soft keys for the subscreen

10.17.2 Subscreen operations

(1) Subscreen number Up to five subscreens can be displayed on a single main screen. The five subscreens have numbers (subscreens 1 to 5). This number is indicated in the top left corner of each subscreen. Example Subscreen 3 is displayed as shown below. Subscreen number
3 :WORK OFFSET NO. 02 (G55) X 10.000 Y 20.000 Z 30.000

273

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

(2) Subscreen operation keys (Sn) Subscreen selection keys After pressing the <SHIFT> key, enter <1> to display subscreen 1. After pressing the <SHIFT> key, enter <2> to display subscreen 2. After pressing the <SHIFT> key, enter <3> to display subscreen 3. After pressing the <SHIFT> key, enter <4> to display subscreen 4. After pressing the <SHIFT> key, enter <5> to display subscreen 5.

B62564E1/02

Any subscreen from 1 to 5 can be displayed and data on the subscreen can be edited. Subscreen deletion key (<S8>) After pressing the <SHIFT> key, enter 8 to delete all subscreens from the current main screen. Subscreen redisplay key (<S9>) After pressing the <SHIFT> key, enter 9 to redisplay subscreens deleted with the subscreen deletion key. (3) Soft keys for the subscreen In the subscreenedit state, the soft keys for the subscreen are displayed as shown below:

INPUT + INPUT

INPUT NO.

MOVE/ RETURN DELETE SELECT ENLARG MAIN SCREEN SCREEN

1 Subscreen edit (input) keys

Subscreen operation keys

The five soft keys on the left are displayed according to the data displayed on the subscreen (position, tool compensation, etc.). (Shown above are the soft keys displayed for the subscreen for the offset from the workpiece reference point.) The four soft keys on the right are used for subscreen operation. Use the subscreen operation keys as described below: 1 <MOVE/ENLARG> When this key is pressed, the subscreen can be moved, enlarged, or reduced. After this key is pressed, the following soft keys are displayed.

SET END

Keys for moving the subscreen (displayed in yellow) <>

Keys for enlarging or reducing the subscreen (displayed in red) <> <> < > < >

Key for terminating setting

Moves the subscreen to the left by one column. <> Moves the subscreen to the right by one column. <> Moves the subscreen down by one row. <> Moves the subscreen up by one row. <SET END> Terminates setting.

Reduces the subscreen by one unit in the horizontal direction. Enlarges the subscreen by one unit in the horizontal direction. Enlarges the subscreen by one unit in the vertical direction. Reduces the subscreen by one unit in the vertical direction.

The unit by which the subscreen is enlarged or reduced depends on the data displayed on the subscreen.

274

B62564E1/02
2 <RETURN MAIN>

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

After this key is pressed, subscreens are still displayed, but data in them cannot be edited. Only data on the main screen can be edited. The soft keys for the subscreens are substituted by the soft keys for the main screen. 3 <DELETE SCREEN> When this key is pressed, the subscreen is erased. Subsequently, only data on the main screen can be edited. The soft keys for the subscreen are substituted by the soft keys for the main screen. This key erases only a subscreen in the edit status. To delete all subscreens, press the <SHIFT> key and enter 8 as described above. 4 <SELECT SCREEN> When this key is pressed, the data to display on a subscreen can be selected. After this key is pressed, the subscreen menu is displayed as shown below.
GRAPHIC(GRAPH)
Y 5000.000 2500.000 5:PROGRAM O100 ; N1 G90 G00 X0 Y0 Z100. ; N2 C90. ; N3 G42 G01 X10. F1000 D1 ; N4 Y20. ; > N5 X0 ; N6 G40 Y0 ; N7 M30 ; %

O0100 N00005
0:MENU 01: POSITION 02: PROGRAM 03: TOOL OFFSET 04: WORK OFFSET 05: MODAL 06: DI/DO 07: SERVO ERROR 08: ALARM MESSAGE 09: OPERATOR MESSAGE

MEM***STRT**** *** *** 08:40:00 LSK

INPUT NO. MOVE/ RETURN DELETE SET ENLARG MAIN SCREEN END

Select an option by using the cursor keys (<> , <>, <>,<> ) and pressing the <SET END> soft key. Selected data is displayed on the subscreen.

275

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 10.17.3 Data displayed on the subscreen
(1) POSITION subscreen Indicates the current position. The following data can be displayed: (RELATIVE) : Relative coordinates (ABSOLUTE) : Absolute coordinates (MACHINE) (RESIDUAL) (MANUAL) : Machine coordinates : Remaining travelling distance

B62564E1/02

: Degree of manual interrupt (only when the manual pulse interrupt and simultaneous manual/automatic operation functions are available)

By enlarging or reducing the subscreen, the number of data items for indicating the position on a screen can be changed. Changing position data displayed on a subscreen
1:POSITION (RELATIVE) (ABSOLUTE) *X 5.678 *X 15.678 Y 21.000 Y 31.000 Z 100.000 Z 110.000 C 90.000 C 9.000

To change the absolute coordinates shown in the right half of the left screen to machine coordinates, follow this procedure: To select the right half of the screen, press the <> cursor key. (The title of the selected part is displayed in yellow reverse video.) To change the type of position data, press the <> page key.

<> key
1:POSITION (RELATIVE) (ABSOLUTE) *X 5.678 *X 15.678 Y 21.000 Y 31.000 Z 100.000 Z 110.000 C 90.000 C 9.000

<> key
1:POSITION (RELATIVE) (MACHINE) *X 5.678 *X 5.678 Y 21.000 Y 21.000 Z 100.000 Z 110.000 C 90.000 C 9.000

To select the part to be changed, press the cursor keys (<> , <>, <> , <> ). To select the type of position data, press the page keys ( <>, <> ). If the subscreen is in the edit status, the origin/preset operation can be performed for position data to be changed as well as for position data on the main screen. (2) PROGRAM subscreen Indicates the current program. The subscreen can be enlarged or reduced. The program cannot be edited on the subscreen.
1:PROGRAM O100 ; N1 G90 G00 X0 Y0 Z100. ; N2 C90. ; N3 G42 G01 X10. F1000 D1 ; N4 Y20. ; > N5 X0 ; N6 G40 Y0 ; N7 M30 ; %

(3) TOOL OFFSET subscreen Indicates tool compensation data. When the subscreen is enlarged, more sets of tool compensation data can be displayed on a single screen. In the subscreen edit state, data can be entered using the page keys, cursor keys, and soft keys.

276

B62564E1/02
1 With tool compensation memory A
1:TOOL OFFSET 001 1.234 002 5.678 003 0.000

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

2 With tool compensation memory B

1:TOOL OFFSET NO. GEOMETRY WEAR 001 1.234 5.678 002 10.000 20.000

3 With tool compensation memory C

1:TOOL OFFSET (LENGTH) (RADIUS) NO. GEOMETRY WEAR GEOMETRY WEAR 001 1.234 2.345 3.456 4.567 002 10.000 20.000 30.000 40.000

(4) WORK OFFSET subscreen Displays the offset from the workpiece reference point. When the subscreen is enlarged, more sets of data can be displayed on a single screen. In the subscreen edit state, data can be entered using the page keys, cursor keys, and soft keys.
1:WORK OFFSET NO.00 (COMMON) X 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 NO.01 X Y Z (G54) 1.234 5.678 0.000 NO.01 (G55) X 10.000 Y 20.000 Z 0.000 NO.01 (G56) X 30.000 Y 40.000 Z 0.000

(5) MODAL subscreen Displays continuousstate information. Continuousstate information includes the G, H, D, F, and S codes. This subscreen cannot be enlarged or reduced.
1:MODAL G90 G54 G01 G80 G17 G64 G40 G43 D10 H20 F 10. S 100

(6) DI/DO subscreen Lists DI/DO signals. When this subscreen is enlarged, more bytes can be displayed on a single screen.
1:DI/DO 000 00110011 003 001 00000011 004 002 00000000 005 00100000 00101000 00000000

(7) SERVO ERROR subscreen Displays servo position errors. This screen cannot be enlarged or reduced.
1:SERVO ERROR X 55 Y 0 Z 0 C 0

277

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

(8) ALARM MESSAGE subscreen

B62564E1/02

Displays alarm messages. When this subscreen is enlarged, more lines can be displayed on a single screen. This subscreen cannot be enlarged or reduced horizontally.
1:ALARM MESSAGE PS010 IMPROPER GCODE

(9) OPERATOR MESSAGE subscreen Displays operator messages. This subscreen is used only when one of the following options is added: Custom macro NC window External data input/output When this subscreen is enlarged, more lines can be displayed on a single screen. This subscreen cannot be enlarged nor reduced horizontally.
1:OPERATOR MESSAGE MC012 ALARM OCCURS

10.17.4 Subscreen operations

(1) To display multiple subscreens as shown in the first example in Fig. 10.17, follow the procedure below: 1) Display the TOOL OFFSET screen as the main screen. 2) Following the steps described below, display the current position on subscreen 1: Press the <SHIFT> key and enter <1>. Press the <MOVE/ENLARG> soft key. Press the < (yellow) and < (yellow)> soft keys to change the size of the subscreen. Press the < (red)> soft key to move the subscreen to the right. Press the <SET END> soft key. Press the <> page key, <> cursor key, and <> page key in this order to display the absolute coordinates and machine coordinates of the current position. 3) Following the steps described below, display the current program on subscreen 2: Press the <SHIFT> key and enter <2>. (The default for subscreen 2 is TOOL OFFSET. The TOOL OFF SET subscreen is displayed initially.) Press the <SELECT SCREEN> soft key. The subscreen menu is displayed. Press the cursor key to move the cursor to 02: PROGRAM. Then, press the <SET END> soft key. Press the <MOVE/ENLARG> soft key. Press soft keys as many times as necessary to display the subscreen at the desired position with the desired size. Press the <SET END> soft key. 4) Following the procedures described above, display the offset from the workpiece reference point in subscreen 3 and modal information in subscreen 4. 5) Finally, press the <RETURN MAIN> soft key. (2) To delete subscreen 1, follow the procedure below: 1) Press the <SHIFT> key and enter <1>. 2) Press the <DELETE SCREEN> soft key. (3) To redisplay subscreen 1, follow the procedure below: 1) Press the <SHIFT> key and enter <1>. 2) Press the <RETURN MAIN> soft key.

278

B62564E1/02

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

NOTE

When a subscreen is deleted, the displayed data, position, and size of the subscreen are stored. The subscreen is redisplayed as it was before deletion.

(4) To change the value of G56 on the WORK OFFSET subscreen or subscreen 3, follow the procedure below: 1) Press the <SHIFT> key and enter <3>. 2) Press the page keys and cursor keys to move the cursor to a desired position. 3) Enter a value and press the <INPUT> key. 4) Press the <RETURN MAIN> soft key. (5) To delete all subscreens, do the following: 1) Press the <SHIFT> key and enter <8>. (6) To redisplay subscreens, do the following: 1) Press the <SHIFT> key and enter <9>. Setting input (1) This function can be used with a 14inch or 10inch CRT (it cannot be used with a 9inch CRT). (2) This function can be used with the M or T system (it cannot be used with the TT system). (3) When the current program is displayed on the main screen, the program subscreen cannot be displayed.

279

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

B62564E1/02

10.18 RS232C Parameter Setting Screen

The user is required to set parameters necessary for data communication via the RS232C, RS422, and remote buffer interfaces. An improvement enable setting these parameters on one menu.

10.18.1 Selecting RS232C Screen

Either of the following two methods can be used for menu selection. (a) Press the SETTING function selection key several times. (b) Press the SETTING function selection key, then the RS232C chapter selection key.

10.18.2 Details of Screens

(1) 14 CRT Screen
SETTING(RS232C)
TV CHECK = OFF TV(COMMENT) = ON IN/OUT CODE = ASCII EOB CODE = LF/CR/CR PUNCH F.G. INPUT DVC = 1 OUTPUT DVC= 1 B.G. INPUT DVC = 2 OUTPUT DVC= 2 RS232C CHANL2 RS422 DVC TYPE = 8 DVC TYPE = 8 STOP BITS= 1 STOP BITS= 1 BAUD RATE= 4800 BAUD RATE=19200

O0000 N00000

RS232C CHANL1 RS232C CHANL3 DVC TYPS = 8 DVC TYPS = 8 STOP BITS= 2 STOP BITS= 2 BAUD RATE= 9600 BAUD RATE= 4800

By SELECT +/SELECT key please select OFF/ON

MDI***STOP**** *** *** 21:37:00

SELECT SELECT + CHAPTE R

Press page key <> <> to change the screen.

SETTING(RMTBUF)
RS422 DVC TYPE STOP BITS BAUD RATE PROTOCOL = 1 = 1 =86400 = A

O0000 N00000
RS232C DVC TYPE STOP BITS BAUD RATE PROTOCOL = 7 = 1 =19200 =EXT_B

5000 5070

CNV REV CDC ETC TCC ECH 422 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 86400

FLOPPY CASSETTE, PROGRAM FILE MATE, HANDY FILE (Remote mode)

MDI***STOP**** *** *** 21:37:50 LSK

SELECT SELECT + CHAPTE R

NOTE 1 The information related to the RS232C and RS422 channels is displayed only when the reader/ punch interface B option has been specified. NOTE 2 Page 2 is displayed only when the remote buffer interface option has been specified.

280

B62564E1/02
(2) 9 CRT Screen
SETTING(RS232C) TV CHECK I/O CODE EOB CODE F.G. INP OUT B.G. INP OUT =OFF =ISO =LF/CR/CR DVC = 1 DVC = 1 DVC = 2 DVC = 2

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

O0001 N00000 TV(COMMENT)=ON PUNCH RS232C DVC TYPE = 8 CHANL1 STOP BITS= 2 BAUD RATE= 9600 RS232C DVC TYPE = 8 CHANL2 STOP BITS= 1 BAUD RATE=19200

By SELECT +/ Key, please select OFF/ON. MDI *** RSET **** SELECT+ SELECT IMG 13:30:32 ALM CHAPTER

Press page key <><> to change the screen.

SETTING(RS232C) TV CHECK I/O CODE EOB CODE F.G. INP OUT B.G. INP OUT O0001 N00000 =OFF TV(COMMENT)=ON =ISO =LF PUNCH DVC = 1 RS232C DVC TYPE = 8 DVC = 1 CHANL3 STOP BITS= 2 DVC = 2 BAUD RATE= 4800 DVC = 2 RS422 DVC TYPE = 8 STOP BITS= 2 BAUD RATE=19200

By SELECT +/ Key, please select baud rate. MDI *** RSET **** SELECT+ SELECT IMG 13:33:08 CHAPTER

Press page key <><> to change the screen.

SETTING(RMTBUF) RS422 DVC TYPE = 8 STOP BITS= 1 BAUD RATE=86400 PROTOCOL = A 5000 5070 CNV 0 0 86400 RSV 0 CDC 0 O0001 N00000 RS232C DVC TYPE = 7 STOP BITS= 1 BAUD RATE=19200 PROTOCOL =EXT_B ETX 1 TCC 0 ECH 0 422 1

FLOPPY CASSETTE, PROGRAM FILE MATE HANDY FILE (Remote mode) MDI *** RSET **** SELECT+ SELECT IMG 13:34:34 ALM CHAPTER

NOTE 1 Page 2 is displayed only when the reader/punch interface B option has been specified. NOTE 2 Page 3 is displayed only when the remote buffer interface option has been specified.

281

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

(3) Specification method

B62564E1/02

Move the cursor to the desired item and select the value to be specified using the SELECT+ or SELECT key. NOTE 1 Only the values that fall in the following valid setting range can be selected. NOTE 2 The parameters can be specified regardless of what the current mode is.

(4) Valid setting range (a) It is possible to select whether to turn the TV check on or off. (OFF: No TV check is made. ON: A TV check is made.) (b) It is possible to select whether to turn the TV (comment) on or off. (ON: Characters are counted for a TV check during control out.) (c) For the input/output code system, ISO, EIA, or ASCII can be selected. (d) For the EOF code, an LF/CR/CR or LF output can be selected. (e) For input/output devices, item 1, 2, 3, 10, or 13 can be selected. Setting 1 2 3 10 Channel used Channel1 Channel2 Channel3 Channel10 Interface used RS232C RS232C RS232C Remote buffer RS232C or RS422 RS422 Connector JD5A of main CPU board JD5B of main CPU board JD5J of main CPU board JD5C or JD6A of option 1 board (*Select by parameter 500#0) 13 Channel13 JD6D of sub board

(f) The following number can be specified for device specification: 1 RS232C or RS422 except for remote buffer: Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Device Specification Tape reader with serial interface (Control codes DC1-DC4 are used) Tape reader with serial interface (Control codes are not used) Personal computer (Control codes DC1-DC4 are used) Personal computer (Control codes are not used) Tape reader with rewinding function FANUC PPR, Handy file (local mode) FANUC cassette (bubble cassette) FANUC Floppy cassette, Handy File (Remote mode) FANUC Program File Mate

2 RS232C or RS422 for Remote Buffer Number 0 7 8 Personal computer FANUC Cassette (bubble cassette) FANUC Floppy cassette, Handy File (Remote mode) FANUC Program File Mate Device Specification

*Specification number 7 is used for RS232C only. (g) Number of stop bits is 1 or 2. (h) The following value can be selected for baud rate:

282

B62564E1/02
1 Other than remote buffer RS232C 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 2 Remote buffer RS232C 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

RS422 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200

RS422 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 76800 86400

(i) For the remote buffer, protocol B, extended protocol B, or protocol A can be select. NOTE 1 Extended protocol A is included in protocol A. NOTE 2 Switching between protocol A and extended protocol A is controlled according to the <SET> parameter.

* See the supplementary descriptions of the remote buffer for details. (5) Parameters Setting items TV check TV (comment) Input/Output code Corresponding parameter/ bit no. Parameter 0000#0 (TVC) Parameter 0000#1 (CTV) Parameter 0000#2 (ISP) Parameter 0000#4 (EIA) Parameter 0000#3 (NCR) Parameter 0020 for forground Parameter 0022 for background Parameter 0021 for forground Parameter 0023 for background Parameter no. 5110, 5120, 5130, 5140, 5150, 5160 5111, 5121, 5131, 5141, 5151, 5161 5112, 5122, 5132, 5142, 5152, 5162 On: (0) On: (0) Setting value Off: (1) Off: (1) =1 =0,0 =0,1

EIA : #4 ISO : #4/#2 ASCII : #4/#2

EOB code Input device Output device Device specification

LF/CR/CR punch (0) LF punch (1) * * * * 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 13, 15, 16 * : Set on parameter screen 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8

Stop bits

Parameter no.

1, 2

Baud rate

Parameter no.

1, 12 Set 1 to 7 on parameter screen.

283

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

Setting items Device specification R e m o t e b u f f e r Stop bits Baud rate Corresponding parameter/ bit no. RS422 : Parameter no.5071 RS232C : Parameter no.5081 RS422 : Parameter no.5072 RS232C : Parameter no.5082 RS422 : Parameter no.5073 RS232C : Parameter no.5083

B62564E1/02
Setting value RS422 : 0, 8 RS232C : 0, 7, 8 1, 2 RS422 : 1, 15

Set 1 to 7 on parameter screen. RS232C : 1, 12 Set 1 to 7 on parameter screen. Protocol RS422 : Parameter no.5074 RS232C : Parameter no.5084 B : (1) Extended B : (2) A : (3)*1 *1 Extended protocol is also included. Set HDLC (5) on parameter screen.

10.18.3 Notes
(1) The device specification, stop bit, and baud rate parameters for RS232 channels 1 to 3 are determined according to parameter Nos. 5001 to 5003, and those for the RS422, according to parameter No.5013. If a value other than 1 to 6 is specified for parameter No.5001, 5002, 5003, or 5013, the device specification, stop bit, and baud rate corresponding to the parameter is blanked. If the cursor is placed at the blank, the following message corresponding to each channel appears in the simplified help message frame below the menu. Channel 1: Set 1 to 6 value to parameter 5001. Channel 2: Set 1 to 6 value to parameter 5002. Channel 3: Set 1 to 6 value to parameter 5003. RS422: Set 1 to 6 value to parameter 5013. 1) 14 CRT
SETTING(RS232C)
TV CHECK = OFF TV(COMMENT) = ON IN/OUT CODE = ASCII EOB CODE = LF/CR/CR PUNCH F.G. INPUT DVC = 1 OUTPUT DVC= 1 B.G. INPUT DVC = 2 OUTPUT DVC= 2 RS232C CHANL2 DVC TYPE = STOP BITE= BAUD RATE= RS422 DVC TYPE = STOP BITE= BAUD RATE=

O0000 N00000

RS232C CHANL1 DVC TYPE = STOP BITE= BAUD RATE=

RS232C CHANL3 DVC TYPE = STOP BITE= BAUD RATE=

Please set the parameter 500 2 to 16

MDI***STOP**** *** *** 23:57:40

SELECT SELECT + CHAPTE R

284

B62564E1/02
2) 9 CRT
SETTING(RS232C) TV CHECK I/O CODE EOB CODE F.G. INP OUT B.G. INP OUT =OFF =ISO =LF/CR/CR DVC = 1 DVC = 1 DVC = 2 DVC = 2

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

O0001 N00000 TV(COMMENT)=ON PUNCH RS232C DVC TYPE = CHANL3 STOP BITS= BAUD RATE= RS422 DVC TYPE = STOP BITS= BAUD RATE=

Please set the parameter 5013 to 16. MDI *** RSET **** SELECT+ SELECT IMG 15:24:55 ALM CHAPTER

(2) If protocol A is selected for the remote buffer, or if the protocol is switched from A to B or extended B, the power must be switched off and on again. Similarly, if the stop bit or baud rate for the RS232C or RS422 for the remote buffer, or parameter No.5070 is changed with protocol A selected, the change becomes effective only after the power is switched off and on again.

10.18.4 Help Message

When the cursor is placed at a menu item, the corresponding help message appears below the menu, as shown below. Example TV check: Select off or on using the SELECT+ or SELECT- soft key.

285

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

B62564E1/02

10.19 Screen for Specifying HighSpeed and HighPrecision Machining

The parameters for highspeed and highprecision machining can be specified on this screen. Since data is entered in the parameter fields according to the units of measurement displayed on the screen, it is unnecessary to specify the units used for each parameter. These parameters can be easily specified using the automatic setting function and automatic tuning function.

10.19.1 Screen configuration

The screen for specifying highspeed and highprecision machining is accessed by pressing the <SERVICE> function key. One way to display this screen is to press the <SERVICE> soft key several times. Otherwise, press the <SERVICE> soft key followed by the <CHAPTER> soft key to display soft keys for each <SERVICE> screen, then press the <HPCC> soft key. This screen consists of two pages: Tuning and setting The parameters required to use highspeed and highprecision machining are displayed on the setting screen. The parameters for machining precision are displayed on the tuning screen. Data can be specified in these parameters for each type of machining on this screen. To display the operation soft keys, press the < > key to the right of the soft keys. The above operations can also be used to display other screens. The first page is used for tuning. HPCC (TUNING) is displayed on the top left of the tuning screen. The second page is used for setting. To display the setting screen, press the <SETTING> operation soft key on the tuning screen. The parameters for highprecision contour control and RISC can be set on the tuning and setting screens. When the highprecision contour control and RISC options are not provided, asterisks (*) are displayed in the entry fields for these parameters. When the RISC option is supported by software but the RISC board is not installed, asterisks are also displayed in the entry fields to indicate the option is unavailable. Tuning screen (for the 14-inch CRT)
HPCC(TUNING)
FINE

O0001 N00000
ROUGH 20 0 4000 100 40 1200 ****** 10.000 3460 100 94.00
CHAPTE R

MEDIUM 6 FINE LEVEL 1 0 ACC/DEC LEVEL(5..0..5) 0 4000 MAX FEED (MM/MIN) 4000 100 TCONST FOR BIPL (MSEC) 150 40 TCONST FOR AIPL (MSEC) 24 1000 CORNER FEED (MM/MIN) 600 CLAMP BY ACC (MSEC) ******(1) ****** (CIRCLE FEED CLAMP) RADIUS (MM) 10.000 MAX FEED (MM/MIN) 3460 MIN FEED (MM/MIN) 100 FEED FOWARD
INPUT SLCT AUTO ACTIVE TUNE

10.000 4000 100 95.65

HPCC TUNE HPPC SET

(%)

97.65
AUX

MDI***STOP**** *** *** 12:34:56 LSK

*1 Asterisks are displayed in the entry field for a parameter dedicated to high-precision contour control or RISC.

286

B62564E1/02

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

(Message window displayed on the tuning screen)
HPCC(TUNING)
FINE

O0001 N00000
ROUGH 20 0 4000 100 40 1200 ****** 10.000 3460 100 94.00
CHAPTE R

MEDIUM 6 FINE LEVEL 1 AIPL LEVEL(5..0..5) IS MIN DATA 0 ACC/DEC 0 4000 MAX FEEDFOWARD FEED (MM/MIN) IS MAX DATA 4000 100 TCONST FOR BIPL (MSEC) 150 40 TCONST FOR AIPL (MSEC) 24 1000 CORNER FEED (MM/MIN) 600 CLAMP BY ACC (MSEC) ******(1) ****** PUSH [AUX]KEY (CIRCLE FEED CLAMP) RADIUS (MM) 10.000 MAX FEED (MM/MIN) 3460 MIN FEED (MM/MIN) 100 FEED FOWARD
INPUT SLCT AUTO ACTIVE TUNE

10.000 4000 100 95.65

HPCC TUNE HPPC SET

(%)

97.65
AUX

MDI***STOP**** *** *** 12:34:56 LSK

(Parameter guidance displayed on the tuning screen by pressing the <AUX> key)
HPCC(TUNING)
FINE LEVEL ACC/DEC LEVEL(5..0..5) MAX FEED (MM/MIN) TCONST FOR BIPL (MSEC) TCONST FOR AIPL (MSEC) CORNER FEED (MM/MIN) CLAMP BY ACC (MSEC) (CIRCLE FEED CLAMP) RADIUS (MM) MAX FEED (MM/MIN) MIN FEED (MM/MIN) FEED FOWARD
INPUT SLCT AUTO ACTIVE TUNE

O0001 N00000
FINE 1520 1521 1520 1523 1522 1524 ****** 1526 1527 1528 1529
AUX

MEDIUM 1540 1541 1540 1543 1542 1544 ****** 1546 1547 1548 1549
HPCC TUNE HPPC SET

ROUGH 1560 1561 1560 1563 1562 1564 ****** 1566 1567 1568 1569
CHAPTE R

(%)

MDI***STOP**** *** *** 12:34:56 LSK

Setting screen (for a 14-inch CRT)

HPCC(SETTING)
HPCC MODE G05.1 MODE AUTO ON/OFF OVERRIDE BY ZAXIS DOWN(ZAG) IGNORE FEED AT PROGRAM FEED FOWARD MAX FEED(HPCC) OVERRIDE AT AREA2(ZAG) OVERRIDE AT AREA3(ZAG) OVERRIDE AT AREA4(ZAG)

O0001 N00000
ON OFF ON OFF ON 3000 (MM/MIN) 90 (%) 80 (%) 70 (%)

HPCC FUNCTION AVAILABLE OR NOT

MDI***STOP**** *** *** 12:34:56 LSK
INPUT ON/OFF AUTO SET HPCC TUNE HPPC SET CHAPTE R

*1 The 9-inch CRT display does not contain simple help messages at the bottom of the setting screen.

287

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 10.19.2 Setting screen

The HPCC (SETTING) screen is called the setting screen.

B62564E1/02

The parameters required to use highspeed and highprecision machining can be set on the setting screen. Some parameters cannot be set on this screen. These parameters do not usually need to be changed and are therefore specified by pressing the <AUTO SET> key. (1) Operation To move the cursor, press the cursor keys on the CNC operators panel. To enable or disable parameters, move the cursor to the corresponding field where ENABLED/DISABLED is displayed and press the <ON/OFF> soft key. Whenever the <ON/OFF> soft key is pressed, the parameter is toggled between the enabled and disabled states. (2) Automatic Setting To perform automatic setting, press the <AUTO SET> key, then press the <EXEC> key. To set the parameters required for highspeed and highprecision machining, be sure to perform automatic setting once before machining. During automatic setting, the following parameters are set. For details of the functions of the parameters below. Parameter No. 0000#5 1009#0 1601#0 7559#1 7565#0 7565#4 7567 7591 7592 7593 1808#3 1811#2 1883#1 1884#4 1962 1518 Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 Function Disables highspeed pulse distribution. Specifies axis control by RISC. Enables acceleration clamp during circular interpolation. Enables deceleration at corners Enables highprecision contour control. Enables feedrate override according to the Zaxis descent angle. Remarks A B B A A A A A A A A C

Same setting as Maximum feedrate under highprecision contour control. parameter 1422 90 80 70 1 1 1 1 50 9400 Override in area 2 (ZAG) Override in area 3 (ZAG) Override in area 4 (ZAG) PI control Enables advance feedforward. Enables feedforward. Enables high speed reading of feedrate feedback. Feedforward feedrate factor (50%) Lower limit of feedforward for automatic calculation (94%)

The parameters corresponding to A in the remark fields are set only after the highprecision contour control or RISC option has been specified. The parameters corresponding to B in the remark fields are set only after the RISC option has been specified. After the parameter corresponding to C in the remark field is changed, the power must be turned off then on again. Otherwise, an alarm occurs. The automatic setting function transfers the above settings to the relevant parameters. If the automatic setting function is performed after data is specified for parameters, the settings specified by the function are overwritten by these settings. The automatic setting function can be disabled with the NAS bit of parameter 1517.

288

B62564E1/02 10.19.3 Tuning screen

The HPCC (TUNING) screen is called the tuning screen. (1) Operation

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

On the 14inch CRT three sets of parameters corresponding to three machining types are displayed on a single screen. On the 9inch CRT, these parameters are displayed separately for each machining type. In this case, change the current machining type (finishing (FINE), semifinishing (MEDIUM), and roughing (ROUGH)) with the <PAGE> key. (2) Transferring Parameters The three types of parameters for finishing, semifinishing, and roughing are displayed on the tuning screen. When one of these parameter sets is selected, these settings are automatically used for the corresponding machining. The parameter settings vary according to the type of machining. Of the three sets of parameters, the parameters of the currently enabled machining type are called active parameters. The title of the machining type (FINE, MEDIUM, or ROUGH) of the active parameters is displayed in reverse video. The settings of active parameters are transferred to the parameters which the CNC actually processes during machining. These parameters are called execution parameters. When active parameters are input, the parameters modified on the setting screen and the execution parameters are rewritten. For instance, the difference in feedrate at corners is specified in parameter 1478. This valve is also specified in parameter 1524 for FINE, parameter 1544 for MEDIUM, or parameter 1564 for ROUGH. When parameters for FINE are active and the difference in feedrate at corners for FINE is input, the value is specified in parameter 1524 and parameter 1478. When the difference in feedrate at corners for MEDIUM or ROUGH is input, the value is only specified in parameter 1544 or 1564, because the parameters for MEDIUM and ROUGH are inactive.
FINE Parameter 1524

Execution parameter MEDIUM

Parameter 1544

The system checks whether the parameter is active. The valve in parameter 1524 is transferred.

Parameter 1478

ROUGH
Parameter 1564

Fig. 10.19.3 When the Difference in Feedrate at Corners Is Input in Each Mode (FINE Parameters are Active) (3) [INPUT] When parameters for each axis, including the parameter for the time constant after interpolation, are set on the screen, these values are converted so that they conform to the units of measurement for each axis, then they are input for each axis. To set parameters separately for each axis, enter data in parameters on the parameter screen. Press the <AUX> key to display parameter numbers. It is possible to change the screen page according to the displayed parameter number for the necessary parameter setting. (4) [AUX] When the <AUX> key is pressed, parameter numbers are displayed. To cancel this state, press the <AUX> key again. The previous screen is redisplayed. When the automatic tuning function is used, a window may be opened to display a message for a calculation result. While the window is open, all operations are disabled. Press the <AUX> key to close the window. Changing the screen clears parameter numbers and closes any open message window.

289

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

(5) [AUTO TUNE]

B62564E1/02

When the <AUTO TUNE] key is pressed, parameters for a certain level of cutting (FINE LEVEL) can be automatically calculated and set. To make automatic adjustments, press the <AUTO TUNE> key then press the <FINE>, <MEDIUM>, or <ROUGH> soft key. Before automatic tuning, the following values must be specified in each mode. FINE LEVEL Maximum feedrate Time constant before interpolation Loop gain for the servo (parameter 1825) (Same setting regardless of the mode) (Same setting regardless of the mode)

All values except for the servo loop gain can be specified on the tuning screen. When the above parameters are not set, a message window is opened to indicate that calculation is not impossible. Messages concerning the results of automatic calculation may also be displayed. Press the <AUX> key to close the window. The automatic setting function can be disabled with the NAS bit of parameter 1517. CAUTION The automatic tuning function is only used to set standard values. Actual error is a slightly different from the error calculated during setting due to servo system delay.

(6) FINE LEVEL FINE LEVEL refers to the degree of finishing. The degree of finishing has no unit of measurement. When FINE LEVEL is specified as 1, the CNC calculates to obtain a precision of 10 microns. When FINE LEVEL is specified as 10, the CNC calculates to obtain a precision of 100 microns. (7) SLCT ACTIVE To select active parameters, press the <SLCT ACTIVE> key and press the <FINE>, <MEDIUM>, or <ROUGH> soft keys. The title of the selected mode is displayed in reverse video. The settings of all the parameters recorded in each mode are transferred to the execution parameters. (8) Specifying Values in Parameters for Each axis To specify values in parameters separately for each axis, press the <AUX> key to display parameter numbers. Enter data in parameters on the parameter screen. When different values are specified in parameters for each axis, asterisks (*) are displayed in the corresponding fields on the setting screen. To transfer the values entered in active parameters to the execution parameters, specify the active parameters as active although they are already active. Active parameters need not be selected to only rewrite the settings of execution parameters. When the settings of the execution parameters are rewritten in this way, the display of the settings on the setting screen remains unchanged. (9) Increment System Conversion When setting parameters, one must be aware of the increment system being used. However, on the high precision contour control (HPCC) screen, data is always specified in parameters using the increment system. For example, to specify a maximum speed of 4000 mm/min, 400 is specified when the increment system is 0.001 mm (ISB) and 4000 is specified when the increment system is 0.0001 mm (ISC). However, on the HPCC screen, 4000 is entered. (10)Correspondence to Execution Parameters The following table shows the correspondence between the parameter numbers for each mode on the tuning screen and the numbers of execution parameters. When active parameters are selected or entered, the contents of the active parameters are transferred to the execution parameters with the following numbers. The execution parameters are the conventional parameters for each function.

290

B62564E1/02

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

Execution parameter No. None None 1630 1631 1635(*1) 1482(*2) 1622(*3)

FINE FINE LEVEL ACC/DEC LEVEL MAX FEED TCONST FOR BIPL TCONST FOR AIPL 1520 1521 1630 1523 1522

MEDIUM 1540 1541 1640 1543 1542

ROUGH 1560 1561 1660 1563 1562

CORNER FEED CLAMP BY ACC(*4) (CIRCLE FEED CLAMP) RADIUS MAX FEED MIN FEED FEED FORWARD

1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529

1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549

1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569

1478 1643 1492 1490 1491 1985

*1 When feedforward is enabled *2 When feedforward is disabled and HPCC is enabled *3 When feedforward and HPCC are disabled *4 Displayed only when the highprecision contour control and RISC options are provided (11)Settings on the Adjustment Screen [FINE LEVEL] Enter the level of finishing. When the finishing level is specified as 1, the CNC calculates to obtain a precision of approx. 10 microns. Valid data range: 1 to 100 (approx. 10 microns to 1 mm) Specify the degree of acceleration/deceleration that corresponds to the following levels. The current acceleration can be changed according to the following ratio. 5 2.00 4 1.67 3 1.43 2 1.25 1 1.11 0 1.00 1 0.90 2 0.80 3 0.70 4 0.60 5 0.50

[ACC/DEC LEVEL]

Level Coefficient [MAX FEED]

This parameter determines the rate of the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. The acceleration/deceleration before interpolation depends on this parameter and the time constant. Acceleration is calculated by dividing [MAX FEED] by [TCONST FOR BIPL]. Because of this, it is not necessary to specify the maximum feedrate in this parameter. This parameter is common to all three machining modes.

[TCONST FOR BIPL] This parameter determines the rate the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. The parameter specifies the time that elapses until [MAX FEED] is obtained. [MAX FEED] is common to the three machining modes (FINE, MEDIUM, and ROUGH). The degrees of acceleration in each mode can be checked with the setting of the [TCONST FOR BIPL] parameter. [CORNER FEED] When the difference in the feedrate between two blocks is greater than the feedrate specified in this parameter, the tool decelerates to this feedrate. The smaller the setting of this parameter, the higher the precision. Although this reduces potential damage to the machine, more time is required for machining. This parameter is enabled only when the highprecision contour control and RISC options are provided. When an acceleration greater than the acceleration specified in this parameter is applied to blocks, the tool decelerates to the specified acceleration or slower. The greater the setting of the parameter, the smaller the allowable acceleration.

[CLAMP BY ACC]

291

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

B62564E1/02

This enables high precision machining and reduces potential damage to the machine. This parameter has a default value of the same acceleration as for acceleration/ deceleration before interpolation during automatic tuning. [RADIUS] This parameter is used to clamp the feedrate according to the radius of an arc. The acceleration is calculated with [MAX FEED] according to the radius specified in the parameter. Specify the maximum allowable feedrate for the radius specified in the above parameter. The default value of the maximum feedrate is calculated during automatic tuning so that the same acceleration as that for acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is applied to the tool. Specify the minimum feedrate at which the feedrate is clamped. Specify a feedforward factor. Do not change this parameter in a state other than the emergency stop state.

[MAX FEED]

[MIN FEED] [FEED FORWARD]

The following shows notes on using the setting screen: CAUTION 1 Specifying a feedforward factor on the tuning screen The feedforward factor is transferred to the servo only when the power is turned on or when the system enters the emergency stop state. Be sure to specify the feedforward factor in the emergency stop state. Active parameters can be selected only in the emergency stop state. CAUTION 2 When the deceleration ratio for the rotation axis is too high An overflow occurs in the servo software during calculation for feedforward. An alarm may also occur for the rotation axis immediately after automatic tuning, indicating an incorrect digital parameter. In this case, set the bit of the following parameter to 1 for the axis. Parameter number 1804 Bit number 4

For the description of the parameter, refer to the servo maintenance manual. CAUTION 3 When the machine vibrates after automatic setting When the machine is operated after automatic setting, it may vibrates along an axis. In this case, set the bit of the following parameter to 0. When this bit is 1, it is possible that the machine may vibrate. Parameter number 1884 Bit number 4

NOTE 1 Conditions for enabling data to be entered on the setting screen Data can be entered on the setting screen when the following conditions are met: When bit 0 (PWE) of parameter 8000 = 1: 1. In the MDI mode: Data can be entered with keys. 2. In the emergency stop state NOTE 2 This screen can be erased by setting bit 2 of parameter No. 15#2 to 1. NOTE 3 If a lower limit for the feedforward factor for automatic adjustment (parameter No. 1518) has been set, this lower limit is always used for the feedforward factor when a higher finish level than a predetermined level is specified. In this case, the time constant after interpolation and other items that are calculated from the feedforward factor are all the same value for different cases. As a result, the same result may be calculated automatically for different finish levels. If such a problem occurs, set parameter No. 1518 to 0, then retry automatic adjustment.

292

B62564E1/02

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

10.19.4 Example of the procedure for using the tuning screen

The following is a flowchart showing an example of how to use the tuning screen. This flowchart starts in a state in which nothing is specified and ends in a state in which highprecision contour control is enabled. In this example the parameters for FINE are specified as active.

Press the<SERVICE> soft key several times to display the HPCC (TUNING) screen. to display the operation soft keys, then press the <HPCC SET> soft key. Press the key < > The HPCC (SETTING) screen is displayed. Press the <AUTO SET> soft key, then press the <EXEC> soft key. (At this time, a power-off alarm may occur.)

Press the <HPCC TUNE> soft key to redisplay the HPCC (TUNING) screen. Set the following parameters for FINE: Specify 1 in the FINE LEVEL field. (This setting indicates the highest level of finishing.) Specify the maximum feedrate in the MAX FEED field. Specify the time constant in the T-CONST FOR BIPL field. Check whether the title ("FINE" or any other title) is being displayed in reverse video. Title "FINE" Other title Press the <SLCT ACTIVE> soft key and press the <FINE> soft key. Press the <AUTO TUNE> soft key and press the <FINE> soft key. A message indicating that calculation is not possible is displayed. Set necessary parameters again. High-precision contour control is enabled.

10.19.5 Setting by specifying accelerations

The highspeed & highprecision machining (adjustment) screen has been enhanced by the addition of a new entry method that supports the specification of accelerations in addition to conventional parameter entry. Specifying accelerations enables the automatic calculation of the following parameters. Specified acceleration Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation Clamp acceleration Acceleration Automatically calculated parameter Time constant before interpolation (Nos. 1523, 1543, and 1563) Acceleration clamp (Nos. 1525, 1545, and 1565) Maximum speed (Nos. 1527, 1547, and 1567)

293

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

Operating procedure 1 Press the function menu key so that the function selection soft key display appears.

B62564E1/02

2 Press the [SERVICE] key several times until the highspeed & highprecision machining screen appears. Alternatively, press the [CHAPTER] key so that the chapter selection soft key display appears, then press the [HPCC] key. 3 If the [ACC INPUT] key is displayed, press it to select acceleration input mode. If the [PARAM INPUT] key is displayed, acceleration input mode has already been selected. When the input mode is switched from parameter input to acceleration input, some items will be changed for acceleration input. NOTE 1 To select acceleration input mode (or parameter input mode), the following conditions must be satisfied. Bit 0 (PWE) of parameter No. 8000 = 1, and 1. The current mode is MDI, and key entries are acceptable, or 2. The current state is emergency stop. NOTE 2 When accelerations are specified, each parameter is calculated automatically according to the following expression:
Time constant before interpolation [msec]

Maximum speed [mm/min]

1/60 [min/sec] 1/1000 [sec/msec]

Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation [mm/sec/sec]

Time constant before interpolation : Parameter 2 for specifying acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (Nos. 1523, 1543, and 1563) Maximum speed : Parameter 1 for specifying acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (No. 1630). If 0 is specified, the maximum cutting feedrate (No. 1422) for the reference axis is used. Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation : Acceleration/deceleration applied before interpolation
Acceleration clamp [msec]

Reference axis maximum cutting feedrate [mm/min] Clamp acceleration [mm/sec/sec]

1/60 [min/sec]

1/1000 [sec/msec]

Acceleration clamp : Parameter for determining the allowable acceleration used to determine a speed by acceleration, for highspeed contour control (Nos. 1525, 1545, and 1565) Reference axis maximum cutting feedrate: Maximum cutting feedrate along the reference axis (No. 1422) Clamp acceleration : Acceleration applied in acceleration clamping
Maximum speed [msec]

60

SQRT (Radius [mm]

Acceleration [mm/sec/sec/] )

Maximum speed Radius

Acceleration

: Upper speed limit applied to feedrate clamping by arc radius (Nos. 1527, 1547, and 1567) : Arc radius applied to feedrate clamping by arc radius (Nos. 1526, 1546, and 1566). If 0 is specified, the radius is assumed to be 5 [mm] (for millimeter machines) or 1 [inch] (for inch machines). : Acceleration applied to feedrate clamping by arc radius

294

B62564E1/02

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

10.20 M Code Group Function

This function enables the display of M codes that are currently being executed, or those which have been executed, by classifying them into several functional groups. The group number (up to 127 groups can be set) and function name of each M code can be specified from the M code group setting screen or by using a program. The user can thereby check, on the screen, the M functions executed on the machine. For the program restart M/S/T/B code output function, the last M code can be output for each M code group. This function can also be used to check whether the combination of multiple (up to five) M codes specified in a block is correct.

10.20.1 Screen for Displaying M Codes Currently Being Executed or Which Have Already Been Executed
Display the screen for displaying M codes currently being executed or which have already been executed (MCODE DISPLAY screen), as follows: (1) Press the function menu key to display the function selection soft keys. (2) Press the [PRG _CHK] soft key. (3) If the M-CODE DISPLAY screen does not appear, switch the screen by performing either of the following operations: a. Press the [PRG_CHK] soft key repeatedly until the M-CODE DISPLAY screen appears. b. Press the [CHAPTER] soft key to display the chapter selection soft keys. Then, press the [M-DISP] soft key. [9 CRT Screen]
MCODE DISPLAY MCG 001 002 003 004 005 010 011 012 013 014 MCODE 03 10 11 12 13 20 21 30 40 100 101 102 110 111 120 130 140 O0111 N00001 NAME DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK LSK CHAPTER+

> MDI *** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00

Underlined M codes: Highlighted M code:

Already executed Currently being executed

The MCG field displays the M code groups (1 to 127) that have been registered with the M-CODE GROUP SETTING screen. To display another set of M code groups, press a page key. M code groups that have not been registered are not displayed.

295

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

B62564E1/02

The M-CODE field displays the five most recent M codes for each M code group, with the latest on the right. An M code which is currently being executed in the current block is highlighted. M codes which have already been executed are displayed in green or by varying the intensity, according to whether a color or monochrome CRT is being used, respectively. The five M codes, however, can be displayed only when they are of two-digit format. If M codes using three or more digits are included, as many of the five M codes as will fit on a line are displayed. The NAME field displays the name of the last-specified M code for each group. [14 CRT Screen]
MCODE DISPLAY
MCG MCODE
001 002 003 004 005 010 011 012 013 014 020 021 022 023 024 03 10 11 12 20 21 22 23 30 40 100 101 102 110 111 120 130 140 200 201 202 210 211 220 230 240

O0111 N00001
MCG MCODE
030 031 032 033 034

NAME
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGG

NAME

300 301 302 RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 310 311 ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII 320 SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 330 CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC 340

> MDI***STOP**** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK

CHAPTE R

Underlined M codes: Highlighted M code:

Already executed Currently being executed

10.20.2 M,S,T,B Codes Output for Program Restart

On the program restart screen, M codes, found during the search for the program restart position, as well as those output with MDI or overstore, can be displayed for each M code group. The last M code can also be output for each M code group. (1) Displaying M codes for each M code group after restarting the program The program restart function supports the display of M codes for each M code group, as follows: (a) Using the program restart function, search for the program restart position and display the program restart screen. [9 CRT Screen]
PROGRAM RESTART (DESTINATION) X 200.000 Y 0.000 Z 500.000 O0111 N00200 BC: 00000000 M 03 10 11 12 20 21 30 40 101 102 110 120 130 140 ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** T 101 102 S 200 B ** S: 13 100 111 ** ** ** ** **

(DIST TO GO) X 1000.000 Y 0.000 Z 2000.000

ACT.F

(RPM)

MEM *** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK INPUT MCGDSP CLEAR OVRSTR CHAPTER

296

B62564E1/02
[14 CRT Screen]
PROGRAM RESTART (DESTINATION) 200.000 X 0.000 Y 500.000 Z

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

O1111 N00001 (DIST TO GO) 1000.000 0.000 2000.000 (ACTUAL SPEED) F S 0

(MM/MIN)

X Y Z

BC: 00000000 M 03 10 11 12 13 14 20 21 30 40 100 101 102 110 111 120 130 140 ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** T 101 102 S 200 B **

0
(RPM)

> MEM***STOP**** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK

INPUT MCG DISP CLEAR OVERST CHAPTE ORE R

(b) Press the [MCG-DSP] soft key to display the M codes, found during the search, for each M code group. Note that these M codes are not displayed on the M-CODE DISPLAY screen described. [9 CRT Screen]
MCODE DISP IN P.RESTART MCG 001 002 003 004 005 010 011 012 013 014 MCODE 03 10 11 12 13 14 20 21 30 40 100 101 102 110 111 120 130 140 0 O0111 N00200 13 100 111 ** ** ** **

BC: 00000000 M 03 10 11 12 20 21 30 40 101 102 110 120 130 140 ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** T 101 102 S 200 B ** S:

ACT.F

(RPM)

MEM *** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK INPUT P.RSTRT CLEAR OVRSTR CHAPTER

297

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

B62564E1/02

To display another set of M code groups, press a page key. The [OVERSTORE] soft key can be used to output M, S, T, and B codes. [14 CRT Screen]
MCODE DISPLAY IN P.RESTART
MCG MCODE 001 03 002 10 11 12 13 14 003 20 21 004 30 005 40 010 100 101 102 103 011 110 111 012 120 013 130 014 140 BC: 00000000 M 103 110 111 120 130 200 201 202 203 210 220 230 240 300 301 303 310 311 320 330 T 101 102 S 200 B ** > MCG 020 021 022 023 024 030 031 032 033 034 140 211 302 340

O1111 N00001

MCODE 200 201 202 203 210 211 220 230 240 300 301 302 303 310 311 320 330 340

(ACTUAL SPEED) F S
MEM***STOP**** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK

0
(MM/MIN)

0
(RPM)

INPUT

PRGRAM RESTRT

CLEAR

OVERST CHAPTE ORE R

NOTE

Pressing the [MCG-DSP] soft key displays the above screen, regardless of the number of axes under the control of the CNC.

(c) When M codes have been output to the PMC with MDI or overstore, after the search for the program restart position, the M code which is currently being executed is highlighted and those M codes that have already been executed are displayed in green or in a different intensity, according to whether a color or monochrome CRT is being used, respectively. For example, when M13 and M14 have been output after search for the program restart position and M14 is being executed, the screen will appear as follows: [9 CRT Screen]
MCODE DISP IN P.RESTART MCG 001 002 003 004 005 010 011 012 013 014 MCODE 03 10 11 12 13 14 20 21 30 40 100 101 102 110 111 120 130 140 0 O0111 N00200 13 100 111 ** ** ** **

BC: 00000000 M 03 10 11 12 20 21 30 40 101 102 110 120 130 140 ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** T 101 102 S 200 B ** S:

ACT.F

(RPM)

MEM *** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK INPUT P.RSTRT CLEAR OVRSTR CHAPTER+

Underlined M codes: Highlighted M code:

Already executed Currently being executed

298

B62564E1/02

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

At this time, the M-CODE DISPLAY screen appears as follows:

MCODE DISPLAY MCG MCODE 001 002 13 14 003 004 005 010 011 012 013 014 O0111 N00200 NAME OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

MEM *** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK CHAPTER+

Underlined M codes: Highlighted M code: (2) Output of the last M code

Already executed Currently being executed

(d) Pressing the [P. RSTRT] soft key returns to the program restart screen (a). Bit 0 (MCGO) of parameter No.7710 can be used to select whether the last M code is output for each M code group or not, when automatically output the last M code by means of the program restart M/S/T/B code output function. 1) When bit 0 (MCGO) of parameter No.7710 is 0, only the last M code found during the search is output. Example When the last M code is M140, the screen will appear as follows:
MCODE DISP IN P.RESTART MCG 001 002 003 004 005 010 011 012 014 MCODE 03 10 11 12 13 14 20 21 30 40 100 101 102 110 111 120 140 140 O0111 N00200 13 100 111 ** ** ** **

BC: 00000000 M 03 10 11 12 20 21 30 40 101 102 110 120 130 140 ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** S 200 B **

ACT.F

S:

(RPM)

MEM *** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK INPUT P.RSTRT CLEAR OVRSTR CHAPTER

2) When bit 0 (MCGO) of parameter No.7710 is 1, the last M code for each M code group found during the search is output. Example When the last M code for each group is M03, M14, M21, M30, M40, M102, M111, M120, M130, and M140 and the last M code (M40) of group 005 is being executed, the screen will appear as follows:

299

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

B62564E1/02

MCODE DISP IN P.RESTART MCG 001 002 003 004 005 010 011 012 013 014 MCODE 03 03 11 12 13 14 14 20 21 21 30 30 40 40 100 101 102 110 111 120 130 140 0

O0111 N00200

BC: 00000000 M 03 10 11 12 13 20 21 30 40 100 101 102 110 111 120 130 140 ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** T 101 102 S 200 B ** S:

ACT.F

(RPM)

MEM *** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK INPUT P.RSTRT CLEAR OVRSTR CHAPTER

CAUTION

The last M code data for a group is lost, thus cannot be output, if five or more M codes of a group have already been output with MDI or overstore.

10.20.3 M Code Group Check Function

The check, described below, can be performed for multiple M codes specified in a single block. Bit 3 (MGCK) of parameter No.7710 is used to select whether the check is performed. (1) Check for M codes which must be specified alone An alarm occurs if an M code, which must be specified alone, is specified with another M code in a single block. (2) Check for M codes of the same group An alarm occurs if M codes of the same group are specified in a single block. Group numbers from 0 to 127 can be set. Group numbers 0 and 1, however, both have special meaning. A 0 indicates M codes for which no check is required, while 1 indicates M codes which must be specified alone.

10.20.4 Details of Grouping M codes

(1) M-code Group Setting Screen Display the M-CODE SETTING screen as follows: (1) Press the function menu key to display the function selection soft keys. (2) Press the [SERVICE] soft key. (3) If the M-CODE SETTING screen does not appear, switch the screen by performing either of the following operations: a. Press the [SERVICE] soft key repeatedly until the M-CODE SETTING screen appears. b. Press the [CHAPTER] soft key to display the chapter selection soft keys. Then, press the [M-CODE] soft key.

300

B62564E1/02
[9 CRT SCREEN]
MCODE GROUP SETTING CODE 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 GROUP 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

O0111 N00001 NAME AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGG HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ

> MEM *** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK INPUT PUNCH INP_NO

The M code group number (GROUP) for each M code (CODE) can be set on this screen. The M code name (NAME) set by a program can also be checked for each M code on this screen. The above shows an example where M codes are represented using four digits. M codes can be represented using up to eight digits, depending on the corresponding parameter setting. M code groups can be set for M00 to M99, and up to 400 additional M codes, numbered starting from M100, can be specified by the user (see Parameter Manual for an explanation of how to add M codes). To set the M code group number for an M code, use the cursor keys or the [INP_NO] soft key to move the cursor to the M code, then enter the group number. M code group numbers can be entered consecutively by separating them with a semicolon (;) . M code groups can be numbered from 1 to 127. When 0 is entered, the M code is not registered in an M code group. To display another sets of M codes, press a page key. Only 0 can be set for those M codes which call a subprogram, such as M98 and M99. Data can be entered only when the PWE bit of parameter No.8000 is set to 1. This setting is made from the setting screen. A function name of up to 20 characters can be specified uniquely for each M code in the M code name (NAME) field. M code names, however, cannot be entered directly on the M-CODE GROUP SETTING screen. See Item, Input/output of M code group numbers and M code names for an explanation of how to set M code names. [14 CRT SCREEN]
MCODE GROUP SETTING
CODE GRP
0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 > MDI***STOP**** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK
INPUT PUNCH INPUT NUMBER CHAPTE R

O0111 N00001
CODE GRP
0015 0016 0017 0018 0019 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 0025 0026 0027 0028 0029 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

NAME
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGG HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

NAME
PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT UUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUU VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD

0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2

(2) Input/ output of M code group numbers and M code names M code group numbers and M code names can be set by executing a program. The numbers and names can be output to external devices.

301

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

(a) Setting by G10 G10 L40 Pn Rg Pn Rg ( ) ; : Specify an M code in n. : Specify an M code group number in g.

B62564E1/02

( ) : Specify an M code name in parentheses. Alphanumerics and special characters can be directly specified. When using Japnese characters, provided Japanese character input is enabled (bit 3(JPN) of parameter No.2205 is set to 1), specify the internal code for each character (four hexadecimal digits for Kanji and Hiragana characters, or two hexadecimal digits for Katakana characters) prefixed and suffixed with @. The character @, therefore, cannot be used in an M code name. Up to 20 characters, excluding @, can be specified in parentheses. The two hexadecimal digits of an internal code are regarded as being one character. Up to ten @s (five pairs) can be specified. NOTE M code names are not displayed on the program/program check screen even when blocks for specifying M code names are executed.

Example

When the following program is executed, M code group 1 and M code name SPINDLE are set for M03: G10 L40 P03 R1 (SPINDLE@84647B5F@) ; The number of characters in parentheses is as follows: SPINDLE @ 8464 ( ) 7B5F ( ) @ 7 characters 2 characters 2 characters 2 pcs (One pair)

(b) Output to external devices M code group numbers and M code names can be output, via the RS 232C interface, to external devices such as a Floppy Cassette by pressing the [PUNCH] soft key on the M code group setting screen. Data is output in G10 format (described in (1) ), without a program number, with file name M CODE GROUP. NOTE The options for the reader/punch interface and programmable data input (G10) must bespecified.

(3) Notes (a) Part program length reduces by 45 meters when this option is combined.

302

B62564E1/02

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

10.21 Workpiece Zero Point Manual Setting Function

This function can set the workpiece zero point offset value on the WORK ZERO OFFSET screen so that the current workpiece position becomes the new workpiece zero point or coincides with a specified position.

10.21.1 Screen Selection

(1) Display the WORK ZERO OFFSET screen according to the following procedure. 1) Press the function menu key to display the function selection soft keys. 2) Press the OFFSET soft key. 3) If the workpiece zero point offset screen does not appear, switch the screen by performing either of the following two steps. a. Press the OFFSET soft key repeatedly until the WORK ZERO OFFSET screen appears. b. Press the CHAPTER soft key to display the chapter selection soft keys, then press the WORK ZERO soft key. (2) The following data is newly displayed as shown in the example below. 1) Currently selected workpiece coordinate system G code on the second line from the top 2) Current machine coordinates in the lower right section ` 9 CRT Screen (when no. of controlled axes is 5)
WORK ZERO OFFSET O0000 N00000 CURRENT G54 NO. 00 (COMMOM) NO. 02 (G55) X 0.000 X 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000 NO. 01 (G54) (MACHINE) X 0.000 X 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000 > MDI *** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK INPUT +INPUT MEASURE TL_INP INP_NO +

Operation Selection key INPUT +INPUT MEASURE TL_INP INP_NO +

PUNCH

CHG_DSP

CURRENT

Guide key EXEC (VALUE)

EXEC

303

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

B62564E1/02

` 14 CRT Screen (when the no. of controlled axes is 7)

WORK ZERO OFFSET
CURRENT NO.00 X Y Z A B C W NO.01 X Y Z A B C W > MDI***STOP**** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK
INPUT +INPUT MEASUR TL INP INPUT PUNCH E NEMBER CURRNT POS CHAPTE R

O0000 N00000
NO.04 X Y Z A B C W NO.05 X Y Z A B C W (G57) 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 (G58) 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 NO.06 X Y Z A B C W (G59) 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

G54.1 P02 NO.02 X Y Z A B C W NO.03 X Y Z A B C W (G55) 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 (G56) 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

(COMMON) 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 (G54) 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

(MACHINE) X Y Z A B C W

0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

Operation selection key

INPUT +INPUT E
MEASUR

TL_INP

INPUT PUNCH NUMBER

CURRNT POS

CHAPT ER

Guide key EXEC

10.21.2 Operation method

(1) To specify a workpiece offset that makes the current position (machine coordinates) become the workpiece coordinate system origin: Step 1 Place the cursor on the desired coordinate system axis on the WORK ZERO OFFSET screen. 2 PUNCH CHG_DSP CURRENT CHAPTER +

EXEC

(VALUE)

(2) To specify a workpiece offset that makes the current position coincide with a certain point () in the workpiece coordinate system: Step 1 Place the cursor on the desired coordinate system axis in the WORK ZERO OFFSET screen. 2 PUNCH CHG_DSP CURRENT CHAPTER +

3 Input the coordinate value from the MDI panel. 4 EXEC +

NOTE 1 The CURRENT soft key becomes effective when parameter WZMS (bit 3 of parameter No. 1200) is 1. NOTE 2 When the cursor is at workpiece zero point offset No.00 (COMMON) , an attempt to manually specify the workpiece zero point is rejected, and the warning message EXTERNAL WORKPIECE ZERO NOT INPUT will appear.

304

B62564E1/02
<Example of operation>

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

(1) When an external workpiece zero point (offset specified at COMMON in WORK ZERO OFFSET screen) and workpiece coordinate system 1 (G54) are specified 1) If an operation (operation (1) ) is performed so that the current tool position (machine coordinates: X100. , Y200.) becomes the zero point of workpiece coordinate system 1

Y 250

G 200 Current position

E 150

A : External workpiece zero point offset B : Original G54 workpiece zero point offset C : New G54 workpiece zero point offset D : Machine coordinate value display E : Absolute coordinate value before setting F : Original workpiece coordinate zero point G : New workpiece coordinate zero point

D 100

B 50 External workpiece zero point A X Machine zero point 50 100 150 200 250 300

Before operation

NO. 00 (COMMON) X 50. 000 Y 50. 000 NO. 00 (COMMON) X 50. 000 Y 50. 000

NO. 01 (G54) X 100. 000 Y 50. 000 NO. 01 (G54) X 50. 000 Y 150. 000

MACHINE X 100. 000 Y 200. 000 MACHINE X 100. 000 Y 200. 000

ABSOLUTE X 50. 000 Y 100. 000 ABSOLUTE X 0. 000 Y 0. 000

After operation

305

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

B62564E1/02

2) If an operation (: X-50. , Y-50. in operation (2) ) is performed so that the current tool position (machine coordinates: X100. , Y200. ) coincides with position (X-50. , Y- 50.) in workpiece coordinate system 1

Y 250 A : External workpiece zero point offset B : Original G54 workpiece zero point offset C : New G54 workpiece zero point offset D : Machine coordinate value display E : Absolute coordinate value before setting F : Original workpiece coordinate zero point G : New workpiece coordinate zero point H : Input value (X-50. , Y-50.)

200

150

Current position

C E 100 F

D 50 B External workpiece zero point

A X Machine zero point 50 100 150 200 250 300

Before operation

NO. 00 (COMMON) X 50. 000 Y 200. 000 NO. 00 (COMMON) X 50. 000 Y 200. 000

NO. 01 (G54) X 100. 000 Y 50. 000 NO. 01 (G54) X 100. 000 Y 150. 000

MACHINE X 50. 000 Y 150. 000 MACHINE X 50. 000 Y 150. 000

ABSOLUTE X 50. 000 Y 50. 000 ABSOLUTE X 50. 000 Y 50. 000

After operation

306

B62564E1/02
(2) When a local coordinate system (G52) is specified

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

1) If an operation (operation (1) ) is performed so that the current tool position (machine coordinates: X50. , Y150.) becomes the origin of workpiece coordinate system 1, on the assumption that the external workpiece zero point offset is (X0. , Y0.)

Y 250

200

A : Original G54 workpiece zero point offset B : New G54 workpiece zero point offset C : Machine coordinate value display D : Absolute coordinate value before setting E : Local coordinate system offset (no change) F : Original workpiece coordinate zero point G : New workpiece coordinate zero point Current position G

150

E 100

D F

E C 50 B

A X Machine zero point 50 100 150 200 250 300

Before operation

NO. 00 (COMMON) X 0. 000 Y 0. 000 NO. 00 (COMMON) X 0. 000 Y 0. 000

NO. 01 (G54) X 200. 000 Y 50. 000 NO. 01 (G54) X 100. 000 Y 100. 000

MACHINE X 50. 000 Y 150. 000 MACHINE X 50. 000 Y 150. 000

ABSOLUTE X 100. 000 Y 50. 000 ABSOLUTE X 0. 000 Y 0. 000

After operation

307

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

(3) When tool length and cutter compensation are specified

B62564E1/02

1) If an operation (operation (1) ) is performed so that the current tool position (machine coordinates: X100. , Z100.) becomes the origin of workpiece coordinate system 1 when tool length and cutter compensation are functioning, on the assumption that the external workpiece zero point offset is (X0. , Z0.)

200

A : Original G54 workpiece zero point offset B : New G54 workpiece zero point offset C : Machine coordinate value display D : Absolute coordinate value before setting E : Original workpiece coordinate zero point F : New workpiece coordinate zero point G : Cutter compensation vector = -10.000 H : Tool length compensation vector = 20.000

150

H 100 C B 50

E A

F D E

X Machine zero point 50 100 150 200 250 300

Before operation

NO. 00 (COMMON) X 0. 000 Z 0. 000 NO. 00 (COMMON) X 0. 000 Z 0. 000

NO. 01 (G54) X 200. 000 Z 50. 000 NO. 01 (G54) X 110. 000 Z 80. 000

MACHINE X 100. 000 Z 100. 000 MACHINE X 100. 000 Z 100. 000

ABSOLUTE X 90. 000 Z 30. 000 ABSOLUTE X 0. 000 Z 0. 000

After operation

NOTE

The absolute coordinates assume that bits 2 (DTL) and 3 (DCR) of parameter No.2202 are both 1 (either set of coordinates does not include a distance traveled because of tool length or cutter compensation).

308

B62564E1/02 10.21.3 Workpiece zero point measurement B

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

If there is the tool measurement value B option, the indications on the WORK ZERO OFFSET screen vary depending on parameter WMH (bit 4 of parameter No.6003). ` 9 CRT Parameter WMH (NO. 6003#4) = 0
WORK ZERO OFFSET O0000 N00000 CURRENT G54 (TL) NO. 00 (COMMOM) NO. 02 (G55) X 0.000 X 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000 NO. 01 (G54) (MACHINE) X 100.000 X 150.000 Y 100.000 Y 150.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000 > MDI *** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK INPUT +INPUT MEASURE TL_INP INP_NO +

Parameter WMH (NO. 6003#4) = 1

WORK ZERO OFFSET CURRENT G54 NO. 00 (COMMOM) X 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 A 0.000 B 0.000 (MACHINE) X 150.000 Y 150.000 Z 0.000 A 0.000 B 0.000 > MDI *** STOP **** *** *** INPUT +INPUT MEASURE O0000 N00000 (TL) NO. 01 (G54) X 100.000 Y 100.000 Z 0.000 A 0.000 B 0.000 HOLE MEASURED #1 0.000 0.000 #2 0.000 0.000 #3 0.000 0.000 10:10:00 LSK TL_INP INP_NO +

309

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

` 14 CRT screen Parameter WMH (NO. 6003#4) = 0
WORK ZERO OFFSET
CURRENT NO.00 X Y Z A B C W NO.01 X Y Z A B C W > MDI***STOP**** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK
INPUT +INPUT MEASUR TL_INP INPUT PUNCH E NUMBER CURRNT POS CHAPTE R

B62564E1/02

O0000 N00000
0.000 NO.04 X Y Z A B C W NO.05 X Y Z A B C W (G57) 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 (G58) 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 NO.06 X Y Z A B C W (G59) 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

G54.1 P02

(TL)

(COMMON) 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 (G54) 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

NO.02 X Y Z A B C W NO.03 X Y Z A B C W

(G55) 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 (G56) 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

(MACHINE) X Y Z A B C W

0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

Parameter WMH (NO. 6003#4) = 1

WORK ZERO OFFSET
CURRENT NO.00 X Y Z A B C G54.1 P02 (TL) 0.000 NO.04 X Y Z A B C NO.05 X Y Z A B C #3X Y (G57) 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 (G58) 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 NO.06 X Y Z A B C (G59) 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 (COMMON) 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 NO.02 X Y Z A B C NO.03 X Y Z A B C #2X Y (G55) 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 (G56) 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

O0000 N00000

NO.01 (G54) X 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 A 0.000 B 0.000 C 0.000 HOLE MEASURED #1X 0.000 Y 0.000

(MACHINE) X Y Z A B C

0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

MDI***STOP**** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK

INPUT +INPUT MEASUR TL_INP INPUT PUNCH E NEMBER CURRNT POS CHAPTE R

310

B62564E1/02

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

10.22 Transverse Inhibit Limit Function

When the absolute coordinate along an axis exceeds the transverse inhibit limit (setsetting parameter No.5251) during automatic operation, movement along that axis is stopped but the automatic operation continues, updating the absolute coordinate along axis. That is, operation continues as if the machine lock had been applied tothe axis. Movement along the axis is resumed when the absolute coordinate again falls within the range of the transverse inhibit limit. The operation is identical during manual operation. When the absolute coordinate along an axis exceeds the transverse inhibit limit during manual operation, movement along that axis is stopped. Any subsequent manual operation results in the absolute coordinates still being updated, as if the machine lock had been applied to the axis. Movement along the axis is resumed when the absolute coordinate again falls within the range of the transverse inhibit limit. The transverse inhibit limit is checked only along a single axis and in a single direction. This axis is specified with setting parameter No.5250 and the direction is specified with the TILM bit of setting parameter No.5201. The figure below outlines operation with the transverse inhibit limit.

(3) (2)' (1) +Y G01 X+_ _ Y+_ _ X-_ _ ; ; ; (1) (2) (3) (2)

+X

Commands (1), (2), and (3) and used to move the tool along the path indicated in the figure by (1), (2) , and (3) when parameters are set to check the limit along the X-axis in the positive direction. This function is enabled or disabled by setting the TILE bit of setting parameter No.5201. CAUTION 1 This function is not available for rotary axis. CAUTION 2 This function is not available during the following modes. (1) Selection of machine coordinate system (G53) (2) Automatic reference position return (G28/G30) (From the intermediate point to the reference point) (3) Thread cutting mode (G33) (4) Tapping mode (G63) (5) Binary operation (Unit time 2msec) (6) Manual reference point return (7) Selection of machine coordinate system of axis control by PMC CAUTION 3 This function is disabled for the following axes: (1) The axis subject to three-dimensional coordinate conversion in three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode (G68) (2) The axis subject to polar coordinate interpolation in polar coordinate interpolation mode (G12.1) (3) The axis subject to cylindrical interpolation in cylindrical interpolation mode (G07.1) (4) The tapping axis in rigid tapping mode (G84.2/G84.3) (5) The chopping axis in chopping mode (G81.1) (6) The axis subject to hobbing in hobbing mode

311

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

B62564E1/02

CAUTION 4 When mirror image is specified with a signal (or setting) for an axis during manual operation, the absolute coordinate along the axis is subjected to mirror image conversion relative to the actual machine movement. The limit, at which the tool will be stopped, is compared with the converted absolute coordinate. When mirror image is specified with a signal (or setting) for an axis during automatic operation, the absolute coordinate indicates the coordinate specified with the command, while the machine coordinate and actual machine movement are subject to mirror image conversion. The limit, at which the tool will be stopped, is compared with the absolute coordinate that is not subjected to mirror image conversion. CAUTION 5 The relationship between the absolute coordinate and the machine coordinate for an axis is shifted when the workpiece coordinate system is set such that the current position exceeds the transverse inhibit limit for the axis or the workpiece coordinate system is set in an area that exceeds the transverse inhibit limit. (1) When the workpiece coordinate system is set such that the current position exceeds the transverse inhibit limit (a) When parameters are set to check the limit along the X-axis in the positive direction, the current position and inhibit limit will be as follows:

-20.000 -10.000 0.000 -20.000 -10.000 0.000 10.000 Active position 10.000 20.000 20.000

Machine coordinate

Work coordinate (Absolute coordinate)

Ihibit limit position

(b) The workpiece coordinate system is set such that the current position exceeds the transverse inhibit limit (G92 X25.).

-20.000 -10.000 0.000 20.000 30.000 Active position 40.000 10.000 20.000

Machine coordinate

Work coordinate offset by G92 0.000 10.000

Work coordinate (Absolute coordinate)

Ihibit limit position

(c) G90 X5. 0 is commanded (i) While the absolute coordinate exceeds the transverse inhibit limit for an axis, only the absolute coordinate is updated. The machine coordinate remains as is (the tool does not move).
-20.000 -10.000 0.000 10.000 20.000 Machine coordinate

Work coordinate offset by G92 Machine sift value -10.000 0.000 10.000 20.000 Active position 30.000 Work coordinate (Absolute coordinate)

312

B62564E1/02

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

(ii) When the absolute coordinate falls within the range of the transverse inhibit limit, the tool starts moving and the machine coordinate and absolute coordinate along the axis are updated as follows:
-20.000 -10.000 0.000 10.000 20.000 Machine coordinate

Work coordinate offset by G92 Machine sift value -10.000 0.000 10.000 20.000 Ihibit limit position 30.000 Work coordinate (Absolute coordinate)

Active position

As a result, absolute coordinate 0 in the actual workpiece coordinate system is shifted from the origin, as indicated by the workpiece coordinate system offset specified with G92, by the machine shift value shown in the figure above. This shift value can be canceled only by performing the following operations: Manual reference position return Workpiece coordinate system preset with G92.1 Workpiece coordinate system preset with the WORK operation selection soft key on the current position display screen (2) The absolute coordinate is shifted in the same way when the workpiece coordinate system is set such that it exceeds the range of the transverse inhibit limit.

NOTE

To change the transverse inhibit limit, perform either of the following: (1) Change setting parameter No.5251 by an MDI operation. (2) Change setting parameter No.5251 by programmable parameter input (G10).

313

11. DISPLAY

B62564E1/02

11.DISPLAY
11.1 Program Display
11.1.1 Execution program and program directory
1 Press the function menu key. 2 Press the <PROGRAM> soft key or <PROG> hard key. One of the following screens appears: i) Program screen ii) Program number screen iii) Program number and program name screen The display can be switched between these screens as shown below.

TEXT

DIR.MEM and

DRCTRY MEMORY key

is

displayed by pressing the CHAPTER Programscreen DIR.MEM key TEXT key TEXT key

DIR.MEM key

Page key Programnumberscreen + Forthecompact CRT/MDIpanel Programnumberandprogram namescreen

314

B62564E1/02

11. DISPLAY

At the bottom of the program screen, the size of the remaining part program storage space and the number of programs that can be registered are displayed as follows: FREE PAGES: 6960 (1272M) FREE FILES: 100 The page is the minimum unit used to store a program in part program storage. One page corresponds to 77 characters (or a part program length of about 0.2 m). In the example above, the size of remaining space is 193 pages (about 38.6 m), and the number of programs that can be registered is 39. When the program number and program name screen displays a program name, up to 16 characters are displayed. However, when the option for 48character program name display is selected, up to 48 characters are displayed as shown below. Example of display: 14 CRT (18 programs on one screen)

In the case of the 9 CRT, one screen displays the program numbers and names of up to five programs. NOTE The term page used here is a unit of data in internal memory. It is not related to the size of a page on the CRT screen.

11.1.2 Program check screens

Three program check screens are used. 1) Screen to display the command values specified in the block to be executed next, and the continuous state values in that block The command values specified in the block that is four or more blocks after the current block and the continuousstate values in that block are displayed. (Whether these values are displayed depends on the program specified.) 2) Screen to display the command values specified in the block executed last, and the continuousstate values in that block 3) Screen to display the command values specified in the current block, and the continuousstate values in that block 1 Press the function menu key. 2 Press the <PRGCHK> soft key or <PCHECK> key hard key. One of the three screens above appears. The desired screen is selected in one of two ways: i) Press the <PRGCHK> soft key or <PCHECK> hard key repeatedly until the desired screen appears. ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key, then press the corresponding soft key.

315

11. DISPLAY
iii) Whether absolute or relative is selected for the current position display on the screen after chapter selection for program checking depends on the setting of the DAP bit in parameter No. 2203. For the operation of the ORIGIN and PRESET keys after this screen is selected, see Section 11.3.2. 9" CRT function selection keys
POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET PRG-CHK

B62564E1/02

CHAPTER

9" CRT program checking chapter selection keys

CHECK LAST ACTIVE +

9" CRT operation selection keys after chapter selection for program checking (Same as above for other chapters)
ORIGIN PRESET 0

14" CRT function selection keys

POSITI ON PROGRA OFFSET PRGRAM SETTIN SERVIC MESSAG M CHECK G E E CHAPTE R

14" CRT program checking chapter selection keys

CHE CK LAST NEXT

14" CRT operation selection keys after chapter selection for program checking (Same as above for other chapters)
ORI GIN PRE SET CHE CK LAST NEXT

Command values specified in the block executed last (LAST)

Command values specified in the current block (ACTIVE)

Summarized display of the current program and position data (check). The remaining subprogram call count is displayed in the L field.

316

B62564E1/02 11.1.3 Groupbygroup program directory display and punchout

11. DISPLAY

In addition to program directory display, which displays the program numbers and program names of all registered programs, groupbygroup directory display is possible. This display divides programs into groups according to units of machining. The name of programs in the same group need to contain the same character string. In groupbygroup directory display, the programs whose names contain the specified character string are searched for, then a directory of their program numbers and program names is displayed. Furthermore, a group of program numbers and names can be punched out. Suppose that the character string GEAR1000 is included in the names of the main program and subprograms for machining a gear part with part number 1000. The programs whose names contain the character string GEAR1000 can be found from all the programs stored in memory, and a directory of their numbers and names can be displayed. Thus, the programs stored in large memory can be managed easily.

Directory display listing the program numbers and program names of currently registered programs

Display of a directory of programs for a shaft

317

11. DISPLAY
(1) Procedure for groupbygroup directory display Use the procedure below. (The soft keys indicated below are for the 9 CRT.) 1 Set the part program storage and edit mode.

B62564E1/02

2 Press the function menu key, then press the <PROGRAM> soft key or <PROG> hard key. 3 Select chapter selection key display by pressing the <PROGRAM> soft key or <PROG> hard key repeatedly or by pressing the <CHAPTER> key. Then, press the <DIR.MEM> key to select the program number and program name screen. 4 Press the <OPERATION SELECTION> key to switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys. 5 Press the <DIR.GRP> key. COPY MOVE MERGE DIR.GRP

6 Press the (NAME) key. (NAME) 7 Enter the character string identifying the desired program in the group. The program names can be as long as desired. However, only the first 48 characters are effective in the search. When the programs whose names start with the character string GEAR1000 are to be found, for example, enter GEAR1000*. Be sure to append the asterisk, called a wild card, which indicates that any character string meets the requirements of the search. If the asterisk is omitted, only the programs whose names consist of the character string GEAR1000 are searched for. A question mark specifies a single arbitrary character. For example, when ????1000 is entered, the programs whose names start with four arbitrary characters are searched for. 8 Press the <EXEC> key. EXEC 9 The screen changes to the group directory screen, which displays a directory of programs whose names contain the specified character string. When no program whose name contains the specified character string is found, the message DATA NOT FOUND is displayed. 10 If a directory of programs occupies more than one page, use the page keys to scroll the pages. 11 Unless the power is turned off, a directory of programs in a group continues to be stored until a search is done for another group. After switching from the group directory screen to another screen, the directory of programs in the group previously searched can be displayed again. This operation is performed using the procedure below. i) Press the function menu key, then press the <PROGRAM> soft key or <PROG> hard key. ii) Switch the soft keys to the chapter selection keys by pressing the <PROGRAM> soft key or <PROG> hard key repeatedly or by pressing the <CHAPTER> key. Then, press the <DIR.MEM> key to select the program number and program name screen. iii) Press the <OPERATION SELECTION> key to switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys. iv) Press the <DIR.GRP> key. v) Press the <PRVGRP> key. (NAME) vi) The screen switches to the group directory screen and displays the directory of the programs in the group previously searched. Therefore, when the group directory screen is to be displayed again after switching to another screen, the character string included in the programs of the group need not be reentered. PRV-GRP PRV-GRP

318

B62564E1/02
(2) Groupbygroup program output (punchout)

11. DISPLAY

1 Display the directory of programs in a group according to the procedure for groupbygroup directory display. 2 Press the <PUNCH> key. SEARCH PUNCH 3 Press the <GRP.ALL> key. GRP .ALL The programs searched for in the group are output. When the group directory display screen is displayed, programs can be punched out using the following keys: <THIS> <(PROG#)> : Punches out the currently selected main program. : Punches out a searched for program numbered 0. THIS (PROG#) TEXT DIR.MEM

319

11. DISPLAY

B62564E1/02

11.2 Status Display

This function displays the status of the control unit, alarm status, editing status, whether the buffer contains the next block, and so forth. These statues are displayed on the second last line (soft key display line) of the CRT screen.

(1) (2) 16 17

(3)

(4)

(5) (6)

(7)

(8) (9)

This figure is for the 9" CRT. On the 14" CRT screen, the same status data is displayed, right-justi fied.

TAPE JOG STOP READ MTN FTN 16:52:13 @ ALM

40

The status display line contains nine fields, (1) to (9). On all CNC screens, the status items listed below are displayed. (1) Automatic operation mode selection (MEM, MDI, TAPE, EDIT, or ****) This field displays the automatic operation mode currently selected. When no automatic operation mode is selected, **** is displayed. (2) Manual operation mode selection (JOG, HND, INC, AGJ, J+REF, or ***) This field displays the manual operation mode currently selected. When no manual operation mode is selected, **** is displayed. (3) Automatic operation status (RESET, STOP, HOLD, STRT, MSTR, or SRCH) This field displays the status of automatic operation. RSET STOP HOLD STRT MSTR NSRC : : : : : : Reset is in progress. Automatic operation is stopped. Automatic operation is suspended. Automatic operation is started. Execution of a manual numeric command is started. Sequence number search is in progress.

(4) Program editing status (READ, PNCH, VRFY, SRCH, COND, EDIT, or ****) This field displays the status of program editing. READ PNCH VRFY SRCH COND EDIT **** : : : : : : : Registration is in progress. Punchout is in progress. Verification is in progress. Search is in progress. Memory arrangement is in progress. An editing operation (such as insertion or alteration) is in progress. No editing operation is in progress,

(5) Axis movement/dwell status (MTN, DWL, or ***) This field displays MTN during movement along an axis, and displays DWL when the machine is dwelling. This field displays *** in other cases. (6) M/S/T/B function status (FIN or ***) This field displays FIN when a miscellaneous function such as M, S, T, and B is being performed (that is, when the system is waiting for a completion signal from the PMC). In other cases, this field displays ***. (5) (6) Emergency stop status (EMG) If an emergency stop occurs, the display of (5) and (6) disappears and the character string EMG is displayed in reverse, instead.

320

B62564E1/02
(7) Current time display This field displays the current time in hours, minutes, and seconds.

11. DISPLAY

Example 16:52:13 (Fiftytwo minutes and thirteen seconds after four oclock in the afternoon) (8) Status of writing into nonvolatile memory (@ or space) This field displays @ when data is being written into nonvolatile memory. (9) Alarm status and label skip status (ALM, BAT, WRN, LSK, or ***) ALM blinks in reverse when an alarm has occurred. WRN blinks when a warning message appears on the CRT screen. This field displays BAT when the voltage of the battery for the absoluteposition detector or nonvolatile memory for storing parameters, tool compensation data, and part programs is low. This display disappears after the battery is replaced and the alarm is reset. This field displays LSK when none of these statuses arepresent, and the tape reader is placed in the label skip status. In other cases, this field displays ***.

321

11. DISPLAY

B62564E1/02

11.3 Current Position Display

Four currentposition screens are used. Current position in the relative coordinate system 1) Overall position display screen 2) Currentposition screen based on the relative coordinate system 3) Currentposition screen based on the workpiece coordinate system 4) Currentposition screen based on the machine coordinate system Current position in the workpiece coordinate system Current position in the machine coordinate syste Remaining distance to travel

11.3.1 Currentposition screens

1 Press the function menu key. 2 Press the <POSITION> soft key or <POS> hard key. 9" CRT function selection keys
POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET PRG-CHK CHAPTER +

9" CRT position chapter selection keys

OVERALL RELATIV ABSOLUT MACHINE

Overall position display

Relative position display

14" CRT function selection keys

POSITI ON PROGRA OFFSET PRGRAM SETTIN SERVIC MESSAG M CHECK G E E CHAPTE R

14" CRT position chapter selection keys

OVER RELA ABSO MACH ALL TIV LUT INE

Current position display Current position display in the workpiece coordinatein the machine coordisystem nate system Select the desired screen using one of the procedures described below. i) Press the <POSITION> soft key or <POS> hard key repeatedly until the desired screen appears. ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key, then press the corresponding soft key. OVERALL : Displays overall position data. RELATIV : Displays the current position in the relative coordinate system ABSOLUT: Displays the current position in the workpiece coordinate system. MACHINE : Displays the current position in the machine coordinate system.

322

B62564E1/02 11.3.2 Presetting the current position display

11. DISPLAY

The current position in the relative coordinate system or workpiece coordinate system can be preset. 1 Select the currentposition screen based on the relative coordinate system or the currentposition screen based on the workpiece coordinate system. (See Section 11.3.1.) 2 Press the operation menu key to switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys. 3 To set the current position to 0 Press the <ORIGIN> key. The soft keys are switched to the operation guidance keys. 4 (4)1 To set the coordinates on all axes to 0, press the <ALLAXS> key. (4)2 To set the coordinate on a particular axis to 0, enter the axis name (X, Z, etc.), then press the <EXEC> key. (4)2 To set the coordinates on multiple axes to 0, enter the axis names in succession, then press the <EXEC> key. Example 5 This operation performed on the current position screen based on the workpiece coordinate system is the same as specifying G92X0Y0....; in a program. The workpiece coordinate system is shifted so that the current position becomes the zero point. This operation performed on the currentposition screen based on the workpiece coordinate system is the same as specifying G92XY; in a program. The workpiece coordinate system is shifted so that the current position is set to the specified coordinates. XYZ <EXEC> key Enter desired coordinates, then press the <EXEC> key. Example X100.0Y2000.0 <EXEC> key To set the current position to particular coordinates, press the <RESET> key. The soft keys are switched to the operation guidance keys.

9" CRT position operation selection keys ORIGIN RESET

9" CRT origin operation guide keys ALL-AXIS (AXIS)

9" CRT preset operation guidance key (AXIS) 14" CRT position operation selection keys ORI GIN
RESET

14" CRT origin operation guidance keys ALL AXIS (AXIS)

14" CRT preset operation guidance key (AXIS)

323

11. DISPLAY 11.3.3 Presetting the workpiece coordinate system

(a) Manual intervention when the manual absolute signal is off (b) Move command executed with the machine locked (c) Handle interrupt, and movement by manual/automatic simultaneous operation (d) Operations with a mirror image

B62564E1/02

(e) Setting the local coordinate system with G52 or shifting the workpiece coordinate system with G92 (f) Setting the origin of the workpiece coordinate system from the MDI panel The operations above shift the workpiece coordinate system. When the MDI panel is used, however, the shifted coordinate system can be cancelled, and the workpiece coordinate system can be preset at the original position offset from the machine zero point by the workpiece reference point offset. (For detailed information about presetting the workpiece coordinate system, see Section 8.2.6 in Part II.) Use the procedure below. 1 Select the overall position display screen. 2 Press the operation menu key to switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys. 3 Set the reset state or automatic operation stop state, then press the <WRKCRD> soft key or <WORK COORD> hard key. 4 41 To preset all axes, press the <ALLAXS> key. 42 To preset a particular axis, enter the axis name and immediately after the axis name, then press the <EXEC> key. 9" CRT position operation menu keys ORIGIN PRESET MEM-FRP WRK-CRD 9" CRT workpiece coordinate operation guidance keys ALL-AXIS (AXIS)

14" CRT position operation selection keys ORI GIN PRE SET MEM WORK -FRP COORD

14" CRT workpiece coordinate operation guidance keys ALL AXIS (AXIS)

5 The cutter compensation, tool length compensation, and tool offset are cancelled, and the origin of the selected workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59) is preset at the position offset from the origin of the machine coordinate system by the workpiece reference point offset. As a result, the current position (in absolute coordinates) in the workpiece coordinate system are the values obtained by subtracting the workpiece reference point offset from the machine coordinates. Whether to preset relative position display as with absolute coordinates is specified by the DSE bit of parameter No. 2202.

324

B62564E1/02

11. DISPLAY

11.4 Operator Message Display

The operator messages are classified into two groups: (i) External operator messages (ii) Operator messages specified with custom macros When an operator message is reported, the operator message screen is usually displayed automatically. 1 Press the function menu key to switch the soft keys to the function selection keys. 2 Press the <MESSAGE> soft key or <MESSAGE> hard key. One of the following screens is displayed: 9" CRT function selection keys
SETTING SERVICE MESSAGE CHAPTER +

Operator message

9" CRT message chapter selection keys

ALARM OPERATOR +

14" CRT function selection keys

POSITI ON PROGRA OFFSET PRGRAM SETTIN SERVIC MESSAG M CHECK G E E CHAPTE R

Alarm message

14" CRT notice chapter selection keys

ALAR OPER M ATOR

The operator message screen can be selected in one of two ways: i) Press the <MESSAGE> (soft key or hard key) key repeatedly until the operator message screen appears. ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key, then press the OPERATOR key. Clearing operator messages External operator messages are cleared by external commands. For detailed information about external operator messages including how to clear them, refer to the relevant manual supplied by the machine tool builder. When an operator message specified with a custom macro is displayed, a singleblock halt occurs. The message disappears when the next cycle is started. For the display of operator messages specified with custom macros, refer to the relevant manual describing the custom macros.

325

11. DISPLAY

B62564E1/02

11.5 Alarm Message Display

The alarm messages are classified into three groups: (i) Alarm messages reported by CNC selfdiagnosis (ii) External alarm messages (iii) Alarm messages specified with custom macros When an alarm message is reported, the alarm message screen is displayed automatically. 1 Press the function menu key to switch the soft keys to the function selection keys. 2 Press the <MESSAGE> soft key or <MESSAGE> hard key. One of the following screens is displayed: 9" CRT function selection keys
SETTING SERVICE MESSAGE CHAPTER +

Operator message

9" CRT message chapter selection keys

ALARM OPERATOR +

14" CRT function selection keys

POSITI ON PROGRA OFFSET PRGRAM SETTIN SERVIC MESSAG M CHECK G E E CHAPTE R

Alarm message

14" CRT notice chapter selection keys

ALAR OPER M ATOR

The alarm message screen can be selected in one of two ways: i) Press the <MESSAGE> (soft kye or hard key) key repeatedly until the alarm message screen appears. ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key, then press the ALARM key. Clearing alarm messages External alarm messages are cleared by external commands. For detailed information about external alarm messages including how to clear them, refer to the relevant manual supplied by the machine tool builder. Alarms reported by CNC selfdiagnosis and alarms specified with custom macros are cleared by resetting the NC. For detailed information about alarms reported by CNC selfdiagnosis, see Appendix 11. For detailed information about alarms specified with custom macros, refer to the relevant manual describing the custom macros.

326

B62564E1/02

11. DISPLAY

11.6 Graphic Display

To enable the user to check the progress of machining and current tool position on the CRT screen, the tool path can be drawn during automatic or manual operation. The functions listed below are available for this drawing function. (i) Different colors can be used for rapid traverse and cutting feed when drawing a tool path. NOTE Seven colors are available.

(ii) The O, N, F, S, and T values of the program being draw and the coordinates in the workpiece coordinate system are displayed. (iii) Drawing can be performed in an arbitrary plane. Threedimensional drawing is possible as well as bi plane drawing. Z Y Y

X Z X Drawing in an arbitrary plane Y Z X X Bi-plane drawing

Three-dimensional drawing

(iv) Threedimensional drawing allows a graphic to be rotated horizontally and vertically.

Z Horizontal rotation Vertical rotation

(v) Parameter No. 7703 allows the controlled axes to be selected for the graphic display axes X, Y, and Z. The names of the controlled axes selected with the parameter are displayed as the names of the axes on the CRT screen. (vi) A graphic on the screen can be shifted and enlarged. Current screen New screen

Enlargement Current screen New screen

Shift

327

11. DISPLAY 11.6.1 Selecting the graphic screen

1 Press the function menu key to switch the soft keys to the function selection keys.

B62564E1/02

2 Press the <GRAPHIC> soft key or <OTHERS> hard key to display the graphic screen.

14" CRT function selection keys

POSI TION PRO GRAM OFF SET
PRGRAM SET CHECK TING

SER VICE

MES SAGE

GRAPH IC

CHAP TER

11.6.2 Setting the graphic parameters

(1) Operation 1 Select the graphic screen (see Section 11.6.1). 2 Press the <GRAPH PARAM> key to display the graphic parameter screen.

3 Move the cursor to the desired parameter with the cursor keys <> , <> , <> , and <> . The cursor keys <> and <> move the cursor horizontally. The cursor keys <> and <> move the cursor vertically. 4 To set a parameter, enter the desired data then press the <INPUT> key. 5 To return to the graphic screen after setting the parameters, press the <GRAPH> key.

328

B62564E1/02
(2) Graphic parameters (a) Graphic plane This parameter sets a graphic plane. The following graphic planes are available:

11. DISPLAY

Z Y XY X Z YZ Y X ZX Z X Y X YX Y Y ZY Z Z XZ X Z Y XYZ2 Z X X (Bi-plane graphic) X XZY Y XYZ

(b) Rotation angle (horizontal) This parameter specifies a horizontal rotation angle in degrees. Set a value from 360 to +360. An initial value can be set using parameter No. 4831. Suppose that 180 is set in parameter No. 4831. When a rotation angle of 30 is set, the resultant graphic rotation angle is 210 degrees. Z X

Y Y

30, 180,

Y f:Represents the resultant XYZ coordinates.

329

11. DISPLAY

B62564E1/02

(c) Rotation angle (vertical) When the graphic plane XYZ or XZY is used, vertical rotation is allowed as well as horizontal rotation.

Z Horizontal rotation

Vertical rotation axis

Vertical rotation X Y

Parameter No. 4832 can rotate the vertical rotation axis in the horizontal plane. When this parameter is set to 0, the vertical rotation axis is parallel to the display screen.

330

B62564E1/02
Example Drawing plane: XZY Rotation angle (horizontal)= +20 Rotation angle (vertical) = +10 Parameter No. 4832 = +65 Y Y Vertical rotation axis

11. DISPLAY

10

65 X Initial vertical rotation axis

10

20 Z

20 X

f:Represents the resultant XYZ coordinates.

331

11. DISPLAY
(d) Scale factor

B62564E1/02

A value from 0.01 to 100.00 can be specified. When a scale factor is automatically determined from the maximum and minimum values of the graphic range, the scale factor is clamped within this range. (e) Maximum and minimum values of the graphic range When the maximum and minimum values are set for each axis on specified planes, the scale factor and the center of the screen are automatically determined so that the screen can display the maximum and minimum values. The maximum value must be greater than the minimum value. When 0 is specified for these parameters, the scale factor and CRT center parameters are not automatically determined. Instead the scale factor set and CRT center that have been manually set are used. When a scale factor is automatically set, it includes an allowance of 10%. The scale factor of an axis subject to screen restriction is effective. Axes that are not restricted by the screen are positioned so that the range determined by a maximum value and minimum value is positioned at the center of the screen. (See the figures that follow.) This means that when a difference between a maximum value and minimum value set for one axis varies too much from that for another axis, the actually displayed screen does not match the maximum and minimum values set for one of the axes. Example X-Y plane Suppose that the following is set: Maximum value: X = 100. Y = 5. Minimum value: X = -100. Y = -5. In this case, the center (0) of the Y-axis is posi tioned at the center of the screen so that the screen display matches the X-axis range, +100 to -100. This means that the screen display does not match the maximum and minimum values set for the Y-axis. (See the figure to the right.) Y 100 0 100 100 0 100 X

Screen

Area set by maximum and minmium values

10%

10%

332

B62564E1/02

11. DISPLAY
In the case of a biplane drawing on the XYZ2 graphic plane, when the ratio of the difference between the maximum and minimum values set for the Yaxis to the difference between those set for the Zaxis exceeds 1:2 or 2:1, the screen allocation is clamped to 1:2 or 2:1. Screen Y 1

If the ratio of the difference between the maximum and minimum values set for the Zaxis to the difference between those set for the Yaxis is greater than 2, the screen is divided as shown above. In the case of the drawing plane XYZ or XZY, the scale factor is determined so that the rectangular parallelepiped determined by the set maximum and minimum values always fits in the screen when rotated horizontally by any angle.

10%

10%

Parallelepiped determined by the set maximum and minimum values Rotated by an arbitrary angle

(f) CRT center This parameter specifies the coordinates of the screen center in the workpiece coordinate system of a program used for drawing. When the maximum values and minimum values are set, the centers of those values are automatically set. The drawing scale in the coordinate system on the graphic screen is calculated from the screen center coordinates and the scale factor. The unit is mm or inches.

333

11. DISPLAY
(g) Notes (i) Specify positional values in mm or inches.

B62564E1/02

(ii) The parameter scale factor, the maximum and minimum values of the graphic range, and the CRT center are independent of data defining the graphic screen and data displayed on the screen for making alterations. This is to make it easier to return to the original screen after a graphic enlargement or shift operation. Usually, graphic data matches the settings. After a graphic enlargement or shift operation, however, the graphic data changes, resulting in a mismatch with the settings. In such a case, @ is prefixed to the setting. When the <AFTER SHIFT> soft key is pressed, the graphic data is transferred to the settings (A in the figure below). When the <BEFORE SHIFT> soft key is pressed, the settings are transferred to the graphic data (B in the figure below.) A B The tool path is drawn using graphic data. Drawing Change of settings

Graphic data

Settings

NOTE

When enlarging a graphic, the red and yellow cursors are used to change the maximum and minimum values. When shifting a graphic, the RELATIVE SCALE field is used to change the scale factor parameter, and the red cursor is used to change the center coordinate data.

(iii) The graphic parameters are not cleared even when the power is turned off.

334

B62564E1/02 11.6.3 Drawing a tool path

11. DISPLAY

The tool path in automatic or manual operation can be drawn so that the user can check the progress of machining, the current tool position, and so forth on the CRT screen. (1) Starting drawing 1 Select the graphic screen. (See Section 11.6.1.) 2 Press the <START MACHIN> key to allow the movement of a tool in automatic or manual operation to be drawn. DRAWING is displayed in the lowerright corner of the screen. 3 Execute the desired program in the tape or memory operation mode. To draw the tool path without moving the machine, lock the machine. The cutting feed path and rapid traverse path can be drawn in different colors by setting parameter Nos. 4821 and 4822. The tool position from which a tool offset is subtracted in the workpiece coordinate system is drawn according to the CRT center and scale factor determined by the graphic parameters set. If the tool position in the workpiece coordinate system changes discontinuously as in the case of origin setting or workpiece coordinate system switching, a tool movement is assumed. The drawing function may not be able to follow a very low feedrate. In this case, only the tool path can be drawn, but not the machining profile. When DRAWING is displayed, the internal processing for drawing continues even if the screen is switched. When the display returns to the graphic screen, the drawing during that period is displayed with the tracking capability somewhat degraded. (2) Terminating drawing 1 Select the graphic screen. (See Section 11.6.1.) 2 Press the <STOP> key to terminate drawing. The movement of the tool in the automatic or manual operation stops. (3) Clearing the graphic screen To clear the tool path, press the <ERASE> key after terminating drawing.

335

11. DISPLAY
(4) Shifting the screen

B62564E1/02

Press the <SHIFT> key to display the shift screen. Move the cursor (a red box) up and down and to right and left with the cursor keys <> , <> , <> , and <> to specify the center of the new screen. Enter a value from 0.01 to 99.99 in the RELATIVE SCALE field in the lowerright corner of the screen, then press the <INPUT> key. The value displayed in the RELATIVE SCALE field in the lowerright corner of the screen multiplied by the entered scale factor then becomes the new relative scale factor. After pressing the <SET END> key, press the <ERASE> key and the <START MACHIN> key. Then the tool path is drawn on the new screen. When the graphic parameters, and the maximum and minimum values of the graphic range are set, the scale factor automatically determined by the maximum and minimum values is multiplied by the value set in the RELATIVE SCALE field. For drawing at the center according to a specified scale factor, the parameters specifying the maximum and minimum values of the graphic range to 0. Current screen New screen

SCALE FACTOR =2.00

336

B62564E1/02
(5) Enlarging a graphic

11. DISPLAY

Press the ENLARGE key to display the graphic enlargement screen. Specify the diagonal points of the new screen by moving the red and yellow cursors (J) displayed in the central part of the screen up and down and to right and left with the cursor keys <> , <> , <> , and <> . The next drawing operation is performed so that the rectangle with the set diagonal points fits in the screen. Press the <SET END> key, the <ERASE> key then the <START MACHIN> key. The tool path is then drawn on the new screen. Current screen New screen

NOTE 1 Reduction is not allowed. For reduction, use the RELATIVE SCALE field for the graphic shift operation. NOTE 2 After graphic shift or enlargement, the graphic parameter screen may display an at sign (@). This means that graphic data set for shifting or enlarging a graphic does not match the setting on the graphic parameter screen. NOTE 3 When two planes are selected, the plane containing the red cursor (J) is subject to enlargement.

337

11. DISPLAY

B62564E1/02

11.7 Displaying the Actual Spindle Speed

The actual spindle speed is displayed on several screens including the position display screen. On each screen, the spindle speed in rpm is displayed in decimal after the character S or the characters ACT.S. The display mode and position slightly vary, depending on the size of the CRT screen and screen type. The NOS bit (bit 0) of parameter No. 2204 enables the spindle speed display function to exclude the header (such as S and ACT.S) and unit (rpm) from the display.

11.8 Directory of Floppy Disk Files

It is possible to display a directory of files in a floppy disk that contains execution programs, parameters, and offset data. 1 Press the function menu key. 2 Press the <PROGRAM> soft key or <PROG> hard key. 3 Press the <DIR.FLP> key. The floppy cassette file directory screen appears. However, the file names are not displayed at this stage. 4 Press the operation menu key, then switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys. 5 Press the <SRH_FIL> key. 6 61 To display a directory of files starting at the first file, press the <TOP> key 62 To display a directory of files starting at a particular file, press the <(FILE#)> key, enter the desired file number, then press the <EXEC> key. 7 The files listed on the preceding and following pages can be displayed by scrolling the page up and down.

(1) Select the DIRECTORY (FLOPPY) screen. (a) Press the function selection key <PROGRAM> several times to display the DIRECTORY screen. POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET PRG_CHK CHAPTER +

338

B62564E1/02

11. DISPLAY
(b) The DIRECTORY screen can also be selected by pressing the function selection key <PROGRAM>, then pressing the chapter selection key <DIR.FLP>. POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET PRG_CHK CHAPTER +

TEXT

DIR.MEM

DIR.FLP

NOTE

The directory is not displayed at this stage.

(2) Press the operation selection key <SRH_FIL>. +

READ

PUNCH

SRH_FIL

DELETE FILE

TEXT

(3) Display a directory. (a) Press the operation guidance key <TOP> to display a directory starting with the first file. TOP (FILE#) +

(b) To display a directory starting with a particular file, press the operation guidance key <(FILE#)>, enter the desired file number, then press the <EXEC> key. TOP (FILE#) +

File number input EXEC +

(4) The files listed on the previous pages can be displayed by scrolling the pages. NOTE The directory display is cleared when the mode or screen is changed. To return to the directory display, perform the above operation again.

339

11. DISPLAY

B62564E1/02

11.9 Load Meter Display

The load (torque) on the spindle motor and servo motor are displayed as a bar graph on the CRT screen. The 14 CRT screen displays waveforms indicating the fluctuation in the load as well. In bar graph display, the latest sampling values are displayed. In waveform display, the fluctuations over one minute are displayed. The rated load of the motor corresponding to each load meter must be set in a parameter. When the load reaches the rated value the load meter indicates 100%. The load meter screen also displays load meters, the absolute position, specified speed, actual speed, override value, number of machining parts, and operation data. Up to three axes can be displayed on the load meter screen for the servo motor. The user can select the axes whose load is displayed by setting parameters. To display the load on the spindle motor, the load signal needs to be connected to the A/D converter of the CNC. The load meter screen is selected as follows: 1 Press the function selection key. 2 Press the <PRGCHK> soft key or <PCHECK> hard key. The load meter screen can be selected in either of the following ways: (i) Press the <PRGCHK> soft key or <PCHECK> hard key repeatedly until the load meter screen appears. (ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key, then press the <OPE.MNTR> or <OPE.MONITR> key. 9 CRT function selection keys POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET PRG-CHK 9 CRT program checking chapter selection keys CHECK LAST ACTIVE OPE.MNTR 14 CRT function selection keys
POSI TION PRO GRAM OFF SET
PRGRAM SET CHECK TING

CHAPTER +

SER VICE

MES SAGE

CHAP TER

14 CRT program checking chapter selection keys CHECK LAST AC TIVE OPE.M ONITR

340

B62564E1/02

11. DISPLAY

NOTE 1 Set the numbers of the axes whose load is to be displayed in parameter Nos. 2231 to 2333. Set the rated load of the motor corresponding to each load meter in parameter Nos. 2234 to 2237. When the applied load reaches the rated load, the load meter indicates 100%. NOTE 2 Load meter data is displayed using a bar graph and percentages. The range of the bar graph is 0% to 200%. 100% is indicated by a change in color on the 14 screen or a change in brightness on the 9 CRT screen. NOTE 3 The 14 CRT screen displays a graph indicating the fluctuations in load over one minute. One screen displays the fluctuations for one load meter. The cursor keys <> and <> can be used to select the load meter for which this type of graph is to be displayed.

341

11. DISPLAY

B62564E1/02

11.10 Display of Run Times and Parts Counts

The CRT screen can display the cumulative poweron time, the cumulative automatic operation time, the cumulative cutting time, and the cumulative time recorded with an arbitrary timer for each machine. Except for the cumulative poweron time, the operator can alter and preset any of the cumulative times via the MDI panel. The CRT screen can also display the number of parts required and cumulative parts counts. Two types of cumulative parts counts are displayed. One is a cumulative parts count that can be changed only by parameter alteration. This is used to count the total number of parts machined, and is referred to as the total cumulative parts count. The other is the cumulative parts count that can be be altered or preset by the operator via the MDI panel. In general, before a new type of workpiece is machined, this count is preset to 0 to count the number of parts machined. Unless otherwise noted, this count is referred to as the cumulative parts count. Each time M02, M30 or an M code with a parameter set is executed, these counts are incremented by one. This means that the number of machined parts can be counted using a program that executes M02, M30, or an M code with a set parameter when each workpiece has been machined. When the cumulative parts count reaches the number of parts required, a signal is output to the machine. The operator can alter the number of parts required via the MDI panel. Use the procedure below to select the run time and parts count display screen, and alter or change cumulative values. 1 Press the function menu key to switch the soft keys to the function selection keys. 2 Press the [SETTING] soft or hard key. The run time and parts count display screen can be selected in one of two ways: (i) Press the [SETTING] soft or hard key repeatedly until the run time and parts count display screen appears. (ii) Press the [CHAPTER] key, then press the [TIMER] key.

3 Select the MDI mode, then move the cursor to the cumulative parts count field with the cursor keys. Enter the desired preset value with the numeric keys, then press the [INPUT] key. Similarly, the number of parts required can be preset. When 0 is set as the number of parts required, the number of parts required is assumed to be infinite. The total cumulative parts count cannot be preset on this screen. Use the parameter screen to preset the total cumulative parts count. 4 To alter the cumulative automatic operation time, cumulative cutting time, and cumulative time recorded with an arbitrary timer for each machine, move the cursor to the corresponding hours (H), minutes (M), and seconds (S) fields with the cursor keys, then enter the desired values. NOTE 1 Custom macro system variables can be used to write to or read from the cumulative parts count field and the field for the number of parts required.] Cumulative parts count: #3901 Number of parts required: #3902 NOTE 2 Specifying DTIM, bit 5 of parameter No. 7620, appropriately enables the accumulated values of poweron time, automatic operation time, cutting time, and time recorded on the timer which can be used for any purposes, to be displayed in units of days, hours, minutes, and seconds.

342

B62564E1/02

11. DISPLAY

11.11 Clock
The current time is displayed in hours, minutes, and seconds on each CRT screen. The clock display screen displays the current date and time in year, month, day, hours, minutes, and seconds. The clock display screen enables the current time to be set. The current date and time (year/month/day/hours/minutes/seconds) can also be read using custom macros or the PMC window. (1) Display The current time is displayed in hours, minutes, and seconds on the status display line of each CRT screen. The current time is displayed on the status display line on all CNC screens as shown in the figure at the right.

The clock display screen displays the current date and time as the year, month, day, hours, minutes, and seconds. 1 Press the function menu key to switch the soft keys to the function selection keys. 2 Press the [SETTING] soft or hard key.

When the current screen is not the clock display screen, the clock display screen can be displayed in one of two ways: i) Press the [SETTING] soft or hard key repeatedly until the clock display screen appears. ii) Press the [CHAPTER] key to switch the soft keys to the chapter selection keys, then press the [TIMER] key.

343

11. DISPLAY
9" CRT function selection keys SETTING 9" CRT setting chapter selection keys TIMER 9" CRT clock operation selection keys INPUT +INPUT SERVICE MESSAGE CHAPTER

B62564E1/02

14" CRT function selection keys

POSI TION PRO GRAM OFF SET
PRGRAM SET CHECK TING

SER VICE

MES SAGE

CHAP TER

14" CRT setting chapter selection keys

HANDY GEN ERAL
OPERAT MACRO PANEL VAR.

TOOL LIFE

SER VICE

MES SAGE

TIMER

CHAP TER

14" CRT operation selection keys INPUT +INPUT (2) Setting The clock display screen is used to set the time. 1 Display the clock display screen. (See Item (1) above.) 2 Move the cursor to the desired field. 3 Enter the desired value, then press the [INPUT] key. Item Year Month Day Hours Minutes Seconds NOTE Maximum value 99 12 31 23 59 59

When specifying the year, enter only the last two digits. Negative values and values greater than the maximum value above cannot be specified.

(3) Custom macros and clock Reading system variables #3011 and #3012 enables the current date and time (year/month/day/hours/ minutes/seconds) to be checked. Data Year/month/day Hours/minutes/seconds Example System variable #3011 #3012

When the current date and time is 17 minutes 5 seconds past 4 p.m. on May 20, 1987 #3011: 19870520 #3012: 161705

344

B62564E1/02

11. DISPLAY

11.12 Background Graphic Display

11.12.1 Overview
The background graphic display has the function described below. Tool path drawing: This function draws the path of the tool center specified by a part program.

Tool path drawing The tool path drawing function represents the path of the tool as lines to allow the part program to be closely checked. (1) Notes (a) For a program stored in memory, the tool path is drawn in the background (background drawing). (b) The tool path can be drawn along the Xaxis, Yaxis, Zaxis, and axes parallel to these axes. The tool path cannot be drawn along a rotary axis, PMC axis, or so forth. (c) The tool path can be drawn for the functions listed below. G00: Positioning G01: Linear interpolation G02/G03: Circular interpolation G17/G18/G19: Plane selection G90/G91: Absolute/incremental data input G40/G41/G42: Cutter compensation/cancel G43/G44/G49: Tool length compensation/cancel G50/G51: Scaling/cancel G50.1/G51.1: Programmable mirror image/cancel G68/G69: Coordinate system rotation/cancel G72.1/G72.1: Figure copy G52: Local coordinate system setting G92: Workpiece coordinate system change G92.1: Workpiece coordinate system presetting G73/G74/G76/G80/G81/G82/G83/G84/G85/G86/G87/G88/G98/G99: Canned cycle/cancel G65: Macro call M98: Subprogram call Optionalangle chamfering/corner rounding Custom macros (with some restrictions) (d) When the ordinary graphic display option is also installed, you can enable background graphics by setting bit 2 of parameter No. 10 to 1.

345

11. DISPLAY
(2) Features

B62564E1/02

The tool path drawing function draws the path of the center of a tool. The function has the features listed below. (a) Highspeed drawing Compared with graphic display A, a tool path is drawn at higher speed, thus allowing a faster NC program check. (b) Partially enlarged drawing While viewing a drawn tool path, the user can specify a partial enlargement center and relative scale factor (graphic shift) or diagonal points (graphic enlargement). So, a required portion can be enlarged using simple operations. (c) Threedimensional drawing In addition to twodimensional graphics, threedimensional graphics can be drawn. A graphic can be rotated horizontally and vertically. (d) Biplane drawing Two planes, the XY plane and XZ plane, can be drawn at the same time. (e) Scale display (plane drawing and biplane drawing), or coordinate axis and reference dimension display (threedimensional drawing) Each screen displays a ruler for plane drawing and biplane drawing, or coordinate axis and dimensions for threedimensional drawing, so that the dimensions of each graphic can be determined correctly. (f) Colors for rapid traverse and cutting feed paths Different colors can be used for rapid traverse and cutting feed when drawing a tool path. (g) Position display The O, N, and T values of the program being drawn and the coordinates in the workpiece coordinate system are displayed. (h) Graphic display axis Parameter No. 7703 allows the controlled axes to be selected for the graphic display axes X, Y, and Z. The names of the controlled axes selected with the parameter are displayed as the names of the axes on the CRT screen.

11.12.2 Setting of graphic parameters

Before a tool path can be drawn, necessary data must be set on the graphic (parameter) screen. This screen includes the parameters described below. (1) Graphic plane Specify the desired plane for drawing. The following types of drawings are available. Y XY X X YX Y Y XYZ2 Z X X (Bi-plane drawing) Y ZY Z Z YZ Y Z XZ X Z X X ZX Z X Y XZY Y Z XYZ

346

B62564E1/02
(2) Rotation angle (horizontal) This parameter specifies a horizontal rotation angle in degrees.

11. DISPLAY

Set a value from 360 to +360. The initial value can be set using parameter No. 4831. Suppose that 180 is set in parameter No. 4831. When a rotation angle of 30 is set, the resultant graphic rotation angle is 210 degrees.

Z X

Y Y 30 180

Y f:Represents the resultant XYZ coordinates.

(3) Rotation angle (vertical) When the graphic plane XYZ or XZY is used, vertical rotation is allowed as well as horizontal rotation. Z Horizontal rotation

Vertical rotation axis

Vertical rotation X Y

347

11. DISPLAY

B62564E1/02
Parameter No. 4832 rotates the vertical rotation axis in the horizontal plane. When this parameter is set to 0, the vertical rotation axis is parallel to the display screen. Example Graphic plane: XZY Rotation angle (horizontal) = +20 Rotation angle (vertical) = +10 Parameter No. 4832 = +65 Y Y Vertical rotation axis

10_

65_ X 10_ Initial vertical rotation axis

20_ Z

20_ X

f:Represents the resultant XZY coordinates. (4) Scale factor A value from 0.01 to 100.00 can be specified. When the scale factor is automatically determined from the maximum and minimum values of the graphic range, the scale factor is clamped within range. (5) CRT center This parameter specifies the coordinates of the screen center in the workpiece coordinate system of a program used for drawing. When the maximum values and minimum values are set, the midpoint of those values are automatically set. From the screen center coordinates and scale factor, the drawing scale in the coordinate system on the graphic screen is calculated and displayed. The units are millimeters or inches. (6) Maximum and minimum values of the graphic range When a maximum value and minimum value are set for each axis on specified planes, a scale factor and CRT center are automatically determined so that the screen displays the maximum and minimum values. When 0 is specified for these parameters, the scale factor and CRT center parameters are not automatically determined, but the set scale factor and CRT center are used. (7) Use of color Different colors can be used for rapid traverse and cutting feed when drawing a tool path. Seven colors are available. (8) Graphic program number specification This parameter specifies a program number subject to tool path drawing. When the [REWIND] soft key is pressed, the graphic program pointer returns to the start of the specified program. When [START MACHIN] is pressed, the tool path is drawn from the beginning of the program.

348

B62564E1/02
(9) Graphic offset numbers

11. DISPLAY

In general, a part program subject to background drawing does not allow offset values to be altered using G10 or system variables during drawing. (Any attempt to do so is ignored.) However, an offset value can be modified during drawing for three offset numbers specified here. (This has no effect on the offset values used for machining.) (10)Program numbers and sequence numbers defining the start and end of a program fragment When only a part of program is to be drawn, these parameters specify the start block and end block with fourdigit program numbers and fivedigit sequence numbers. When 0 is set in all the parameters, the parameters are ignored and the entire program is drawn. Usually, set these parameters to 0. Example Graphic start program number Sequence number Graphic end program number Sequence number =0001 =00010 =0002 =00020 0002 ;

0001 ; N10 M98 P2 ; M02 ;

N20 M99

In this example, only the portions indicated by the solid lines are drawn. NOTE The 0xxxx and Nxxxx blocks corresponding to program numbers and sequence numbers specified in these parameters must be single blocks or blocks containing an NC statement. Blocks containing an instruction for calling a macro program or subprogram and blocks containing a macro program are ignored. Example Specifiable Not specifiable 01234; 01234 M1 ; Macro call by an M code N234 ; N234 M98 P4500 ; Subprogram call N235 G92 X0 Y0; N345 #10 = #20 ; Macro program

(11)Graphic tool numbers (maximum, minimum) Instead of the procedure in Item (10) above, the tool path of a program fragment can also be drawn by specifying the maximum graphic tool number and minimum graphic tool number. These parameters specify a tool number range so that a tool path can be drawn during machining using the tools with the specified range of tool numbers. When both of these parameters are set to 0, the settings are ignored. When only the minimum graphic tool number is set to 0, the paths of all tools whose numbers are not larger than the set maximum graphic tool number are drawn. When only the maximum graphic tool number is set to 0, the paths of all tools whose numbers are not smaller than the set minimum graphic tool number are drawn. These parameters can be used in combination with the program numbers and sequence numbers defining the start and end of a program fragment.

349

11. DISPLAY 11.12.3 Procedure for setting graphic parameters

Use the procedure below to set the graphic parameters. GRAPHIC (PARAMETER)

B62564E1/02

GRAPHIC PLANE = (1:XY2:YZ3:ZX4:XYZ 5:YX6:ZY7:XZ8:XZY 9:XYZ2) SCALE FACTOR =

XYZ

CRT CENTER

X = 40,000 Y = 10,000 Z = 20,000 70,000 15,000 70,000

1.00

GRAPHIC RANGE MAX X = Y= Z=

ROTATION ANGLE (H) = 210 (V) = 0 GRAPHIC RANGE MIN X =150,000 GRAPHIC START PROGRAM 0=#### Y = 35,000 SEQENCE N=##### Z = 30,000 GRAPHIC END PROGRAM 0=#### SEQUENCEN N=##### GRAPHIC PROGRAM 0= #### GRAPHIC TOOL MAX T=#### MIN T=#### COLOR CUTTING= # OFFSET NO. 01 D=#### RAPID = # NO. 02 D=#### NO. 03 D=####

(1) Press the function menu key to switch the soft keys to the function selection keys. (2) Press the [GRAPHIC] soft key or [OTHERS] hard key repeatedly until the graphic screen appears. (3) Press the [GRAPH PARAM] key to display the graphic parameter screen. (4) Move the cursor to the desired parameter with the cursor keys <> , <> , <> , and <> . (5) Enter the desired values, then press the <INPUT> or <+INPUT> key. (6) After setting the parameters, press the <GRAPH> or <GRAPHIC> key to return to the graphic screen.

350

B62564E1/02 11.12.4 Drawing procedure

The GRAPHIC (GRAPH) screen is used for drawing. GRAPHIC (GRAPH) Y X 400,000 Y 100,000 Z 200,000 100,000 F S T 0 0 0

11. DISPLAY

0,000

100,000 X 100,000 0,000 100,000

The soft keys on the GRAPHIC (GRAPH) screen have the functions indicated below. Soft key <STOP> <ERASE> Stops drawing the tool path. Clears the drawn tool paths. When a parameter is changed, the graphic data remains valid until the <ERASE> key is pressed. The <ERASE> key is valid when drawing is not in progress. Sets the graphic shift screen. Sets the graphic enlargement screen. Starts drawing. If [START MACHIN] is pressed when STOPPED is not displayed at the lowerright corner of the screen, drawing starts at the beginning of the program. If [START MACHIN] is pressed when STOPPED is displayed at the lowerright corner of the screen, drawing resumes from where it stopped. Ignored. Displays the GRAPHIC (PARAMETER) screen. Pressed to start drawing at the beginning of the program. Draws the tool path for one block then stops. Function

<SHIFT> [ENLARGE] [START MACHIN]

<GRAPH> [GRAPH PARAM] <REWIND> [SINGLE]

351

11. DISPLAY

B62564E1/02

The center path of a tool specified in a part program can be drawn according to the procedure below. (1) To start a new drawing, set the necessary parameters according to Chapter 11.12.2. (2) Select the GRAPHIC (PARAMETER) screen, then set the necessary data. (3) When the part program to be drawn is not stored in memory, load it into memory. M02 or M30 must be specified at the end of the part program. (4) Press the [REWIND] soft key to call the part program to be drawn. (5) Press the [START MACHIN] soft key to start drawing. If STOPPED is not displayed in the lowerright corner of the screen, drawing starts at the beginning of the program. When drawing is in progress, DRWING is displayed in the lowerright corner of the CRT screen. If the screen is switched, drawing stops. To resume drawing, return to the graphic screen, then press the [START MACHIN] soft key. (6) To stop drawing temporarily, specify M00 in the middle of the part program beforehand, or press the STOP soft key. STOPPED is then displayed in the lowerright corner of the CRT screen. To resume drawing, press the [START MACHIN] soft key. To resume drawing from the beginning of the program, press the [REWIND] soft key, then press the [START MACHIN] soft key. (7) When the last part (M02 or M30) of the part program is executed, drawing stops, and DRWING is no longer displayed. The drawn tool path is retained until the [ERASE] key is pressed, the graphic is used by another function, another tool path is drawn, or the power is turned off.

11.12.5 Figure to be drawn

In the case of rapid traverse, a tool path is drawn at a speed proportional to the rapid traverse speed set in a parameter for machining. Note that a straight line is drawn for the rapid traverse of linear interpolation. A tool path for helical cutting can also be drawn.

11.12.6 Start coordinates and position

The system determines the start point of the tool path in a program according to two cases. (1) When G92, G52, or G92.1 is specified If G92, G52, or G92,1 is followed by an initial movement command, the point specified in G92, G52, or G92.1 defines the start point. (2) When G92, G52, and G92.1 are not specified If an initial movement command is specified without specifying G92, G52, and G92.1, the coordinates of the end point of the initial movement command in the workpiece coordinate system define the start point.

11.12.7 Drawing position after the start of drawing

The tool path is drawn according to a specified amount of movement. (1) Ignored functions Blocks that include G04 (dwell), G10 (offset setting), G20 and G21 (inch/metric switching), ATC M06, and G22 and G23 (stored stroke limit on/off) are ignored. For G28 and G30, the tool path is drawn to an intermediate point. For G29, the tool path is drawn from an intermediate point. The secondary miscellaneous functions M, S, T, and B are ignored. When G27 is specified, the system does not check if the tool is returned to the reference point. The system does not check the tool position according to the stored stroke limit. (2) Block for which a cycle is not performed For a block that includes G31 (skip function) or G60 (unidirectional positioning), the cycle is not performed. Instead, drawing proceeds to the end point.

352

B62564E1/02
(3) Custom macros

11. DISPLAY

(a) I/O commands to DI/DO using #1000 to #1035 and #1100 to 1135 (interface signals) are ignored. #1000 to #1035 are assumed to be set to 0. The contents of #1100 to #1135 are not output. #1100 to #1135, when referenced, are assumed to be set to 0. (b) #2000 to #2799 (tool offset value) cannot be used to change the offset. (c) #5201 to #5335 (workpiece reference point offset) and #2500 to #2806 (workpiece reference point offset of FS6 type) cannot be used to change the offset of the workpiece reference point. (d) No message is displayed by #3000 (alarm message), but the warning NC STATEMENT ERROR (B.G) is displayed, and drawing does not proceed any further. (e) #3001 and #3002 (clock) are ignored. Therefore, note that drawing does not proceed any further when, for example, the following is specified: #3001 = 0 : WHILE [#3001 LE 100] D01 ; END1 ; (f) The values of #5001 to #5104 (position information) are undefined. (g) The variables #1 to #33, #100 to #199, and #500 to #699 set in a program being drawn are not associated with the machining program, and have no effect on machining. (h) The values of the common variables (#500 to #699), which are not cleared when the power is turned off, can be changed in the program to be drawn, but the new values are cleared when the power is turned off. (i) #700 to #999 can be referenced in the program being drawn, but no data can be written to #700 to #999. (j) The macrobased print command, punch command, and SETVN command are not executed.

11.12.8 Graphic shift

See the description of graphic shift in Subsec. 11.6.3.

11.12.9 Graphic enlargement

See the description of graphic enlargement in Subsec. 11.6.5.

11.12.10 Initial values at the start of drawing

(1) Local variables: Null (2) Macro variables: Foreground values are set in #100 to #199 and #500 to #599. (3) Workpiece coordinate offsets: Foreground values are set in COMMON and G54 to G59. (4) Tool offsets: Foreground values are set only for three offsets set by the parameters.

353

11. DISPLAY

B62564E1/02

11.13 Waveform Diagnosis Function

Waveform diagnosis functions are classified into the following two types: (1) Singleshot type This type of waveform diagnosis function enables graphic display of waveforms that represent variations in the following data items. This function can generate triggers for sampling data when a machine control signal rises or falls. This facilitates the adjustment of servo and spindle motors. [Data items for servos] Servo errors, number of pulses to be generated, torque, electric current commands, heat simulation, and composite speed for all axes [Data items for spindles] The speed of each spindle and the value of the load meter for each spindle [Data items for signals] On or off states of machine control signals specified by signal addresses NOTE Up to two data items and up to four signals can be sampled simultaneously.

(2) Servoalarm type This type of waveform diagnosis function triggers terminating data sampling when a servo alarm occurs or when the specified machine signal rises or falls. The termination of data sampling can be delayed by a specified time since the trigger is generated, thus facilitating detection of faults. Recorded data items can be input or output to or from an external device using the reader/punch interface. [Data items for servos] Servo errors, number of pulses to be generated, torque, electric current commands, heat simulation, and composite velocity for all axes [Data items for spindles] None [Data items for signals] None NOTE Up to four data items can be sampled simultaneously. The maximum number of data items sampled cannot be specified on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. See the later description of parameters.

11.13.1 Screens
Three display screens are provided for the waveform diagnosis function. This section describes how to display each screen. (1) WAVE DIAGNOSIS (GRAPH) screen 1
PARAME PITCH TER ERROR DIAG NOSIS DISPLAY MEMORY SYSTEM CONFIG WAVE DIAGNS CHATER +

Press the [SERVICE] function selection soft key or press the [SERVICE] key on the MDI panel, then press the operation menu key. The chapter selection soft keys in (1) are displayed. Press the [WAVE DIAGNS] chapter selection soft key. The WAVE DIAGNOSIS (GRAPH) screen is displayed. On this screen, press the operation menu key. The operation selection keys in (2) are displayed.

354

B62564E1/02

11. DISPLAY

WAVE DIAGNOSIS(GRAPH)000000000000111 NNN000000000000333

WAVE 1.X 2.Y 00

0
TRACE ERASE STOP

500
READ PUNCH

1000

1500
PARAME- SHIFT TER

TIME(MS)
LSK
CHAPT ER

MEM *** STOP **** *** *** 03:14:18

(2) WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen and WAVE DIAGNOSIS (GRAPH) screen 2
TRACE ERASE STOP READ PUNCH PARAME TER SHIFT CHAPTE R

While these soft keys are displayed, press the [PARAMETER] or [SHIFT] key. The WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen or WAVE DIAGNOSIS (GRAPH) screen is displayed. In this case, the operation selection soft keys in 3 or 4 are displayed. 3
INPUT SET END CHAPTE R

4
WAVE1 WAVE1 WAVE2 WAVE2 SET END CHAPTE R

Pressing the [SET END] key redisplays the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen.
WAVE DIAGNOSIS(PARAMETER) 000000000000111 NNN000000000000333

CONDITION TRIGGER DELAY TIME

= 0 = X010.1 = 1000

DI/DO

= X001.1 X001.2 X001.3 X001.4

TIME RANGE = 0 (25,50,100,200,400,800MS) ZERO SIFT = 0 (WAVE 1) DATA KIND DATA RANGE DATA COLOR WAVE COLOR
INPUT

= = = =

0 1 1000 1

(WAVE 2) DATA KIND DATA RANGE DATA COLOR WAVE COLOR

SET END

= = = =

1 2 1000 2
LSK
CHAPTE R

MEM *** STOP **** *** *** 03:14:18

355

11. DISPLAY

B62564E1/02

WAVE DIAGNOSIS(GRAPH) 000000000000111 NNN000000000000333

WAVE 1.X 2.Y 00 X001.1 X001.2 X001.3 X001.4 0

WAVE1

500

1000

1500
SET END

TIME(MS)
LSK
CHAPTE R

MEM *** STOP **** *** *** 03:14:18

WAVE1 WAVE2 WAVE 2

11.13.2 Specifying the conditions for starting data sampling

As described above, waveform diagnosis functions are classified into two types: the singleshot type and servoalarm type. Items to be set for these types are different. See the description in item (i) for how to use the singleshot waveform diagnosis function. See the description in item (ii) for how to use the servoalarm waveform diagnosis function. (i) Singleshot waveform diagnosis (1) CONDITION Enter one of the following settings in the CONDITION field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. 0 1 2 NOTE : Starts sampling data the moment the [TRACE] key is pressed. : Starts sampling data when the trigger signal rises after the [TRACE] key is pressed. : Starts sampling data when the trigger signal falls after the [TRACE] key is pressed. When no trigger signal is specified, 1 and 2 are assumed to be 0.

(2) TRIGGER Enter the PMC address and bit number corresponding to a trigger signal in the TRIGGER field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. Valid data range (3) TIME RANGE Enter 25, 50, 100, 200, 400, or 800 in the TIME RANGE field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. The sampling time is specified as 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0, or 16.0 s. The sampling time determines not only sampling conditions, but also graph display conditions. (4) DATA KIND Select the type of waveform to be traced and enter your choice in the DATA TYPE field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. 0 1 2 5 6 7 9 : Servo error : Number of servo pulses to be generated : Servo torque : Actual speed : Value of the electric current command for the servo : Data during heat simulation : Composite speed for all axes (pulses, detection units) (pulses, command units) (%) (pulses, detection units) (%) (%) (mm/min or rpm) (rpm) (%) : G000.0 to G511.7, Y000.0 to Y127.7, F000.0 to F319.7, and X000.0 to X127.7

10 : Spindle speed 11 : Load meter for a spindle

356

B62564E1/02

11. DISPLAY

NOTE

The servo torque and the value of the electric current command are represented as percentages of the corresponding settings in parameter 1979. Spindle speed refers to the speed of a digital spindle only.

1 : Number of servo pulses after interpolation +

0 : Servo error

Pulse distribution (interpolation)

CMR

Acceleration/ deceleration circuit

Error counter

DMR

(5) AXIS ASSIGN Enter one of the following settings in the AXIS ASSIGN field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. [When 1 to 7 is specified as the waveform type] 1 to (the number of controlled axes): Servo axis number [When 9 is specified as the waveform type] 1 or 2: For Series 15MB, specify 1. [When 10 or 11 is specified as the waveform type] 1 or 2: Spindle amplifier number (6) DI/DO Enter the PMC address and bit number of the external input/output signal to be traced in the DI/DO field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. Valid data range (7) DATA RANGE Enter the value per graduation on the vertical axis of the graph (0 to 524287) in the DATA RANGE field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. (8) ZERO SHIFT Enter the value for the zero point (10000 to +10000) in the ZERO SHIFT field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. (9) WAVE COLOR Enter one of the following settings in the WAVE COLOR field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. 1: Red, 2: Green, 3: Yellow, 4: Blue, 5: Purple, 6: Light blue, 7: White (ii) Waveform diagnosis of servoalarm type 1 CONDITION Enter one of the following settings in the CONDITION field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. 100 : Starts sampling data and fetching it into the ring buffer the moment the [TRACE] key is pressed and terminates the sampling when a servo alarm occurs. 101 : Starts sampling data and fetching it into the ring buffer the moment the [TRACE] key is pressed and terminates the sampling when a servo alarm occurs or when the trigger signal rises. 102 : Starts sampling data and fetching it into the ring buffer the moment the [TRACE] key is pressed and terminates the sampling when a servo alarm occurs or when the trigger signal falls. : G000.0 to G511.7, Y000.0 to Y127.7, F000.0 to F319.7, and X000.0 to X127.7

357

11. DISPLAY
2 TRIGGER

B62564E1/02

Enter the PMC address and bit number corresponding to the trigger signal specified in the TRIGGER field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. Valid data range 3 DELAY TIME Enter the time (0 to 32000 ms) in the DELAY TIME field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. This setting specifies how long actual termination of tracing is delayed since the tracing termination condition is satisfied. 4 DATA KIND Select the types of waveforms to be traced from the following and enter the settings in parameters 4640, 4641, 4645, and 4646 on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. For details, see the later description of parameters. 0 1 2 5 6 7 NOTE : Servo error : Number of servo pulses to be generated : Servo torque : Actual speed : Value of the electric current command for the servo : Data during heat simulation (pulses, detection units) (pulse, command units) (%) (pulses, detection units) (%) (%) : G000.0 to G511.7, Y000.0 to Y127.7, F000.0 to F319.7, and X000.0 to X127.7

The servo torque and the value of the electric current command are represented as percentages of the corresponding settings in parameter 1979.

5 AXIS ASSIGN Enter one of the following settings in the AXIS ASSIGN field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. 1 to (the number of controlled axes): Servo axis number 6 DATA RANGE Enter the value per graduation on the vertical axis of the graph (0 to 524287) in the DATA RANGE field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. 7 ZERO SHIFT Enter the value for the zero point (10000 to +10000) in the ZERO SHIFT field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. 8 WAVE COLOR Enter one of the following settings in the WAVE COLOR field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. 1: Red, 2: Green, 3: Yellow, 4: Blue, 5: Purple, 6: Light blue, 7: White

11.13.3 Starting or terminating data sampling

(1) Starting data sampling Press the [TRACE] key. The system enters the samplingenabled state (trace mode). (2) Terminating data sampling Press the [STOP] key. When data is being sampled, data sampling is terminated.

11.13.4 Waveform display

As soon as data is sampled, it is displayed in the form of a graph on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (GRAPH) screen. For servoalarm types, the date and time at the end of data sampling are displayed at the top of the screen.

358

B62564E1/02 11.13.5 Editing a displayed waveform

11. DISPLAY

The waveform representing the sampled data can be edited using the following operations to make it easier to view. (1) Specifying the waveform type (only for the servoalarm type) To display data items sampled with the servoalarm waveform diagnosis function, specify the waveform type specified in parameters 4640 and 4641 as the type of the 1st waveform and the waveform type specified in parameters 4645 and 4646 as the type of the 2nd waveform. (2) Specifying the display range of the vertical axis To enlarge or reduce the display range of the vertical axis, enter a value per graduation in the DATA RANGE field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. (3) Specifying the display range of the horizontal axis To enlarge or reduce the display range of the horizontal axis, enter a time per graduation in the TIME RANGE field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. (4) Specifying the value of the zero point To move the display range for the vertical axis up or down, enter the desired value of the zero point in the ZERO SHIFT field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. (5) Moving the zero point press the [SHIFT] key on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. The WAVE DIAGNOSIS (GRAPH) screen is displayed. To move the position of the zero point in the graph up and down, press the [WAVE 1 ], [WAVE 1 ], [WAVE 2 ], and [WAVE 2 ] keys on the screen.

11.13.6 Erasing a displayed waveform

To erase the waveform being displayed, press the [ERASE] key on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. Once a waveform is erased, it cannot be displayed again.

11.13.7 Waveform data input/output

The servoalarm type waveform diagnosis data can be output to an output device via the reader/punch interface controlled in the foreground. Also servoalarm type waveform diagnosis data that was output can be input from an input device. (1) Type of waveform diagnosis data to input or output Servoalarm type diagnosis data items are classified into the following six types. Diagnostic data items are recorded for four waveforms (two waveform types for any two axes). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Positional deviation Move command Actual electric current Actual speed Electric current command Heat simulation

(2) Outputting waveform diagnosis data When the [PUNCH] operation key is pressed, servoalarm diagnostic data recorded by the CNC controller is output. Diagnostic data consists of all the data on four waveforms. Even when a singleshot waveform is displayed after servoalarm type data is traced, the CNC controller still stores the previous servoalarm waveform diagnosis data. In this case, pressing the [PUNCH] key outputs the waveform diagnosis data currently recorded, namely, the latest servoalarm waveform diagnosis data. Waveform diagnosis data cannot be output under the following conditions: During automatic operation While servoalarm waveform diagnosis data is being sampled While the input/output device controlled in the foreground is being used When servoalarm type data has not been traced since the power was turned on (3) Inputting waveform diagnosis data When waveform diagnosis data that was output is input to the CNC controller, the servoalarm waveform diagnosis data recorded by the CNC controller is replaced with the input waveform diagnosis data. 359

11. DISPLAY

B62564E1/02
When the waveform diagnosis data has been input and the waveform diagnosis graph screen is displayed, graphs are displayed automatically according to the graph display parameter for waveform diagnosis used when waveform diagnosis data was output. Graphs are also displayed when the waveform diagnosis graph screen chapter is selected on a screen other than the graph screen. Waveform diagnosis data cannot be input under the following conditions: During automatic operation While servoalarm waveform diagnosis data is being sampled While an input/output device controlled in the foreground is being used

(4) Input/output format of waveform diagnosis data This item shows the input/output format of waveform diagnosis data for reference. When data output from the CNC controller is used as input, there is no need to care about the input/output format. NOTE The input/output format is subject to change without notice. A (axisnumber word) D (waveformdata word) C (characterdata word)

T (identifier word) T0: Header T69: Date and time of the start or end of tracing T60: Positional deviation T61: Move command T62: Actual electric current T63: Actual speed T64: Electric current command T65: Heat simulation 1 T0: Header
T 0 C W A V E D I A G

C: Characterdata word 2 T60: Date and time of the start or end of tracing
T 6 9 D * * * * * * * * , * * * * * * ;

D*...*: Date and time of the start or end of tracing Example D19921031,230859; indicates 23:08:59 on October 31, 1992. 3 Identifier word and axisnumber word
T 6 0 A 1 ; T 6 2 A 1 ;

To a.

a.

Pairs of identifier and axisnumber words specify the order to input waveform data blocks in 4. The above example shows that waveform data blocks are input in the following order: Positional deviation waveform data for the 1st axis, actual electric current waveform data for the 1st axis, positional deviation waveform data for the 3rd axis, electric current command waveform data for the 3rd axis 4 Waveform data block
D * * * , * * * , * * * , * * * ;

D: Indicates the beginning of a waveform data block. Each data item is separated by a comma (,). Each block has data for every 8 ms. These blocks continue to be generated for 16 seconds. 360

B62564E1/02
(5) Inputting and outputting waveform diagnosis data 1
PARAME PITCH TER ERROR DIANO SIS DISPLAY MEMORY SYSTEM CONFIG WAVE DIAGNS

11. DISPLAY

CHATE R

Press the [SERVICE] function selection soft key or press the [SERVICE] key on the MDI panel, then press the operation menu key. The chapter selection soft keys in 1 are displayed. Press the [WAVE DIAGNS] chapter selection soft key. The WAVE DIAGNOSIS (GRAPH) screen is displayed. On this screen, press the operation menu key. The operation selection keys in 2 are displayed. 2
TRACE ERASE STOP READ PUNCH PARAME TER SHIFT CHAPTE R +

Go to 3. Go to 3. When the [READ] or [PUNCH] soft key is pressed, operation guidance key is displayed. When the [READ] or [PUNCH] soft key is pressed after a file name or file number is input using the keyin buffer, processing starts immediately. 3 EXEC (FILE_ (FILE NAME) #) Go to 4. Go to 4.

Go to 5 if READ . has been pressed Go to 6 if PUNCH has been pressed. 4 EXEC

Go to 5 if READ has been pressed. Go to 6 if PUNCH has been pressed.

If the (FILE_NAME) or (FILE#) soft key has been pressed, enter a file name or file number with the MDI keys, then press the EXEC key.

STOP

Stops reading and displays soft keys in 2. 6

STOP FEED CANCEL

Stops feeding paper tape, if it is being fed, and starts punching. Stops punching and displays soft keys in 2. NOTE 1 When the start condition and axis number are specified again to edit the displayed waveforms after waveform data is sampled, the original waveforms are not displayed again. NOTE 2 The singleshot type and servoalarm waveform diagnosis functions have different setting fields on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. For instance, the DI/DO field is provided only for the singleshot waveform diagnosis function, and the DELAY TIME field is provided only for the servoalarm waveform diagnosis function. For the singleshot waveform diagnosis function, the smaller the setting of the TIME RANGE field, the shorter the sampling time. This allows a large numbers of short cycles to be specified for sampling. For the servoalarm waveform diagnosis function, each sampling cycle is always 8 ms regardless of the setting of the TIME RANGE field.

361

11. DISPLAY

B62564E1/02

11.14 Help Function

The help function displays detailed information about the alarm state of the CNC unit and soft key operations in a window on the CRT screen. This function can display the following: (1) Alarm help Alarms are issued when the operator makes an error in operating the CNC unit or a failure occurs in the CNC unit. The help function explains the cause and location of the error in detail. It also explains action to be taken to cancel the alarm condition. (2) Soft key help The soft keys displayed on the CRT screen depend on the operating state of the CNC unit. The help function explains in detail the function of each soft key that is currently displayed. It describes when a soft key needs to be pressed and what happens to the CNC unit when the key is pressed. While operating the CNC unit, the operator can obtain necessary information from the window on the CRT screen without referring to the operators manual.

11.14.1 Operation
(1) Displaying and erasing the help window To use the help function, press the [HELP] key (<SHIFT>+<EOB>) on the MDI panel. On a 9inch CRT screen, the help window is displayed at the center. On a 14inch CRT screen, the help window is displayed in the topright corner. To erase the help window from a CRT screen, press the [HELP] key again or select 9. CLOSE HELP WINDOW from the initial help menu. The previous screen is redisplayed. SHIFT (2) Selecting an option from the menu Unless the CNC is in the alarm state, the initial help menu is displayed when the [HELP] key is pressed in the initial state (usual screen display). One of the following three options can be selected from the initial help menu: 1. ALARM, 2. SOFT KEY, and 9. CLOSE HELP WINDOW. Move the cursor to an option and press the [INPUT] key.
HELP INITIAL MENU 1.ALARM 2.SOFT KEY

EOB HELP

9.CLOSE HELP WINDOW

HELP ROM SER.:AH00 EDT.:01 (SELECT BY CURSOR & PUSH INPUT KEY)

Fig. 11.14.1(a) Initial Help Menu (14Inch CRT)

362

B62564E1/02
(3) Alarm help

11. DISPLAY

If 1. Alarm is selected from the initial help menu, the window lists alarm types (alarm selection display). Move the cursor to PS, GB, SR, or any other alarm type, enter an alarm number using the keyin buffer, and press the [INPUT] key. The window shows detailed information on the selected alarm (detailed alarm display). When the [INPUT] key is pressed again, the window returns to the alarm selection display. For detailed alarm display, use the [PAGE UP] and [PAGE DOWN] keys. By pressing these keys, the previous or succeeding information can be displayed. The [PAGE DOWN] key can also be used to see the next part of a help message.
1.ALARM ALARM SELECTION PS :FOREGROUND PROGRAM/SETTING ALM. BG :BACKGROUND PROGRAM/SETTING ALM. SR :SERIOUS PROGRAM/SETTING ALARM OH :OVER HEAT ALARM SB :SUB CPU ALARM SW :PARAMETER ENABLE SWITCH ON ALM. OT :OVERTRAVEL ALARM PC :PMC ALARM SV :SERVO ALARM IO :I/O ALARM PW :POWER OFF PARAMETER SET ALARM 1.ALARM ALARM NO. :PS010 DIVISION :GENERAL AN ILLEGAL G CODE WAS SPECIFIED IN A NC SENTENCE. THIS ALARM ALSO OCCURS BY A OPTION ORGANIZATION, NC SITUATION OR MODE SELECTION, EVEN IF A G CODE IS PROPER.

(SELECT BY CURSOR & INPUT NUMBER)

(PUSH INPUT KEY TO RETURN SELECT)

Fig. 11.14.1(b) Sample Alarm Selection Display (14Inch CRT)

Fig. 11.14.1(c) Sample Detailed Alarm Display (14Inch CRT)

NOTE

Arrows (

on the 14inch CRT screen) or minus and plus signs ( on the 9inch CRT +

screen) at the topright corner of the window indicate that the [PAGE UP] and [PAGE DOWN] keys can be used.

363

11. DISPLAY
(4) Soft key help

B62564E1/02

When 2. SOFT KEY is selected from the initial help menu, the window lists the soft keys (soft key selection display). Move the cursor to a soft key displayed in the window and press the [INPUT] key. The window shows detailed information on the soft key (detailed soft key display). When the [INPUT] key is pressed again, the window returns to the soft key selection display. For detailed soft key display, use the [PAGE UP] and [PAGE DOWN] keys. When these keys are pressed, the previous or succeeding information can be displayed. The [PAGE DOWN] key can also be used to see the next part of a help message.
2.SOFT KEY SOFTKEY SELECTION NO.2 NO.1 NO.3 POSITI PROGRA OFFSET M ON NO.8 NO.7 NO.6 SERVIC MESSAG GRAPHI C E E KEY STATUS NO.4 PRGRAM CHECK NO.9 NO.5 SETTIN G NO.10 CHAPTE R 2.SOFTKEY NO.1 KEY STATUS :FUNCTION SELECTION

POSITI ON

: FUNCTION SELECTION

PRESS THIS KEY TO SELECT THE SCREEN RELATIVE TO THE POSITION DISPLAY. YOU CAN SELECT THE DETAILED SCREENS, WHEN YOU PRESS THIS KEY FOR SEVERAL TIMES OR PRESS CHAPTER KEY SO AS TO CHANGE SOFT KEY STATE TO CHAPTER SELECTION.

REVERSE DISPLAYED KEY IS CURRENTLY SELECTED FUNCTION. (SELECT BY CURSOR & PUSH INPUT KEY)

*OVERALL POSITION SCREEN *RELATIVE POSITION SCREEN (PUSH INPUT KEY TO RETURN SELECT)

Fig. 11.14.1(d) Sample Soft Key Selection Display (14Inch CRT)

Fig. 11.14.1(e) Sample Detailed Soft Key Display (14Inch CRT)

NOTE

An arrow ( on the 14inch CRT screen) or a plus sign ( + on the 9inch CRT screen) at the bottomright corner of the window indicates that the message continues beyond the window.

(5) Returning to the initial help menu To return to the initial help menu from a help window, press the [SHIFT] key and enter 9. Even in the alarm state described in (7) below, soft key help can be selected from the initial help menu. (6) Deleting a window from the initial help menu When 9. CLOSE HELP WINDOW is selected, the help window is erased.

364

B62564E1/02
(7) Using the help function in the alarm state

11. DISPLAY

When the [HELP] key is pressed when an alarm occurs in the initial state (usual screen display), the initial help menu is not displayed. Instead, the detailed help window for the current alarm is displayed. When two or more alarms occurred, information on the state of the alarm not currently displayed can be displayed by pressing the [PAGE UP] or [PAGE DOWN] key. At the topright corner of the window, the total number of current alarms (m) and the number of the current message (n) are indicated in the format n/m. In Fig. 11.14.1(f), the message regarding the first of two alarms (PS010, OT008) is displayed. When the [INPUT] key is pressed in the detailed alarm display state, the window lists current alarms (alarm list display). To return to detailed alarm display, move the cursor to an alarm and press the [INPUT] key.
1.ALARM 01/02 1.ALARM CURRENT ALARM LIST PS010 OT008

ALARM NO.:PS010 DIVISION :GENERAL AN ILLEGAL G CODE WAS SPECIFIED IN A NC SENTENCE. THIS ALARM ALSO OCCURS BY A OPTION ORGANIZATION, NC SITUATION OR MODE SELECTION, EVEN IF A CODE IS PROPER.

(PUSH INPUT KEY TO RETURN SELECT)

(SELECT BY CURSOR & PUSH INPUT KEY)

Fig. 11.14.1(f) Sample Detailed Alarm Display (14Inch CRT) in the Alarm State (8) Enabling or disabling the cursor (only for a 14inch CRT)

Fig. 11.14.1(g) Sample Alarm List Display (14Inch CRT) in the Alarm State

The frame of a help window is first displayed in green. In this state, the cursor can be moved only within the help window. The cursor displayed on the original screen is erased. If the [SHIFT] key is then pressed twice, the cursor is erased from the window and restored on the original screen. In this state, the frame of the window is displayed in white. By pressing the [SHIFT] key twice, the cursor can be moved to the help window or to the original screen. When the cursor is in the right half of the original screen, the help window is shifted to the left. The operator can edit the program and specify parameters while the help window is open.

365

11. DISPLAY 11.14.2 Help window states

By pressing keys, the help window state is changed as shown below:

B62564E1/02

<HELP> key (Alarm state)

Initial state (usual screen display) <SHIFT> +< SHIFT> key

9. CLOSE HELP WINDOW

<HELP> key key

Enabling or disabling the cursor, only for a 14-inch <HELP> CRT)

Initial help menu

<SHIFT> + 9 key

Cursor and <INPUT> key

Alarm selection

Soft key selection

<INPUT> key

Cursor and <INPUT> key

<INPUT> key

Cursor and <INPUT> key

Alarm list

Cursor and <INPUT> key <INPUT> key

Detailed alarm <DOWN key> <UP key>

Detailed soft key

<DOWN key>

<UP key>

Fig. 8 Help Window States The dotted box indicates the area in which the help window is displayed. When the <HELP> key is pressed in this state, the help window is closed and the initial state is restored. The help window is not displayed on the PMC, MMC, or conversational macro screen. If the screen is switched to one of these three screens while the help window is displayed, the help window is erased.

366

B62564E1/02

11. DISPLAY

11.15 Operation History

This function always collects history data for keys pressed by the NC operator, the states of signals set by the NC operator, and alarms that occurred. In addition, this function enables the operator to monitor history data when necessary. The main features of this function are: (1) Collecting the following history data items: (a) Procedures in which the NC operator presses MDI keys (b) Changes in the states (on or off) of the input/output signals (c) Alarm data (d) Time stamp (time and date) (2) Searching for the following data items: (a) Input/output signals (b) Alarm data (c) Time and date (3) Outputting the following data items (punchout): (a) All history data items (b) A selected range of history data items (4) Selecting signals Up to 20 input/output signals can be selected for history data collection. (5) Alarm history data check Details of alarm history data, including the time and date of alarm occurrence, can be checked.

11.15.1 Operation history

(1) Soft keys (a) Soft keys for the 9inch CRT (i) Function selection keys POSITION SETTING PROGRAM SERVICE OFFSET MESSAGE HISTRY PRG-CHK CHAPTER CHAPTER CHAPTER + +

(ii) Chapter selection keys OPE_HIS DIOSLCT ALM_HIS

(iii) Operation selection keys When the OPE_HIS soft key is pressed TOP ERASE LAST SEARCH PUNCH CHAPTER CHAPTER + +

367

11. DISPLAY
(iv) Operation guidance key When the [SEARCH] soft key is pressed DIDO ALARM TIME

B62564E1/02

When the [DIDO], [ALARM], or [TIME] soft key is pressed FW_SRCH BW_SRCH

When the [PUNCH] soft key is pressed ALL PART

When the [ALL] or [PART] soft key is pressed EXEC When the [ERASE] soft key is pressed EXEC CANCEL

(b) Soft keys for the 14inch CRT (i) Function selection keys
POSITI ON PROGRA M OFFSET PROGRAM SETTIN CHECK G HISTRY SERVIC E

// // // //

CHAPTE R CHAPTE R

(ii) Chapter selection keys

OPERAT DIDO HISTRY SELECT ALARM HISTRY

// //

(iii) Operation selection keys //

TOP LAST SERACH PUNCH ERASE

// (iv) Operation instruction key When the [SEARCH] soft key is pressed DIDO ALARM TIME // // // // // // +

When the [DIDO], [ALARM], or [TIME] soft key is pressed

FRWRD SERACH BKWRD SERACH +

When the [PUNCH] soft key is pressed ALL PART

368

B62564E1/02
When the [ALL] or [PART] soft key is pressed EXEC When the [ERASE] soft key is pressed // EXEC CANCEL // (2) Display procedure (a) Press the [HISTRY] soft key during function selection. (b) The OPERATION HISTORY screen is displayed. History data items are displayed in order from oldest to newest. // //

11. DISPLAY

On the 9inch CRT, one page contains forty history data items, and on the 14inch CRT, one page contains ninety. NOTE The number of display lines varies according to the history data type. For details, see item(4).

(c) The following soft keys are used as operation selection keys. (i) TOP Displays the first page of history data, which starts with oldest history data item. (ii) LAST Displays the last page of history data, which ends with the newest history data item. (iii) SEARCH Searches for a particular type of history data item. For details, see item(5). (iv) PUNCH Outputs history data. For details, see item(6). (v) ERASE Erases history data. For details, see item(7). (d) Press the [SEARCH] soft key (one of the above operation selection keys). Any of the following data items can be searched for. For details, see item(5). (i) DIDO Searches for signal history data. (ii) ALARM Searches for alarm history data. (iii) TIME Searches for time history data. (iv) FW_SRCH Press this soft key after pressing one of the soft keys in (i) to (iii). The selected history data is searched for forward from the currently displayed history data (toward newer history data). (v) BW_SRCH Press this soft key after pressing one of the soft keys in (i) to (iii). The selected history data is searched for backward from the currently displayed history data (toward older history data). (e) Press the [PUNCH] soft key selected (one of the operation selection keys). The following operation instruction keys are displayed. For details, see item(6). (i) ALL Outputs all history data items. (ii) PART Outputs some history data items.

369

11. DISPLAY
(iii) EXEC Starts punchout.

B62564E1/02

(f) Press the [ERASE] soft key (one of the operation selection keys). The following operation instruction keys are displayed. For details, see item(7). (i) EXEC Executes erasing. (ii) CANCEL Cancels erasing. (3) OPERATION HISTORY screen The smaller the number of a history data item, the older it is. 9inch CRT
OPERATION HISTORY NO. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 DATA NO. PW 000 11 92/08/25 12 08:40:00 13 <RESET> 14 G003.5 15 G003.3 16 [SOFT 6] 17 2 18 2 19 0 20 O0001 N00001 DATA NO. G003.3 31 G003.4 32 [SOFT 2] 33 O 34 0 35 0 36 0 37 1 38 [SOFT 2] 39 ; 40 DATA G 9 0 X 4 5 6 . F 1

DATA NO. 5 21 [SOFT 5] 22 1 23 0 24 0 25 0 26 [SOFT 1] 27 <RESET> 28 92/08/25 29 08:41:36 30

MDI***STOP**** *** *** 00:00:00 ***

TOP LAST SEARCH PUNCH CHAPTER

(4) Data displayed (a) MDI key data (i) Address keys and numeric keys: A to Z, 0 to 9, semicolon (;), plus (+), minus (), etc. (ii) Page keys and cursor keys: <PAGE>, <CUR>, <CUR>, etc. (iii) Operation menu keys and soft keys: [LEFT.F], [SOFT 1], [RIGH.F], etc. (iv) Other keys: <RESET> <CAN>, etc. (v) Keys used when the power is turned on: <RESET>, etc. Items in (i) are displayed after a space. Items in (ii), (iv), and displayed (v) are displayed enclosed in symbols. (< >) Items in (iii) are displayed enclosed in square brackets ([ ]). Data items in (v) are displayed in reverse video. MDIkey data items are each displayed on one line. (b) Input/output signal data Input/output signal data is displayed in the following format: G000. 7 An up arrow () indicates that the state of the signal changed from off to on. A down arrow () indicates that the state of the signal changed from on to off. Bit number Address Input/output signal data items are each displayed on one line.

370

B62564E1/02
(c) Alarm data Alarm data items are displayed in reverse video.

11. DISPLAY

Only the type and number of an alarm are displayed on the OPERATION HISTORY screen. PS 003 Alarm number Alarm type Alarm data items are displayed over three lines. The number and type of the alarm are displayed on the first line, and the date and time when the alarm occurred are displayed on the next two lines. (d) Time and date The following times and dates are collected and displayed as history data. i) Time and date when the power was turned on 92/08/30 11:30:32 ii) Time and date when the power was turned off 92/08/30 11:55:16 iii) Time and date when an NC alarm occurred 92/08/30 11:33:48 iv) Time and date when the time and/or date was changed 92/08/31 00:00:00 5 Time and date at constant intervals 92/08/30 11:45:32 Specify this interval in parameter 7765. NOTE Even when the above parameter is set, the time and date are not collected if no other history data (keys, signals, etc.) is collected within the specified interval.

The time and date are displayed over two lines. The data items in ii) to (v) are displayed in reverse video. (5) Searching for a history data item Pressing the [SEARCH] key (one of the operation selection keys) enables the following data items to be searched for. (i) Signal data item (a) Press the [DIDO] key. (b) Use one of the following search methods: 1 Enter a signal type (X, Y, G, or F), address, decimal point (.), and bit number. Example G3.5 When the entered signal type, address, and bit number agree with those of a history data item, that history data item is found. 2 Enter a signal type (X, Y, G, or F) and address. Example G3 When the entered signal type and address agree with those of a history data item, that history data item is found. 3 Enter a signal type (X, Y, G, or F).

371

11. DISPLAY
Example

B62564E1/02
G When the entered signal type agrees with that of a history data item, that history data item is found.

(ii) Alarm data item (a) Press the [ALARM] key. (b) Use one of the following search methods: 1 Enter an alarm type and alarm number with keys. Example OT7 When the entered alarm type and alarm number agree with those of a history data item, that history data item is found. 2 Enter an alarm type with keys. Example OT When the entered alarm type agrees with that of a history data item, that history data item is found.

(iii) Time data (a) Press the [TIME] key. (b) Use the following search method. Enter month/date/hour/minute with keys. Less significant data can be omitted as shown in the example below. Example Month/date/hour/minute: 08/26/13/24 Month/date/hour: 08/26/13 Month/date: 08/26 Month: 08

NOTE

Enter the month, date, hour, and minute with two digits each.

After the above operations do the following: To search for a history data item forward from the currently displayed history data (toward newer history data), press the [FW_SRCH] soft key. To search for a history data item backward from the currently displayed history data (toward older history data), press the [BW_SRCH] soft key. NOTE Searching forward for a history data item terminates at the most recent history data item (last data item). Searching backward for a history data item terminates at the oldest history data item (first data item). If the specified history data item is not found, a warning is issued.

When the specified history data item is found during searching, the page of history data items that contains the specified history data item is displayed. The line number of the specified history data item is displayed in reverse video. Subsequently, this history data item is used as the (search pointer) during searching. When searching has not yet been performed, the oldest history data item (first data) is used as the search pointer. The search pointer is also used during partial punchingout. Once history data has been searched for, the search pointer is kept until the power is turned off. When the memory for history data items becomes full, the first data in the history is automatically used as the search pointer. (6) Outputting history data History data can be output to the host computer via the RS232C interface. (a) Press the [PUNCH] soft key (one of the operation selection keys) on the OPERATION HISTORY screen. (b) The following punchingout can be performed: (i) Complete punchout Press the [ALL] soft key, then press the [EXEC] soft key. All history data items are output. (ii) Partial punchout

372

B62564E1/02

11. DISPLAY
1 Before starting partial punchout, use the search function to determine the reference points for starting and ending partial punchout. The search pointer is used as (reference history data item) for partial punchout. For details on searching, see item(5). 2 Specify the number of display lines of history data items to output. For details on display lines, see item(4).

Example 1 To output 100 history data items forward from the reference history data item, press the [PART] soft key, enter 100, then press the [EXEC] soft key. Example 2 To output 100 history data items backward from the reference history data item, press the [PART] soft key, enter 100, then press the [EXEC] soft key. Example 3 To output all history data items forward from the reference history data item, press the [PART] soft key, enter 9999, then press the [EXEC] soft key. Example 4 To output all history data items backward from the reference history data item, press the [PART] soft key, enter 9999, then press the [EXEC] soft key. NOTE 1 History data items are always output in the foreground. NOTE 2 The valid data range for partial punching is 9999 to 9999 excluding 0. 9999 and 9999 have the meanings described in the above examples. When the number of history data items is less than the absolute value of the value entered, the entered numeric value is handled as if it were 9999 or 9999.

(c) History data items are output in ASCII code in the following format. (i) MDI key Example When the [A] key is pressed [MDI] key pushed A LF

(ii) DI/DO Example 1 When the state of G003.5 changes from off to on DI/DO changed G3.5_ON LF Example 2 When different signals with the same address are changed at the same time DI/DO changed F0.6_ONF0.1_OFF LF (iii) Alarm Example When the alarm, PW000 TURN OFF THE POWER occurs Alarm! PW0 at 92/8/30 23:17:56 LF

(iv) Time Example 1 At 23:17:56 on August 30, 1992 92/8/30 23:17:56 LF Example 2 When the power is turned on 92/8/30 23:17:56 Power On LF (d) Communication protocol Refer to the case where the NC sends data in Transmission Method for the RS232C Interface in the FANUC Series 15B Operators Manual (Appendixies). (7) Erasing history data (a) Press the [OPE_HIS] soft key (one of the chapter selection keys). (b) Press the [ERASE] soft key (one of the operation selection keys). (c) Press the [EXEC] soft key (one of the operation instruction keys). When the [EXEC] soft key is pressed by mistake during selection, press the [CANCEL] soft key. When operation history data is erased, the date and time it was erased is recorded at the beginning of new history data.

373

11. DISPLAY 11.15.2 Selecting signals

(1) Soft keys (a) Soft keys for the 9inch CRT (i) Function selection keys POSITION SETTING PROGRAM SERVICE OFFSET MESSAGE HISTRY PRG-CHK CHAPTER CHAPTER CHAPTER + +

B62564E1/02

(ii) Chapter selection keys OPE_HIS DIOSLCT ALM_HIS

(iii) Operation selection keys When the [DIOSLCT] soft key is pressed CLEAR INPUT (iv) Operation guidance keys When the [CLEAR] or [ALL_CLR] is pressed EXEC CANCEL ALL_CLR ON:1 OFF:0 CHAPTER CHAPTER + +

(b) Soft keys for the 14inch CRT (i) Function selection keys
POSITI ON PROGRA M OFFSET PROGRAM SETTIN CHECK G SERVIC E

// //

CHAPTE R

HISTRY

// //

CHAPTE R

(ii) Chapter selection keys

OPERAT DIDO HISTRY SELECT ALARM HISTRY

// //

(iii) Operation selection keys When the [DIDO SELECT] soft key is pressed CLEAR ALL ON:1 CLEAR OFF:0 INPUT // //

374

B62564E1/02
(iv) Operation guidance keys When the [CLEAR] or [ALL CLEAR] soft key is pressed // EXEC CANCEL // (2) SELECT DI/DO screen

11. DISPLAY

Up to 20 addresses can be used to select signals. Signals need not always be specified in sequence from data number 1.
DI/DO SELECT NO. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 ADDRESS SIGNAL X000 00001000 X004 10000000 X008 00001100 X009 00111000 X012 00001111 Y000 01000000 Y004 00110000 Y007 00011100 Y008 00011100 Y010 00011100 NO. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 O0001 N0001 ADDRESS SIGNAL G000 00000001 G004 00000010 G008 00000011 G003 01011100 G043 00100001 F000 01100010 ******** ******** ******** F020 10101010

MDI

* * *

STOP ALL_CLR

* * * * * * * ON:1

* * * OFF:0

00:00:00

* * * +

CLEAR

CHAPTER

(3) Specifying data 1 Press the [HISTRY] soft key several times, or press the [CHAPTER] soft key followed by the [DIDO SELECT] soft key. The [SELECT DI/DO] screen is displayed. 2 Press the cursor keys [] or [] to move the cursor to the position to enter data. 3 Enter a signal type (X, Y, G, or F) and address, then press the [INPUT] soft key. Example Y4([INPUT] key) Valid data range: G0 to G511, F0 to F319, X0 to X127, or Y0 to Y127 4 Specify signal address Y004 in the ADDRESS column, then set the SIGNAL column to the initial value (00000000). 5 The operation selection keys have the following functions: (i) CLEAR When the [CLEAR] soft key and the [EXEC] soft key are pressed, the signal data at the cursor is deleted. The contents of the signal field is changed to ********, and the address field is cleared. When the [CLEAR] soft key is pressed by mistake, press the [CANCEL] key. (ii) ALL_CLR When the [ALL_CLR] soft key and the [EXEC] soft key are pressed, all specified data items are deleted. When the [ALL_CLR] soft key is pressed by mistake, press the [CANCEL] key. (iii) ON:1 Press this soft key to set all bits of the data item at the cursor to 1. (iv) OFF:0 Press this soft key to set all bits of the data item at the cursor to 0. (v) INPUT This soft key is used to enter a signal address. It is also used to enter the value of the signal after a signal address is entered. NOTE Changes in signals cannot be deleted unless they continue for longer than 16ms.

375

11. DISPLAY 11.15.3 Alarm history

(1) Soft keys (a) Soft keys for the 9inch CRT (i) Function selection keys POSITION SETTING PROGRAM SERVICE OFFSET MESSAGE HISTRY PRG-CHK CHAPTER CHAPTER CHAPTER + +

B62564E1/02

(ii) Chapter selection keys OPE_HIS DIOSLCT ALM_HIS

(b) Soft keys for the 14inch CRT (iii) Function selection keys
POSITI ON PROGRA M OFFSET PROGRAM SETTIN CHECK G SERVIC E

// //

CHAPTE R

HISTRY

// //

CHAPTE R

(iv) Chapter selection keys

OPERAT DIDO HISTRY SELECT ALARM HISTRY

// //

(2) Alarm history screen 9inch CRT

ALARM HISTORY SW000 92/08/26 OT007 X 92/08/27 0T008 X 92/08/27 PW000 92/08/27 MC001 92/08/28 O0001 N00001

PARAMETER ENABLE SWITCH ON 12:35:26 + OVERTRAVEL(HARD) 08:40:18 OVERTRAVEL(HARD) 08:40:18 POWER MUST BE OFF 08:45:32 09:20:50

MDI

* * *

STOP

* * * *

* * *

* * *

00:00:00 CHAPTER

* * *

376

B62564E1/02
(3) Display format of history data History data items are displayed as follows: OT 007 X + overtravel (hard limit) Message text Axis for which the alarm occurred Alarm number Alarm type

11. DISPLAY

On the 14inch CRT display, the date and time of alarm occurrence and alarm history data are displayed in this order on a line. On the 9inch CRT display, the date and time of alarm occurrence is displayed over two lines under the alarm history data. NOTE 1 No message text is displayed for EX and MC alarms. NOTE 2 When the values of parameter 1020 and 1021 are different from those when an alarm occurred, no correct axis data is not displayed.

11.15.4 Restrictions
(1) The operation history function does not collect history data items while the OPERATION HISTORY screen is being displayed. (2) While the OPERATION HISTORY screen is being displayed, the operation history function does not collect history data items even when the OPERATION HISTORY screen is changed to the PMC screen. This is because it is still assumed that the OPERATION HISTORY screen is being displayed. (3) Approx. 2040 <MDI> key history data items can be recorded in memory as history data. When memory is full, older data items are deleted first. (4) Specify the correct date and time on the setting screen. (5) The number of signal addresses specified on the SELECT DI/DO screen affects the processing speed during automatic operation. Specify only the required signal addresses.

377

11. DISPLAY

B62564E1/02

11.16 Internal Position Compensation Data Display Function

The function for displaying internal position compensation data displays the data used in the CNC for each function while the following functions are executed: Cutter compensation Tool length compensation Drilling canned cycle Coordinate rotation Three-dimensional coordinate conversion Programmable mirror image Scaling Three-dimensional tool compensation Operations This function provides a screen for each of the above functions. How to display each screen is described below: (1) Press the function menu key to display the function selection soft keys 1. (2) Press the function selection soft key [PRG_CHK] (9 CRT) or [COMMAND] (14 CRT) or the MDI panel key [P- CHECK] and the operation menu key to display the chapter selection soft keys 2. Pressing the chapter selection soft key [POS_DAT] (9 CRT) or [POS. DATA] (14 CRT) displays the POSITION DATA screen shown below. Then pressing the operation menu key displays the operation selection soft keys 3. (3) Press the operation selection soft key corresponding to the screen you want to display. Subsequent pages briefly describe each screen. Function selection keys on 9 CRT 1 POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET PRG_CHK CHAPTER

Chapter selection keys for program check on 9 CRT 2 POS DAT

Operation selection keys for positional compensation data on 9 CRT 3 CUT CMP TLC OFS CAN CYL ROTATON 3DM CNV

Function selection keys on 14 CRT 1

POSITI ON PROGRA M OFFSET COMMAN SETTING D SERVIC E MESSAG E GRAPH CHAPTE R

Chapter selection keys for program check on 14 CRT 2

CHECK LAST ACTIVE OPE MONITR POS. DATA

Operation selection keys for position compensation data on 14 CRT 3

CUTTER CMPENS TL LEN OFFSET CANNED ROTATI CYCLE ON 3 DIM PRGMBL CNVSON MIRRORG SCALIN G 3 DIM OFFSET CHAPTE R

378

B62564E1/02
[Cutter compensation screen]
POSITION DATA
CUTTER COMPENSATION ON/OFF (RELATIVE) X 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 U 0.000 V 0.000 W 0.000 (G/D/H) (M) G91 G01 G17 G41 D 0 (F) (S) G54 G80 G64 G49 H 0 0 M02

11. DISPLAY

O0100 N0000
(DIST TO GO) X Y Z U V W (T) 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

[ON / OFF] Displays ON in the cutter compensation mode and OFF in other modes. [OFFSET VECTOR]

OFFSET VECTOR X Y 100.000 200.000

(L): (ACT.F) (ACT.S) 0 0

Displays the cutter compensation vector created for each block.

MDI***STOP**** */* */* 02:47:55 LSK

CUTTER TL LEN CANNED ROTATI 3DIM PRGMBL SCALIN 3DIM CMPENS OFFSET CYCLE ON CNVSON MIRROR G OFFSET CHAPT ER

[Tool length compensation screen]

POSITION DATA
CUTTER COMPENSATION ON/OFF (RELATIVE) X 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 U 0.000 V 0.000 W 0.000 (G/D/H) (M) G91 G01 G17 G40 D 0 (F) (S) G54 G80 G64 G43 H 0 0 M02

O0100 N0000
(DIST TO GO) X Y Z U V W (T) 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

[ON / OFF] Displays ON in the tool length compensation mode and OFF in other modes. [OFFSET VECTOR] Displays the tool length compensation vector created for each block. Remark) Tool length compensation can be applied for any axis according to parameter setting and therefore data for all axes are displayed.

OFFSET VECTOR X Y Z U V W 100.000 200.000 300.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

(L): (ACT.F) (ACT.S) 0 0

MDI***STOP**** */* */* 02:47:55 LSK

CUTTER TL LEN CANNED ROTATI 3DIM PRGMBL SCALIN 3DIM CMPENS OFFSET CYCLE ON CNVSON MIRROR G OFFSET CHAPT ER

379

11. DISPLAY
[Canned cycle screen]
POSITION DATA
CANNED CYCLE ON/OFF 0.000 0.000 0.000 U 0.000 V 0.000 W 0.000 (G/D/H) (M) Z G54 G76 G64 G49 0 M02 X Y X Y Z U V W (T) 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

B62564E1/02

O0100 N0000
(RELATIVE) (DIST TO GO)

INTIAL POINT Z 0.000

NUMBER OF REPETITIONS L(CMD) L(ACT) 20 1

[ON / OFF] Displays ON in the drilling canned cycle mode and OFF in other modes. [INITIAL POINT] Displays the absolute position of the initial point. [POINT R] Displays the absolute position of point R. [POIN Z] Displays the absolute position of point Z. [NUMBER OF REPETITIONS] Displays the specified value and current value of the number of repetitions. [CUT IN VALUE] Displays the depth of cut for G73 and G83. [SHIFT VALUE] Displays the shift for G76 and G87.

POINT R CUTIN VALUE Z 200.000

POINT Z SHIFT VALUE Z 200.000 X Y 10.000 20.000 D (F) (S)

G91 G01 G17 G40 0 H 0

(L): 0 0

(ACT.F) (ACT.S)

MDI***STOP**** */* */* 02:47:55 LSK

CUTTER TL LEN CANNED ROTATI 3DIM PRGMBL SCALIN 3DIM CMPENS OFFSET CYCLE ON CNVSON MIRROR G OFFSET CHAPT ER

[Coordinate rotation screen]

POSITION DATA
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION ON/OFF (RELATIVE) X 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 U 0.000 V 0.000 W 0.000 (G/D/H) (M) G91 G01 G17 G40 D 0 (F) (S) G54 G80 G64 G49 H 0 0 M02

O0100 N0000
(DIST TO GO) X Y Z U V W (T) 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

[ON / OFF] Displays ON in the coordinate rotation mod and OFF in other modes. [ROTATION CENTER]

ROTATION CENTER X Y 100.000 200.000

ANGLE OF ROTATION 90.00000

(L): (ACT.F) (ACT.S) 0 0

Displays the absolute position of the center of coordinate rotation. [ANGLE OF ROTATION]

MDI***STOP**** */* */* 02:47:55 LSK

CUTTER TL LEN CANNED ROTATI 3DIM PRGMBL SCALIN 3DIM CMPENS OFFSET CYCLE ON CNVSON MIRROR G OFFSET CHAPT ER

Displays the angle of coordinate rotation.

380

B62564E1/02
[Three-dimensional coordinate conversion screen]
POSITION DATA
3DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION ON/OFF

11. DISPLAY

O0100 N0000
(RELATIVE) (DIST TO GO) X Y Z 0.000 0.000 0.000 U 0.000 V 0.000 W 0.000 (T) M02 X 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 U 0.000 V 0.000 W 0.000 (G/D/H) (M) G91 G54 G01 G80 G17 G64 G40 G49 D 0 H 0 (F) (S) 0

ROTATION CENTER (FIRST) (SECOND) X 1.000 X 1.000 Y 2.000 Y 2.000 Z 3.000 Z 3.000 DIRECTION OF CENTER AXIS OF POTATION (FIRST) (SECOND) X 1.000 X 1.000 Y 2.000 Y 2.000 Z 3.000 Z 3.000 ROTATION ANGLE (FIRST) (SECOND) 30.00000 30.00000

[ON / OFF] Displays ON in the three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode and OFF in other modes. [ROTATION CENTER] Displays the absolute position of the rotation center for threedimensional coordinate conversion. [DIRECTION OF CENTER AXIS OF ROTATION] Displays the direction of the rotation center axis for threedimensional coordinate conversion [ROTATION ANGLE] Displays the rotation angle for three-dimensional coordinate conversion.

(L): 0 0

(ACT.F) (ACT.S)

MDI***STOP**** */* */* 02:47:55 LSK

CUTTER TL LEN CANNED ROTATI 3DIM PRGMBL SCALIN 3DIM CMPENS OFFSET CYCLE ON CNVSON MIRROR G OFFSET CHAPT ER

[Programmable mirror image screen]

POSITION DATA
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE ON/OFF (RELATIVE) X 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 U 0.000 V 0.000 W 0.000 (G/D/H) (M) G91 G01 G17 G40 D 0 (F) (S) G54 G80 G64 G49 H 0 0 M02

O0100 N0000
(DIST TO GO) X Y Z U V W (T) 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

MIRROR CENTER X Y Z U V W 100.000 200.000 300.000

[ON / OFF] Displays ON in the programmable mirror image mode and OFF in other modes. [MIRROR CENTER] Displays the absolute position of the mirror axis. Remark) Nothing is displayed for axes along which no mirror axis exists. When 0 is displayed, it means that the mirror axis exists at coordinate 0.

(L): (ACT.F) (ACT.S) 0 0

MDI***STOP**** */* */* 02:47:55 LSK

CUTTER TL LEN CANNED ROTATI 3DIM PRGMBL SCALIN 3DIM CMPENS OFFSET CYCLE ON CNVSON MIRROR G OFFSET CHAPT ER

381

11. DISPLAY
[Scaling screen]
POSITION DATA
SCALING ON/OFF X 0.000 Y 0.000 SCALING CENTER SCALING FACTOR Z 0.000 U 0.000 X 0.000 X 2.00000 V 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 2.00000 W 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 2.00000 (G/D/H) (M) U 0.000 U 1.00000 V 0.000 V 1.00000 G91 G54 M02 W 0.000 W 1.00000 G01 G80 G17 G64 G40 G49 D 0 H 0 (F) (S) 0 X Y Z U V W (T) 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 (RELATIVE)

B62564E1/02

O0100 N0000
(DIST TO GO)

[ON / OFF] Displays ON in the scaling mode and OFF in other modes. [SCALING CENTER] Displays the absolute position of the scaling center. [SCALE FACTOR] Displays the scale factor for each axis.

(L): 0 0

(ACT.F) (ACT.S)

MDI***STOP**** */* */* 02:47:55 LSK

CUTTER TL LEN CANNED ROTATI 3DIM PRGMBL SCALIN 3DIM CMPENS OFFSET CYCLE ON CNVSON MIRROR G OFFSET CHAPT ER

[Three- dimensional tool compensation screen]

POSITION DATA
THREEDIMENSIONAL TOOL OFFSET ON/OFF (RELATIVE) X 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 U 0.000 V 0.000 W 0.000 (G/D/H) (M) G91 G01 G17 G41 D 0 (F) (S) G54 G80 G64 G49 H 0 0 M02

O0100 N0000
(DIST TO GO) X Y Z U V W (T) 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

[ON / OFF ] Displays ON in the three-dimensional tool compensation mode and OFF in other modes. [OFFSET VECTOR]

OFFSET VECTOR X Y Z 1.000 2.000 3.000

(L): (ACT.F) (ACT.S) 0 0

Displays the threedimensional tool compensaion vector created for each block.

MDI***STOP**** */* */* 02:47:55 LSK

CUTTER TL LEN CANNED ROTATI 3DIM PRGMBL SCALIN 3DIM CMPENS OFFSET CYCLE ON CNVSON MIRROR G OFFSET CHAPT ER

382

B62564E1/02

11. DISPLAY

11.17 Coordinate System Related Data Display Function

The FANUC Series 15-B provides the following diagnostic displays for coordinate data: (i) Display of the shift (*) of the coordinate system when manual intervention is applied with the manual absolute signal turned off during manual operation (ii) Display of the shift in the coordinate system due to a manual interrupt caused by the automatic/manual simultaneous function or other function (iii) Display of the offset of the coordinate system when the origin of the workpiece coordinate system is set with a G92 command or MDI operation (iv) Display of the offset of the coordinate system when the local coordinate systems set with a G52 command (v) Display of the shift of the coordinate system due to a move command issued when the machine is in the lock state

Workpiece coordinate system (G54) before manual intervention Po Position before manual intervention

S Offset of the origin of the workpiece coordinate system for G54 WZo Origin of the workpiece coordinate system before manual intervention Workpiece coordinate system (G54) after manual intervention S Machine zero point Position after manual intervention Amount of manual intervention

Pn

WZn Origin of the workpiece coordinate system after manual intervention

Fig. 11.17 Coordinate System before and after Manual Intervention when the Manual Absolute Signal is Off

NOTE

The shift is the distance the coordinate system moves along each axis (in the case of (i) for example). Vector S in Fig. 11.17 in dicates the total shift along the axes.

Explanation The workpiece coordinate system used for automatic operation is defined with several offsets. The controlled axes, the machine coordinates, absolute coordinates, and offsets are related as fol lows: [Machine coordinate]=[Absolute coordinate] + External workpiece zero point offset + Currently valid offset among those caused by G54 to G59 + Offset caused by G92 (1) + Offset caused by G52 (2) + Other data related to coordinates (3) This function can display values (1), (2), and (3) above on the diagnosis screen.

383

11. DISPLAY

B62564E1/02

The table below lists the diagnosis number of each data item related to the coordinates for each control axis. Diagnosis No. 4100 4101 4102 4103 4104 Description Shift in the coordinate system by manual operation Shift in the coordinate system due to a manual interrupt caused by the automatic / manual simultaneous function or other function Offset of the coordinate system when the workpiece coordinate system is set with a G92 command Offset of the coordinate system when the local coordinate system is set with a G52 command Shift of the coordinate system in the machine lock state

(1) Shift in the coordinate system by manual operation Displays the shift in the coordinate system along each axis in manual operation with the manual absolute signal turned off. Diagnosis No. 4100 Indication MANUAL SHIFT Description Displays the shift in the coordinate system by manual operation along the X-axis. Displays the shift in the coordinate system by manual operation along the Y-axis. Displays the shift in the coordinate system by manual operation along the Z-axis.

(2) Shift of the coordinate system due to a manual interrupt caused by the automatic/manual simultaneous function or other function. Displays the amount of intervention caused by a manual interrupt along each axis. Diagnosis No. 4101 Indication MANUAL SHIFT Description Displays the manual interrupt amount along the X-axis caused by the automatic/manual simultaneous function or other function. Displays the manual interrupt amount along the Y-axis caused by the automatic/manual simultaneous function or other function. Displays the manual interrupt amount along the Z-axis caused by the automatic/manual simultaneous function or other function.

(3) Offset of the coordinate system when the workpiece coordinate system is set with a G92 command. Displays the offset along each axis in the coordinate system set with a G92 command. Diagnosis No. 4102 Indication G92 OFFSET Description Displays the offset caused by a G92 command along the X-axis in input increments. Displays the offset caused by a G92 command along the Y-axis in input increments. Displays the offset caused by a G92 command along the Z-axis in input increments.

384

B62564E1/02

11. DISPLAY

(4) Offset of the coordinate system when the local coordinate system is set with a G52 command. Displays the offset along each axis in the coordinate system set with a G52 command. Diagnosis No. 4103 Indication G92 OFFSET Description Displays the offset caused by a G52 command along the X-axis in input increments. Displays the offset caused by a G52 command along the Y-axis in input increments. Displays the offset caused by a G52 command along the Z-axis in input increments.

(5) Shift in the coordinate system in the machine lock state. Displays the shift in the coordinate system due to a move command issued in the machine lock state. Diagnosis No. 4104 Indication Description

MCN LOCK SHIFT Displays the shift in the machine lock state along the X-axis in input increments. Displays the shift in the machine lock state along the Y-axis in input increments. Displays the shift in the machine lock state along the Z-axis in input increments.

385

12. CRT SCREEN SAVING FUNCTION

B62564E1/02

12.CRT SCREEN SAVING FUNCTION

The CRT screen saving function clears all data items on the CRT screen when the power is on and the CRT has not used within a certain period of time. This function is effective for extending the life of the screen.

12.1 Small CRT/MDI Panel

To clear all data items on the CRT screen, press the SHIFT and cancel (CAN) keys simultaneously. To subsequently redisplay data items on the CRT screen, press any key.

12.2 Panels Other than the Small CRT/MDI Panel

To clear all data items on the CRT screen, press any function key and the cancel (CAN) key simultaneously. To subsequently redisplay data items on the CRT screen, press any key. The following function keys can be used. POS PROG OFFSET P-CHECK

SETTING

SERVICE

MESSAGE

OTHERS

This function cannot be used with a system equipped with the MMC function.

12.3 Screen Saver Function

When the operator does not operate the keyboard for a predetermined period, the screen being displayed is automatically cleared and an animated screen (called a saver screen) is displayed instead. When one of the following conditions occurs, the original screen is redisplayed. The operator presses a key (including a key from the PMC) A new alarm is issued A new operator message is output The operation mode changes The saver restoration signal goes high Saver screen

<<

11 : 20 : 33

>>

When the screen saver is activated, the screen (saver screen) shown on the left is displayed. The current-time indication moves across the screen from left to right, gradually moving down the screen as it deletes the original screen. (The original screen is not updated while the screen saver is activated.)

j j j j j

386

B62564E1/02
Notes

12. CRT SCREEN SAVING FUNCTION

(1) When operator input causes the original screen to be redisplayed, the input is also reflected on the screen. (2) For screens other than the CNC screen, such as the PMC, conversational, or TC screen, the screen saver function is disabled. (3) When a newly issued alarm is of the same type (PS, OT, or SV) as that of an alarm which was issued previously, the original screen is not redisplayed. Example While OT100 is being issued, if OT001 is issued, the original screen is not redisplayed. When SV001 is issued, the original screen is redisplayed. (4) Even while an alarm is being displayed on the screen, if the operator does not operate the keyboard for a predetermined period, the screen saver is automatically activated, and the saver screen is displayed. (5) While a graphic screen is being created (for example, with the graphic display function), the screen saver may not be activated. (6) This function cannot be used with a system equipped with the MMC function. (7) This function is also enabled while the screen is displayed using a conversational macro. (8) When the screen clear function is used, it takes priority over this function. (The saver screen is als cleared.) Parameter Description 0016 Setting entry Data type : Byte Data unit : Minute Data range : 0 to 127 When the operator does not operate the keyboard for the period specified in this parameter, the saver screen is displayed. When 0 is specified, the screen saver function is disabled. Screen saver start time

387

13. DATA OUTPUT

B62564E1/02

13.DATA OUTPUT
13.1 Tool Offsets
The tool offsets set in offset memory can be output to the output device. The output data format is the same as the offset data input (programmable data input : G10) format specified by the tape command. 1 Setting the data output interface Set what interface is used as the data output interface in the foreground output device. (See Section 10.3.) The reader/punch interface or ASR33 interface can output data. 2 Setting the output code Set whether to output data in the EIA or ISO code in the punch code. (See Section 10.3.) 3 Set the operation mode to the EDIT mode. 4 Press the function menu key to enable the soft keys to function as the function selection keys. 5 Press the OFFSET key (soft or hard key) several times. Display the screen of the tool offset. 6 Press the operation menu key to enable the soft keys to function as the operation selection keys. 7 Press the PUNCH key to enable the soft keys to function as the operation guidance keys. 8 Press the TOOL key. 9 Output of the offset values is started and the STOP soft key is displayed. 10 To cancel offset value output, press the STOP key. Once this key is pressed, however, output of the remaining offset values cannot be restarted. 11 After the offset values have been output, the soft keys return to operating as the operation selection keys. Function Soft keys Operation menu key menu key 9" CRT function selection keys
POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET PRG-CHK CHAPTER +

9" CRT unit

9" CRT OFFSET operation selection keys

ALL_CLR PUNCH MEASURE +

9" CRT operation guide keys (PUNCH)

TOOL (F_NAM) (FILE#)

14" CRT unit

Function menu key

Soft keys

Operation menu key

14" CRT function selection keys

POSITI ON PROGRA OFFSET M
PROGRAM CHECK

SETTIN SERVIC MESSAG G E E

CHAPTE R

14" CRT OFFSET operation selection keys

INPU T +IN PUT MEAS URE PUNC H INPUTA ALL NUMBER CLEAR

14" CRT operation guidance keys

TOOL (FILE_ NAME) (FILE #)

388

B62564E1/02

13. DATA OUTPUT

13.2 Parameters
The parameters set in NC memory can be output to the output device. The output data format is the same as the parameter tape format. 1 Setting the data output interface Set what interface is used as the data output interface in the foreground output device. (See Section 10.3.) The reader/punch interface or ASR33 interface can output data. 2 Setting the output code Set whether to output data in the EIA or ISO code in the punch code. (See Section 10.3.) 3 Set the operation mode to the EDIT mode. 4 Press the function menu key to enable the soft keys to function as the function selection keys. 5 Press the SERVICE key (soft or hard key) several times. Display the screen of the parameter 6 Press the operation menu key to enable the soft keys to function as the operation selection keys. 7 Press the PUNCH key to enable the soft keys to function as the operation guide keys. 8 To output parameters other than the pitch error compensation Press the PARM key. To output only the pitch error compensation Press the PITCH key. To output all the parameters at a time Press the ALL key. 9 Parameter output is started and the STOP soft key is displayed. 10 To cancel parameter output, press the STOP key. Once this key is pressed, however, output of the remaining parameters cannot be restarted. 11 After the parameters have been output, the soft keys return to operating as the operation selection keys. 9" CRT operation selection keys
PUNCH READ

9" CRT function selection keys

SETTING SERVICE MESSAGE CHAPTER +

9" CRT operation guide keys

A L L PARAM PITCH (F_NAM) (FILEt)

14" CRT function selection keys

POSITI ON PROGRA OFFSET M
PROGRAM CHECK

SETTIN SERVIC MESSAG G E E

CHAPTE R

14" CRT operation selection keys

INPUT +IN PUT INPUT ON:1 OFF:0 NUM READ PUNC H BER

14" CRT operation guidance keys

ALL PARA PITCH (FILE_ (FILE ME ER NAME) #) TER ROR

389

13. DATA OUTPUT

B62564E1/02

13.3 Offset from the Workpiece Reference Point

The offset from the workpiece reference point set in the offset memory can be output to the output device. The output data format is the same as the format of offset data input (programmable data input G10) specified by the tape command. 1 Setting the data output interface Set what interface is used as the data output interface in the foreground output device. (See Section 10.3.) The reader/punch interface or ASR33 interface can output data. 2 Setting the output code Set whether to output data in the EIA or ISO code in the punch code. (See Section 10.3.) 3 Set the operation mode to the EDIT mode. 4 Press the function menu key to enable the soft keys to function as the function selection keys. 5 Press the OFFSET key (soft or hard key) several times. Display the screen of the work origin compensation. 6 Press the operation menu key to enable the soft keys to function as the operation selection keys. 7 Press the PUNCH key to enable the soft keys to function as the operation guide keys. 8 Press the WRK.ZER key. 9 The output of offset values is started and the STOP soft key is displayed. 10 To cancel output of the offset values, press the STOP key. Once this key is pressed, however, output of the remaining offset values cannot be restarted. 11 After the offset values have been output, the soft keys return to operating as the operation selection keys. NOTE The offset from the workpiece reference point can be output only when the addition of workpiece coordinate set count (option) is available.

9" CRT function selection keys POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET PRG-CHK CHAPTER +

9" CRT OFFSET operation selection keys ALL_CLR PUNCH MEASURE +

9" CRT operation guidance keys (PUNCH) WRK.ZER (F_NAM) (FILE#)

14" CRT function selection keys

POSITI ON PROGRA OFFSET PROGRAM SETTIN CHECK M G SERVIC E MESSAG E CHAPTE R

14" CRT OFFSET operation selection keys

IN PUT +IN PUT MEA SURE TL_INP INPUT PUNCH NUMBER CHAPTE R

14" CRT operation guidance keys

WORK ZERO (FILE_N (FILE# AME) )

390

B62564E1/02

13. DATA OUTPUT

13.4 Output of Tool Offset Data Corresponding to Tool Number

Tool offset data corresponding to the specified tool number can be output to the output device. The output data format is the same as the format of offset data input specified by the tape command. G10 L70 ; Tffff Pffff : : : G11 ; M2 ; 1 Setting the data output interface Set what interface is used as the data output interface in the foreground output device. (See Section 10.3.) The reader/punch interface or ASR33 interface can output data. 2 Setting the output code Set whether to output data in the EIA or ISO code in the punch code. (See Section 10.3.) 3 Set the operation mode to the EDIT mode. 4 Press the function menu key to enable the soft keys to function as the function selection keys. 5 Press the OFFSET key (soft or hard key) several times. The screen which contains the tool offset data corresponding to the specified tool number is displayed . 6 Press the operation menu key to enable the soft keys to function as the operation selection keys. 7 Press the PUNCH key to enable the soft keys to function as the operation guidance keys. 8 Press the TL.DATA key. 9 Output of tool offset data is started. 10 After the tool offset data has been output, the soft keys return to operating as the operation selection keys. 9" CRT function selection keys POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET PRG-CHK CHAPTER + Rffff Kffff ;

9" CRT OFFSET operation selection keys ALL_CLR PUNCH MEASURE

9" CRT operation guidance keys (PUNCH) TL.DATA (F.NAM) (FILE#) (FILE#)

14" CRT function selection keys

POSITI ON PROGRA OFFSET PROGRAM SETTIN CHECK M G SERVIC E MESSAG E CHAPTE R

14" CRT OFFSET operation selection keys INPUT INSERT DELETE SERACH PUNCH MEASUR
E

14" CRT operation guidance keys

TOOL DATA (FILE_ NAME) (FILE #)

391

14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC 14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD

B62564E1/02

14.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD
In this chapter, the FANUC Floppy cassette and FANUC FA Card are reffered to as the cassette and card, respectively.

14.1 What is a File

The unit of data, which is input/output between the cassette or card and the CNC by one input/output operation (pressing the [READ] or [PUNCH] key), is called a file. When inputting CNC programs from, or outputting them to the cassette or card for example, one or all programs within the CNC memory are handled as one file. Files are assigned file numbers 1,2,3,4 and so on, with the lead file as 1. File1 File2 File3 Filen Blank

One file can also be written over two cassettes as follows: Cassette 1 or Card 1 File1 File2 File3 File (k-1) File k

Cassette 2 or Card 2 Continuation of file k File (k+1) File n Blank

Once written in the cassette or card, data can subsequently be read out by correspondence between the data contents and file numbers. This correspondence cannot be verified, unless the data contents and file numbers are output to the CNC and displayed. Therefore, when writing data in the cassette or card, enter the file numbers and data contents in the memo column. Entry example on MEMO File 1 File 2 File 3 . . File (n1) File n NC parameters Offset data NC programO0100 . . NC programO0500 NC program O0600

392

B62564E1/02

14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC 14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD

14.2 File SearchOut

To enable data input/output between a cassette or a card and the CNC, the data in the cassette or the card to be input or output must be specified. This operation is called file searchout. File searchout is performed as follows: Be sure to perform file searchout in conjunction with data input/output operation. File searchout alone cannot be performed. 1 Select the mode in which the desired input/output operation is to be performed (see each item). 2 Press one of the soft keys to select the screen on which the desired input/output operation is to be performed (see each item). 3 Press the operation menu key to display the soft keys for input/output operation. 4 Press soft key [READ] or [PUNCH] to select the desired input/output operation. 5 Press soft key [(FILE#)] and enter a file number. 6 Perform the desired data input/output operation. When the above operation is completed, the following file searchout is performed according to the file number entered in step 5 before data input/output: File number 0 (zero) 1 to 9999 Contents of file searchout The beginning of the cassette is searched out. The file with the specified file number ( 1 to 9999 ) is searched out.

NOTE 1 Note that when file number N0 or N1 is specified, the results of file searchout depend on whether the cassette or card contains any files.

File searchout When the cassette contains or the card a files N0 Cassette or card searchout (File 1 is searched out.) When the cassette or the card dose not contain any files The beginning of the cassette or the card is searched out.

N1

File 1 is searched out.

If an input/output operation is performed , a P/S alarm occurs because on file has benn written in the cassette or the card.

When writing data in a new cassette or card for the first time, specify N0 to search out the cassette or the card. Also specify N0 when writing data from the beginning of the cassette or the card after deleting all the written data. NOTE 2 Even if file searchout is not performed correctly (the file is not found, etc.), no alarm occurs in the CNC. Whether P/S alarm No. 820, 830, or 840 occurs depends on what I/O channel is being used when data input/output is performed after file searchout.

393

14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC 14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD

B62564E1/02

Examples of data input/output performed after file searchout are given below. For details of data input/ output, see Sections 14.3 and 14.4. Example 1 When program number 1234 in NC memory is output as file 5 in the cassette or the card 1 Set the operation mode to the EDIT mode. 2 Press the PROGRAM soft key or the PROG hard key to select the program display screen. 3 Press the operation menu key to display the soft key [PUNCH]. 4 Press the soft key PUNCH. 5 Enter [(FILE#)], [5], [(PROG#)], [1], [2], [3], and [4] in that order. 6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. When the soft key [EXEC] is pressed, the file corresponding to number 5 is searched out and a program with program number 1234 is output to the file as a new file. File number 5 follows N and program number 1234 follows 0. Example 2 When file 3 in the cassette is loaded into CNC memory 1 Set the operation mode to the EDIT mode. 2 Press the PROGRAM soft key or the PROG hard key to select the program display screen. 3 Press the operation menu key to display the soft key [READ]. 4 Press the soft key [READ]. 5 Enter [(FILE#)] and [3] in this order. 6 Press the soft key [ALL]. When the soft key [ALL] is pressed, the file corresponding to the file number following N is searched out and the CNC program in that file is loaded into CNC memory.

394

B62564E1/02

14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC 14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD

14.3 Data Output Operation

To output data from the CNC to the cassette or the card, use the following procedure: Slide the writeprotect top on the cassette or the card to RECORD (which means writeenable) before outputting data. If data is output with the cassette or the card in the writedisable status, P/S alarm No. 820, 830, or 840 occurs. Which P/S alarm occurs, however, depends on what input/output channel is being used.

14.3.1 CNC program output

The following operation enables an NC program to be output to the cassette or the card. To output the NC program to a specific file, however, perform file searchout in advance (see Section 14.2). Note that the files before the searched out file remain unchanged but that the subsequent files are deleted. When outputting the NC program is attempted without file searchout specified, the program is added to the end of the last file in the cassette or the card. 1 Set the operation mode to the EDIT mode. 2 Press the PROGRAM soft key or the PROG hard key to select the program display screen. 3 Press the operation menu key to display the soft key [PUNCH]. 4 Press the soft key [PUNCH]. 5 Specify file searchout when necessary. 6 Enter [(PROG#)] [program number] and press the soft key [EXEC] or [ALL]. When [EXEC] is pressed, one NC program in the CNC memory is output. When [ALL] is pressed, all the NC programs in CNC memory are output. Example 1 When [A] is output (a) When file searchout is not specified File1 File2 File3 Blank (Beforeoutput)

File1

File2

File3

A (File4 )

Blank

(Afteroutput)

(b) When file searchout is specified File searc-out (Beforeoutput)

File1

File2

File3

Blank

File1

A (File2 )

Blank

(Afteroutput)

395

14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC 14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD

B62564E1/02

CAUTION

The cassette and card are provided with the write protect switch. Set the switch to the write enable state. Then, start output operation. 1 Write protect switch of the cassette

(1) Write protect (enabling read operation only)

(2) Write enable (enabling read, write, and erase operations)

2 Write protect switch of the card

Write protect switch

Write enable Write protect (enabling write operation) (disabling write operation; read operation only is allowed)

NOTE 1 If P/S alarm No. 820, 830, or 840 occurs when the CNC program is being output to the cassette or the card, the contents of the cassette or the card are restored to the preoutput status. If P/S alarm No. 820, 830, or 840 occurs when the CNC program is being output after file searchout has been performed, however, only the files before the searched out file are restored. NOTE 2 When program output is conducted after N1 to N9999 head searching, the new file is output as the designated nth position. In this case, 1 to n1 files are effective, but the files after the old nth one are deleted. If an alarm occurs during output, only the 1 to n1 files are restored. NOTE 3 Head searching with a file No. is necessary when a file output from the CNC to the cassette or card is again input to the CNC memory or compared with the content of the CNC memory. Therefore, immediately after a file is output from the CNC to the cassette or card, record the file No. on the memo.

396

B62564E1/02 14.3.2 Offset data output

14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC 14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD

The following operation enables the output of offset data to the cassette or the card. 1) Select the EDIT mode. 2) Press the OFFSET soft or hard key to select the tool offset data display screen. 3) Press the operation menu key to display the soft key [PUNCH]. 4) Press the soft key [PUNCH]. 5) Specify file searchout when necessary. 6) Press the soft key [TOOL]. For which file the offset data is output to, refer to 14.3.1.

14.3.3 CNC parameter output

The following operation enables the output of CNC parameters to the cassette or the card. 1) Select the EDIT mode. 2) Press the SERVICE soft or hard key to select the parameter display screen. 3) Press the operation menu key to display the soft key [PUNCH]. 4) Press the soft key [PUNCH]. 5) Specify file searchout when necessary. 6) Press the soft key [PARAM] or [ALL]. When [PARAM] is pressed, only ordinary parameters are output. When [ALL] is pressed, both ordinary parameters and pitch error compensation data are output. For which file the CNC parameter is output to, refer to 14.3.1.

397

14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC 14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD

B62564E1/02

14.4 Data Input Operation

Observe the following procedures to input data from the cassette or the card to the CNC.

14.4.1 CNC program input

The following operation enables the CNC program to be output from the cassette or the card to the CNC: 1 Set the operation mode to the EDIT mode. 2 Press the PROGRAM soft key or the PROG hard key to select the program display screen. 3 Press the operation menu key to display the soft key [READ]. 4 Press the soft key [READ]. 5 Specify file searchout for the file containing the program to be input. (For details of file searchout, see Section 14.2.) 6 Press the soft key [ALL] (ordinary operation) or enter [(PROG#)] [program number] and press the soft key [EXEC] (valid when the number of the program to be input is changed).

14.4.2 Offset data input

The following operation enables the CNC program to be input from the cassette or the card to the CNC: 1 Set the operation mode to the EDIT mode. 2 Press the PROGRAM soft key or the PROG hard key to select the program display screen. 3 Press the operation menu key to display the soft key [READ]. 4 Press the soft key [READ]. 5 Specify file searchout for the file containing the offset data to be input. 6 Enter [(PROG#)] [program number] and press [EXEC]. Since offset data in the file is first input as one CNC program as a result of this operation, be sure to specify the program number. Otherwise, a warning is output. 7 When the input operation is completed, the input offset data is displayed on the screen in the format of data input by the offset value program (G10). G10L____P____R____ ; 8 Switch the EDIT mode to the MEMORY mode and press the cycle start button to execute the program. When the program is executed, offset data is loaded into the CNC offset memory. 9 Select the offset data display screen and check whether the offset data is set correctly.

14.4.3 CNC parameter input

The following operation enables CNC parameters input from the cassette or the card to the CNC. 1) Press the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine side. 2) Press the corresponding soft key to select the service setting screen. 3) Set PARAM and WRITE ENABLE to 1. Alarm SW000 is displayed. 4) Operate the SERVICE soft or hard key to display the program screen. 5) Press the operation menu key to display the soft key [READ]. 6) Press the soft key [READ]. 7) Specify file searchout. 8) Press the soft key [PARAM] or [ALL]. When [PARAM] is pressed, only ordinary parameters are input. When [ALL] is pressed, both ordinary parameters and pitch error compensation data are input. 9) As a result of step 8, CNC parameters are loaded into the memory for CNC parameters. Usually, alarm PW000 occurs after all the CNC parameters have been read. 10)Select the service setting screen and set PARAM and WRITE ENABLE to 0. 11) If alarm PW000 is issued, turn the CNC power off then on again. 12)Release the emergency stop button on the machine.

398

B62564E1/02

14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC 14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD

14.5 File Deletion

Data written in the cassette or the card can be deleted in units of files. 1 Set the operation mode to the EDIT mode. 2 Press the PROGRAM soft key or the PROG hard key to select the program display screen. 3 Release the program protect switch ( ). 4 Slide the writeprotect key of the cassette to RECORD and insert the cassette or the card into the adapter. The red lamp goes on to indicate the adapter status. 5 Press the operation menu key to display the soft key [DELETE FILE]. 6 Press the soft key [DELETE FILE]. 7 Enter [(FILE#)] [file number] and press [EXEC]. The specified file is deleted and the file numbers after the deleted file are moved up one. CAUTION If steps 5 to 7 are executed without the writeprotect key in the RECORD position in step 4, no alarm occurs. Also note that the specified file is not deleted.

Example 1 When [(FILE#)] [2] is entered and [EXEC] is pressed (when file 2 is deleted) File1 File2 File3 File4 Blank (Beforedeletion)

File1

File2

File3

Blank

(Afterdeletion)

399

14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC 14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD

B62564E1/02

14.6 Precautions
14.6.1 Request for cassette replacement
When one file has been entered over two cassettes red and green lamps on the adaptor flash alternately on completion of data input/output between the first cassette and the CNC, prompting cassette replacement. In this case, take the first cassette out of the adaptor and insert a second cassette in its place. Then, data input/output will continue automatically. Cassette replacement is prompted when the second cassette is required during file searchout, data input/output between the CNC and the cassette, or file deletion. NOTE 1 Since cassette replacement is processed by the adaptor, no special operation is required. The CNC will interrupt data input/output operation until the next cassette is inserted into the adaptor. NOTE 2 When reset operation is applied to the CNC during a request for cassette replacement, the CNC is not reset at once, but reset after the cassette has been replaced.

14.6.2 Adaptor lamp conditions

The yellow and green lamps of the cassette or card adaptor indicate operating conditions. For details, refer to the Operators Manual of the FLOPPY CASSETTE or FANUC FA Card. CAUTION All alarms occurred in the adapter are displayed as P/S alarm No.86. Find out the cause of the error using the statuses of the cassette or card and looking back each operation, then release the alarm.

400

B62564E1/02

14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC 14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD

14.7 File Name of Floppy Cassette or Card

Using a Floppy Cassette enables a name to be assigned to the file when the file is output. File names are assigned according to the following rules: (1) CNC program (2) CNC parameter (3) Pitch error data (4) Parameter and pitch error (5) Tool offset data = Oxxxx Oxxxx: Selected program number = PARAMETER = PITCH. ERROR = PARAM. AND. PITCH = OFFSET

(6) All program (at PUNCH ALL operation) = ALL. PROGRAM

401

14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC 14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD

B62564E1/02

14.8 Expanded File Control Function

The expanded file control function enables a file directory display function designed for use with the FANUC Floppy Cassette adapter to input, output, delete, and search for a desired file simply by specifying its file name. When the FANUC 2drive Floppy Cassette adapter is used, the display of a directory, file input/output, and renaming of a file can also be performed.

14.8.1 Searching for, inputting/outputting, and deleting a file by specifying its file name
Searching for a file by specifying its file name A file that has been stored to a cassette can be searched for by specifying its file name. Use the following procedure: Example 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Searching for file ABC Select the floppy directory screen from the program screen. Press the [SRH_FIL] operation selection key. Press the [(F_NAM)] soft key. (SRH _FIL > is displayed in the keyin field.) Key in A , B , and C as the file name. (SRH _FIL > ABC is displayed in the keyin field.) Press [EXEC].

Inputting a file by specifying its file name A CNC program can be input from the cassette by specifying its file name. Use the following procedure: Example 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Inputting a file named ABC Select the floppy directory screen from the program screen. Select EDIT mode. Press the [READ] operation selection key. Press the [(F_NAM)] soft key. (READ > is displayed in the keyin field.) Key in A , B , and C as the file name. (READ> ABC is displayed in the keyin field.) Press [ALL] (for normal operation). Alternatively, enter [(PROG#)], (program number), then [EXEC] (to change the program number of the program to be input).

Outputting a file by specifying its file name A CNC program can be output from the cassette by specifying its file name. Use the following procedure: Example 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. Outputting a program with its file name set to ABC Select the floppy directory screen from the program screen. Select the EDIT mode. Press the [PUNCH] operation selection key. Press the [(F_NAM)] soft key. Key in A , B , and C as the file name. (PUNCH > ABC is displayed in the keyin field.) Enter [(PROG#)], then (program number). (PUNCH > ABC Oxxxx is displayed in the keyin field.) xxxx: Selected program number Press the [EXEC] soft key.

When outputting one program stored in CNC memory

4.

When outputting all programs stored in CNC memory 4. Press the [(F_NAM)] soft key. (PUNCH > is displayed in the keyin field.) 5. Key in A , B , and C as the file name. (PUNCH > ABC is displayed in the keyin field.) 6. Press the [ALL] soft key.

402

B62564E1/02
Deleting a file by specifying its file name

14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC 14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD

A file stored on a cassette can be deleted by specifying its file name. Use the following procedure: Example 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Deleting a file named ABC Select the floppy directory screen from the program screen. Select EDIT mode. Press the [DELFILE] operation selection key. Press the [(F_NAM)] soft key. (DELFILE > is displayed in the keyin field.) Key in A , B , and C as the file name. (DELFILE > ABC is displayed in the keyin field.) Press [EXEC].

14.8.2 Twodrive floppy cassette control

To use the 2drive Floppy Cassette adapter, set bit 2 (DRV) of parameter No. 7620 to 1. Selecting a drive, displaying the directory, and inputting/outputting a file Press the [DRIVE] soft key to select a drive. Pressing the soft key toggles the selection between drive 0 and drive 1. The selected drive number is displayed at the top of the screen. After a drive has been selected, display of the directory and file input/output can be performed as normal. Use the following procedure: 1. 2. 3. Select the floppy directory screen from the program screen. Press the [DRIVE] soft key to select the drive. Pressing this soft key toggles the selection between drive 0 and drive 1. For the selected drive, display of the directory and input/output of a file can be performed as normal.

Renaming a file by specifying its file number A file can be renamed by specifying its file number. Use the following procedure: Example 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Volume transfer A file stored on the currently selected drive can be transferred to the other drive by specifying the file number or file name. This operation is called volume transfer. In volume transfer, all files or a single file can be transferred. Use the following procedure: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the floppy directory screen from the program screen. Select EDIT mode. Press the [VOLCOPY] operation selection key. Press [ALL] (to transfer all files). (VOLCPOY > ALL is displayed in the keyin field.) Alternatively, enter [(FILE#)], then (file number) (to transfer one file by specifying its file number). (VOLCPOY > Nxxxx is displayed in the keyin field.) xxxx: Selected file number Alternatively, enter [(F_NAM)], then (file name) (to transfer one file by specifying its file name). (VOLCPOY > filename is displayed in the keyin field.) 5. Press [EXEC]. Assigning file name ABC to a file having file No. 3 Select the floppy directory screen from the program screen. Select EDIT mode. Press the [RENAME] operation selection key. Press the [(FILE#)] soft key. Key in 3 as the file number. Press the [(F_NAM)] soft key. (RENAME > N3 is displayed in the keyin field.) Key in A , B , and C as the file name. (RENAME > N3ABC is displayed in the keyin field.) Press [EXEC].

403

14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC 14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD
Deleting all files All files in the selected drive can be deleted at one time. Use the following procedure: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select the floppy directory screen from the program screen. Select EDIT mode. Press the [DELFILE] operation selection key. Press the [ALL] soft key. (DELFILE > ALL is displayed in the keyin field.) Press [EXEC].

B62564E1/02

14.8.3 Soft key operations

The following lists the soft key operations that can be performed from the floppy directory screen: Operation SRH_FIL READ PUNCH DELFILE 1st guide (FILE#) (F_NAM) (FILE#) (F_NAM) (F_NAM) (FILE#) (F_NAM) ALL RENAME VOLCOPY (FILE#) (FILE#) (F_NAM) ALL (F_NAM) EXEC EXEC * (PROG#) ALL (PROG#) ALL, THIS EXEC * EXEC * EXEC 2nd guide EXEC 3rd guide

NOTE 1 Those soft keys marked with * can be omitted. NOTE 2 A dotted line separating soft keys indicates that one of those soft keys should be selected.

14.8.4 Notes
NOTE 1 Parameters can be input and output, using the parameter screen, as normal. Note, however, that the output file name is PARAMETER. NOTE 2 Offset data can be input and output, using the offset screen, as normal. Note, however, that the output file name is OFFSET. NOTE 3 Up to 17 alphanumeric characters can be entered as a file name. If more than 17 characters are entered, only the first 17 are used as the file name. The first character of the file name must not be a space. NOTE 4 Drive selection, renaming of a file, volume transfer, and deletion of all files can be performed only when the 2drive Floppy Cassette adapter is being used. If these operations are attempted while using the onedrive Floppy Cassette adapter, the ILLEGAL INTERFACE warning message appears. NOTE 5 If a file name, specified for search, input, or deletion, is not found on the cassette, alarm DR OFF is issued. NOTE 6 If the name specified for an output file duplicates one that already exists, alarm DR OFF is issued.

404

B62564E1/02

15. ABSOLUTEPOSITION DETECTION

15.ABSOLUTEPOSITION DETECTION
On an axis equipped with an absolute pulse coder, the machine position is monitored even when the CNC power is turned off, so return to the reference position is unnecessary when the power is turned on again. An absolute pulse coder consists of an ordinary incremental pulse coder equipped with an absolute counter. Based on the counter value, an absolute position can be detected. The absolute pulse coder uses the backup battery so that the pulse coder monitors the machine position by the counter if the CNC is turned off. If an absolute pulse coder is installed on an axis, the current position on that axis is read from the absolute counter when the CNC is turned on, and the machine coordinate system and workpiece coordinate system are automatically set based on the read value. Automatic operation can thus start immediately. The requirements for reference position return after poweron operation, described in this manual, do not apply to axes equipped with an absolute pulse coder. CAUTION If a servo motor is to be detached from a control axis, the absolute pulse coder cannot be used for that axis.

NOTE

The time from the poweron operation until the servo ready signal (SA) is output varies depending on the distance between the machine position detected at poweron and the reference position. If the distance is 1 m, the time required until the servo ready signal (SA) is output is extended by approximately 1 s.

15.1 Initial Setting at PowerOn

(1) The machine coordinate system and a workpiece coordinate system are set automatically. The G54 coordinate system is selected as the workpiece coordinate system. (2) The offsets from the workpiece reference point which are specified with G92 and G52 are cleared. (3) Relative coordinates (RELATIVE) for indicating a position are set with the DSE bit, bit 1, of parameter No. 2202. (4) The other initial settings at poweron are the same as when the absolute position detection function is not provided.

15.2 Manual Reference Position Return at Machine Installation

In the following cases, be sure to manually return to the reference position to associate the reference position with the counter value of the absolute pulse coder: (a) First field adjustment (after the reference position is defined) (b) When the reference position is changed (c) When the absolute pulse coder is replaced. (d) When alarm OT32 occurs (e) When the CMOS memory is replaced (f) When the CMOS memory is cleared Manually return to the reference position as follows: (1) Set APLCZRN, bit 4 of parameter No. 1815, to 0. (2) Turn the power off then on again. Alarm OT32 is then displayed. (3) Return to the reference position manually. When tool reaches the reference position, parameter APLC ZRN is automatically set to 1. (4) Press the reset button. Alarm OT32 is then released.

405

15. ABSOLUTEPOSITION DETECTION

B62564E1/02

15.3 Alarm
When the power is turned on, one of the following alarms may occur: (1) Alarm OT32 NEED ZRN (ABS SCDR) The reference position is not associated with the counter value of the absolute pulse coder. That is, parameter APLCZRN is 0. Before the CNC power is turned on, the battery voltage for the absolute pulse coder dropped to 0 V, and the counter value of the absolute pulse coder is lost. An error was detected in the counter value of the absolute pulse coder. If alarm OT32 occurs, it is necessary to manually return the tool to the reference position. See Section 15.2. (2) Alarm SV101 DATA ERROR (ABS PCDR) An error occurred while data was being read from the absolute pulse coder. (The absolute pulse coder may be faulty.) If the machine moves a considerable amount when the power is turned on, the motor excess deviation alarm occurs. If this alarm occurs, turn the power off then on again. (3) Battery voltage alarm The battery voltage alarm, BAT, is indicated on the CRT screen. For how to replace the battery, see Part IV, Maintenance. CAUTION If BAT is indicated on the CRT screen, display the signal output status on the service screen to check whether the alarm applies to the system or the absolute pulse coder.

To display the service screen, use the following procedure: 1 Press the function menu key to display the function selection keys.
SETTING SERVICE
MESSAGE CHAPTER

2 Press the [SERVICE] soft key or the SERVICE hard key. The service screen appears. 3 If the service screen being displayed does not show diagnostic data, perform the following: Press the [CHAPTER] key to switch the soft keys to the chapter selection keys.
PARAM PITCH DIAGNOS DSP .MEM

Press the [DIAGNOS] key. Alternatively: Press the [SERVICE] soft key or the SERVICE hard key several times until diagnostic data is displayed. 4 If desired diagnostic data is still not displayed, perform the following: Using the page keys (4)1 Press a page key to change pages. (4)2 Using soft keys

406

B62564E1/02

15. ABSOLUTEPOSITION DETECTION

(i) Press the operation menu key to display the operation selection keys.
INP-NO.

(ii) Press the [INPNO.] key. Then, the operation guidance keys are displayed.
(VALUE)

(iii) Enter the number of the target diagnostic data. As the data number is entered, the following soft key display appears:
EXEC

Display diagnostic data No. 240 using the above procedure. If the 7th bit (leftmost data) is 1, the battery voltage alarm applies to the system. If the 6th bit of diagnostic data No. 240 is 1, the battery voltage alarm applies to the absolute pulse coder. CAUTION The voltage level of the backup battery for the absolute pulse coder is normally 6 V. Over time, however, the voltage level drops. V 6V

4.5V DO.PBATL 1.5V

DO.PBATZ DO.PBATL : Battery alarm This alarm occurs when the voltage drops to 4.5 V. If it occurs, BAT is indicated on the CRT/MDI. DO.PBATZ : Battery zero alarm This alarm occurs if the power to the NC unit is turned off when the voltage is approximately 1.5 V or less. In this case, alarm OT32 NEED ZRN (ABS PCDR) or OT34 BATTERY ZERO (ABS PCDR) is indicated, and the absolute pulse coder storage completion bit, bit 4 of parameter No. 1815, is automatically set to 0. When this alarm occurs, the battery alarm also occurs.

407

15. ABSOLUTEPOSITION DETECTION

B62564E1/02

15.4 Setting the Zero Point for the Absolute Pulse Coder through MDI Operation
When the absolute pulse coder or servo motor is replaced, the zero point of the absolute pulse coder must be set by storing the counter value of the absolute pulse coder with the machine set at the reference position. There are two methods to set the zero point of the absolute pulse coder. One method uses manual reference position return. The other method uses MDI operation for setting the zero point, which is done after the machine is moved to the reference position manually. When the zero point of the absolute pulse coder is set through MDI operation, the dog which is used for deceleration in manual reference position return and the switches for selecting the manual reference position return mode are unnecessary. The MDI operation for setting the zero point of the absolute pulse coder, however, requires some means to confirm that the machine is at the reference position. When the machine has been moved to the reference position by manual jog feed, manual handle feed, or another operation, the zero point can be set by setting parameters through MDI. Use the following procedure: 1 Set APLCZRN (bit 4) of parameter No. 1815 to 0. Alarm message POWERMUST BE OFF appears. 2 Turn off the power, then turn it on again. Alarm OT32 NEED ZRN (ABS PCDR) appears. 3 Move the machine to the reference position through manual jog feed, manual handle feed, manual incremental feed, or suchlike. 4 Set APLCZRN (bit 4) of parameter No. 1815 to 1. Alarm message POWERMUST BE OFF appears. 5 Turn off the power, then turn it on again. The zero point is then set.

408

B62564E1/02

16. AXIS CONTROL

16.AXIS CONTROL
16.1 Axis Control by the PMC
Any axes can be isolated from control of the CNC and controlled directly by the PMC. The PMC can issue commands specifying a traveled distance, feedrate, and so forth to move the tool along these axes independently of the other axes operating under the CNC. Therefore, peripheral equipment such as a turret, pallet, or index table can be controlled by using an axis of the CNC. Whether to place each axis under control of the CNC or PMC can be selected with a relevant input signal. The following operations can be controlled by the PMC directly: (i) Rapid traverse with a traveled distance specified (ii) Cutting feed with a traveled distance specified Feedrate and override can also be specified. Cutting feed can be started simultaneously with another PMCcontrolled axis. (iii) Reference position return (iv) Positioning at the machine coordinates (v) Dwell

PMC BMI First axis, PMC axis control data Second axis, PMC axis control data

CNC

First axis management

Pulse distribution

Servo control

Motor

Second axis management

Pulse distribution

Servo control

Motor

Command

Third axis management

Pulse distribution

Servo control

Motor

Third axis, PMC axis control data : :

Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for details.

409

16. AXIS CONTROL

B62564E1/02

16.2 Mirror Image Function

The mirror image function can be enabled or disabled for each axis by setting MIRx of parameter No. 12 or by using an external signal. When the function is enabled and a move command is specified for an axis in the positive direction, the machine moves and the coordinates change in the direction shown in the table below. Machine movement Automatic operation Manual operation CAUTION Negative direction Positive direction Machine coordinate Negative direction Positive direction Relative coordinate Negative direction Positive direction Absolute coordinate Positive direction Negative direction

The machine coordinate and absolute coordinate are updated in different directions along the specified axis. The workpiece coordinate system shifts as the machine moves. When the mirror image function is enabled for the Xaxis, the coordinate system shifts as shown below. Y

Machine movement after mirror image

Move command (Automatic operation)

Absolute coordi nate when mirror image is started

Absolute coordinate after mirror image on

Work coordinate system shiftvalue Origin of work coordinate system Work offset value Machine origin X

After a desired machining has been finished, move the machine to the position where the mirror image function was applied and disable the function. This cancels the shift of the workpiece coordinate system to zero. Alternatively, perform one of the following to set the shift of the workpiece coordinate system to zero. Manual reference position return Presetting the workpiece coordinate system (by using the G92.1 command or by specifying the preset operation on the MDI)

NOTE 1 The mirror image cannot be switched during axis movement. Always switch the mirror image during stopped state. NOTE 2 For mirror image during manual operation, either on or off of mirror image that was valid by setting operation or by external mirror image signal when the mode was switched to the manual operation is effective. Switching of mirror image state either by setting operation or by external mirror image signal is not effective in the manual operation.

410

II. MAINTENANCE

B62564E1/02

1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
1.1 Cleaning the Tape Reader
(a) Tape reader without reels No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Part to be cleaned Surface of the read head (lightdetection part) Surface of the read head (lightemitting part) Tape retainer Tape path Capstan Guide roller Pinch roller Machine assembly under the tape path plate Inside of the tape reader cover Reference drawing Fig. 1.1 (a) (1) Fig. 1.1 (a) (2) Fig. 1.1 (a) (3) Fig. 1.1 (a) (4) Fig. 1.1 (a) (5) Fig. 1.1 (a) (6) Fig. 1.1 (a) (7) Fig. 1.1 (a) (8) Fig. 1.1 (b) (9) Interval Every day Every day Every day Every day Every week Every week Every week Every month Clean with a cloth or blush. Every month Clean with Cl i h gauze or a thin hi brush b h moistened with pure alcohol. alcohol Cleaning procedure

(3) (5)
A8600060V009

(2) (4)

(10)
Feed magnet A860-00600-V003

(6) (1) (7)

(11)
Brake magnet A860-0060-V004

(8)

Fig. 1.1 (a) Front view of the tape reader without reels (with the cover removed)

(9)

Fig. 1.1 (b) Side view of the tape reader without reels 413

1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
(b) Tape reader with reels No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Part to be cleaned Surface of the read head (lightdetection part) Surface of the read head (lightemitting part) Tape retainer Tape path Capstan Guide roller Pinch roller Machine assembly under the tape path plate Inside of the tape reader cover Reference drawing Fig. 1.1 (c) (1) Fig. 1.1 (c) (2) Fig. 1.1 (c) (3) Fig. 1.1 (c) (4) Fig. 1.1 (c) (5) Fig. 1.1 (c) (6) Fig. 1.1 (c) (7) Fig. 1.1 (c) (8) Fig. 1.1 (d) (9) Interval Every day Every day Every day Every day Every week Every week Every week Every month

B62564E1/02

Cleaning procedure

Clean with Cl i h gauze or a thin hi brush b h alcohol moistened with pure alcohol.

Clean with a cloth or blush blush. Every month

(3) (6) (5)

(1)

(2)

(4) (6)

(6)

(6)

(7)

(8)

Fig. 1.1 (c) Front view of the tape reader with reels (with the cover removed)

(9)

Fig. 1.1 (d) Side view of the tape reader with reels

414

B62564E1/02

1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

1.2 Tape Reader Lubrication

(a) Tape reader without reels The points to be lubricated periodically and the intervals are as follows: No. 1 Lubrication point Magnet section See Fig.1.1 (a) (7) . Interval Every 3 months Every year Luna oil Lubricant (*1) Luna oil Amount 1 drop

Rocol paste

Apply a thin film of paste.

Rocol paste

415

1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
(b) Tape reader with reels The points to be lubricated periodically and the intervals are as follows: No. 1 Lubrication point Magnet section See Fig.1.2 (e) (1). Luna oil Interval Every 3 months Every year Lubricant (*1) Luna oil Rocol paste

B62564E1/02

Amount 1 drop Apply a thin film of paste.

Rocol paste

Guide roller section See Fig.1.2 (e) (2).

Every 6 months

Rocol oil

2 to 3 drops

Rocol oil

Tension arm guide roller See Fig.1.2 (f) (3). Rocol oil

Every 6 months

Rocol oil

2 to 3 drops

416

B62564E1/02

1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

(3)

(3)

2 (2) (1)

Fig. 1.2 (e) Front view of the tape reader with reels *1 Types of lubricants No. 1 2 3 Name Rocol oil Rocol paste Luna oil Trade name Rocol oil Rocol paste ROCOL APS Luna oil Manufacturer Sumitomo Metal Mining Co., Ltd. Sumitomo Metal Mining Co., Ltd. ROCOL CO. LTD.(U.K) Nippon Oil Co., Ltd.

ROCOL ASO ROCOL CO. LTD.(U.K)

417

1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

B62564E1/02

1.3 Adjusting the PhotoAmplifier of the Tape Reader with Reels

1 Punch about 40 cm of test tape consisting of alternating patterns of punched and unpunched positions as shown below (*1 and *2), then splice both ends to make an endless tape.
ISO code

EIA code

or

*U*U*U*U

DELETE CR

For adjustment, use the adjustment program included in the tape reader with reels. 2 Start the adjustment program. a) Set RELEASE, then press the FORWARD and REWIND buttons simultaneously. b) The AUTO and ALARM LEDs blink. c) The adjustment program mode is then entered.

d) Set the test tape(*3). e) Set REEL OFF. f) Press the FORWARD button. g) The tape starts running.

418

B62564E1/02
3 Adjustment

1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

a) The adjustment points are located at the right side, viewed from the rear of the tape reader with reels. (If they are not at the location indicated in the figure, they are located in section A(*4).) b) Turn SP until LD5 lights. c) Turn DATA until LD1 blinks(*5). If LD5 does not light, adjustment is impossible.

4 End of adjustment a) Press STOP.

b) Set RELEASE. c) Press FORWARD and STOP at the same time. d) The normal mode then returns. e) Before starting adjustment, make sure that the signal cables are connected properly.

*1 The paper tape used must conform to the following: Unpunched paper tape for information interchange : JIS C6243 Dimensions for punched paper tape for information interchange : JIS C6246 *2 If the tape reader is adjusted with black paper tape, then it is used with paper tape other than black, a read error may occur. When adjusting the output waveform of the photoamplifier, use blue, white, pink, yellow, or orange paper tape. Do not use black or gray. If the tape reader is adjusted with black or gray paper tape then used with blue, white, or pink, etc. paper tape, a read error occurs. Do not use black or gray paper tape for adjustment unless it is used in regular operation. *3 If the version of the program in the tape reader is version B or later, EIA test tape can also be used. *4 Loosen the four screws shown in the following figure to open the printed circuit board. The board swings open in the direction of the arrow with the lower side attached. After adjustment is completed, close the board and tighten the screws. 419

1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

B62564E1/02

Screw

Printed circuit board

Losen the screws. DATA

Rear

Front

LD0 to 7

Screw

Open

Screw

Be careful not touch the power supply unit which produces 5 V and 24 from 200 V VAC.

*5 If LD0 and LD3 blink when the DATA dial is turned, the following adjustment is needed:

DATA

DATA

LD3

LD1

1) Cause LD3 to blink. 2) Turn the DATA dial toward the center until LD1 starts blinking, then set DATA at that point.

420

B62564E1/02

1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

1.4 Cleaning the Air Filter (For the SelfStanding Cabinet Only)
If the air filter in the lower part at the rear of the unit is clogged by dust, the efficiency of dust collection drops, and the temperature inside the equipment may rise. Therefore the air filter needs to be cleaned. Clean the filter every week as follows: (1) Remove the filter retainer, then remove the air filter in the lower part at the rear of the unit. (2) Blow dust away from the internal side of the filter while shaking the filter lightly. (3) If the filter is still dirty, clean it with neutral cleanser, then dry it in the shade.

Air filter

421

2. REPLACING A FUSE

B62564E1/02

2. REPLACING A FUSE
If a fuse in the CNC system blows, find the cause, take appropriate action, then replace the fuse.

2.1 Fuse Specifications

The specifications of the fuses used in the CNC system are as follows: Table Units containing fuses and fuse specifications Unit name Power unit AI Power unit BI Connection unit Parts symbol F1,F2 F3 F4 F1,F2 F3 F4 F51 Capacity 7.5A 3.2A 5A 10A 5A 5A 1.6A Specifications A60L00010245#GP75 A60L00010075#3.2 A60L00010046#5.0 A60L00010245#GP100 A60L00010075#5.0 A60L00010046#5.0 A60L00010046#1.6 Use For 200 VAC input power supply For 9CRT (monochrome) For I/O For 200 VAC input power supply For 9CRT (monochrome) For I/O Protection from an external defect of machine side 24VDC line

2.2 Fuse Mounting Position

2.2.1 Power unit

Power unit AI or BI F1

F2

F3 F4

2.2.2 Connection unit

1.6A fuse (F51)

DI/DO connector

422

B62564E1/02

3. REPLACING BATTERIES

3. REPLACING BATTERIES
3.1 Replacing the Battery for Backing Up the Memory in the Control Unit
(1) Obtain a lithium battery (A98L00310007). (2) Turn on the power to the machine (NC). (The battery can be replaced when the NC is either on or off. Note that if the battery is replaced with the NC turned off, replacing the buttery must be completed within 30 minutes. Otherwise the NC memory contents may be lost. (3) Remove the battery case from the front panel of the power unit. Hold the upper and lower sides of the case, and pull it out toward you.

Front panel of the power unit Battery case

Battery A98L00310007

(4) Disconnect the connector from the battery. (5) Replace the battery, then attach the connector to a new battery. (6) Mount the battery case. (7) Turn off the machine (NC).

423

3. REPLACING BATTERIES

B62564E1/02

3.2 Replacing the Batteries of the Absolute Pulse Coder

(1) Prepare four commercially available alkaline dry cells, size D. (2) Turn on the power to the machine (NC). (Be sure to turn on the NC unit before replacing the batteries. If batteries are replaced when the power is off, the stored absolute position is lost.) (3) Loosen the screws of the battery case. For the location of the battery case, refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder. (4) Replace the batteries in the case. Be careful to install the new batteries with correct polarity. (Insert two batteries in one direction, and the other two in the opposite direction as shown below.)

Screw

(5) After replacement, install the cover. (6) Turn off the machine (NC).

Cover

424

B62564E1/02

4. TROUBLESHOOTING

4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 Symptom and Investigation
(1) Type of failure Check the mode. Check the display on the CRT/MDI. Check the CNC status indication. Check whether a positioning error occurred. If so, check on which axis the error occurred, and also check the magnitude of the error. Check whether a tool path error occurred. If so, check the magnitude of the error. Check whether the speed is normal. Check whether a miscellaneous function failed. Check the alarm number. (2) Frequency of failure Check when the failure occurred, and check the frequency of the failure. (Check whether the failure occurred while another machine was operating.) Check the frequency of the failure with the same workpiece. Find the program in which the failure occurred. Then, check the sequence number. Check whether the failure occurred in a specific mode. Check whether the failure is related to the operation of changing tools. Check whether the failure is related to the feedrate. (3) Repetition of failure Run the program tape several times in which the failure occurred. Check the values in the CNC, then compare them with the programmed values. Check to see whether the failure is due to an external factor. Check the stored offsets and the remaining distribution. Check the response to override (while changing the amount of override). Ask the operator to explain the symptoms of the failure.

425

4. TROUBLESHOOTING

B62564E1/02

4.2 Checking the Input Voltage, Ambient Conditions, Handling, Programming, Operation, Machine, and Interface
(1) Checking the input voltage Check whether the input voltage fluctuates. Check whether the input voltage drops. Check whether the front or rear door is open (door interlock). Check whether there is equipment in the factory using a large amount of current. Check whether there is an electrical discharge machine or welding machine operating in the factory. (2) Ambient conditions Check the temperature. Check for temperature changes. Check for a sudden temperature change. Check whether the filter is cleaned. Check whether the tape reader is dirty. Check whether there is oil or coolant splashed about. Check for vibration. Check whether the unit is exposed to direct sunlight. (3) External factors Check whether the machine has been repaired or adjusted recently. Check whether the power magnetics cabinet has been repaired or adjusted recently. Check whether the CNC unit has been repaired or adjusted recently. Check whether there is any source of noise nearby, such as a crane, high frequency sewing machine, or electrical discharge machine. Check whether a new machine has been installed nearby. Check whether there is any other CNC unit experiencing the same failure within the factory. Check whether the user has adjusted the inside of the CNC unit. Check whether the same failure occurred before. (4) Handling Check whether the operator has been trained properly. Check whether the operator has been replaced. Check whether the operator is familiar with the program. Check whether the program was completed too early or interrupted. Check whether the program includes incremental commands. Check whether the tool compensation is set correctly. Check whether modification to the tool compensation is made correctly. Check whether transition to another operation mode is made. Check whether the optional block skip function is used properly. Check whether the tape is set properly. Check if the part program code contains any errors. Check whether an erroneous operation was performed.

426

B62564E1/02
(5) Punched tape Check whether the tape is dirty. Check the tape for any folds or creases. Check whether the splice is normal. Check whether the program operated normally before. Check whether the tape is a copy of the master tape. Check whether the tape has been punched. Check whether the tape is punched correctly. Check whether the tape punch unit operates normally. Check whether a wrong tape is being used. Check whether the puncher operates properly. (6) Programming Check whether the used program is a new one.

4. TROUBLESHOOTING

Check whether the program was created according to the instructions explained in the operators manual. Check whether the order of addresses is valid. Check whether a failure occurs in a specific block. Check whether an error occurs in a subprogram. Check whether a listing of the tape is created for inspection. (7) Operation Check whether any change or adjustment was made in operation. Check if any fuses have blown. Check whether the emergency stop is still effective. Check whether the machine is ready for operation. Check whether an alarm has occurred. Check whether the MODE switch is set correctly. Check whether the tape reader switch is set correctly. Check whether the override is set to 0. Check whether a machine lock is applied. Check whether the system is in the feed hold status. (8) Machine Check whether the machine is prepared properly. Check whether the machine vibrates during operation. Check whether the tool tip is normal. Check the offset due to the change of tools. Check whether the backlash compensation is appropriate. Check whether changes in temperature result in any distortion in the machine parts. Check whether the workpiece is measured correctly. Check whether the measurement was made at a constant temperature. (For 1,C change in temperature, the length of a 1m piece of steel changes by 10.) Check whether the cables are in the normal state. (Check the radius of each curve in the cables, and also check for any flaws, twists, and abnormally pressed cables.) Check whether the signal lines are separated from the power lines. (9) Interface Check whether the power lines are installed separately from the CNC cables. Check whether the shielding is normal. Check whether parts such as relays, solenoids, and motors are provided with a noise suppressor.

427

4. TROUBLESHOOTING

B62564E1/02

4.3 Visually Checking the CNC System

(1) Checking the appearance of the control unit Check if the cabinet is broken anywhere. Check whether the CRT/MDI unit is normal. Check whether the filter is clean. Check whether the reader is clean. Check whether the reader door is closed. Check whether the unit was operated with the door left open. Check that the chips accumulated on the cabinet do not fall into the cabinet when the door is opened. (2) Tape reader Check whether the tape reader is dirty. Check whether the brake magnet works normally. (3) Inside of the control unit Check whether the control unit is dirty. Check whether the fan motor operates normally. Check whether the unit is damaged by corrosive gas. (4) Power supply unit Check whether the power supply unit is connected correctly. Check the fuses. Check the circuit breaker. Check whether the voltage level is within the allowable range. Check whether the shielding and cable duct are grounded correctly. Check whether the wiring path is correct. Check whether the terminals are tightened securely. (5) Grounding Check whether grounding is normal. Check whether the shielding is grounded normally. (6) Cables Check whether the cable connectors are connected securely. Check whether the internal cables are normal. Check whether the external cables are normal. Check the cables for flaws and twists. (7) Printed circuit board Check whether the printed circuit boards are installed securely. Check whether the plug connectors are connected normally. Check the mechanical conditions. (Check whether the printed circuit boards are distorted.) Check the version number. Check whether the printed circuit boards are connected to one another properly. (8) CRT/MDI unit Check whether the push buttons are normal. Check whether the tape cable is normal.

428

B62564E1/02

4. TROUBLESHOOTING

4.4 CNC Status Indication

The internal status of the CNC can be displayed.

4.4.1 How to display the CNC internal status

1 Press the function menu key to display the function selection keys. SETTING SERVICE MESSAGE CHAPTER

2 Press the [SERVICE] key. Then, the service screen appears. 3 If the service screen displayed does not contain diagnostic data, perform the following: Press the [CHAPTER] key to switch the soft keys to the chapter selection keys. PARAM PITCH DIAGNOS DSP .MEM

Press the [DIAGNSIS] key. Alternatively: Press the [SERVICE] key repeatedly until diagnostic data appears on the screen. 4 If the desired diagnostic data is not displayed on the screen: Using the page keys 41 Change pages by using page keys. 42 Using soft keys (i) Press the operation menu key to display the operation selection keys. INP-NO. +

(ii) Press the [INPNO]. key. Then, the soft keys are switched to the operation guidance keys. (VALUE) (iii) Enter the data number of the target diagnostic data. As the data number is entered, the soft keys are displayed as follows: EXEC 5 Press the [EXEC] key. Then the diagnostic data with the entered data number is displayed on the screen. The soft keys are returned to the operation selection keys.

429

4. TROUBLESHOOTING 4.4.2 Description of internal selection

(1) Indication of status in which no command is apparently executed No. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1001 0 Indication INPOSITION CHECK FEED RATE OVERRIDE JOG FEED OVERRIDE INT/START LOCK ON SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK WAIT REVOLUTION STOP POSITION CODER FOREGROUND READING BACKGROUND READING

B62564E1/02

Internal status when 1 is indicated Position check is in progress. The feedrate override is set to 0%. The jog feedrate override is set to 0%. Start lock/interlock is set on. The system waits for the speed arrival signal to go on. The system waits for the spindle 1revolution signal during threading. The system waits for the revolution of the position coder during feed per spindle revolution. A part program is being read in the foreground. A part program is being read in background editing.

1000

(2) Indication of the reset status The status of the input signals related to the reset and feed hold operations is indicated. No. 1010 7 6 5 4 Bit 3 RST When 1 is indicated ESP RRW ERS RST : : : : Emergency stop The reset & rewind signal is on. The external reset signal is on. The reset key is pressed. 2 ERS 1 RRW 0 ESP

A bit set to 1 means that the associated error explained above occurred. (3) TH alarm status indication The TH alarm status is indicated. No. Indication Meaning If a TH alarm occurs, the position of the character that caused this alarm is indicated as the number of characters counted from the top of the block. (Foreground TH alarm) The read code of the character that caused a TH alarm is indicated with a bit pattern. (Foreground TH alarm) If a TH alarm occurs, the position of the character that caused this alarm is indicated as the number of characters counted from the top of the block. (Background TH alarm) The read code of the character that caused a TH alarm is indicated with a bit pattern. (Background TH alarm)

1100 POSITION (CHARACTER)

1101 BIT PATTERN (CHARACTER) F 1100 POSITION (CHARACTER) B

1101 BIT PATTERN (CHARACTER) B (4) Indication of positional deviation

The positional deviation on each axis is indicated. No. Indication X SERVO ERROR Y SERVO ERROR Z SERVO ERROR : : Meaning Positional deviation on the Xaxis in detection units Positional deviation on the Yaxis in detection units Positional deviation on the Zaxis in detection units

3000

430

B62564E1/02
(5) Indication of servo control information Servo control information is indicated. 3010 to 3023 3030 to 3043 3050 to 3063 3070 to 3083 3090 to 3103 3110 to 3123 3130 to 3143 3150 to 3163 3170 to 3183 3190 to 3203 3210 to 3223 3230 to 3243 3250 to 3263 3270 to 3283 3290 to 3303 Servo control information for the 1st axis Servo control information for the 2nd axis Servo control information for the 3rd axis Servo control information for the 4th axis Servo control information for the 5th axis Servo control information for the 6th axis Servo control information for the 7th axis Servo control information for the 8th axis Servo control information for the 9th axis Servo control information for the 10th axis Servo control information for the 11th axis Servo control information for the 12th axis Servo control information for the 13th axis Servo control information for the 14th axis Servo control information for the 15th axis

4. TROUBLESHOOTING

Investigation of disconnection alarm and overload alarm If an overload alarm (SV 023) or disconnection alarm (SV 015) message appears on the CRT, check the diagnostic data (No. 3014 (1st axis), No. 3034 (2nd axis), No. 3054 (3rd axis), or the starting diagnostic number for the target axis plus 4). Then, confirm whether the display indicates the disconnection alarm or overload alarm. #7 OVL #6 LVAL #5 OVC : #7 = 1 #4 HCAL #3 HVAL #2 DCAL #1 FBAL #0 OFAL

Overload alarm

Disconnection alarm : #1 = 1 Then check the diagnostic data (No. 3015 (1st axis), No. 3035 (2nd axis), No. 3055 (3rd axis), or the starting diagnostic number for the target axis plus 5). Confirm the meaning of the alarm. From bits 7 and 4 at each address, the alarm can be determined in detail. See the following table: #7 ALDF #6 #5 #4 EXPC #3 #2 #1 #0

Alarm type Overheated motor Overheated amplifier Disconnection in the internal pulse coder (hardware) Disconnection in the separate pulse coder (hardware) Pulse coder disconnection (software) Example

7bit ALDF 1 0 1 1 0

4bit EXPC 0 0 0 1 0

If the SV 015 disconnection alarm occurs on the first axis, diagnostic data Nos. 3014 and 3015 contain the following: No. 3014 : 00000010 No. 3015 : 10110100 As shown above, bit 1 (FBAL) of diagnostic data No. 3014 is set to 1. At the same time, bit 7 (ALDF) and bit 4 (EXPC) of diagnostic data No. 3015 are both set to 1. Thus, the alarm indicates disconnection in the separate pulse coder (hardware).

431

4. TROUBLESHOOTING
Digital servo alarms #7 OVL #6 LVAL #5 OVC #4 HCAL #3 HVAL #2 DCAL #1 FBAL #0 OFAL

B62564E1/02

Symbol OFAL FBAL DCAL

Description LSI OVERFLOW An overflow alarm has occurred in the digital servo. PULCO DISCONNECTION A pulse coder disconnection alarm has occurred. EXCESS I FORM MOTOR A regenerative discharge circuit alarm has occurred in the servo amplifier. (The DC LED on the servo amplifier is on.) EXCESS V TO MOTOR An overvoltage alarm has occurred in the servo amplifier. (The HV LED on the servo amplifier is on.) ABNORMAL CURRENT IN SERVO An abnormal current alarm has occurred in the servo amplifier. (The HC LED on the servo amplifier is on.) EXCESS CURRENT IN SERVO An overcurrent (overload) alarm has occurred in the servo amplifier. POWER V TOO LOW An insufficient voltage alarm has occurred in the servo amplifier. (The LV LED on the servo amplifier is on.) SV OVERLOAD An overload alarm has occurred in the servo motor or servo amplifier. If the alarm is activated from the servo amplifier, either the servo amplifier, separate discharge unit, or power transformer has overheated. (The OH LED on the servo amplifier is on.)

HVAL

HCAL

OVC

LV

OVL

432

B62564E1/02
Investigation of absoluteposition detection alarm

4. TROUBLESHOOTING

When optional absolute position detection is performed, an alarm may be detected at poweron. In this case, SV101 DATA ERROR (ABS PCDR) or OT032 NEED ZRN (ABS PCDR) is indicated. The cause of the alarm is indicated in the diagnostic data. If alarm SV101 DATA ERROR (ABS PCDR) or OT032 NEED ZRN (ABS PCDR) is indicated on the CRT, the diagnostic data (No. 3018 (1st axis), No. 3038 (2nd axis), No. 3058 (3rd axis), or the starting number of the target axis plus 8) contains detailed information. #7 APMVAL #6 APPER #5 APFER #4 APTER #3 APCER #2 APBATZ #1 #0

APPLSM APNZRN

Symbol

Meaning (action)

APNZRN The reference position is not associated with absolute position detection. (Action : Associate the reference position with absolute position detection.) APPLSM A pulse error alarm has been raised. (Action : Associate the reference position with absolute position detection.) APBATZ The battery voltage of the AB pulse coder is zero. (Action : Replace the battery, then associate the reference position with absolute position detection.) A communication error occurred during data transmission. (Action : Replace the pulse coder.) A timeout occurred during data transmission. (Action : Replace the pulse coder.) A framing occurred during data transmission. (Action : Replace the pulse coder.) A parity error occurred during data transmission. (Action : Replace the pulse coder.) A motor excess deviation alarm has occurred. This alarm is raised when the machine movement at poweron is detected as exceeding 24000 pulses. (Action : Make sure that the machine does not move when the power is turned on.)

APCER APTER APFER APPER APMVAL

433

5. FAILURE DIAGNOSIS GUIDANCE

B62564E1/02

5. FAILURE DIAGNOSIS GUIDANCE

As a knowledge base, the knowhow of experts who are familiar with troubleshooting and corrective actions against various possible machine failures can be stored in memory of the Series 15. Using the knowledge base, the inference engine included in the Series 15 traces the cause of a failure in the machine according to the same process used by experts. The operator only needs to perform simple conversational operations with the CRT/MDI unit, such as selecting a symptom, and answering questions as needed. Then, the Series 15 diagnoses the failure in the same way as an expert. The failure diagnosis expert system varies according to the contents of the knowledge base. Refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder for detailed operations. An example of operation is shown below. 1 Suppose that automatic operation cannot be started. Press the MESSAGE soft key several times to select the diagnosis screen. Failure Diagnosis In the example at the left, four diagnosis items are provided. 1 2 3 4 Automatic operation Manual operation ATC APC

Select an item to be diagnosed. To diagnose an automatic operation failure, for example, select item 1. 2 Failure Diagnosis 1 2 Automatic operation does not actuate. The machibe does not actuate during automatic operation

Then, detailed diagnosis items for automatic operation are displayed. When item 1 is selected, the failure is diagnosed based on the knowledge base.

434

B62564E1/02

5. FAILURE DIAGNOSIS GUIDANCE

3 Generally, the states of input/output signals are checked automatically. Only items that require the operators confirmation appear as shown below: Failure Diagnosis Check to see if bit 0 of DGN 005 can be turned on or off by switching the Start SW on the ma chine operator's panel. 1. 2 It turns on/off. It does not turns on/off.

4 When the inference about the cause of the failure has been made, the cause and action to be taken are displayed. Failure Diagnosis Automatic operation is not started due to open ing of the splash guard. The limit switch which checks the splash guard is opening and closing may be damaged. Con firm it.

435

APPENDIX

B62564E1/02

APPENDIX A . STATUS WHEN TURNING THE POWER ON, WHEN RESET

APPENDIX A. STATUS WHEN TURNING THE POWER ON, WHEN RESET

f: The status is not changed or the movement is continued. : The status is cancelled or the movement is interrupted. Item Offset value Setting dat Se ata Data set by the MDI setting operation parameter Programs in memory Contents in the buffer storage Display of sequence number Other data ta One shot G code When turning power on f f f f When reset f f f f f ( Note 1 )

Modal G code

Initial G codes ( For G20 Initial G codes. and G21, the one effective G20/G21 and G22/G23, before cutting off the pow- not change. er remains effective. ) Zero Zero Zero f f Depends on system parameter LVK ( Data NO. 6000 ) ( Note 2 )

F, E S, T, M L Work coordinate value Movement Dwell Op peration n during exe xecution Issurance of M, S and T codes Tool offset Tool nose radius compensation Storing called subprogram number Rewind

439

APPENDIX A . STATUS WHEN TURNING THE POWER ON, WHEN RESET

B62564E1/02

Item ALM NOT READY LSK BUF REFERENCE POINT RETURN COMPLETION LED S and T codes M code M, S and T strobe signals Spindle speed signal ( S12 bits/S aganogue signal ) NC ready signal ( MA, MB ) Servo ready signal CYCLES START LED FEED HOLD LED

When turning power on Extinguishes if there is no cause for the alarm Lights Extinguishes

When reset Extinguishes if there is no cause for the alarm ( lights in emergency stop ) Lights Extinguishes f f f

Out utput sign nals fo for LE EDs

ON ON ( When other than servo alarm )

f ON ( When other than servo alarm )

NOTE 1 When a program is returned to its head, the start program number is displayed. NOTE 2 When a reset is performed during execution of a subprogram, execution returns to the head of the main program by the rewind operation. Execution cannot be started from the middle of the subprogram.

440

B62564E1/02

APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES

APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES 1. GENERAL

The following two interfaces are used for data input/output between the Series 15 and input/output units. (i) RS232C interface (ii) RS422 interface Table Name and specification of Interfaces RS232C Interface Serial voltage interface ( Startstop system ) 50 to 19200 baud Possible Possible 100m ( When 4800 baud or less ) 50m ( When 9600 baud or less ) ( depending on I/O equipment ) Remarks RS232C is not name of I/O equipment. Its EIA standard. RS422 Balanced transmission, serial interface ( Startstop system ) 50 to 86400 baud Possible Possible Approx. 800m ( When 4800 baud or less ) ( depending on I/O equipment )

Baud rate Tape punch Tape reading Cable length ( Max. )

RS422 is not name of I/O equipment. Its EIA standard.

Specifying reader/punch interface A, which is a Series 15 option, enables the following two channels to be used: (a) Connector JD5A on main CPU board (printed circuit board of control unit) RS232C (b) Connector JD5B on main CPU board (printed circuit board of control unit) RS232C This interface, however, cannot be used if a tape reader incorporated into an NC cabinet is used. Specifying reader/punch interface B and serial port A or B also enables the following two channels to be used: (c) Connector JD6D on Sub board (printed circuit board of control unit) RS422 (d) Connector JD5J on Sub board (printed circuit board of control unit) RS232C For the parameters related to the RS232C and RS422 interfaces, see Appendix 7.4.15.

441

APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES

B62564E1/02

2. INTERFACE CONNECTOR POSITIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENT

(1) Main CPU board

POS. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 JD5A ( RS-232-C ) JD5B ( RS-232-C )

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

442

B62564E1/02
(2) Sub board

APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES

POS. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 JD5J ( RS-232-C ) JD6D ( RS-422 )

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

443

APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES

(3) Pin assignment

B62564E1/02

JD6D RS 422 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 RD
*RD

JD5A JD5B JD5J SD

*SD

RS 232 C

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

RD 0V DR 0V CS 0V CD 0V

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

SD 0V ER 0V RS 0V

RT
*RT

TT
*TT

CS
*CS

RS
*RS

DM 0V
*DM

TR
*TR

( + 24V )

+ 24V

( + 24V )

+ 24V

20

444

B62564E1/02

APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES

3. RS232C INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS

3.1 Names of RS232C Interface Signals
The RS232C interface uses the signals shown in Fig. 3.1 (a).

CNC

Output Input

SD (Send Data) RD (Receive Data) RS (Request to Send) CS (Clear to Send) ER (Equipment Ready) DR (Data Set Ready) CD (Carrier Detect) SG (Signal Ground) FG (Frame Ground) When not using DR, connect DR and ER. Be sure to connect ER and CD. When not using CS, connect CS and RS.

Fig. 3.1 (a) RS232C Interface

445

APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES

B62564E1/02

3.2 Signal Description of RS232C Interface

Signal name SD RD RS RS232C circuit number 103 104 105 I/O Output Input Input Send Data Receive Data Request to Send Description Start bit Stop bit

ON OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ( When ISO code H0I is sent)

Sending request: This signal is set to on when NC starts sending data and is turned off when transmission ends. When this signal and the DR signal are on, the NC unit can send data. For this reason, if the input/output unit cannot keep up with processing due to punchout, etc., this signal is turned off to stop data transmission from the NC unit. Data transmission stops after two characters, including the data currently being sent, have been sent. When not using this signal, be sure to connect it to the RS signal of the NC. When this signal is on, it indicates that the input/ output unit is ready for operation. This signal usually connects to the signal (ER signal of the input/output unit) indicating that the power of the input/output unit is on (see Note below). The NC unit sends data when this signal is on. If this signal is turned off during data transmission, alarm SR820 DR OFF, SR830 DR OFF, or SR840 DR OFF occurs. When not using this signal, be sure to connect it to the ER signal of the NC. When this signal is on, it indicates that the NC unit is ready for operation. Also, when this signal is on, the input/output unit must regard the SD signal as significant information. Be sure to connect this signal to the ER signal of the NC in the connecting cable because this signal is not used to connect the input/output unit.

CS

106

Input

Clear to Send

DR

107

Input

Data Set Ready

ER

108.2

Output

Equipment Ready

CD

109

Input

Carrier Detect

SG FG

102 101

Signal grounding Frame grounding

NOTE

Signal on/off state is defined as follow.

3 V or lower Function Signal condition OFF Marking

+3 V or higher ON Spacing

446

B62564E1/02

APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES

3.3 RS232C Interface Transmission Methods

(a) Startstop transmission Usually, synchronous and startstop transmission are provided for serial interfaces. The Series 15/150 uses startstop transmission. Startstop transmission: In this transmission, each transmitted character consists of eight bits preceded by a start bit and followed by two stop bits. One character in start-stop

b1 Start bit

b2

b3

b4

b5

b6

b7

b8 Stop bits (2 bits)

Data bit (8 bit including one parity bit)

(b) Codes (i) EIA code + control codes DC1 to DC4 (ii) ISO code + control codes DC1 to DC4 Input/output units must be able to identify the following control codes output from the NC unit: Character DC 1 DC 2 DC 3 DC 4 Tape reader start Tape punch designation Tape reader stop Tape punch release
f

5
f f f f

4
f f f f

2
f f

1
f

NOTE

The above control codes are always used irrespective of EIA and ISO.

The RS232C interface uses control codes DC1 to DC4. (a) The NC unit can send control codes DC1 to DC4 to control input/output units. (b) When an input/output unit cannot keep up with processing (when the NC sends data) (i) The CS signal of the NC can be used to temporarily stop data transmission from the NC. Data transmission is stopped within two characters, including the data currently being sent, after the off CS signal has been input to the NC. When the CS signal is turned on again, data transmission is restarted. (ii) The NC unit stops data transmission within ten characters after the input/output unit has sent control code DC3 to the NC. When the input/output unit sends control code DC1, the NC restarts data transmission. If the input/output unit is equipped with an ISO/EIA converter, it must satisfy the specifications listed in Table 3.3 (a).

447

APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES

Table 3.3 (a) Tape code
ISO code Character 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z DEL NUL BS HT LF or NL CR SP % ( ) + : / . # $ & * , ; < = > ? @
f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f

B62564E1/02

EIA code 4
f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f * f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f

6
f f f f f f f f f f

5
f f f f f f f f f f

Character 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z Del Blank BS Tab CR or EOB SP ER ( 245 ) ( 247 ) +

6
f

4
f f f

1 Numeral
f

Meaning 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N

Address ?

f f f f f f f f f f f

f f

f f

f f f f f f f f

f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f

f f f f f f f f f f f f f

f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f

f f f f f

f f f f

Not used at significant data zone in ISO code. Assumed as address 0 at EIA code. Address
f

P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

* *

f f f

f f f f

f f f

Delete( cancel erroneous hole ) No holes. Not used at significant data zone is EIA code. Back space Tabulator End of block Carriage return Space Absolute rewind stop Control out( start of comment ) Control in( end of comment )

f f f f

f f

f f f f

f f

* *

* f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f * f *

Plus sign Minus sign Assumed as program number in ISO code.

/ .
f

f f

f f

f f f

f f

Optional block skip Decimal point Sharp Dollar symbol Ampersand Apostrophe Asterisk Comma Semicolon Left angle bracket Equal mark Right angle bracket Question mark Commerical at mark Quotation mark

&

* * *

* * * * * * * *

448

B62564E1/02

APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES

CAUTION

When the input/output unit is equipped with the ISO/EIA converter, pay special attention to the following items listed in Table 3.3 (a): Control out (Comment field start) Control in (Comment field end) EIA code (. . . . . . . . . . . . . ) CR O . . . . . . . . . . .

Condition 1

Condition 1

Condition 3

Condition 2

ISO code

( . . . . . . . . . . . . .)

LF

: . . . . . . . . . . .

Condition 1 :To represent left parenthesis ( of the ISO code in the EIA code, bits 2, 4, and 5 of the EIA code are punched out. To represent right parenthesis ) of the ISO code in the EIA code, bits 2, 4, and 7 of the EIA code are punched out. Condition 2: Character O of the EIA code corresponds to colon : of the ISO code. Condition 3: : code. CR of the EIA code corresponds to LF of the ISO

NOTE

Control codes DC1 to DC4 are the transmission codes output from NC. These codes need not be punched out on an NC tape.

(iii) Transmission rate (baud rate) The transmission rate (baud rate) indicates how many bits are transmitted per second. In the Series 15, the following baud rates can be selected: 50, 100, 110, 150, 200, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 2800, and 9600 Example When the baud rate is 110 When one character consists of one start bit, eight data bits, and two stop bits (11 bits in total), the number of characters transmitted per second is calculated from the following formula: Number of characters/second = 110 characters/second (max.) 11 (iv) Cable length The cable length depends on each input/output unit. For the actual cable length, consult with the manufactures of the input/output units. When cable A (A66L00010041) is used, the NC assumes the following cable length according to the baud rate and interface to be used: RS232C 4800 bauds or less: 100 m or less 9600 bauds: 50 m or less RS422 4800 bauds or less: 800 m or less

449

APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES

B62564E1/02

Timing chart when the NC receives data (loading data into memory) (1) The NC unit sends control code DC1 to the input/output unit. (2) When it receives DC1, the input/output unit starts sending data to the NC. (3) When the NC cannot keep up with processing, the NC sends control code DC3 to the input/output unit. (4) When it receives DC3, the input/output unit stops data transmission to the NC. Data transmission stops within 10 characters after control code DC3 has been sent. (If more than ten characters are sent, alarm SR82, SR83, or SR84 occurs.) (5) The NC sends control code DC1 to the input/output unit after processing has terminated. (6) When it receives DC1, the input/output unit restarts data transmission to NC. (Data transmission, however, must be restarted beginning with data immediately following the previously sent data.) (7) When data read is completed, the NC sends control code DC3 to the input/output unit. (8) When it receives DC3, the input/output unit stops data transmission. 10 ms or longer

100 ms or longer

ER (Output) RS (Output) SD (Output) RD (Input) DR (Input) CS (Input) Up to 10 characters 1 ms or longer

DC1 DC3

DC1 DC3 ER code

Timing chart when the NC sends data (punch out) (1) The NC unit sends control code DC2 to the input/output unit. (2) The NC sends punched out information to the input/output unit. (3) When the input/output unit cannot keep up with data processing (a) When the CS signal of the NC is turned off, the NC stops data transmission within two characters, including the data currently being sent. When the CS signal is turned on again, the NC restarts data transmission. (See Fig. A). (b) The input/output unit sends control code DC3 to the NC. NC stops data transmission within ten characters after DC3 has been sent. The input/output unit sends control code DC1 to the NC. When it receives DC1, NC restarts data transmission. (See Fig. B.) (4) If the CS signal of the NC is turned on when the input/output unit side terminates data processing, the NC restarts data transmission beginning with the data immediately following the previously sent data. (5) The NC sends control code DC4 to the input/output unit when data transmission is completed.

450

B62564E1/02

APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES

10 ms or longer ER (Output) RS (Output) SD (Output) DR (Input) CS (Input)

100 ms or longer

DC2 DC4 1 ms or longer within 10 characters Fig. A

10 ms or longer ER (Output) RS (Output) SD (Output)

100 ms or longer

RD (Input)

DC2 DC4 DC3 DC1 within 10 characters 1 ms or longer Fig. B

DR (Input) CS (Input)

451

APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES

B62564E1/02

3.4 Connection between RS232C Interface and I/O Device

NC

SD RD RS CS ER DR CD SG FG

SD RD RS CS ER DR CD SG FG

I/O device side

NC

SD RD RS CS ER DR CD SG FG

SD RD RS CS ER DR CD SG FG 452

I/O device side

B62564E1/02

APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES

In the cable connecting the input/output unit and RS232C interface, the SG signal and each signal must be paired as shown in the figure below.

CNC or PMC SD RD RS CS SG ER DR

External device RD SD CS RS SG DR ER

Cable: 10 pairs 0.18 mm2, with total shield

453

APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES

B62564E1/02

4. RS422 INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS

4.1 Names of RS422 Interface Signals
The RS422 interface uses the signals shown in Fig. 4.1 (a).

CNC or PMC-J

CD3 1 2 10 11 5 6 14 15 12 13 16 17 3 4 7

SD
*SD

Send data Receive data Request to send Clear to send Receiver ready Data mode Terminal (CNC or PMC-J) ready Short with TR if RR is not used. Short with TR if DM is not used.

RD
*RD

RS
*RS

CS
*CS

Short with RS if CS is not used.

RR
*RR

DM (DR)

*DM (*DR)

TR (ER)

*TR (*ER)

SG

FG

Signal ground Security ground

Fig. 4.1(a) RS422 interface

454

B62564E1/02

APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES

4.2 Explanation of RS422 Interface Signals

Name SD RD RS RS422 circuit No. 103 104 105 Input/ output Output Input Output Send Data Receive Data Request to Send ON OFF Description Start bit Stop bit

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ( When ISO code H0I is transmitted. )

This signal is turned on when data transmission from the NC starts. It is turned off when data transmission terminates. When both this signal and the DM signal are on, the NC can send data. For this reason, if the input/output unit cannot keep up with processing due to punchout, etc., this signal is turned off to stop data transmission from NC. Data transmission stops after two characters, including the data currently being sent, have been sent. When not using this signal, be sure to connect it to the RS signal. When this signal is on, it indicates that the input/output unit is ready for operation. This signal is usually connected to the signal (TR signal of the input/output unit) indicating that the power of the input/output unit is on (see Note below). The NC sends data when this signal is on. If this signal is turned off during data transmission, alarm SR870 DR OFF occurs. When not using this signal, be sure to connect it to the TR signal of the NC. When this signal is on, it indicates that NC is ready for operation. Also, when this signal is on, the input/ output unit must regard the SD signal as significant information. When this signal is on, it indicates that the input/output unit can send data to NC. When not using this signal, be sure to connect it to the TR signal of the NC. This signal is not used.

CS

106

Input

Clear to Send

DM (DR)

107

Input

Data Mode

TR (ER)

108.2

Output

Terminal Ready

RR

109

Input

Receiver Ready

TT SG FG

113 102 101

Output

Transmission timing Signal ground Security ground

NOTE

Signal ON and OFF are as follows:

A<B Function Signal condition OFF Marking

A>B ON Spacing A B

Driver Receiver 455

A B

APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES

B62564E1/02

4.3 RS422 Interface Transmission Methods

See Section 3.3 RS232C Interface Transmission Methods.

4.4 Connection between RS422C Interface and Input/Output Unit

NC

CD3 1 2

I/O device side SD SD

*SD

10 11 5 6

14 15 12 13 16 17 3 4

*SD

RD RS CS RR

RD
*RD

*RD

RS
*RS

*RS

CS
*CS

*CS

RR
*RR

*RR

DM

DM
*DM

*DM

TR SG FG

TR
*TR

*TR

SG

FG

456

B62564E1/02

APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES

CNC

CD3 1 2 10 11 5 6 14 15 12 13 16 17 3 4 7 SD
*SD

External device side SD

*SD

RD
*RD

RD
*RD

RS
*RS

RS
*RS

CS
*CS

CS
*CS

RR
*RR

RR
*RR

DM
*DM

DM
*DM

TR
*TR

TR
*TR

SG FG

SG FG

Cabling to I/O devices is done as follows, and pair each signals.

CNC
*SD

External device SD
*RD *SD *CS *RS *RR *TR

RD SD CS

*RD *RS *CS *TR

RD

RS

CS

RS

TR

RR

*RR

RR

TR

SG

SG

Cable: 8 pairs 0.3mm2 , with total shield.

457

APPENDIX C. WARNING MESSAGE LIST

B62564E1/02

APPENDIX C. WARNING MESSAGE LIST

Message PARAMETER/SETTING DATA/MACRO VARIABLE CANT REWRITE (MDI EXECUTING) PARAMETER/SETTING DATA/MACRO VARIABLE CANT REWRITE (RESETTING) PARAMETER/SETTING DATA/MACRO VARIABLE CANT REWRITE (MODE CHANGING) KEY IN DATA FORMAT ERROR WRITE PROTECT (MEMORY PROTECTION KEY IN EFECT) WRITE PROTECT (DATA NUMBER 8000#0/PWE IS 0) CHANGE TO MDI MODE DATA IS OUT OF RANGE TOO MANY DIGITS START REJECT Meaning Because MDI operation is being performed, neither parameters, setting data, nor macro variables can be rewritten. Because reset operation is being performed, neither parameters, setting data, nor macro variables can be rewritten. Because mode switching is being performed, neither parameters, setting data, nor macro variables can be rewritten. Enter data with keys. The format is illegal. Input is disabled because the memory protection key (workpiece coordinates, offset values, and programs) is on. Parameter input is disabled because PWE (bit 0) of parameter No. 8000 (enable/disable parameter write) is set to 0. An attempt was made to input parameters in mode other than the MDI mode. Place the system in the MDI mode. An attempt was made to input a value, but the value exceeded the allowable range. An attempt was made to input a value, but it was longer than the maximum allowable number of digits. The start of automatic operation is not accepted. (1)Automatic operation pause signal *SP is low. (2)An alarm exists. (3)The SRN signal has been sent. (4)The program the operator wants to execute is now being edited in the background. (5)PTR is not ready in the tape mode. An attempt was made to enter data for a parameter, but input for that parameter was not allowed. Data is missing. The external input/output device channels are being used, so a device cannot be used unless the operation is terminated. To release this state, reset the system. Although no program was selected, an attempt was made to perform editing. Before editing, select a program by searching for its program number or registering the program. ORIGIN operation is disabled because the system is in the reset or feed hold state. Editing is disabled because the system is in the reset or feed hold state. Release the reset or feed hold state. Editing of a program is disabled because that program is currently running. An attempt was made to register a new program with an existing program number. Because the program memory area is full, no more programs can be registered. An attempt was made to register parameters in a state other than the emergency stop state. Place the system in the emergency stop state.

LOCKED PARAMETER DATA NOT FOUND DEVICE IS ALREADY IN USE

NO PROGRAM SELECTED

ORIGIN IMPOSSIBLE (IN RESET OR FEED HOLD) EDIT REJECT (IN RESET OR FEEDHOLD) EDIT REJECT (PROGRAM IN OPERATING) ALREADY EXISTS NO MORE PROGRAM CANT BE ENTERED NOT EMERGENCY STOP

THE NUMBER OF PROGRAMS IS OUT Because the number of registered programs has reached the maximum OF RANGE allowable number, no more programs can be registered.

458

B62564E1/02
Message GUARDED WORD

APPENDIX C. WARNING MESSAGE LIST

Meaning An attempt was made to edit a word that cannot be edited. For example, this message appears when an attempt is made to alter or delete a program number. An attempt was made to write a program to tape, but no program number was found at the beginning of the program. The command cannot be used in the current CNC status. (This message appears when HERE is specified at the beginning in program verification or when a program restart is specified during program restart operation.) Although a program was running in the background, an attempt was made to edit that program. An attempt was made to edit a program in the background, but the program was being used in the foreground. (The program, however, can be edited in the background when the program is being reset and rewound in the foreground.) The cursor was used to select a program, or an attempt was made to edit a program, but the program could not be displayed (when a parameter is set to suppress the display of that program during operation or when the program is encrypted). No option is given to a specified command. The parameter for selecting the graphic display axis (parameter No. 7703) is not set. Another user (such as the PC) tried to use the graphic CPU. Workpiece zero point manual setting was performed on the external workpiece zero point offset. The tool has attempted to enter an area set as inhibited by stored stroke limit 1 during manual movement in the positive direction. Backing out the tool in the negative direction automatically clears this warning message. The tool has attempted to enter an area set as inhibited by stored stroke limit 1 during manual movement in the negative direction. Backing out the tool in the positive direction automatically clears this warning message. An attempt was made to use the repeat search function when neither the forward nor backward search function had been executed. Before using the repeat search function, execute either the forward or backward function. The previous forward or backward search operation was invalid for the NC mode screen on which you attempted to use the repeat search function. Retry the forward or backward search function by starting from scratch. On the signal selection screen, an attempt was made to newly register a previously registered address.

NO PROGRAM NUMBER COMMAND ILLEGAL USE

BACKGROUND EDIT REJECT (PROGRAM IN OPERATING) BACKGROUND EDIT REJECT (SAME PROGRAM ON THE FOREGROUND)

INVISIBLE PROGRAM

NO OPTION GRAPHIC AXIS NUMBER NOT SET FAIL TO OCCUPY GRAPHIC CPU EXTERNAL WORKPIECE ZERO NOT INPUT +OVERTRAVEL(SOFT1)

OVERTRAVEL(SOFT1)

CAN NOT REPEAT (BUFFER IS EMPTY)

CAN NOT REPEAT (FUNCTION IS DIFFERENT) ALREADY EXISTS

459

APPENDIX D. LIST OF OPERATIONS

B62564E1/02

APPENDIX D. LIST OF OPERATIONS

Classification Clear Function Data protection key KEY 1 PWE = 1 DATA No. 8000 Mode selection Power ON Function key OFFSET Operation menu key
ALL ALLCLR

Tool offset Value One Program Input (program number not changed) One Program Input (program number changed or added)

WEAR

, or

GEOMETRY READ

KEY 3

EDIT

PRGRM

Operation menu key

1PRGRM

NEW

KEY 3

EDIT

PRGRM

Operation menu key READ (PROG #) Program number

EXEC

D Data I Input From Tape Add Program Registration of all programs Pitch Error Compensation amount KEY 3 KEY 3 f EDIT EDIT Emergency SW. ON. MDI or Emergency switch ON. PRGRM PRGRM SERVICE

Operation menu key 1PRGRM ADD Operation menu key

PITCH

READ

READ

ALL

READ ON: 1 0

Parameter

SERVICE

PARAM

INPNo. EXEC

OFF: INPUT +INPUT

Data No.

Offset Value Data Input D I From MDI

KEY 1

OFFSET

Operation menu key INPUT (Absolute input) +INPUT (Incremental input) Offset value
EXEC

Setting Data

KEY 2

MDI

SETTING

Operation menu key HANDY (Setting relating to I/O) GENERAL (Settable parameter)
1: 0: ON OFF

Data

EXEC

(VALUE)

Parameter, Pitch error compensation data

Operation menu key EDIT SERVICE

ALL PARAM PITCH

PUNCH

Operation menu key Offset Value O Output EDIT OFFSET

ALL TOOL WRK.ZER

PUNCH

All Program

KEY 3

EDIT

PRGRM

Operation menu key

ALL

PUNCH

Operation menu key One Program KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM

THIS

PUNCH (PROG #)

or

PUNCH

Program number Program No. Search (Programs in memory) Sequence No. Search (Sequence No. in memory) Sequence No. Search (Sequence Nos. on tape) KEY 3 EDIT or MEMORY PRGRM

EXEC

Operation menu key FWSRCH (PROG #) Program number

EXEC

S Search h

KEY 3

EDIT or MEMORY

PRGRM

Operation menu key FWSRCH (SEQ #) Sequence number

EXEC

TAPE

PRGRM

Operation menu key FWSRCH (SEQ #) Sequence number

EXEC

460

B62564E1/02
Data protection key PWE = 1 DATA No. 8000

APPENDIX D. LIST OF OPERATIONS

Classification

Function

Mode selection

Function key
CHAPTER TEXT Operation menu key FWSRCH or BWSRCH (WORD) Word to be searched EXEC

Word Search (Words in memory) Search Address Search (Addresses in memory) Deletion of all Programs Currently displayed program Disignated program

KEY 3

EDIT

PRGRM

KEY 3

EDIT

PRGRM

CHAPTER TEXT Operation menu key FWSRCH or BWSRCH (WORD) Address to be searched EXEC

KEY 3

EDIT

PRGRM

Operation menu key DELETE PROGRAM ALL EXEC Operation menu key PROGRAM THIS
DELETE

Deletion of a Program

KEY 3

EDIT

PRGRM

Operation menu key DELETE PROGRAM (PROG #) Program number

EXEC

Deletion of words, from cursor positioned to designated word Deletion of words from cursor position to EOB Program P Editing Deletion of one word Alternation of a word

KEY 3

EDIT

PRGRM

Operation menu key A(WORD) Word Operation menu key

AEOB

DELETE EXEC

KEY 3

EDIT

PRGRM

DELETE

KEY 3

EDIT

PRGRM

Operation menu key or

DELETE

DLTWRD

WORD

KEY 3

EDIT

PRGRM

Operation menu key ALTER (WORD) Word to be changed

EXEC

Insertion of a word

KEY 3

EDIT

PRGRM

Operation menu key INSERT (WORD) Word to be inserted

EXEC

All Program Memory Arrangement Currently Selected Program Memory Arrangement Designated Program Memory Arrangement Comparison all Programs in Memory with those on tape Comparison one C Comparison i Program in Memory with that on tape Comparison from Current Position

KEY 3

EDIT

PRGRM

Operation menu key

ALL

CONDENS

KEY 3

EDIT

PRGRM

Operation menu key

THIS

CONDENS

KEY 3

EDIT

PRGRM

Operation menu key CONDENS (PROG #) Program number

EXEC

EDIT

PRGRM

Operation menu key

ALL

VERIFY

EDIT

PRGRM

Operation menu key

1PRGRM

VERIFY

EDIT

PRGRM

Operation menu key

HERE

VERIFY

461

APPENDIX E. CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN ENGLISH KEY AND SYMBOLIC KEY (Series 15)

B62564E1/02

APPENDIX E. CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN ENGLISH KEY AND SYMBOLIC KEY (Series 15)
Table : Correspondence between English key and Symbolic key (Series 15)
Name English key Symbolic key Name English key Symbolic key

RESET key

CANCEL key

CAN

POSITION key

POS

DELETE key

DELETE

PROGRAM key

PROG

ALTER/ CALCULATION key

ALTER CALC

OFFSET key

OFFSET

MMC key

MMC

PCHECK key

PCHECK

PMC/CNC key

PMC CNC

SETTING key

SETTING

INPUT/INSERT key

INPUT INSERT

SERVICE key

SERVICE

SHIFT key

SHIFT

MESSAGE key

MESSAGE

PAGE UP key

PAGE

OTHERS key

OTHERS

PAGE DOWN key

PAGE

EOB/HELP key

EOB HELP

462

INDEX
A
ABSOLUTEPOSITION DETECTION, 405 ACTIONS REQUIRED FOR ALARMS, 152 Adaptor lamp conditions, 400 Adjusting the PhotoAmplifier of the Tape Reader with Reels, 418 Alarm, 406 Alarm history, 376 Alarm Message Display, 326 All Axes Machine Lock, 136 Arithmetic key (SHIFT or ALTER key), 39 AUTOMATIC OPERATION, 93 Automatically inserting sequence numbers, 177 Auxiliary Function Lock, 136 AXIS CONTROL, 409 Axis Control by the PMC, 409 CNC program output, 395 CNC Status Indication, 429 Collating Programs, 164 Connection between RS232C Interface and I/O Device, 452 Connection between RS422C Interface and Input/Output Unit, 456 Connection unit, 422 Contents to be displayed and operations when the MMC is installed, 29 Coordinate System Related Data Display Function, 383 Copying and moving a program, 169 CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN ENGLISH KEY AND SYMBOLIC KEY (Series 15), 462 CRT SCREEN SAVING FUNCTION, 386 Current Position Display, 322 Currentposition screens, 322 Custom Macro Variables, 218

B
Background Editing, 166 Background Graphic Display, 345 Block restart, 108

D
Data displayed on the subscreen, 276 Data Input Operation, 398 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD, 392 DATA OUTPUT, 388 Data Output Operation, 395 Data Protection Key, 227 Deleting Part Programs, 156 Description of internal selection, 430 Details of Grouping M codes, 300 Details of Screens, 280 Directory of Floppy Disk Files, 338 DISPLAY, 314 Display, 144 Display and setting, 210 Display format of tool life data, 246 Display of Run Times and Parts Counts, 342 Displaying and modifying a tool group, 245 Displaying the Actual Spindle Speed, 338 Displaying the coordinates of the tool tip, 88 Displaying the number of pulses for manual interrupt and the traveled distance, 89 Displaying tool life data while executing a machining program, 245 Drawing a tool path, 335 Drawing position after the start of drawing, 352 Drawing procedure, 351 Dry Run, 137

C
Changing language of the display, 38 Changing soft keys, 31 Changing the contents of the key input buffer, 29 Changing tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool, 86 Changing words and addresses (CHANGE), 175 Chapter selection keys, 34 Checking the Input Voltage, Ambient Conditions, Handling, Programming, Operation, Machine, and Interface, 426 Class B measurement of the tool length, 231 Class B Measurement of the Tool Length and Workpiece Reference Position, 231 Class B measurement of the workpiece reference point, 237 Cleaning the Air Filter (For the SelfStanding Cabinet Only), 421 Cleaning the Tape Reader, 413 Clearing all tool offset values, 212 Clearing execution data, 245 Clock, 343 CNC parameter input, 398 CNC parameter output, 397 CNC program input, 398

i1

E
Editing a displayed waveform, 359 Editing Part Programs, 157 Editing part programs, 159 Effect of Manual Intervention, 74 Emergency Stop, 148 Erasing a displayed waveform, 359 Example of the procedure for using the tuning screen, 293 Executing Automatic Operation, 98 Execution program and program directory, 314 Expanded File Control Function, 402 Expanded tool life management, 248 Explanation of RS422 Interface Signals, 455 Extended Part Program Editing, 168

I
Incremental Feed, 64 Initial Setting at PowerOn, 405 Initial values at the start of drawing, 353 INTERFACE CONNECTOR POSITIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENT, 442 Internal Position Compensation Data Display Function, 378 Interruption, 91 INTRODUCTION, 3

K
Key input and input buffer, 29

L
Length of Part Program Storage, 167 LIST OF OPERATIONS, 460 Load Meter Display, 340

F
FAILURE DIAGNOSIS GUIDANCE, 434 FANUC PPR, 58 Feed hold, 99 Figure to be drawn, 352 File Deletion, 399 File Head Searching, 393 File Name of Floppy Cassette or Card, 401 Format Guidance, 182 Format guidance with figure, 186 Function for Displaying Multiple Subscreens, 272 Function selection keys, 33 Fuse Mounting Position, 422 Fuse Specifications, 422

M
M Code Group Check Function, 300 M Code Group Function, 295 M,S,T,B Codes Output for Program Restart, 296 Machine Lock on Each Axis, 136 Machine Operators Panel, 42 Manual Absolute ON and OFF, 70 Manual Continuous Feed, 62 Manual Feed in a Specified Direction, 67 Manual Handle Feed, 65 Manual handle interrupt, 129 Manual Interrupt during Automatic Operation, 129 Manual interruption and the coordinate system, 92 Manual Interruption Function for ThreeDimensional Coordinate Conversion, 91 Manual Numeric Command, 68 MANUAL OPERATION, 60 Manual Reference Position Return, 60 Manual Reference Position Return at Machine Installation, 405 MDI keyboard, 25 MDI operation, 94 Measuring the Tool Length, 228 Menu Switch, 243 Merging programs (MERGE), 173 Mirror Image Function, 410 Modes, 140 Moving the cursor to the position to be edited, 157 MULTIEDIT FUNCTION, 161

G
GENERAL, 441 Graphic Display, 327 Graphic enlargement, 353 Graphic shift, 353 Groupbygroup program directory display and punchout, 317

H
Handle feed in the longitudinal direction of the tool, 75 Handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool, 79 Help Function, 362 Help Message, 285 Help window states, 366 How to display the CNC internal status, 429

N
Names of RS232C Interface Signals, 445

i2

Names of RS422 Interface Signals, 454 NC format guidance, 182 New tool selection signal, 247 Note, 145 Note for handling tape reader, 57 Notes, 284, 404 Notes on threedimensional handle feed, 87 Number of Programs that can be Registered, 167

Presetting a tool life counter, 245 Presetting the current position display, 323 Presetting the workpiece coordinate system, 324 Procedure for setting graphic parameters, 350 Program check screens, 315 Program Display, 314 Program Encryption, 187 Program end (M02, M30), 99 Program restart, 102 Program restart function and output of M, S, T, and B, codes, 106 Program stop (M00), 99

O
Offset data input, 398 Offset data output, 397 Offset from the Workpiece Reference Point, 213, 390 Offset Values, 210 Operation, 140, 362 Operation and Display Transition, 161 Operation guidance keys, 37 Operation History, 367 Operation history, 367 Operation in the MEMORY mode, 93 Operation in the tape mode, 93 Operation method, 304 Operation Mode, 93 Operation selection keys, 36 OPERATIONAL DEVICES, 19 Operations, 270 Operator Message Display, 325 Optional stop (M01), 99 Outline of operations, 33 Output of Tool Offset Data Corresponding to Tool, 391 Override Playback, 133 Overtravel, 148 Overview, 345

R
Read/Punch Function for Custom Macro Common Variables, 220 Registering a part program from the tape, 154 Registering Part Programs, 154 Registering part programs from CRT/MDI panel, 155 Remarks, 163 Repeat search, 158 REPLACING A FUSE, 422 REPLACING BATTERIES, 423 Replacing the Batteries of the Absolute Pulse Coder, 424 Replacing the Battery for Backing Up the Memory in the Control Unit, 423 Request for cassette replacement, 400 Reset, 100 Resetting a tool change signal, 247 Restarting Automatic Operation, 101 Restrictions, 377 Retrace, 126 RETRACE PROGRAM EDITING FUNCTION, 139 Rewinding a program, 97 Rotational handle feed around the center of the tool tip, 83 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE, 413 RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES, 441 RS232C INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS, 445 RS232C Interface Transmission Methods, 447 RS422 INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS, 454 RS422 Interface Transmission Methods, 456 RS232C Parameter Setting Screen, 280

P
Panels Other than the Small CRT/MDI Panel, 386 Parameters, 223, 389 Part Program Output, 165 Pitch Error Compensation Data, 225 Playback, 180 Portable tape reader, 55 POWER ON/OFF, 59 Power unit, 422 PreTravel Stroke Limit Check Function, 149 Precautions, 400 Preparations for Storing and Editing Part Programs, 153

S
SAFETY FUNCTIONS, 148 Screen configuration, 286 Screen for Displaying M Codes Currently Being Executed or Which Have Already Been Executed, 295 Screen for Specifying HighSpeed and HighPrecision Machining, 286

i3

Screen Saver Function, 386 Screen Selection, 303 Screens, 354 Searching for a program by name, 96 Searching for a program number or sequence number, 95 Searching for, inputting/outputting, and deleting a file by specifying its file name, 402 Selecting a Program to be Executed, 95 Selecting RS232C Screen, 280 Selecting signals, 374 Selecting the graphic screen, 328 Selecting the tool data screen, 256 Servo and Spindle Setting and Adjustment Screens and Spindle Monitor Screen, 263 Servo screens, 263 Setting and Display Unit, 19 SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA, 210 Setting by specifying accelerations, 293 Setting of graphic parameters, 346 Setting screen, 288 Setting the Floating Reference Position, 262 Setting the graphic parameters, 328 Setting the Zero Point for the Absolute Pulse Coder through MDI Operation, 408 Setting tool data, 257 Settings, 216 Signal Description of RS232C Interface, 446 Simple Conversational Programming, 196 Simultaneous automatic and manual operation, 131 Single Block, 137 Singleblock stop according to the comparison between sequence numbers, 100 Small CRT/MDI Panel, 386 Soft key display, 30 Soft key operations, 404 Software Operators Panel, 252 Specifying a tool holder offset for tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool, 86 Specifying the conditions for starting data sampling, 356 Spindle screens, 265 Start coordinates and position, 352 Starting Automatic Operation, 98 Starting or terminating data sampling, 358

Status Display, 320 STATUS WHEN TURNING THE POWER ON, WHEN RESET, 439 Stopping Automatic Operation, 99 Stored Stroke Limit Check in Manual Operation, 151 STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION), 153 Subscreen operations, 273, 278 Subscreen states, 272 Symptom and Investigation, 425

T
Tape Reader, 44 Tape Reader Lubrication, 415 Tape reader with reels, 46 Tape reader without reels, 44 TEST OPERATION, 136 ThreeDimensional Handle Feed, 75 Time Stamp Function, 191 Tool change signal, 247 Tool Life Management Data, 245 Tool Offset Using Tool Numbers, 256 Tool Offsets, 388 Tool retraction and recovery, 115 Tool skip signal, 247 Transverse Inhibit Limit Function, 311 TROUBLESHOOTING, 425 Tuning screen, 289 Twodrive floppy cassette control, 403

V
Visually Checking the CNC System, 428

W
Warning message, 30 WARNING MESSAGE LIST, 458 Waveform data input/output, 359 Waveform Diagnosis Function, 354 Waveform display, 358 What is a File, 392 When the soft keys are insufficient, 30 Workpiece Zero Point Manual Setting Function, 303 Workpiece zero point measurement B, 309

i4

Revision Record

FANUC Series 15/150-MODEL B For Machining Center OPERATION OPERATORS MANUAL (B62564E1)

02

Dec., 1996

D Addition of new functions

D Correction of errors

01

Aug., 1994

evision

Date

Contents

Revision

Date

Contents

No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.